Home

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual

1. Port VPI Node PortID AggrT VPCap CbrW RtVbrW NrtVbrW AbrW UbrW LA1 0 N A 0x10000000 0 false 5040 5040 5040 5040 5040 IA2 O N A 0x10000001 0 false 5040 5040 5040 5040 5040 IA3 O N A Ox10000002 0 false 5040 5040 5040 5040 5040 IA4 O 1 Ox10000003 O false 5040 5040 5040 5040 5040 gt IAS O 1 0x10000004 0 false 5040 5040 5040 5040 5040 lA6 O Ha Ox10000005 O false 5040 5040 5040 5040 5040 89 CTL 0 N A 0x10000038 0 false 5040 5040 5040 5040 5040 3 EI DE 3c 3 er 25 The fields in this display are defined as follows o 3 Field Description Port The port number of the interface VPI The virtual path number of the interface Node The index of the node to which the interface is attached PortID The internal representation of this port used by ATM Forum PNNL AggrT The link aggregation token value that is advertised in the Hello protocol This field is read only and set to 0 VPCap true means that this interface has VP switching capability and false means that it does not This field is read only and set to false CbrW The administrative weight of this interface for CBR traffic The default is 5040 RtVbrW The administrative weight of this interface for real time VBR traffic The default is 5040 NrtVbrW The administrative weight of this interface for non real time VBR traffic The default is 5040 AbrW The administrative weight of this interface for ABR traffic The default is 5040 UbrW The administrative weight o
2. 117 4 1 2 Creating a Trap Destination AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual TOC 11 Table of Contents 1 17 4 1 3 Displaying Trap Destination Information 1 287 1 17 4 2 Configuring the SNMP Trap Log 2 055 1 287 117 4 2 1 Displaying the SNMP Trap Log 1 288 1 17 4 2 2 Configuring the Trap Log Threshold 1 289 1 17 4 2 2 1 Modifying the Trap Log Threshold 1 290 1 17 4 2 2 2 Resetting the Trap Log Threshold 1 290 1 17 4 2 2 3 Displaying the Trap Log Threshold 1 291 1 18 SPANS Configuration Commands 000 e eee ee 1 292 1 18 1 Deleting a SPANS Signalling Path 2 0 000000 1 292 1 18 2 Creating a SPANS Signalling Path a 1 293 1 18 3 Showing the SPANS Signalling Path Configuration 1 295 1 19 SPVC Configuration Commands 2 cece eee 1 298 1 19 1 SPANS SPVC Configuration Commands 4 5 1 298 1 19 1 1 Deleting a SPANS SPVC 2 1 298 1 19 1 2 Creating a SPANS SPVC 2 1 298 1 19 1 3 Displaying SPANS SPVC Information 1 301 1 19 2 PNNISPVC Configuration Commands 0 005 1 302 1 19 2 1 Deleting a PNNI SPVC 2 2 0 0 0 eee eae 1 302 1 19 2 2 Creating a PNNI SPVC 2 1 303 1 19 2 3 Configuring PNNI SPVC Parameters 1 306 1 19 2 3 1 Configuring Pacing for PNNISPVCs 1 306
3. If no entries have been configured in the registry then the following is displayed myswitch configuration nsap registry gt show No information is available 1 172 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 11 4 2 Deleting an ILMI LECS Address Registry Entry This command lets you delete an entry or multiple entries from the ILMI LECS address regis try Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration nsap registry gt delete lecs lt port gt lt instance gt For example you can delete a specific instance on a specific port as follows myswitch configuration nsap registry gt delete lecs 1A2 2 This example only deletes instance number 2 from port 1A2 You can also delete a specific instance on the control port CTL as follows oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinByUuod INY myswitch configuration nsap registry gt new lecs 1CTL 1 47000580ffe1000000f21a00d00020481a00d00b This example only delete instance number 1 from port 1CTL On an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 you need to specify the board number e g 2CTL You can also use an asterisk as a wildcard character to delete all registered addresses on a switch fabric that have the same instance number as follows myswitch configuration nsap registry delete lecs 2 Are you sure you want to delete ALI LECS entries with 2 as the instance n y If you type n or press lt ENTER gt the command is aborted
4. 1 341 enabling them to be output to the console 1 341 showing if they are output to the console 1 341 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual M manufacturing revision number displaying for a fabric 1 68 maximum hop count displaying 0 8 1 35 seting aise toa ety Sees 1 25 memory pools configuring 0 1 321 configuring for PMP calls 1 322 configuring for PP calls 1 322 displaying 0 1 323 metric set FT PNNI creating 00 1 26 deleting ena wel eae 1 26 displaying 1 27 modifying 1 26 PNNI creating 1 44 displaying 1 44 1 46 modifying 1 44 minimum threshold for NSAP updates displaying 08 1 35 SOP ING shite teeters kaa kara 1 28 MPOA operation disabling on a LES 1 132 enabling ona LES 1 132 MTU size configuring for a Classical IP interface 1 105 configuring fora LES 1 132 N network modules configuring alarms 1 7 configuring up or down 1 141 displaying 1 143 displaying alarms 1 6 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual displaying information 1 143 displaying revision level 1 143 displaying serialnumber 1 143 displaying the number installed 1
5. 20 cee eae 1 155 1 10 4 7 4 Setting Traffic Models on a Series LE Network Module 00 20 cee eae 1 156 1 10 4 7 5 Displaying Traffic on a Series LE Network MOQUE ico satin eh ebay bie gated tases ates 1 157 1 10 4 8 Configuring Traffic on a Series D Network Module 1 158 1 10 4 8 1 Enabling Disabling the AAL5 Transmitted PDU Counter 1 158 1 10 4 8 2 Configuring Alternate CLP Thresholds 1 159 TOC 6 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 10 4 8 3 Setting EPD on a Series D Network Module 1 10 4 8 4 Setting EFCI on a Series D Network Module 1 10 4 8 5 Displaying Traffic Models for a Series D Network Module 0 00 2 eee eee 1 10 4 8 6 Setting Traffic Models on a Series D Network Module 00 eee ee eee 1 10 4 8 7 Displaying Traffic on a Series D Network Module nay Lace thee WA hse ee ls 1 10 4 8 8 Configuring the VC CLP Threshold ona Series D Network Module 1 14 NSAP Configuration Commands 0000 cee cece 1 11 1 1 11 2 1 11 3 1 11 4 NSAP Prefix Configuration Commands 000000 11 1 1 Deleting an NSAP Prefix 000000 eee eee 11 1 2 Creating an NSAP Prefix cece eee 11 1 3 Displaying NSAP Prefixes 000 20000 00 eee NSAP ILMI Configuration Command eee 11 2 1 Displaying NSAP Addresses Registered through ILMI NSAP to E 164 Configuration Commands 00
6. 1 336 Index 9 Index proportional multiplier displaying 1 35 Setn E naan G Na 1 30 Q gaali Aria a tle hth tick aes NAA SNe 1 103 Gaal naan SA ee aa 1 103 a f WARP rR ae Oa a E A ara 1 103 GA AA 1 103 QOS expansion table creating an entry 1 255 deleting an entry 1 254 displaying 08 1 256 QOS extension table creating an entry 1 257 deleting an entry 1 257 displaying a 1 258 modifying an entry 1 257 R rate limit configuring on a Series D network module Wara 1 246 RDI Remote Defect Indication 1 178 Remote Defect Indication RDI 1 178 reserved VCIs for PMP connections setting the maximum 1 324 setting the minimum 1 325 reserved VCIs for PMP SVCs displaying the maximum 1 326 displaying the minimum 1 326 revertive timing disabling for TCM 1 89 enabling for TCM 1 89 revertive timing delay configuring for TCM 1 89 disabling for TCM 1 90 enabling for TCM 1 90 Index 10 S scheduling guaranteed 04 1 247 round robin 000005 1 247 smoothed 0 00 eee 1 247 scheduling information displaying on a Series D network module 00 1 250 scheduling traffic on a Series D network m
7. 1 234 CDVT configured on a per port basis a 1 180 displaying for a port 1 220 Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDYT plawta Rh Bae ana 1 180 CES comnection CRORE a ka 1 94 deleting meia ona S 1 96 displaying 0 1 97 Classical IP interfaces 1 103 clock scaling factor displaying 000 1 68 Seng wai eke he Ee os oe 1 66 CLP threshold configuring on a Series D network module 1 245 setting on a Series C network module 1 235 setting on a Series LC network module 1 238 setting on a Series LE network module 1 241 colocated BUS Crean AA 1 132 configuration commands in AMI 1 1 crankback displaying 00 1 41 SEUN Aho eres Saati 1 41 current state displaying for this TCM 1 79 D D4 framing t 9 ica cedieed aed ws 1 84 default calling party number enabling disabling 1 357 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual default ELAN creating 6 eee eee 1 110 deleting aa 1 111 displaying 06 1 112 Designated Transit Lists DTLs 1 21 disabling CES on a DS1 CES port 1 180 disabling CES on an El CES port 1 185 distributed timing 1 350 configuring on a switch 1 351 displaying on a switch 1 351 DLE configuring anycast address 1 132 DLE pe
8. 1 377 1 26 Virtual Path Configuration Commands 00 eee eee eee 1 381 1 26 1 Deleting a Virtual Path 0 0 0 ee eee 1 381 1 26 2 Creating a Virtual Path 00 c eee 1 381 TOC 14 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 26 3 Displaying Virtual Paths 0 0 0 eee 1 384 1 27 Virtual Path Terminator Configuration Commands 0000005 1 386 1 27 1 Deleting a Virtual Path Terminator 00 00 ae 1 386 1 27 2 Modifying a Virtual Path Terminator anaana 1 387 1 27 3 Creating a Virtual Path Terminator eee 1 387 1 27 4 Displaying Virtual Path Terminators a 1 389 1 27 44 Displaying Advanced VPT Information 1 390 1 27 4 2 Displaying QoS Extension Information for VPTs 1 391 Index AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual TOC 15 Table of Contents TOC 16 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Preface This manual provides the technical information needed to configure the ATM Management Interface AMI for the ForeRunner family of ATM Switches TNX ATM Switches and ForeRunnerLE Switches This document was created for users with various levels of experi ence If you have any questions or problems please contact FORE Systems Technical Support Chapter Summaries Chapter 1 AMI Configuration Commands Contains a text and graphical description of the configuration level AMI commands
9. Remote Port The port number on the remote switch fabric Remote VPI The virtual path number on the remote switch fabric Remote VCI The virtual channel number on the remote switch fabric Switch The IP address or name of the remote switch fabric s SCP The following is displayed if no SPANS SPVCS have been configured myswitch configuration spvc spans gt show No SPVC information is available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 301 O e 3 3 D 5 2 O uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 19 2 PNNI SPVC Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure PNNI SPVCs Unlike the SPANS SPVCs PNNI SPVCs are inherently bidirectional which means that a single signalling call establishes the circuits in both directions Although PNNI SPVCs are bidirectional the endpoint that initiates the call setup is known as the source originating and the other endpoint is known as the des tination terminating You can display the list of available subcommands by typing pnni at the spvc level myswitch configuration spvc gt pnni delete new parameters gt show 1 19 2 1 Deleting a PNNI SPVC This command allows you to delete an existing PNNI SPVC from the source end Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration spvc pnni gt delete lt SPVC IDs The following is an example of how to delete a PNNI SPVC myswitch configuration spvc pnni gt delete 3
10. 0c eae eee 1 352 1 23 2 Modifying a Signalling Channel 2a eee 1 352 1 23 3 Creating a Signalling Channel 2c eae eee 1 353 1 23 4 Displaying Signalling Channels ee eee 1 358 1 23 4 1 Displaying ATM Layer Information for Signalling Channels nana maa haa AA NANANA 1 360 1 23 4 2 Displaying Protocol Information for Signalling Ghannels diez man a NAL GANA NAN Gates 1 361 1 23 4 3 Displaying ATM Routing Information for Signalling Channels paaa n a ce ares ase ANN NBA pa berets 1 363 1 23 4 4 Displaying Timer Information for Signalling GLEN AA 1 364 1 23 4 5 Displaying Public UNI Information for Signalling Channels aan NN UAAP KNANG 1 365 1 23 4 6 Displaying IE Filter Information for Signalling Channels ai sec eek eres eal ed eee AA eerie ites 1 366 1 23 4 7 Displaying NSAP Filter Information for Signalling Channels an NAN AA AA beaut BAKA sete 1 368 1 24 Usage Parameter Control Configuration Commands 1 369 1 24 1 Deleting a UPC Traffic Contract aaua aaeeea eee 1 369 1 24 2 Creating a UPC Traffic Contract 00002 c cece 1 369 1 24 3 Displaying the UPC Traffic Contracts 00 000 1 372 1 25 Virtual Channel Configuration Commands eee eee 1 374 1 25 1 Deleting a Virtual Channel 2 cee eee eee 1 374 1 25 2 Creating a Virtual Channel 00 c eee 1 374 1 25 3 Displaying the Virtual Channel Configuration
11. size 1 105 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 8 7 Configuring IP Routes This command allows you to add a static IP route to the local IP routing table delete a static IP route from the local IP routing table or list the current static IP routes in the local IP routing table You can display the list of available subcommands by typing route at the ip level myswitch configuration ip gt route new delete show 1 8 7 1 Adding an IP Route This command lets you create an IP route Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration ip route gt new default lt destination ipaddress gt lt gateway gt lt metric gt host net 1 8 7 2 Deleting an IP Route This command lets you delete an IP route Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration ip route gt delete default lt destination ipaddress gt lt gateway gt These parameters for new and delete are defined as follows Parameter Description default This parameter must be entered to create a default route destination ipaddress The destination IP network number gateway The gateway address to the destination IP network number metric The number of hops to the destination IP network If 1 is specified the route is created with the RTF_GATEWAY flag set The default is 1 host net host means this is a host specific route with the destination being a specific node s
12. wka LECS Addr You must enter one of these parameters if you want to enable ELAN access control If you enter wka the ATM Forum well known address is used when running with ELAN access control enabled In this case you do not have to type in the actual well known address just enter wka If you are using an LECS address that is different than the well known address then you must type the full LECS ATM address to be used when running with ELAN access control enabled When using this command the LES must gt already exist The LES is temporarily administered down while ELAN access control is being enabled or dis abled and comes back up once the process is complete Because of this a warning is shown when you issue this command and you are asked if you want to continue For example myswitch configuration lane les gt security 2 enable 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 00005 f21a 23c0 00200481a23c0 00 WARNING This command will disable the LES service for the duration of execution Full ELAN connectivity may not be restored until all the LANE clients reconnect to the LES service Do you want to continue deleting the peer n y Type n or lt ENTER gt to abort the command or type y to continue the process 1 136 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 5 7 Displaying LES Information This command lets you display the current LES information To display information about every LES that is
13. 1 16 1 7 8 3 Displaying the SecurlD File This command lets you display the contents of the SecurID configuration file However if you wish to edit the file you must do so on the server machine Then you must use the conf security login securid get command to retrieve the new file When you use this com mand it overwrites the existing file Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security login securid gt showconf SecurID Client Configuration ACE Server VERSION v 2 1 104 CLIENT RETRY 5 times CLIENT TIMEOUT 5 sec BAD PASSCODES 3 DES ENCRYPTION allowed and enabled DURESS MODE not allowed MASTER SERVER linus MASTER SERVER ADDRESS 204 95 89 107 PORT NUMBER 1024 AUTHENTICATION SERVICE securid If there is no file or if the file is damaged the following is displayed myswitch configuration security login securid gt showconf Securid configuration file does not exist or is corrupted AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 271 AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 7 9 Displaying Userid Information This command lets you display all of the current userids and their assigned authentication methods privilege levels and login access levels This command is only available to users with admin privileges Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security login gt show Authentication Login Userid Method Privileges Access 1234567890123456 local user all ami local admin all
14. 8 1 253 displaying 00 1 220 BITS timing input SO UNG Anh aaa eat tsa sates 1 83 border switch disabling for FT PNNI 1 20 disabling for SPANS 1 65 Index 1 Index displaying for FT PNNI 1 36 displaying for SPANS 1 65 enabling for FT PNNI 1 20 enabling for SPANS 1 65 FIFPNN D aiae naaa Ha 1 20 SPANS naanakan kal Naa 1 65 Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS osc kA BIKE AKA kA ESA 1 114 buffer overbooking on a port configuring 0 0 1 252 displaying 08 1 220 BUS changing the administrative status kania PATAG AN 1 114 configuring foran ELAN 1 114 creating a 1 115 deleting a 1 114 displaying information 1 116 Starting makan maana 1 114 stopping eee eee eee 1 114 BUS Broadcast and Unknown SOLVED as kp NG tells a kl 1 114 Cc call records changing the data server password 1 318 configuring 1 314 configuring new transfer variables 1 314 deleting transfer variables 1 318 disabling 08 1 317 displaying information 1 319 enabling 000 1 317 modifying transfer variables 1 315 post processing 1 320 carrier detection displaying for a port 1 220 1 231 Index 2 CDV configuring on a Series C network module
15. Maximum Virtual Path Connections 32768 Maximum Virtual Channels SPANS address PMP Minimum Reserved VCI PMP Maximum Reserved VCI Switch TimeZone 1 326 32768 00000038f21c184a 155 259 N A If the display reads ATM Switch in the Switch field in the first line this indicates that the switch name has not been set Use the configuration switch name command to assign a name If the Switch TimeZone field reads N A then this value has not been configured yet AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 7 Setting the Time Zone This command lets you set the time zone for your switch You should set this before you set the time and date on the switch using the oper date command Enter the following myswitch configuration switch gt timezone lt none timezone gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description none Allows you to disable the time zone setting that has been previously configured This is useful if you entered a time zone incorrectly or if you no longer want a time zone set timezone The time zone configured for this ATM switch The switch supports and automatically converts from Standard to Daylight Savings time for the following time zones EST5EDT Eastern Standard Time CST6CDT Central Standard Time MST7MDT Mountain Stan dard Time PST8PDT Pacific Standard Time AKST9AKDT Alaska Standard Time O e 3 3
16. QoSExtIndex MaxCtd MaxCdv MaxClr usec usec 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description QoSExtIndex The index number of the set of QOS extension parameters MaxCtd The maximum cell transfer delay in microseconds MaxCdv The maximum cell delay variation in microseconds MaxClr The maximum cell loss ratio You can also display QOS information about a specific index by entering the following param eters myswitch configuration qosext5 show lt QoSExtIndex gt myswitch configuration qosext5 show 1 QoSExtIndex MaxCtd MaxCdv MaxClr usec usec 1 10 10 10 If no QOS extension table has been created then the following is displayed myswitch configuration qosext gt show No Qos Extension information is available 1 258 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 15 Serial Port Configuration Commands These commands let you manage an RS 232 serial port You can display the list of available subcommands by typing rs232 at the configuration level myswitch show configuration gt rs232 speed 1 15 1 Displaying Serial Port Information This command allows you to show information about the configuration of the RS 232 serial port on the SCP Type show at the rs232 configuration level to list the settings for the serial port Enter the followi
17. R The interval between recordings in minutes AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 315 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description C The contents of the call record file account is for call record data and stats is for per formance monitoring data YoF The status of the file co is for the file to which the switch fabric is currently writing cc is for the file to which the switch fabric has completed writing If the pathname is not speci fied the default file is transferred to the login directory specified in lt userid gt The fol lowing string is used as the default filename in the case where the URL ends witha i e without any filename 5T 3C 3D 5R 3N 5F If multiple switches are to write to the same location the pathname or filename should contain either a I ora 3N token A 3D token in the filename portion separates each recording interval worth of data into a different file with the name being the time that the file was created The following example would record every switch type and switch IP into a separate directory with a file at each recording interval 169 144 1 5 usr auditlog T I D Given an ASX 200BXTNX 210 switch with an IP address of 169 44 4 4 this would produce files in the following directory tree structure usr auditlog ASX200BXTNX1100 169 44 4 4 9608252355 If the filename specified is not made up of the abo
18. Related Manuals Descriptions of the root display operation and statistics level AMI commands can be found in the ATM Management Interface AMI Manual Descriptions of the debug level AMI com mands can be found in the ATM Switch Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Manual for your switch AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual PETTEYE Preface Technical Support In the U S A you can contact FORE Systems Technical Support by any one of four methods 1 If you have access to the Internet you may contact FORE Systems Technical Support via e mail at support fore com 2 You may telephone your questions to support at 800 671 FORE or 412 635 3700 3 You may FAX your questions to support at 412 742 7900 4 You may send questions via U S Mail to FORE Systems Inc 1000 FORE Drive Warrendale PA 15086 7502 Technical support for non U S A customers should be handled through your local distributor No matter which method is used for technical support please be prepared to provide your support contract ID number the serial number s of the product s and as much information as possible describing your problem question ii AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Preface Typographical Styles Throughout this manual all specific commands meant to be entered by the user appear on a separate line in bold typeface In addition use of the Enter or Return key is represented as lt ENTER gt T
19. line line connects the transmitter to the receiver The data stream received from the line is retransmitted out to the line Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over the line diag diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter The J2 stream transmitted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch The J2 stream is still transmitted to the network but the incoming J2 stream is ignored none none designates that no loopback will take place on this port This is the default setting AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 213 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 14 4 Showing J2 Port Configuration This command allows you to display information about the configuration of the ports on a J2 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port j2 gt show Port Carrier Status LineLength Loopback Timing EmptyCells 1C1 no Oxc0 short none internal idle 1C2 no Oxc0 short none internal unassigned 1C3 no Oxc0 short none internal unassigned 1C4 no Oxc0 short none internal unassigned The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The J2 port number of the network module s currently installed in the switch Carrier yes means a carrier has been detected on this port no means a carrier has not been detected on this port A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port but it does not guara
20. 1 146 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 5 Displaying Traffic on a Series C Network Module This command enables you to display traffic model information about the Series C network modules Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic c gt show Module Memory Model EPD FIFOblock 2A 128Kx48 2 6653 enabled 2B 128Kx48 2 8036 enabled 2C 128Kx48 2 8036 enabled 2D 128Kx48 2 8036 enabled gt So The fields in this display are defined as follows 39 3 i SE w Q Field Description a 5 7 Module The network module that has been configured A 53 Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports in units of 48 bit words x48 Model The shared memory model used for this network module See conf module traffic c models for more information EPD The threshold for AAL5 Early Packet Discard on this network module FIFOblock Displays enabled if FIFO blocking is enabled on this network module Otherwise dis plays normal The default is normal You can also display traffic model information about an individual Series C network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic c gt show lt module gt myswitch configuration module traffic c gt show 2C Module Memory Model EPD FIFOblock 2C 128Kx48 2 8036 enabled The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as thos
21. 11 3 1 Displaying NSAP to E 164 Address Mapping Information 11 3 2 Adding an NSAP to E 164 Address Mapping 11 3 3 Deleting an NSAP to E 164 Address Mapping ILMI LECS Address Registry Commands aa 11 4 1 Displaying the ILMI LECS Address Registry 11 4 2 Deleting an ILMI LECS Address Registry Entry 11 4 3 Adding an ILMI LECS Address Registry Entry 1 12 Port Configuration Commands 0000 cee eee 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 k ak a st 1 12 7 E oss st 1 AAL5 Packet Discard Command 22 a Configuring the State of a Port cece eee AISRDI Port Configuration Commands 0000 00a CAC Port Configuration Command 0 00 c cece eee CDVT Port Configuration Command 00 cee eee eee DS1 CES Port Configuration Commands 000000 12 6 1 Enabling Disabling CES ona Port 12 6 2 Configuring DS1 CES Port Framing 12 6 3 Configuring DS1 CES Port Line Length 12 6 4 Displaying DS1 CES Port Line Status 12 6 5 Configuring DS1 CES Port Loopback 12 6 6 Configuring the DS1 CES Port Line Coding 12 6 7 Displaying the DS1 CES Port Configuration CESE1 Port Configuration Commands 0000 eee 12 71 Enabling Disabling CES ona Port 12 7 2 Configuring CRC4 Framin
22. A default must be specified to delete a default route destination ipaddress Indicates the destination IP network number gateway Indicates the gateway address to the destination IP network number 1 5 3 1 5 3 Showing the IP Routes This command lets you display the current IP routes for the TCM s IP interfaces Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration cec slotx ip route gt show Destination default 127 0 0 1 169 144 85 3 198 29 31 0 Gateway Metric Interface Flags 188 29 3L 75 1 ied G 127 0 0 1 0 100 188 29 31 75 1 ied G 198 29 31 28 0 ied The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Destination Indicates the destination IP network number Gateway Indicates the gateway address to the destination IP network number Metric Shows the number of hops to the destination IP network The default is 1 Interface Shows the local IP interface used to get to the destination IP network Flags Shows H if the route is host specific created with the RTF_HOST flag set Shows G if the route is network specific created with the RTF_GATEWAY flag set 1 76 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 3 1 6 Displaying the IP Interface Configuration This command allows you to display information about the configuration of the TCM s IP interfaces Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration
23. O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands To display advanced and basic information about all PNNISPVCs on this switch enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration spvc pnni gt show advanced Originating PNNI SPVCs Source Destination INDEX PORT VPI VCI UPC PORT VPI VCI UPC VPVC SEL STATE 402 1B4 0 402 0 3A1 0 402 0 require down Destination 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 28c8 0020480d0072 00 BearerClass classX ForwardQos class0 BackwardQos class0 Clip no Cost 200 Reroute disabled FtpnniDtl none Name N A Domainid 1 QoSExpIndex 0 Last Failure Cause resource unavailable or unspecified Cause47 Downtime 0 days 05 46 Retry Count 1851 Terminating PNNI SPVCs Source Destination INDEX PORT VPI VCI PORT VPI VCI STATE 2 4B2 0 401 1D3 0 401 up Source 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 28d8 0020480d00b4 00 BearerClass classX ForwardQos class0 BackwardQos class0 Clip no Uptime 0 days 05 46 The basic information fields in this display are defined as listed previously for configuration spvc pnni show The advanced information fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description BearerClass The broadband bearer class specified for this PNNI SPVC Can be classA classC or classx ForwardQos The requested quality of service for this SPVC in the forward calling to called direction BackwardQos Th
24. displaying 08 1 170 O OAM cell generation disabling on a port 1 178 displaying fora board 1 220 displaying fora port 1 220 enabling ona port 1 178 originating paths adding AALANGAN 1 388 deleting a 1 386 displaying 08 1 389 displaying advanced information 1 390 overbooking 1 220 1 252 1 253 P peer group mask for FT PNNI displaying 000 1 35 peer group mask for PNNI A AT E NAA 1 29 peer group summary node PGSN 1 29 performance monitoring configuring a 1 314 configuring new transfer variables 1 314 deleting transfer variables 1 318 disabling 000 1 317 displaying information 1 319 Index 8 enabling 000008 1 317 modifying transfer variables 1 315 post processing 1 320 performance records changing the data server password 1 318 permanent virtual channel adding sasabi sana pauna ssia 1 374 deleting nl aa be Sa 1 374 displaying a 1 377 displaying advanced information 1 379 PGSN peergroup summary node 1 29 PMPs displaying the maximum number of reserved VCIs 1 326 displaying the minimum number of reserved VCIs 1 326 setting the maximum number of reserved VCIs 1 324 setting the minimum number for
25. myswitch configuration atmroute pnni address gt uoneinByUuod INY delete modify new show 1 3 4 1 1 Deleting a PNNI Exterior Reachability Address This command deletes the PNNI exterior reachability addresses and static routes between two domains called interdomain routes Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni address gt delete pnni lt nodeix gt lt address gt lt len gt lt index gt OR interdomain lt domain_id gt lt address gt lt len gt lt dest_domain_id gt 1 3 4 1 2 Modifying a PNNI Exterior Reachability Address This command lets you modify the PNNI exterior reachability address between two domains Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni address gt modify lt nodeix gt lt address gt lt len gt lt index gt port lt port gt vpi lt vpi gt mtag lt mtag gt 1 3 4 1 3 Creating a PNNI Exterior Reachability Address This command lets you create a PNNI exterior reachability address between two domains so they can share reachability information Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni address gt new pnni lt nodeix gt lt address gt lt len gt lt index gt port lt port gt vpi lt vpi gt mtag lt mtag gt OR new interdomain lt domain_id gt lt address gt lt len gt lt dest_domain_id gt AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 37 AMI Configuration Commands The parameters for delete mo
26. symbol Typing configuration at the prompt at the root level displays the configuration commands as follows myswitch gt configuration alarms gt atmarp gt atmroute gt board gt cec gt ces gt ilmiproxy gt ip gt lane gt module gt nsap gt port gt qos gt qosext gt rs232 gt security gt snmp gt spans gt spvc gt switch gt system gt timing gt signalling gt upc gt vcc gt vpc gt vpt gt Each of these commands has a submenu of commands which are described in the following subsections 1 1 Alarms Configuration Commands This submenu allows you to configure alarms You can display the list of available subcom mands by typing alarms at the configuration level myswitch configuration gt alarms show enable disable reset module gt AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 1 Of ASA AMI Configuration Commands oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinbiyuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 1 1 Displaying Alarm Conditions This command lets you display the status of all alarms The linkFailed spansFailed netmodRemovedHighPrio and netmodRemovedLowPrio alarms are available on all switches The powerSupplyInputFailed and tempSensorOverTemp alarms are available on all switches except an LE 155 The powerSupplyOutputFailed alarm is only available on an ASX 200BX an ASX 1000 a TNX 210 and a TNX 1100 The fanBankFailed alarm is only available on an ASX 1000 and a TNX 1100 The powerSupplyOverCurrent
27. 1 228 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands You can also display information about the status of an individual port on a SONET network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port sonet gt show lt port gt status myswitch configuration port sonet gt show 4c1 status Port Carrier Section Line Path Atm 4Cl yes Ox1 Ox1 0x1 0x1 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example 1 12 19 6 Configuring SONET Port Timing This command lets you change the timing source on a port on a SONET network module Enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY myswitch configuration port sonet gt timing lt port gt network internal These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the line length is to be changed The transmit clock for this port network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port network internal AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 229 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 20 TAXI Port Configuration Commands These commands let you modify the configuration of the ports on a TAXI network module The following commands are available onl
28. 1 19 2 3 1 1 Setting the PNNI SPVC Pacing taal sciatica hier EIAI Laas 1 307 1 19 2 3 1 2 Setting the Number of PNNI SPVC Calls 000 000e ee 1 307 1 19 2 3 1 3 Displaying the PNNI SPVC Pacing Parameters aa 1 307 1 19 2 3 2 Configuring Rerouting for PNNISPVCs 1 308 1 19 2 3 2 1 Setting the Interval between the Rerouting of PNNISPVCs 1 308 1 19 2 3 2 2 Setting the Number of PNNI SPVCs to be Rerouted per Interval 1 308 1 19 2 3 2 3 Displaying PNNI SPVC Reroute Informations sia Mana aa vee and 1 309 1 19 2 3 2 4 Setting the Improvement Threshold for Rerouting 4 1 309 1 19 2 4 Displaying PNNI SPVC Information 1 310 1 20 Switch Configuration Commands 000 0c cece eee 1 314 1 20 1 Configuring Call Records and Performance Monitoring 1 314 1 20 1 1 Creating Call Record and Performance Monitoring NANADIOS 2 aa kaa da NANANA NANA ANNE anes 1 314 TOC 12 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 20 2 1 20 3 1 20 4 1 20 5 1 20 6 1 20 7 1 20 1 2 Modifying Call Record and Performance Monitoring Vanao Ee er i aaa NG ua NAAN MAGLAAN 1 20 1 3 Enabling Call Record and Performance Monitoring Transe S a Grad carte ve NG a E RIEA I LAN 1 20 1 4 Disabling Call Record and Performance Monitoring IGLAP AA amp anes 1 20 1 5 Deleting Call Record and Performance Monitoring Transfer Variables 0 000 nananana annaa 1 20 1 6
29. AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 6 5 Displaying Traffic on a Series LC Network Module This command lets you display traffic model information about all of the Series LC network modules in a switch fabric Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic lc gt show Cell Table UBR EFCI EFCI Module Memory Memory Model EPD EPD On Off 1A 256Kx64 32Kx32 3 256 256 256 1 1B 256Kx64 32Kx32 3 256 256 256 1 1D 512Kx64 64Kx32 7 58050 58050 64 1 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Module The network module that has been configured Cell Memory The hardware configuration this memory model supports x64 Table Memory The hardware configuration this memory model supports x32 Model The shared memory model used for this network module See conf module traffic 1c models for more information EPD The AAL5 packet drop threshold for CBR VBR and ABR traffic on this network module in cells UBR EPD The AAL5 packet drop threshold for UBR traffic on this network module in cells EFCI On The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set turned on signalling congestion for ABR traffic in cells EFCI Off The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared turned off indicating no conges tion for ABR traffic in cells 1 The Series LC network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation
30. AMI Configuration Commands 1 27 Virtual Path Terminator Configuration Commands These commands let you configure virtual path terminators You can display the list of avail able subcommands by typing vpt at the configuration level These commands are only used to configure E gt originating or terminating paths To configure through paths you must use the conf vpe commands myswitch configuration gt vpt delete modify new show 1 27 1 Deleting a Virtual Path Terminator This command lets you delete a virtual path terminator Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vpt gt delete lt port gt lt vpi gt term orig Virtual Path 0 cannot be deleted on any of the NOTES connections to the intra fabric ports on an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 Virtual Path 0 cannot be deleted on the control port CTL on any switch The following is an example of how to delete a terminating path myswitch configuration vpt gt del 3b4 88 term Would you like to delete the originating side also y y The following is an example of how to delete an originating path myswitch configuration vpt gt del 3b3 99 orig Would you like to delete the terminating side also y y If you do not specify term or orig the switch automatically deletes both sides of the path myswitch configuration vpt gt del 3b4 88 Before deleting a virtual path you must first NOTES delete all VCCs which use that path 1 386 AMI Configuration Commands
31. CDV usec 4294967295 VF 4294967295 Adminw 5040 gt So 3 e 35 2 Q 25 o2 fe ko 1 47 AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 5 PNNI Node Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure PNNI nodes You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the node level myswitch configuration atmroute pnni node gt admin delete new modify show 1 3 4 5 1 Configuring the PNNI Node State This command lets you bring an existing PNNI node up or take it down You must administer a node down before you can modify it Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni node gt admin lt index gt up down 1 3 4 5 2 Deleting a PNNI Node This command lets you delete an existing PNNI node Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni node gt delete lt index gt When you delete a node the switch prompts you with a warning and asks if you really want to delete the node as follows myswitch configuration atmroute pnni node gt delete 2 Deleting a node will delete all addresses metrics profiles policies and other information configured for this node PNNI interfaces currently attached to this node will be re attached to any remaining node within the same domain If there are no remaining nodes the interfaces will display N A in the Node column until a new node is created in this domain Are you sure you want to delete node n y
32. CLP Thrsh The value at which cells that have been tagged as non conforming CLP 1 are dropped for this port and priority Qsize The reserved queue size for this port and priority in cells 1 The Series LC network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release This command also lets you show port and priority traffic information for an individual port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port traffic lc gt show lt port gt myswitch configuration port traffic lc gt show 1d1 CLP Port Prio Thrsh QSize 1D1 ABR 256 256 1D1 VBR 256 256 1D1 CBR 256 256 1D1 UBR 256 256 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those listed above If there are no Series LC network modules in the fabric then the following is displayed myswitch configuration port traffic lc gt show No Series LC port traffic configuration information available 1 240 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 3 Configuring Port Traffic on Series LE Network Modules These commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on an individ ual port on a Series LE network module on an LE 155 switch You can display the list of avail able subcommands by typing at the le level clpl myswitch configuration p
33. D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY Locations outside of the time zones listed above must supply the following POSIX standard 1003 1 1988 formula for switching between Daylight Savings Time and Standard Time stdoffset dst offset start time end time These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description std and dst Indicates 3 or more bytes that designate standard std or Daylight Savings Time dst Only std is required if dst is omitted then it does not apply in this location You can use uppercase or lowercase letters and any characters except a leading colon digits comma minus plus and ACSII NUL offset The value to add to local time to equal Greenwich Mean Time of fset is of the form hh mm ss Hour hh is required and can be a single digit between 0 and 24 Minutes mm and sec onds ss are optional and are between 0 and 59 If no offset follows dst it is assumed to be one hour ahead of std If preceded by a the time zone is east of the Prime Meridian yn otherwise it is west with an optional start time end time start indicates the date when the change occurs from std to dst end indicates the date when you change back Both start and end are of the form Mm n d d is the d th day 0 lt d lt 6 of week n of month m of the year 1 lt n lt 5 1 lt m lt 12 where week 5 is the last d day in month m which can occur in either the f
34. Discovered ELAN Name The ELAN name returned to the LEC by the LES when it joins the ELAN Configure Direct VCC A temporary bidirectional point to point VCC set up by the LEC to the LECS Control Direct VCC A bidirectional point to point VCC set up by the LEC to the LES Control Distribute VCC A unidirectional point to multipoint VCC set up by the LES to the LECs in the ELAN Multicast Send VCC A bidirectional point to point VCC set up by the LEC to the BUS for sending multicast data to the BUS Multicast Forward VCC A unidirectional point to multipoint VCC set up from the BUS to the LECs in the ELAN Last Error The last error experienced by this LEC if applicable This field is reset when the switch is rebooted 1 When you change the administrative status from down to up it takes a few seconds for the change to occur and to be reflected in the OperStatus field Therefore it is possible for the AdminStatus to be up but the OperStatus to be down If you refresh the display the change has taken place and is reflected here AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 125 O e 3 3 D 3 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 4 LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS Commands These commands allow you to configure the LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS You can display the list of available subcommands by typing lecs at the lane level myswitch configuration lane gt lecs admin de
35. Field Description BLLI Filters on all first second and third Broadband Low Layer Information BLLI IEs which provides compatibility checking by an addressed entity This information is nor mally transferred transparently between the call originator and the call recipient BLLI23 Filters on only the second and third Broadband Low Layer Information BLLI IEs AAL Filters on the AAL ATM Adaptation Layer information Default Calling Address enabled means that the default calling party number CPN shown in the display is sage without a CPN is treated as if it has a CPN of all zeros inserted if one has not been provided disabled means that no default CPN is inserted if one has not been provided If a default CPN is not supplied an incoming call setup mes To display iefilter information for all of the signalling channels on a specific port and path for example port 1B3 and VPI 0 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show 1b3 0 iefilter 1B3 0 disabled F disabled 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 367 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 23 4 7 Displaying NSAP Filter Information for Signalling Channels To show NSAP filter information about all of the signalling ch
36. FwdClpType clpEqual0 means the requested CLR constraint in the forward direction is for the CLPO stream clpEqual0OR1 means the requested CLR constraint in the forward direction is for CLP0 1 stream RevClpType clpEqual0 means the requested CLR constraint in the reverse direction is for the CLPO stream c1pEqua100R1 means the requested CLR constraint in the reverse direction is for CLP0 1 stream FwdCLR The forward CLR Applies only to CBR and VBR class of service RevCLR The reverse CLR Applies only to CBR and VBR class of service State The current state of the profile ProfileType This is a read only field mgmtEntry means this profile is dynamically generated cacheEntry means this profile is user configured LoadBal true means that load balancing is activated for the profile and false means that it is not Applies only to CBR and VBR class of service VPOnly true means that the profile is for a VP connection and false means that it is not OptCTD true means that the profile is to optimize on CTD and false means that it is not Applies only to CBR and VBR class of service 1 58 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description OptCDV true means that the profile is to optimize on Cell Delay Variation CDV and false means that it is not Applies only to CBR and VBR class of service OptAdmWt Shows if the profile will optimize on administrative weight NumAvd A read only field fo
37. If no userid is entered the local userid is assumed to be the one for which you are setting or changing the password The maximum size is 16 characters Any characters are allowed except the colon character 116 1 7 7 Restoring the Login File This command allows you to restore the login file after you have backed it up This command is only available to users with admin privileges Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security login gt restore lt host gt lt full path to restore file gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description host The IP address of the host on which the login file that is to be restored resides full path to backup file The full path name of the login file that is to be restored If you have configured the transfer protocol to be FIP using conf system protocol you only need to enter the command shown above to perform the login file restore After you enter the command shown above you are prompted for the remote userid and password of the remote host from which you are retrieving the file If you have configured the transfer protocol to be TFIP this is the default using conf system protocol the remote host from which the file will be retrieved must be running the TFIP server code If you are unsure of how to do this see the Installation and Maintenance manual for your switch AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 269
38. The default is 32 calls for an SCP that has 32 MB of DRAM The default is 64 calls for an SCP that has 64 MB of DRAM 1 322 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 2 3 Displaying Configured Pools This command lets you display the pools that are configured on this switch The default values will vary depending on the type of SCP installed in the switch Enter the following myswitch configuration switch pools gt show Switch is configured for a TYPICAL load of 1024 Point to Point Calls 64 Point to Multipoint Calls The fields in this display are defined as follows So Field Description S o 3 Point to point Calls Shows how many point to point calls you have reserved memory for on this switch 3 sc Point to Multipoint Calls Shows how many point to multipoint calls you have reserved memory for on this switch FA S 3 1 20 3 Setting or Changing the Switch Name This command enables you to set or change the name of the switch The switch name is shown on the front panel display LED Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration switch name lt name gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description name The new name for the switch If no name has been set using this command then ATM SWITCH is displayed on the front panel of the switch and as the prompt name When the switch name is changed using this comman
39. The index number of the profile cbr rtVbr nrtVbr abr ubr Used only with the new command Indicates for which class of service this profile is used either cbr rtVbr nrtVbr abr or ubr minfwdcr lt minfwdcr gt The minimum forward cell rate requirement minrevcr lt minrevcr gt The minimum reverse cell rate requirement fwdclptype clpEqual0 clpEqual0Or1 clpEqual0 means the requested CLR constraint in the forward direction is for the CLPO stream c1pEqual00R1 means the requested CLR constraint in the forward direction is for CLP0 1 stream revclptype clpEqual0 clpEqual0Or1 clpEqual0 means the requested CLR constraint in the reverse direction is for the CLPO stream c1pEqua100R1 means the requested CLR constraint in the reverse direction is for CLP0 1 stream fwdelr lt fwdelr gt The forward CLR Applies only to CBR and VBR class of service revclr lt revclr gt The reverse CLR Applies only to CBR and VBR class of service optctd true false true means that the profile is to optimize on CTD and false means that it is not Applies only to CBR and VBR class of service optcdv true false true means that the profile is to optimize on Cell Delay Variation CDV and false means that it is not Applies only to CBR and VBR class of service loadbal true false true means that load balancing is activated for the profile and false means that it
40. Value FORE Systems ASX 200BXTNX 210 Operation Status success Press return for more q to quit q AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 101 AMI Configuration Commands The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Req_Oid The object identifier OID for the SNMP request that you sent Rsp_Oid The OID in the response to the SNMP request It is valid only if the operation status is success Operation get means the SNMP request is a get which searches for the OID that you requested gnext means the SNMP request is a getnext which searches for the next greatest entry in the MIB after the specified OID Community The SNMP community string being used The default is public When to do doOnce means that the SNMP request is performed only once doEveryIlmirestart means that the SNMP request is to be performed each time that ILMI comes up on the specified path Value The value returned by the get or the getnext This is valid only if the operation status is success Operation Status The current status of this SNMP query Idle means the request has not been made yet inProgress means the request has been made but has not been completed yet Suc cess means the request has been made and completed successfully Failure means the request has been made but was not successful Failures can occur because either there was no response from the peer the request timed out or there was an e
41. conf spvc spans gt delete lt Local SPVC ID gt source destination bidirectional or myswitch configuration spvc spans gt delete lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt dest session gt lt dest port gt lt dest vpi gt lt dest vci gt source destination bidirectional 1 19 1 2 Creating a SPANS SPVC This command allows you to create a new SPANS SPVC Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration spvc spans gt new lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt dest session gt lt dest port gt lt dest vpi gt lt dest vci gt peak lt Kb sec gt source destination bidirectional 1 298 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows Parameter Description Local SPVC ID Used only with the delete command The unique number that the SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC when it was created port The port number on the local switch fabric vpi The virtual path number on the local switch fabric vci The virtual channel number on the local switch fabric dest session The IP address of the remote switch dest port The port number on the remote switch fabric dest vpi The virtual path number on the remote switch fabric dest vci The virtual channel number on the remote switch fabric peak lt Kb sec gt The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC specified in kilob
42. configuration cec timing gt show ESI module on linus Card type DS1 Stratum 4 DS1 BITS interface framing esf line coding b8zs output level 0 6 dB PLL Status freerun Current Timing Reference secondary Requested Timing Reference secondary Primary Reference 2D1 unavailable Secondary Reference 2A1 unavailable BITS1 Reference unavailable BITS2 Reference unavailable Revertive Switching enabled Revertive Switching Delay 10 Failover Switching Delay 3 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description ESI module Shows the name of the TCM Card type Shows the ESI card type for this TCM DS1 E1 BITS framing interface Shows the framing format of the BITS interface for this TCM Can be DS1 d4 or esf El mf or crc4mf line coding Shows the coding format of the BITS interface for this TCM Can be DS1 ami or b8zs El ami or hdb3 output level Shows the output level in dB of the DS1 BITS interface for this TCM Can be 0 6 1 2 1 8 2 4 or3 0 PLL Status Shows the phase locked loop PLL status for this TCM Can be freerun meaning the local oscillator on the TCM is being used locked meaning the current clock is good holdover meaning the TCM has detected a clock source error and is using the last valid clock source acquire meaning the TCM is trying to lock on to the current clock this may take up to five minutes or refqual meaning the reference quality of the new clo
43. enable private disable unknown disable E 164 enable subscriber enable private disable unknown The fields in the public display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers that currently have a signalling interface enabled VPI The number of the virtual path that contains the signalling channel ILMIReg Shows whether ILMI address and prefix registration occur across this signalling channel Enable means that ILMI address and prefix registration occur across this signalling chan nel If enable is displayed then this is not a public UNI Disable means that no prefix registration messages are sent by the network side and no address registration messages are generated by the user side Ignore means that the network side performs as it nor mally would except that addresses registered are not published into the routing database This setting is not recommended except in public network situations in which CPE equip ment needs ILMI address registration in order to function correctly O e 3 3 D 5 2 a AddressFmt Shows if the native e164 used by public UNI address format or if the private address format is being used across this link E164 Address Shows the native e164 address assigned to this link E164 Address Resolution Shows whether or not to resolve private NSAP addresses into native E 164 addresses Enable means that NSAP address to E 164 address mapping occurs
44. used as the switchclock As another example if network module A is not installed and network modules B and C do not support distributed timing but network module D does support distributed timing then the crystal from D is used as the switchclock 1 22 3 Configuring the Switchclock This command lets you configure the primary or secondary switchclock on a switch fabric Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration timing switchclock primary secondary lt bnp gt none These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description primary The specified port will be designated as the primary switchclock secondary The specified port will be designated as the secondary switchclock bnp The number of the port that will be designated as the primary or secondary switchclock none Resets the switchclock to the default values AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 351 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 23 Signalling Configuration Commands These commands let you configure ATM Forum UNI PNNJ signalling channels You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the signalling level myswitch configuration gt signalling gt delete modify new show 1 23 1 Deleting a Signalling Channel This command allows you to delete an existing signalling channel Enter the following param eters myswitch configuration si
45. 1 10 4 8 1 Enabling Disabling the AAL5 Transmitted PDU Counter This command lets you enable or disable the per connection AAL5 transmitted Protocol Data Unit PDU counter on a per network module basis on a Series D network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic d gt aal5pktcount lt module gt enable disable These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module to be configured for counting AAL5 packets enable disable enable means the network module will count the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs disable means the network module will not count the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs The default is disable 1 You must reset the network module once you have entered this command 1 158 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 8 2 Configuring Alternate CLP Thresholds This command allows you to set the per connection alternate CLP thresholds on a per net work module basis Enter the following myswitch configurat module traffic d gt altclpthresh lt module gt clp1 clp01 lt threshold gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module to be configured with a new CLP threshold clp1 The threshold is being set for CLP 1 cells Applying a CLP 1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greater than t
46. 1 144 1 148 1 153 1 160 1A S D A A 1 149 1 154 1 161 configuring on a Series D network module 4 1 161 configuring on a Series LC network module 0 1 149 configuring on a Series LE network module 0 1 154 EFCI explicit forward congestion indicator configuring 0 1 235 AA BA Od ER 1 103 E100 cies Sa O eae Babala Naa tl Ba pato Gagana 1 103 Index 4 el0 interface 0 1 121 ell interface daia aa MALAMANG 1 121 ELAN access control disabling 1 132 1 136 enabling 1 132 1 136 enabling CES on a DS1 CES port 1 180 enabling CES on an E1 CES port 1 185 EPD Early Packet Discard 1 144 1 148 1 153 1 160 ESF framing 00000 1 84 ESI card displaying the status of 1 79 Ethernet interface 1 103 explicit forward congestion indicator EFCI 1 149 1 154 1 161 F failover timing delay configuring a 1 85 FORE Area configuring 00 1 24 displaying 0 1 36 FORE Level configuring 0 1 24 displaying 0 1 36 freerun mode 0 0c eee eens 1 86 G gateway switch configuring 0 1 19 GCRA traffic policing per port basis 1 218 Generic Cell Rate Algorithm GERA an ah LEE EEK aaa 1 211 H hardware model displaying
47. 1 165 AMI Configuration Commands The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Module The network module that has been configured Priority The class of service to which these thresholds apply VC Thresholds CLP0 1 The threshold at which cells are dropped regardless of their CLP bit when the current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold for this traffic type VC Thresholds CLP1 The threshold at which cells that are CLP 1 are dropped when the current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold for this traffic type 1 The Series D network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release If no Series D network modules are installed then the following is displayed myswitch configuration module traffic d gt show No Series D traffic information is available 1 10 4 8 8 Configuring the VC CLP Threshold on a Series D Network Module This command lets you configure the per connection CLP threshold for all VCs on a per class basis Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic d gt veclpthresh lt module gt cbr vbr abr ubr clp1 clp01 lt threshold gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module to be conf
48. 1 Deleting an NSAP Filter from an Interface This command lets you delete an NSAP filter from an interface Enter the following parame ters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering interfaces gt delete lt port gt lt vpi gt O e 3 3 D 5 2 a incoming outgoing uonjein6iju09 INY 1 16 1 8 4 2 Configuring an NSAP Filter on an Interface This command lets you configure an NSAP filter on an interface You can only configure one incoming and one outgoing filter per interface Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering interfaces gt set lt port gt lt vpi gt lt filter id gt incoming outgoing The parameters for delete and set are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number of the interface to which the filter applies vpi The virtual path number of the interface to which the filter applies filter id The unique name or index number that identifies this filter incoming outgoing incoming means that the filter applies to the incoming side of the interface outgoing means that the filter applies to the outgoing side of the interface If no incoming filter is specified for an interface then all incoming calls are accepted on that interface If no out going filter is specified for an interface then all outgoing calls are accepted on that inter face Calls to the switch itself SNMP connections telnet over ATM etc
49. 232 1 12 22 Port Traffic Configuration Commands a saaan aaa 1 234 1 12 22 1 Configuring Port Traffic on Series C Network Modules 1 234 1 12 22 1 1 Configuring Cell Delay Variation on a Series C Network Module 1 234 1 12 22 1 2 Setting the CLP Threshold on a Series C Network Module 0 0000 e ee eae 1 235 1 12 22 1 3 Configuring EFCI on a Series C Network Module maan NYA Kaman APAN ANAN 1 235 1 12 22 1 4 Configuring Port Queue Size on a Series C Network Module aa 1 236 1 12 22 1 5 Displaying Port Traffic on a Series C Network Module a 1 236 1 12 22 2 Configuring Port Traffic on Series LC Network Modules 1 238 1 12 22 2 1 Setting the CLP Threshold on a Series LC Network Module anaana 1 238 1 12 22 2 2 Configuring Port Queue Size on a Series LC Network Module 2000 000 1 239 1 12 22 2 3 Displaying Port Traffic on a Series LC Network Module anaa 1 239 1 12 22 3 Configuring Port Traffic on Series LE Network Modules 1 241 1 12 22 3 1 Setting the CLP Threshold on a Series LE Network Module a 1 241 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual TOC 9 Table of Contents 1 12 22 3 2 Configuring Port Queue Size on a Series LE Network Module 00 20 eee eae 1 242 1 12 22 3 3 Displaying Port Traffic on a Series LE Network Module a 1 242 1 12 22 4 Configuring Port Traffic on Series D Network Modules
50. 25 1 Deleting a Virtual Channel This command allows you to delete an existing permanent virtual channel Enter the follow ing parameters myswitch configuration vcc gt delete lt iport gt lt ivpi gt lt ivci gt lt oport gt lt ovpi gt lt ovci gt 1 25 2 Creating a Virtual Channel This command enables you to add a new permanent virtual channel Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vcc gt new lt iport gt lt ivpi gt lt ivci gt lt oport gt lt ovpi gt lt ovci gt upe lt index gt name lt name gt advanced options inctype orig tran term outctype orig tran term pmp mpp mpmp The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows Parameter Description iport The incoming port number ivpi The incoming virtual path number ivci The incoming virtual channel number oport The outgoing port number ovpi The outgoing virtual path number ovci The outgoing virtual channel number 1 374 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description upc lt index gt The integer index that refers to a specific UPC traffic contract If no index is specified then no traffic policing will take place on this VCI It is assigned a UPC index of 0 and all traffic on this VCI is treated as UBR traffic This is the default name The name you want to assign to this channel to identify it uniquel
51. 5 PNNI Policy Prefix Configuration Commands 1 61 1 3 5 1 Deleting a PNNI Policy Prefix 0 0048 1 61 1 3 5 2 Modifying a PNNI Policy Prefix 0 1 61 1 3 5 3 Creating a PNNI Policy Prefix a 1 61 1 3 5 4 Displaying PNNI Policy Prefix Information 1 63 1 3 6 SPANS ATM Route Configuration Commands 1 64 1 3 61 Setting the SPANS Area ID 2 a 1 64 1 3 6 2 Setting the SPANS NNI Border Switch Functionality 1 65 1 3 6 3 Displaying SPANS NNI Parameters 2 1 65 Switch Board Configuration Commands 0c eee e eee 1 66 1 4 1 Configuring the Clock Scaling Factor on a Switch Board 1 66 1 4 2 Configuring OAM Cell Processing on a Switch Board 1 67 1 4 3 Displaying the Board Configuration 0000 eee eee 1 68 CEC Configuration e a a Aa E a a E E O E a 1 69 1 5 1 Alarms Configuration Commands eee eee 1 69 1 5 1 1 Disabling an Alarm eee 1 69 1 5 1 2 Enabling an Alarm eee 1 70 1 5 1 3 Configuring an Alarm Relay ea eee 1 71 1 5 1 3 1 Setting an Alarm Relay 2 05 1 71 1 5 1 3 2 Displaying the Alarm Relays 1 71 1 5 1 4 Displaying Alarm Conditions aaaea 1 72 1 5 2 FEM Selections za ma aka na nea lead ae Pale ea ala 1 73 1 5 3 TCM Configuration Commands 0 0 00
52. AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 7 8 Configuring SecurlD These commands let you configure SecurID on a switch This means that all users who have their authentication method configured as securid will be validated by the SecurID server when they attempt to log in to that switch You must have a SecurID server running in order to use these commands For more information about SecurID see the Network Configuration manual for your switch To display the list of commands type securid at the login level myswitch configuration security login gt securid getconf delete showconf 1 16 1 7 8 1 Getting the Securld Configuration File If you have SecurID enabled on a switch this command lets you retrieve the SecurID configu ration file which contains information that the SecurID server and the switch need to commu nicate with each other Enter the following parameters myswitch configur security login securid gt getconf lt host gt lt full path to sdconf rec file gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description host The IP address of the host on which the SecurID file resides full path to sdconf rec file The full path name of the SecurID file that is to be restored If you have configured the transfer protocol to be FIP using conf system protocol you only need to enter the command shown above to retrieve the configuration file After you enter the command shown above you are prompted for th
53. Changing the Prompt saanane Changing the System Protocol a System Log Configuration Commands aan 1 21 5 1 Displaying the Address of the System Log Host 1 21 5 2 Setting the Address of the System Log Host 1 21 5 3 Deleting the Address of the System Log Host 1 21 5 4 Turning Off or Turning On System Log Messages to the Console a Kanan ng Ap NO AT aegis Ba 1 21 5 5 Enabling or Disabling the Logging of Changes 1 21 5 5 1 Displaying the Auditing State AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual TOC 13 Table of Contents 1 21 5 5 2 Changing and Displaying the AMI Auditing State AA tals aaa AA PN 1 343 1 21 5 5 3 Changing and Displaying the SNMP Auditing SALE sesh siete ies eect saan bce ak de ae ey Sie tae ens 1 345 1 21 5 5 4 Changing and Displaying the ILMI Auditing Salaah ils Soir ae Naaalaala Kana 1 347 1 21 6 AMI Timeout Configuration Command anaana 1 349 1 21 7 Configuring the Units for UPC Contracts 2 1 349 1 22 Timing Configuration Commands 0c eee eee 1 350 1 22 1 Configuring the Timing Mode 0 00 cece eee eeee 1 350 1 22 2 Displaying Timing Information 0 0 eee eee 1 351 1 22 3 Configuring the Switchclock 0000 cece eee eee 1 351 1 23 Signalling Configuration Commands 0000 cee eee 1 352 1 23 1 Deleting a Signalling Channel
54. Channel Mark When the number of available virtual channels on a path drops to zero a link state update is sent out to advertise that there are no more VCs available for use on this path When the num ber of VCs indicated by the vemark is available for use on this path again another link state update is sent out to advertise that there are VCs available for use on this path once again This command lets you set the vemark which is the minimum number of virtual channels that need to be to available on a path to make that path usable again Enter the following myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt vemark lt vcmark gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description vemark The minimum number of virtual channels that need to be available on a path to make that path usable The default is 20 1 34 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 17 Displaying ForeThought PNNI Parameters This command lets you display all of the ForeThought PNNI topology parameters Enter the following myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt show Switch NSAP prefix Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 078e Switch Prefix Mask 104 Peer Group Mask 0 Hello Indication Interval 500 msec NSAP Indication Interval 10000 msec Max hop count for NSAP router 20 hops Proportional Multiplier 20 3 Minumum Threshold for NSAP updates 50 Kbps Minimum VC level 20 Fore Area 4 Fore Lev
55. Configuration Commands 1 10 4 2 Setting FIFO Blocking on a Series C Network Module This command lets you set FIFO blocking on a specific network module FIFO blocking enables buffering on the fabric when the network module buffers are full Enter the following parameters myswitch conf module traffic c gt fifoblock lt module gt normal enabled These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description gt module The network module to be configured for FIFO blocking Q o e normal enabled normal means that the network module passes traffic normally enabled means that 3 EI FIFO blocking takes place on the network module when the buffers are full The default is D amp normal asx o amp 3 1 10 4 3 Displaying Traffic Models for a Series C Network Module This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on a net work module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic c gt models Model Memory Ucasts Mcasts MOuts Cells Name 1 32Kx48 4096 5 12 1024 2048 default 2 128Kx48 6144 512 1024 12288 default 3 128Kx48 11264 1024 2048 10240 more conns 5 128Kx48 2048 2048 16384 8192 VP shaping 6 128Kx48 3072 128 1024 13312 more cells 7 32Kx48 2048 256 1024 2560 more cells The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Model The shared memory model for this configuration This is the number to enter for
56. E1 CES port on which the CRC4 framing type is being changed ON OFF OFF means that CRC4 error checking is disabled on this port OFF is the default ON means that CRC4 error checking is enabled on this port 1 12 7 3 Reserving TS16 for Signalling on an E1 CES Port This command lets you specify whether or not time slot 16 TS16 is reserved for signalling information on a E1 CES port Enter the following myswitch configuration port cesel gt ts16 lt port gt ON OFF These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The E1 CES port on which TS16 is being changed ON OFF OFF means that time slot 16 is used as another data channel on this port ON means that time slot 16 is reserved for signalling information ON is the default 1 186 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 7 4 Displaying E1 CES Port Line Status This command lets you display the current line status of each E1 CES port Enter the follow ing myswitch configuration port cesel gt linestatus Rx Tx Rx Tx TS16 FarEndTx NearEndTx NearEnd Port Alarm LOF LOF AIS AIS LOF LOS Loopback AIS TS16LOMF TS16LOMF TestCode 3C1 no no no no no no no off no no no No code 3C2 no no no no no no no off no no no No code 3C3 no no no no no no no off no no no No code 3C4 no no no no no no no off no no no No code 3C5 no no no no no no no off no no no No code 3C
57. ESF SF The type of framing for this port ESF indicates that ESF Extended Super Frame framing will be used SF indicates that SF Super Frame framing will be used 1 12 6 3 Configuring DS1 CES Port Line Length This command lets you change the line length of a DS1 CES port to correspond to the physical cable attached to that port This lets the DS1 CES port anticipate the strength of the received signal on the cable Enter the following myswitch conf port cesdsl gt length lt port gt lt 130 130 260 260 390 gt 390 These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The DS1 CES port for which the framing mode is being set lt 130 The physical cable is shorter than 130 feet long 130 260 The physical cable is from 130 to 260 feet long 260 390 The physical cable is from 260 to 390 feet long gt 390 The physical cable is greater than 390 feet long AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 181 O e 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 6 4 Displaying DS1 CES Port Line Status This command lets you display the current line status of each DS1 CES port Enter the follow ing myswitch configuration port cesdsl gt linestatus Port Alarm 2A1 no 2A2 no 2A3 no 2A4 no 2A5 no 2A6 no Tx Rx Tx LOF AIS AIS LOF LOS Loopback no no no no yes off no no no no yes off no no no no yes off no no no no yes off n
58. Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration snmp gt sets enable disable These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description enable SNMP set requests from remote management stations are accepted This is the default This variable can be set only by a user with admin privileges disable SNMP set requests from remote management stations are ignored 1 285 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 17 3 Displaying SNMP SET Information This command shows you if SNMP SETs from the network are currently enabled or disabled Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration snmp gt show SET operations from network are enabled 1 17 4 Configuring SNMP Traps These commands help you to manage SNMP traps You can display the list of available sub commands by typing at the trap level myswitch configuration snmp trap gt destinations gt log gt 1 17 4 1 Configuring Trap Destinations These commands help you to configure SNMP trap destinations You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the destinations level myswitch configuration snmp trap gt destinations gt delete new show 117 4 1 1 Deleting a Trap Destination This command lets you delete an SNMP trap destination Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration snmp trap destinations gt delete lt trap gt This parameter is defined as follow
59. GCAC parameters apply to CLP 0 1 traffic adminw lt adminw gt The administrative weight value pcr lt per gt The peak cell rate acr lt acr gt The available cell rate ctd lt ctd gt The cell transit delay cdv lt cdv gt The cell delay variation clr lt clr gt The cell loss ratio for CLP 0 traffic clr1 lt clr1 gt The cell loss ratio for CLP 0 1 traffic crm lt crm gt The cell rate margin vf lt vf gt The variance factor AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 45 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByUuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 4 4 Displaying Metric Set Information This command lets you display metric set information Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni metric gt show Node Tag Direction Index Cbr RtVbr NrtVbr Abr Ubr ClpType Adminw 1 1 incoming 1 false false false false false clpEqual0 5040 PCR ACR CTD usec CDV usec 4294967295 4294967295 4294967295 4294967295 CLR CLR1 CRM VF 4294967295 4294967295 4294967295 4294967295 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Node The index number of the node to which the metric set belongs Tag The integer that identifies this metric set Direction The direction of the metric set with respect to the owning node Can be either incoming or outgoing Index The index number of the RAIG being configur
60. IP address net means this is a network specific route with the destination being a network IP address The default is net 1 106 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 8 7 3 Showing the IP Routes This command lets you display the current IP routes Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration ip route gt show Destination default 69 144 69 144 69 144 69 144 69 144 69 144 69 144 48 0 60 0 64 0 200 204 205 206 o JO ce Gateway 69 144 48 1 69 144 48 21 69 144 60 21 69 144 64 21 69 144 200 21 69 144 204 21 69 144 205 21 69 144 206 21 The fields in this display are defined as follows Metric o O O amp amp O O pH AMI Configuration Commands Interface Flags led G led asx0 qaa0 el0 ell e12 e13 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY Field Destination The destination IP network Gateway The gateway address to the destination IP network number Metric The number of hops to the destination IP network The default is 1 Interface The local IP interface used to get to the destination IP network Flags H means the route is host specific created with the RTF_HOST flag set G means the route is network specific created with the RTF_GATEWAY flag set AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 107 AMI Configuration Commands 1 8 8 Displaying the IP Interface Configuration This comman
61. Indicates you are enabling the logging of all ILMI changes to syslog with a priority level y 5 58ing 5 YS Og P y tag of err warning Indicates you are enabling the logging of all ILMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of warning notice Indicates you are enabling the logging of all ILMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of notice info Indicates you are enabling the logging of all ILMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of info debug Indicates you are enabling the logging of all ILMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of debug off Indicates you are disabling the logging of all ILMI changes to syslog This is the default state In order for the actual logging to begin you must NOTE a first have a remote syslog host configured to receive the messages Use the command conf 5 system syslog set to do this AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 347 AMI Configuration Commands Because the logging of each change can generate a lot of extra traffic it is recommended that you enable this feature only after you have reached your initial desired configuration This tool is most useful for logging any minor modifications which occur after that The ILMI syslog messages generally come in pairs with the result of the first message saying Pending and the second message giving the outcome There are some exceptions such as any change that makes it impossible to send the result to syslog such as rebooti
62. LAG 0 00 0 N A S Q Koal 0 00 0 N A 53 LC2 0 00 0 N A po E 1C3 0 00 0 N A o 2 LC4 0 00 0 N A S ICTL 0 00 0 N A The fields in the routing display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers that currently have a signalling interface enabled VPI The number of the virtual path that contains the signalling channel OrigCost The cost of each FT PNNI link configured at the originating end of the signalling channel TermCost The cost of each FI PNNI link configured at the terminating end of the signalling channel Domain The index number of the PNNI domain to which this signalling channel belongs Node The node number to which this signalling channel belongs This field only applies to PNNI interfaces To display ATM routing information for all of the signalling channels on a specific port and path for example port 1A4 and VPI 0 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show la4 0 atmroute Port VPI OrigCost TermCost Domain Node 1A4 0 100 0 1 N A The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 363 AMI Configuration Commands 1 23 4 4 Displaying Timer Information for Signalling Channels To show timer information about all of the signalling channels on a switch fabric enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show timers P
63. LE ARP queries disable means the LES collects TLV parameters from LEC MPCs that register with it but does not distribute these TLVs to LEC MPCs in response to LE ARP queries LES The full ATM address of the LES The LECs that wish to join this ELAN use this address to contact the LES BUS The full ATM address of the BUS for this ELAN LEC Information Index The unique index that identifies this LEC It is dynamically assigned by the switch when the LEC is created AdminStatus Reflects any changes that you have made to the status of the LEC up means you have started the LEC down means you have stopped the LEC OperStatus Reflects the actual current status of the LEC up means the LEC is currently active down means the LEC is currently inactive joining means that the LEC is in the process of reg istering with the ELAN Sel The selector byte portion 20th byte of the ATM address of the LEC in hexadecimal format Mode The configuration mode that is used when a LEC joins the ELAN wellknown means that the well known LECS address and the default LES are used manual means that the specified LECS or LES address is used The default is wellknown MACaddress The Ethernet MAC address for this LEC IfName The e1 interface name of this LEC ELAN The name of the ELAN to which this LEC belongs If there is no ELAN named default you receive the following message myswitch configuration lane defa
64. O configuration spans gt new lal O minvci 32 maxvci 100 1 294 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 18 3 Showing the SPANS Signalling Path Configuration This command lets you list an individual switch fabric s current SPANS signalling path infor mation Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration spans gt show Port VPI State Type CDVT Action RemoteAddress LAL 0 down uni 1000 tag LA2 0 down uni 000 tag LA3 0 down uni 000 tag LA4 0 down uni 000 tag z LA5 0 down uni 000 tag io LA6 0 down uni 000 tag S 9 C1 0 down uni 000 tag 3 Fi LC2 0 down uni 000 tag LC3 0 down uni 000 tag bad 1C4 0 down uni 000 tag 3 ICTL 0 down uni 0 tag The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port number of the SPANS signalling path VPI The virtual path number of the SPANS signalling path State The current state of the SPANS path If the state is up this path is operational If the state is down this interface is not operational Type The type of connection on this SPANS path If the type listed is uni this is a SPANS user to network interface connection to a SPANS host If the type listed is nni then this is a SPANS network to network interface connection to another switch CDVT The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT in microseconds Action Tag means that non compliant cells are tagged Drop means th
65. Parameter Description interface Indicates the name of the IP interface 011 Indicates the IP broadcast type for this interface This is the host portion of the IP address that is used for routing Entering 1 causes the host portion of the IP address to be set to all 1s Entering 0 causes the host portion of the IP address to be set to all 0s 1 74 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 3 1 4 Configuring the IP Subnet Mask This command allows you to modify the IP subnet mask of one of the TCM s IP interfaces Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec slotx ip gt mask lt interface gt lt mask gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description interface Indicates the name of the IP interface mask Indicates the subnet mask for this IP interface It should be entered in dotted decimal nota tion e g 255 255 255 0 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a 1 5 3 1 5 Configuring IP Routes This command allows you to add a static IP route to the local IP routing table delete a static IP route from the local IP routing table or list the current static IP routes in the local IP routing table for one of the TCM s IP interfaces You can display the list of available subcommands by typing route at the ip level uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration cec slotx ip gt route new delete show 1 5 3 1 5 1 Adding an IP Ro
66. Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Oper Status Reflects the actual current status of the LEC Up means the LEC is currently active Down means the LEC is currently inactive Joining means that the LEC is in the process of reg istering with the ELAN Sel The selector byte portion 20th byte of the ATM address of the LEC in hexadecimal for mat Mode The configuration mode that is used when a LEC joins the ELAN wellknown means that the LECS address was discovered via ILMI or that ATM Forum well known address is being used manual means that the specified LECS or LES address is used The default is wellknown MACaddress The Ethernet MAC address for this LEC IfName The e1 interface name of this LEC ELAN The name of the ELAN to which this LEC belongs LECS The address of the LECS that services the ELAN to which this LEC belongs If the Mode is manual then no LECS address is displayed because the LEC directly connects to the LES If the Mode is wellknown then the LECS address is displayed If the LECS address was discovered via ILMI then that LECS address is displayed otherwise the ATM Forum well known address is displayed LES The anycast address of the LES that services the ELAN to which this LEC belongs BUS The address of the BUS that services the ELAN to which this LEC belongs LEC ID The unique ID that the LES gives the LEC when it joins the ELAN
67. Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 27 2 Modifying a Virtual Path Terminator This command lets you modify an existing virtual path terminator Enter the following param eters myswitch configuration vpt gt modify lt port gt lt vpi gt term orig reserved lt Kbps gt cbr none default lt QoSExtIndex gt rtvbr none default lt QoSExtIndex gt nrtvbr none default lt QoSExtIndex gt ubr none default lt QoSExtIndex gt abr none default lt QoSExtIndex gt z So 3 S 1 27 3 Creating a Virtual Path Terminator ae an o2 This command lets you create a new virtual path terminator Enter the following parameters o 5 myswitch configuration vpt gt new lt port gt lt vpi gt term orig reserved lt Kbs gt minvei lt vci gt maxvei lt vci gt advanced options for orig paths shapeovpi lt vpi gt vbrob lt percent gt vbrbuffob lt percent gt extended qos options for orig term paths cbr none default lt QoSExtIndex gt rtvbr none default lt QoSExtIndex gt nrtvbr none default lt QoSExtIndex gt ubr none default lt QoSExtIndex gt abr none default lt QoSExtIndex gt The following is an example of how to create a terminating path myswitch configuration vpt gt new 3b3 99 term Would you like to create the originating side also y y The following is an example of how to cre
68. SONET network module port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port sonet gt mode lt port gt sonet sdh These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the mode is to be changed sonet sdh The mode of operation for this port Can be sonet or sdh AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 225 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 19 4 Configuring the SONET Port Scrambling This command allows you to change the scrambling mode on a port on a SONET network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port sonet gt scrambling lt port gt on off These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the scrambling mode is to be changed on off on indicates that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port off means that cell pay load scrambling is disabled on this port Only the payload of the ATM cells is scrambled The default is on 1 The scrambling mode should be set to the same status on both the transmitting side and the receiving side 1 12 19 5 Showing the SONET Port Configuration This command lets you display information about the configuration of all of the ports on a SONET network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port sonet gt show Port Width Line Mode Loopback Timing Scrambling EmptyCells 1C1 sts3c MM
69. Se LS configuring 0008 creating na oa a SA default configuration mode deleting os rei riesaa ke ra displaying information starting stopping LEC LAN Emulation Client LEC default configuration mode displaying 0 Seting aerarii niaii ia EN LECS changing the administrative status configuring for an ELAN creating AA esd ihe ao Index 6 deleting ic ccsetire eee ete et 1 126 displaying information 1 128 Starting oes ee Ee 1 126 stopping 6 eee 1 126 LECS LAN Emulation Configuration DELVED Scere enue ta eae ee 1 126 LECS database configuration file PENE birsta KG era eds ieee ses 1 130 LES changing the administrative STATUS scsi heme oon anes 3 1 131 configuring for an ELAN 1 131 CRANE foes naive oes 1 132 deleting 004 1 131 displaying advanced information 1 139 1 140 displaying information 1 137 1 1 0 saaan ERREA 1 131 stopping 0 eee eee 1 131 LES LAN Emulation Server 1 131 link cost to PGSN displaying 0 1 36 link cost to PGSN computing method displaying a 1 36 JOO sis an raa a eae Gan Pma 1 103 local interface 1 103 1 104 log deleting the host address 1 340 displaying the host address 1 338 setting the host address 1 339 log messages disabling them from being output on the console
70. Syslog Facility local7 1 340 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 5 4 Turning Off or Turning On System Log Messages to the Console On a switch the system log messages may be directed to three places to syslog to the console and to a remote host These types of switches are defaulted to send log messages to both the console and to syslog The console command can be used in different ways To display whether or not log messages are being output to the console enter console with out any arguments as follows myswitch configuration system syslog gt console If the messages are being sent to the console the following message is shown Syslog console output is enabled O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY If the messages are not being directed to the console the following message is displayed Syslog console output is disabled To enable log messages to be sent to the console or to stop log messages from being output to the console enter console with the appropriate argument as follows myswitch configuration system syslog gt console enable disable These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description enable Indicates that all log messages will be written to the console disable Indicates that no log messages will be written to the console AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 341 AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 5 5 E
71. The incoming port number of the virtual channel Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Input VCI The incoming virtual channel number Output Port The outgoing port number of the virtual channel Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number Output VCI The outgoing virtual channel number Protocol The type of protocol running on this channel which can be spans pvc uni or spvc ConType The connection type for the endpoints of this channel with respect to a particular network Orig originating means that the ingress egress endpoint of the channel is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran transit means that the ingress egress endpoint of the channel is connected to a node within the network and term ter minating means that the ingress egress endpoint of the channel is connected to the desti nation node which is outside the network pp means this is labelled as a point to point channel pmp means this is labelled as a point to multipoint channel mpp means this is labelled as a multipoint to point channel mpmp means this is labelled as a multipoint to multipoint channel AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 379 AMI Configuration Commands To list advanced information about all of the existing permanent virtual channels on a specific port e g port 3B1 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vcc gt show 3b1 advanced Input Output Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Protocol
72. This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description prefix The FI PNNI prefix for this ATM switch that is used in the hello indication FI PNNI mes sage The switch software must be restarted for this command to take effect Therefore you must be in a local AMI session to perform this command 1 3 3 13 Setting the Proportional Multiplier This command enables you to set the proportional multiplier for the NSAP router The propor tional multiplier is expressed as a percentage of Available Cell Rate ACR on any given link in the network If the change in percentage of the ACR on any given link in the NSAP topology of the network exceeds this percentage threshold then the change is considered significant The topology tables are updated accordingly for that link Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt propmult lt percentage gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description propmult The threshold above which you consider the change in ACR on any link to be significant The default is 20 1 If you modify this value you should modify it on all switches in the network 1 30 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 14 Static Route Configuration Commands These commands let you create delete and display static routes You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the staticro
73. Token Ring 1 The MTU size must match the MTU size of the other hosts and edge devices on the ELAN AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 115 AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 2 4 Displaying BUS Information This command lets you display the current BUS information To display information about every BUS that is currently configured on the switch enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane bus gt show Index AdminStatus OperStatus Selector Type MTU ELAN 1 up up 0x12 ethernet 1516 one 2 up up 0x32 token ring 4544 three The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Index The unique index number that identifies this BUS It is dynamically assigned by AMI when the BUS is created AdminStatus Reflects any changes that you have made to the status of the BUS Up means you have started the BUS Down means you have stopped the BUS OperStatus Reflects the actual current status of the BUS Up means the BUS is currently active Down means the BUS is currently inactive Selector The selector byte portion 20th byte of the ATM address of the host or switch that is the BUS in hexadecimal format Type The type of ELAN this is ethernet means that the LAN type is Ethernet token ring means that the LAN type is Token Ring MTU The maximum transmission unit MTU size ELAN The name of the ELAN that this BUS services 1 When you change the administrative s
74. Trap Log This command lets you display the log of the SNMP traps that occurred Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration snmp trap log gt show ndex Trap Xmits LastXmit Events LastEvent time elapsed time elapsed trap_warmStart 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 2 asxLinkDown 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 3 asxSonetLOSDetected 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 4 asxLinkDown 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 5 asxSonetLOFDetected 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 6 asxLinkDown 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 7 asxDS3LOSDetected 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 8 asxLinkDown 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 9 asxDS3LOSDetected 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 0 asxHostLinkUp 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 1 asxSpansUp 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 2 asxHostLinkUp 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 3 asxSpansUp 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 4 asxHostLinkUp 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 5 asxSpansUp 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 6 asxTempSensorRegularTemp 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 7 asxPsOutputUp 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 8 asxPsInputUp 2 days 20 59 2 days 20 59 9 asxSwitchLoginDetected 5 0 days 00 00 5 0 days 00 00 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Index Shows the index number of this trap Trap Shows the name of this trap Xmits Shows how many times this trap was transmitted to the trap destination LastXmit Shows when this trap was last transmitted i e how long ago it was transmitted Events Shows how many times this trap actually
75. Tx line Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over the line none none designates that no loopback will take place This is the default setting 1 12 6 6 Configuring the DS1 CES Port Line Coding The mode command lets you configure the line coding for a particular DS1 CES port Enter the following myswitch configuration port cesdsl gt mode lt port gt B8ZS AMT These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The DS1 CES port on which the line coding is to be changed B8ZS AMI The type of coding to be used B8ZS means that Binary 8 Zero Substitution will be used AMI means that Alternate Mark Inversion will be used see the Glossary AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 183 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 6 7 Displaying the DS1 CES Port Configuration This command lets you display the current configuration of each DS1 CES port Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch Port 2A1 down 2A2 down 2A3 down 2A4 down 2A5 down 2A6 down configuration port cesdsl gt show Framing Carrier Line Loopback Port Line Line Mode State Code State Timing Length Status ESF no B8ZS none internal lt 130 64 ESF no B8ZS none internal lt 130 64 ESF no B8ZS none internal lt 130 64 ESF no B8ZS none internal lt 130 64 ESF no B8ZS none internal lt 130 64 ESF no B8ZS none internal l
76. VPI VCI Port VPI VCI UPC Protocol Name 3B1 0 5 3CTL 0 49 0 uni N A 3B1 0 14 3CTL 0 48 0 spans N A 3B1 0 15 3CTL 0 47 spans N A 3B1 0 16 3CTL 0 50 uni N A 3B1 Q 100 3B4 0 100 0 pvc N A The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example To list all of the existing permanent virtual channels on a specific port path and channel for example port 3B1 VPI O and VCI 100 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vcc gt show 3B1 0 100 Input Output Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI UPC Protocol Name 3B1 Q 100 3B4 0 100 0 pvc N A The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example 1 378 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands To list advanced information about all of the existing permanent virtual channels on a switch board enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vcc gt show advanced Input Output Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Protocol ConType 3B1 0 5 3CTL 0 49 uni N A 3B1 0 14 3CTL 0 48 spans N A 3B1 0 5 3CTL 0 47 spans N A 3B1 0 6 3CTL 0 50 uni N A 3B1 0 100 3B4 0 100 pve tran tran pp z 3B2 0 5 3CTL 0 53 uni N A Q o 3B2 0 4 3CTL 0 52 spans N A 32 3B2 0 5 3CTL 0 51 spans N A 32 3B2 0 6 3CTL 0 54 uni N A S Press return for more q to quit q 2 i 5 The fields in the advanced display are defined as follows Field Description Input Port
77. You can show the list of available subcommands by typing relays at the alarms level Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec alarms gt relays set show 1 5 1 3 1 Setting an Alarm Relay This command lets you set an alarm relay Enter the following parameters gt o oO myswitch configuration cec alarms relays gt set lt relay number gt major minor unused 3 Q 3 2 Q 25 These parameters are defined as follows 25 5 Parameter Description relay number Indicates the number which corresponds to one of the five alarm relay LEDs on the front of the SCP major minor unused Indicates if you want the alarm relay to be major minor or unused 1 5 1 3 2 Displaying the Alarm Relays This command lets you display the alarm relays Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec alarms relays gt show Relay Alarm Current Number Function State I major on 2 minor on 3 unused off 4 unused off 5 major on The fields in this display are defined are defined as follows Field Description relay number Shows the number which corresponds to one of the five alarm relay LEDs on the front of the SCP Alarm Function Shows whether the alarm relay has been configured as major minor or unused Current State Shows whether the alarm relay is on in a state of alarm or of f not ina state of alarm AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 71 AMI C
78. You will also need to show the list of cur rent SNMP traps in order to find the number of the trap to be deleted Enter the following parameters to delete a trap entry myswitch configuration cec slotx snmp trap gt delete lt trap gt The parameter for deleting is defined as follows Parameter Description trap Indicates the number of the trap destination in the list of current SNMP traps that is to be removed For example to delete trap 198 29 31 130 first list the traps to find its number and copy the address in case you want to recreate it later myswitch configuration cec slotx snmp trap gt show Trap Destination 1 192 88 243 18 2 198 29 16 14 3 198 29 16 18 4 198 29 23 39 5 198 29 31 130 1 80 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Then enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec slotx snmp trap gt delete 5 You can display the list again to verify that the trap has been deleted myswitch configuration cec slotx snmp trap gt show Trap 1 2 3 4 1 5 3 5 1 2 Destination 192 w28 oes w28 198 198 198 88 243 18 16 14 16 18 23 39 Creating an SNMP Trap Entry This command allows you to specify a host to which an TCM can send SNMP traps Enter the IP address of the SNMP trap destination to be added Repeat this for as many SNMP trap des tinations as needed Traps are active as soon as they are set Enter the followi
79. a Network Module 1 141 1 10 2 Resetting a Network Module a 1 142 1 10 3 Displaying Network Module Configuration Information 1 143 1 10 4 Configuring Traffic on a Network Module 1 144 1 10 4 1 Configuring Traffic on a Series C Network Module 1 144 1 10 4 1 1 Setting Early Packet Discard on a Series C Network Module 1 144 1 10 4 2 Setting FIFO Blocking on a Series C Network Module 1 145 1 10 4 3 Displaying Traffic Models for a Series C Network Module 1 145 1 10 4 4 Setting Traffic Models on a Series C Network Module 1 146 1 10 4 5 Displaying Traffic on a Series C Network Module 1 147 1 10 4 6 Configuring Traffic on a Series LC Network Module 1 148 110 4 6 1 Setting EPD on a Series LC Network Module 1 148 1 10 4 6 2 Setting EFCI on a Series LC Network Module 1 149 1 10 4 6 3 Displaying Traffic Models for a Series LC Network Module 00 e ce ee eae 1 150 1 10 4 6 4 Setting Traffic Models on a Series LC Network Module 0 e cere eae 1 151 1 10 4 6 5 Displaying Traffic on a Series LC Network Module aaan 1 152 1 10 4 7 Configuring Traffic on a Series LE Network Module 1 153 110 4 7 1 Setting EPD on a Series LE Network Module 1 153 1 10 4 7 2 Setting EFCI on a Series LE Network Module 1 154 1 10 4 7 3 Displaying Traffic Models for a Series LE Network Module
80. address to contact the LES BUS The full ATM address of the BUS for the ELAN ANYCAST The unique anycast ATM address that all LECs in a given ELAN use to connect to one of the DLE servers for that ELAN If no address is provided by the user then this is a stand alone LES BUS pair i e DLE services are not running in that ELAN LECS The LECS address This address is displayed only if ELAN access control has been enabled PEER If there are any DLE peer servers shows the full ATM address of each 1 When you change the administrative status from down to up it takes a few seconds for the change to occur and to be reflected in the OperStatus field Therefore it is possible for the AdminStatus to be up but the OperStatus tobe down If you refresh the display the change has taken place and is reflected here To display information about a particular LES that is currently configured on the switch enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane les gt show lt LES index gt advanced For example to show information about the LES with an index number of 2 enter the following myswitch configuration lane les gt show 2 Index AdminStatus OperStatus LesSel Type MTU ELAN SECURE TLVs 2 up up 0x50 ethernet 1516 eng enable disable LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 50 BUS 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 50 Co Located c5000580ffe1000000f21c10bb0020481c10bb10 ANYCA
81. admin lt LEC index LEC index range x y gt up down uonjein6iju09 INY The parameters for admin are defined as follows Parameter Description LEC index The unique positive integer index of the LEC that is dynamically assigned by AMI when a LEC is created to identify this LEC from any others in the same ELAN Found under the Index field using the conf lane lec show command LEC index range x y The range of index numbers of the LECs that you want to start or stop The index is found under the Index field using conf lane lec show up down Entering up starts this LEC Entering down stops this existing LEC The default is up 1 9 3 2 Configuring LANE ARP Commands These commands let you configure the LANE ARP cache You can reach this level by entering arp at the lec level Enter the following parameters to list the various ARP commands myswitch configuration lane lec gt arp delete show AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 117 AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 3 2 1 Deleting LANE ARP Cache Information This command allows you to remove an ARP entry from the LANE ARP cache or to delete the contents of the LANE ARP cache Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lec arp gt delete all lt MAC address gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description all Indicates that all of the entries are to be flushed from the LANE ARP cache M
82. advanced information modifying 0 Index 14 Ww WHOA i ee ook ee a tee oh ete oR 1 273 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual
83. alarm is activated when a network module is removed from that slot none means that no alarm is activated when a network module is removed from that slot The default is none NetmodStatus Shows present or absent depending on whether or not a network module is currently installed in that slot 1 6 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 1 5 2 Configuring Network Module Alarm Priorities This command lets you configure priorities for the network module alarms for each slot in the switch fabric There are four slots labeled A B C and D These alarms alert you when a net work module has been removed from that slot Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration alarms module gt assign lt slot gt lt priority gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description gt slot The slot in the switch fabric for which you want to configure an alarm priority Can be A B C Q o Or D 3 S priority The priority you want to assign to the slot Each slot in the fabric may be assigned a differ 5 amp ent priority high low or none high means that the netmodRemovedHighPrio alarm o 3 is activated when a network module is removed from that slot Low means that the net ig A modRemovedLowPrio alarm is activated when a network module is removed from that 5 slot none means that no alarm is activated when a network module is removed from that slot The default
84. an index number of 1 enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration lane lec gt show 1 Index 1 Admin Oper Status Status Sel Mode MACaddress IfName ELAN up up 0x00 wellknown 0220481c10bb e10 eng net LECS 0x47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00a03e000001 00 LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 20 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example You can also display advanced information about the LECs Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lec gt show advanced Index 1 Admin Oper Status Status Sel Mode MACaddress IfName ELAN up up 0x00 wellknown 0220481c10bb e10 default LECS 0x47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00a03e000001 00 LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 20 BUS 47000580ffe1000000f21c10bb0020481c10bb20 LEC ID 2 Discovered ELAN name elanl Configure Direct VCC 0 71 Control Direct VCC 0 125 Control Distribute VCC 0 75 Multicast Send VCC 0 128 Multicast Forward VCC 0 76 Last Error ran out of resources to LES The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Index The unique index that identifies this LEC It is dynamically assigned by the switch when the LEC is created Admin Status Reflects any changes that you have made to the status of the LEC Up means you have started the LEC Down means you have stopped the LEC 1 124 AMI Configuration Commands
85. and or the system Do not proceed beyond a WARNING statement until the indicated conditions are fully understood or met This information could prevent serious injury to the operator dam age to the FORE Systems product the system or currently loaded software and is indicated as follows WARNING Hazardous voltages are present To reduce the risk of electrical shock and danger to personal health follow the instructions carefully CAUTION statements contain information that is important for proper installation opera tion Compliance with CAUTION statements can prevent possible equipment damage and or loss of data and are indicated as follows CAUTION You risk damaging your equipment and or software if you do not follow these instructions NOTE statements contain information that has been found important enough to be called to the special attention of the operator and is set off from the text as follows If you change the value of the LECS control NOTES parameters while the LECS process is running the new values do not take effect until the LECS process is stopped and then restarted iv AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Preface Invisible Laser Radiation Notice y D o Class 1 Laser Product o This product conforms to applicable requirements of 21 CFR 1040 at the date of manufacture Class 1 lasers are defined as products which do not permit human access to laser radiation in excess of the access
86. are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers of each network module currently installed in the switch fabric Carrier yes means a carrier has been detected on this port no means a carrier has not been detected State The current state of this port Can be up on line or down off line Loopback The loopback mode of this port Can be either none or diagnostic 1 A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port It does not guarantee that the signal is the proper frequency 1 12 21 TP25 Port Configuration Commands These commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on a TP25 network module The following tp25 commands are available only when a TP25 net work module is installed in the switch fabric You can display the list of available subcom mands by typing tp25 at the port level myswitch configuration port gt tp25 loopback AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual show 1 231 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 21 1 Configuring the TP25 Port Loopback This subcommand allows you to designate the type of loopback on a port on a TP25 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port tp25 gt loopback lt port gt line none These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the loopback mode is to be changed line line loopback also known as r
87. are destroyed O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY Enter the following parameters to modify the overbooking factor myswitch configuration port gt vbrob lt port gt lt percent gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the bandwidth overbooking level for VBR traffic is to be con figured Overbooking cannot be configured on the control CTL port percent The bandwidth overbooking level assigned to this port specified as a percentage Enter an integer value from 1 to 32 767 The default is 100 which indicates that no overbooking will occur Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 denote overbooking AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 253 AMI Configuration Commands 1 13 QOS Expansion Table Commands These commands let you delete create or display information about Quality of Service QOS entries in the QOS expansion table The QOS expansion table is used for translating the QOS class in an incoming connection setup request into parameterized QOS values for Cell Trans fer Delay CTD Cell Delay Variation CDV and Cell Loss Ratio CLR Please refer to Section 6 5 2 3 5 of the ATM Forum PNNI Specification for more information Each entry in the expansion table is indexed by an index and a QOS class The index is used for associating entries in the expansion table with signalling interfaces The table c
88. authorized addresses Setting all to disallow means that all incoming IP packets are rejected even if they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses CAUTION When the a11 flag is set to disallow the only way you can access the switch is via the serial port Information about all rejected packets except for E gt rejected broadcast packets can be sent to syslog by using the debug trace filtering ipfilter on command 1 262 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 6 Displaying IP Access Information This command lets you display information about the IP filters that have been configured myswitch configuration security ipaccess gt show Accepting IP traffic from the following addresses IpAddress 198 24 65 204 19 95 2 89 Mask 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 Configuration Flags Flag all ssr Isr State allow allow allow The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description IpAddress Mask The table of authorized incoming IP addresses and their corresponding masks if applica ble The mask indicates the significant part of the incoming IP address to be used in find ing a matching address in this table A mask of 0 0 0 0 is a wild card that matches all addresses The addresses in the table are accepted unless specifically rejected by a policy set by one of the configuration flags The table can contain
89. be set in number of cells By default this value is set to 90 of the shared buffer size 1 148 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 6 2 Setting EFCI on a Series LC Network Module This command lets you designate the cell buffer threshold over which Available Bit Rate ABR cells have their explicit forward congestion indicator EFCI code point set When the EFCI code point is set this signals congestion to downstream flow control mechanisms Once this threshold is surpassed EFCI continues to be set until the queue empties below the off threshold Enter the following parameters myswitch conf module traffic lc gt efci lt module gt on off lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY Parameter Description module The port on which the EFCI threshold will be set on off on means the EFCI bit will be set when the threshold number is reached signalling con gestion off means the EFCI bit will be cleared when the threshold number is reached indicating no congestion number of cells The number of cells over which the ABR cells will have the EFCI bit set The default for the on threshold is 64 The default for the off threshold is 1 1 The value for the off threshold must always be less than the value for the on threshold The Series LC network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interfac
90. cec slotx ip gt show interface state address netmask broadcast ied up 169 144 28 125 255 255 255 0 169 144 28 255 iel up 169 144 28 225 255 255 255 0 169 144 28 255 100 up 127 0 0 1 255 0 0 0 N A The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description o Z interface Indicates the name of the IP interface S 9 state Lists the administrative state of the IP interface 3 a address Displays the IP address of the IP interface a PI netmask Shows the netmask address of the IP interface S broadcast Indicates the broadcast address of the IP interface You may also designate a single interface to be displayed by entering show and the specific interface name at the prompt as follows myswitch configuration cec slotx ip show ie0 interface state address netmask broadcast ie0 up 169 144 28 125 255 255 255 0 169 144 28 255 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those listed above in the example for showing the configuration of all of the IP interfaces 1 5 3 2 Setting or Changing the TCM s Name This command lets you set or change the name of the TCM Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec slotx gt name lt name gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description name Indicates the new system name for the TCM For example to set the TCM s name to linus enter the following parameters myswitch configuration c
91. follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the framing mode is to be changed plcp hes plcp means the port uses PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol framing for cell delineation hes means the port uses HCS Header Check Sequence based framing for cell delineation The default is hes 1 12 10 6 Configuring the DS3 Port Scrambling This command lets you change the scrambling mode on a port on the DS3 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port ds3 gt scrambling lt port gt on off These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the scrambling mode is to be changed on off on means that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port off means that cell pay load scrambling is disabled on this port 1 Only the payload of the ATM cells is scrambled AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 199 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 10 7 Showing the DS3 Port Configuration This command allows you to display current information about all of the ports on the DS3 net work module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port ds3 gt show Port Carrier Status Mode Framing Loopback Timing Scrambling EmptyCells Length 1A 1 yes 1A2 yes plep cbit none internal off unassigned Gt225 plcp cbit none internal
92. for a fabric 1 68 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual hardware version displaying 06 1 326 displaying for a fabric 1 68 HDB3 coding 0 00008 1 83 hello indication messages 1 25 displaying the interval between 02 005 1 35 setting the interval between 1 25 l OO aa NAN EAEE EIEEE A 1 103 ILMI changing the default signalling channel 005 1 354 enabling disabling on a signalling channel 1 354 ILMI address registration enabling disabling 1 356 ILMI LECS address registry adding an entry 1 174 deleting an entry 1 173 displaying 66 1 172 ILMI SNMP Proxy ISP table 1 99 ILMI SNMP proxy request resending ANU Sais 1 99 information element IE filters enabling disabling 1 356 interface type configuring for a signalling channel 005 1 354 IP access creating an authorized address 1 260 IP address configuring 1 103 IP broadcast address configuring 0 1 104 configuring for TCM 1 74 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Index IP filtering alll Ala tle A e ohh Ak 1 262 deleting an authorized address 3 sik ee OR Hee 1 261 displaying authorized addresses 1 263 displaying IP filtering flags 1 263 Isr flag
93. gt show filters Port VPI Direction Filter Name Template IDs 1A1 0 Incoming 21 10 12 40 1A2 0 Incoming 459 keep_them_out 45 46 47 48 1A2 0 Outgoing 94 49 50 1A4 0 Outgoing 36 filter_36 3984 1CTL 0 Outgoing 37 ctlport 625 1 284 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 17 SNMP Configuration Commands These commands enable you to manage the SNMP communities and traps You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the snmp level myswitch configuration snmp gt community sets show trap gt 1 17 1 Configuring the SNMP Community Access This command lets you modify the SNMP community access to the switch Enter the follow ing parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration snmp gt community read write lt community gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description read indicates you want to set the community string for SNMP read operations get and read write getnext requests write indicates you want to set the community string for SNMP write operations set requests The community string associated with read or with write The default community string associated with read is public The default community string associated with writeisprivate community 1 17 2 Enabling or Disabling SNMP SETs This command lets you enable or disable SNMP SET operations from the network
94. if they are enabled OF NOt sige Meena dais 1 286 enabling 00 1 285 SNMP trap adding for TCM 1 81 deleting for TCM 1 80 displaying for TCM 1 81 SNMP trap destination ko Ko biag AA AA tans 1 287 deleting a diets an Piang 1 286 displaying 1 287 SNMP trap log displaying 04 1 288 displaying the threshold 1 291 modifying the threshold 1 290 Index 11 Index resetting the threshold 1 290 software version displaying 0 1 326 SONET network modules displaying configuration of 1 226 displaying status of 1 227 empty cells 06 1 224 loopback osos naa dagan 1 225 mode of operation 1 225 scrambling 00008 1 226 TIMING masa paw Nka sue PNG Em 1 229 SPANS einek dep sade a Ba Aaah 1 298 SPANS address displaying 0 1 326 SPANS area ID displaying 0 1 65 SOP Gs ess sia teeta a See eee haces he 1 64 SPANS interface 0 0 0 c eee ee 1 103 SPANS signalling path adding i204 KGG AYA Sees 1 293 deleting oie cece whe pe alee a aes 1 292 displaying advanced information fora port and path 1 297 displaying advanced information forall AA 1 296 displaying all 1 295 displaying fora port 1 297 displaying for a port and patho dere ent aasa GO 1 297 SP
95. is amp s local admin all marketing securid user network The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Userid The userids currently available on this switch The asx userid no longer an alias for ami When you first upgrade to ForeThought 5 0 x the switch software creates two separate default userids ami and asx Both are configured with local authentication admin privileges and a11 access If a ForeThought 4 1 x password file already existed both use rids are assigned that same password If a ForeThought 4 1 x password file did not exist both userids are assigned a null password Authentication Method The authentication method for this userid local means that the correct local password for this userid must be supplied to log in to a switch securid means that the correct SecurID passcode must be supplied to log into a switch There are some exceptions See the Network Configuration manual for your switch for more information about these authentication methods and the exceptions The default is local Privileges The privilege level for this userid admin means a person with this userid is allowed to use all AMI commands user means a person with this userid can use all AMI com mands except the following conf security login backup conf security login delete conf security login modify conf security login new conf security login password to modify passwords other than your own conf secu
96. is enabled based on the UPC contract of the connection AALS PP Pol VBR allon means all AAL5 VBR connections are subjected to partial packet policing a110ff means no AALS VBR connections are subjected to partial packet policing svcOn means all AAL5 VBR SVCs are subjected to partial packet policing For AAL5 VBR PVCs partial packet policing is performed based on the UPC contract of the connection svcOff means no AAL5 VBR SVCs are are subjected to partial packet policing For AAL5 VBR PVCs par tial packet policing is enabled based on the UPC contract of the connection 1 222 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description AAL5 Packet Discard CBR allon means all AAL5 CBR connections are subjected to packet discard aL110ff means no AAL5 CBR connections are subjected to packet discard svcOn means all AAL5 CBR SVCs are subjected to packet discard For CBR PVCs AAL5 packet discard is enabled based on the UPC contract of the connection svcOff means no AAL5 CBR SVCs are sub jected to packet discard For CBR PVCs AALS packet discard is enabled based on the UPC contract of the connection AALS Packet Discard VBR allon means all AAL5 VBR connections are subjected to packet discard alloff means no AAL5 VBR connections are subjected to packet discard svcOn means all AAL5 VBR SVCs are subjected to packet discard For VBR PVCs AAL5 packet discard is enabled bas
97. it has not received and processed the logical group node LGN horizontal link IG PtseRfr The interval in seconds between re originations of a self originated PTSE in the absence of triggered updates A node re originates its PNNI Topology State Elements PTSEs at this rate to prevent other nodes from flushing these PTSEs PtseLftF The value used to calculate the initial lifetime of self originated PTSEs The initial lifetime is set to the product of the PTSE refresh interval and the PTSE Lifetime Factor Rxmt The interval in seconds at which unacknowledged PTSEs are retransmitted A PTSE is retransmitted every interval unless explicitly acknowledged through the receipt of either an acknowledgment packet specifying the PTSE instance or the same instance or a more recent instance of the PTSE by flooding To display information about significant changes enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni node gt show sigchange Node AvcrPm AvcrMt CdvPm CtdPm t 50 5 25 50 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Node The index number of this node AvcrPm A change in the Available Cell Rate by this percentage is considered to be significant pro vided the change is more than the threshold value specified using AvcrMt AverMt The minimum threshold for change in Available Cell Rate after which AvcrPm is used to find the significant change A
98. manual mode These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description manual wellknown manual means the LECS address specified here is used as the LECS address wellknown means that the LEC first uses ILMI to attempt to discover the LECS address If no address is available via that method then the LEC attempts to use the ATM Forum s well known LECS address 47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00A03E000001 00 to contact the LECS The default is wellknown LECS address The ATM address of the LECS to be used instead of the well known LECS 1 9 3 4 2 Displaying the Default LEC Configuration Mode This command lets you show whether the default LEC configuration mode is manual using a LECS other than the one at the well known address or wellknown using the LECS at the well known address Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lec default gt show LEC Default configuration mode wellknown 1 120 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 3 5 Creating an Ethernet LEC This command lets you create an Ethernet LEC join an ELAN When a LEC is created a cor responding el interface is created The interface name e10 e11 etc is assigned based on the selector byte entered when the LEC is created The list of current e1 interfaces can be dis played using the conf lane lec show command or the conf ip show command The maxi mum
99. means that payload scram bling is disabled on this port Length The length of the physical cable that is attached to this port EmptyCells The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port It does not guarantee that the signal is the proper frequency 2 Please refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 195 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 9 8 Configuring DS1 Port Timing This command lets you change the timing source on a port on a DS1 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port dsl timing lt port gt network internal These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the line length is to be changed network internal The transmit clock for this port network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port 1 12 10 DS3 Port Configuration Commands These commands let you
100. module Enter the following parameters myswitch conf port ds3 gt loopback lt port gt cell payload diag line none These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the loopback mode is to be changed cell cell loopback means that the DS3 stream received from the network is unframed into ATM cells The cells are reframed and transmitted back to the network payload payload loopback mean the DS3 stream received from the network has the DS3 overhead bits re inserted and is retransmitted to the network diag diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter The DS3 stream transmit ted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch The DS3 stream is still transmitted to the network but the incoming DS3 stream is ignored line line loopback connects the transmitter to the receiver The data stream received from the line is retransmitted out to the line Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over the line none none designates that no loopback will take place on this port This is the default setting 1 198 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 10 5 Configuring the DS3 Port Mode This command allows you to change the framing mode on a port on a DS3 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port ds3 gt mode lt port gt plep hes These parameters are defined as
101. myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt show perf Performance monitoring not configured 1 320 Currently the only utilities that are available to aid in post processing for call records and performance monitoring data are through ForeView These utilities convert the call record and performance record file data from binary to ASCII format so that the information can be imported into databases or spreadsheet programs For more information about these utilities please refer to the ForeView Network Management User s Manual AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 2 Configuring Memory Pools These commands let you allocate memory pools of various data structures that are involved in call setups These pools are considered to be the minimum numbers required for each type of connection As a parameter s value is increased the pools become larger and increase memory requirements Similarly as a parameter s value is decreased the pools shrink and memory is freed Any increases to these pools take effect immediately and are maintained over switch reboots However decreases may be slightly delayed if the parameters are changed and the data structures that are needed to change the pool size are already in use For example if you decrease the number of point to point calls from 500 to 300 and all of the calls are in use that pool will not shrink until 200 calls have been released Typical va
102. new password restore securid gt show upriv whoami gt o 89 More information about userids and other 3 3 E gt methods of security can be found in the Network nG Configuration manual for your switch Gani o 5 116 1 7 1 Backing Up the Login Userid File This command lets you make a backup of the file that contains all of the login IDs and infor mation This command is only available to users with admin privileges Enter the following myswitch configuration security login gt backup lt host gt lt full path to backup file gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description host The IP address of the host to which the login file will be backed up full path to backup file The full path name of the file to which the login file will be backed up If you have configured the transfer protocol to be FIP using conf system protocol you only need to enter the command shown above to perform the file backup After you enter the command shown above you are prompted for the remote userid and password of the remote host to which you are backing up the file If you have configured the transfer protocol to be TFIP this is the default using conf system protocol the remote host to which the file will be backed up must be running the TFIP server code If you are unsure of how to do this see the Installation and Maintenance manual for your switch AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 265 A
103. not up or if ILMI is up the negotiation is still in progress A value that is displayed without brackets indi cates the value has been successfully negotiated if ILMI is enabled and up or negotiation did not need to take place if ILMI is disabled For more information see the Network Configuration manual for your switch Oper MaxVCI The actual operational top number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for UNI SVCs on this path A value that is displayed in brackets indicates that negotiation of this value with the UNI peer via ILMI is not complete because either ILMI is not up or if ILMI is up the negotiation is still in progress A value that is displayed without brackets indicates the value has been successfully negotiated if ILMI is enabled and up or negotiation did not need to take place if ILMI is disabled For more information see the Network Configuration manual for your switch 1 360 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description InSigUpc The index number of the UPC traffic contract that is applied to the input signalling chan nel UPC contracts can be displayed using conf upc show OutSigUpce The index number of the UPC traffic contract that is applied to the output signalling chan nel UPC contracts can be displayed using conf upc show N A indicates that the output signalling channel is not tied to any UPC index To list ATM i
104. number of LECs that can be created on a switch is 16 Enter the following This command only allows you to create an E gt instance of a LEC on a switch To create a LEC on a host you must use the ForeRunner VLAN Manager or use an ForeRunner adapter Refer to the respective user s manual for more information O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY You can only create an Ethernet LEC on a switch NOTES To create a Token Ring LEC you must use a ForeRunner PC adapter Refer to your respective PC adapter user s manual for more information myswitch configuration lane lec gt new lt LEC Selector byte HEX gt lt ELAN name gt ip lt IP Address gt mask lt IP netmask gt wellknown manual manual mode options lecs lt LECS address gt or les lt LES address gt The parameters for new are defined as follows Parameter Description LEC Selector byte HEX The 20th byte of the ATM address of the LEC entered in hexadecimal format Use the conf atmarp getnsap command to display the entire ATM address ELAN name The name of the ELAN that this LEC is joining ip lt IP Address gt The IP address for this el interface By entering this information here you will not have to bring up the LEC s el interface separately using conf ip admin lt interface gt up mask lt IP netmask gt The optional subnet mask for this el interface that shows the significant part of the address It should be ent
105. occurred on the switch LastEvent Shows how long ago this trap last occurred The first occurrence is always transmitted After that transmissions are determined by the threshold and time period 1 288 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands You can also display information about an individual trap as follows myswitch configuration snmp trap log gt show lt index gt variables myswitch configuration snmp trap log gt show 11 Index Trap Xmits LastXmit Events LastEvent TI asxSpansUp 1 2 days 20 59 T 2 days 20 59 To display even more details about a trap occurrence including the specific port number on which these traps occurred use the variables option as follows gt Sa myswitch configuration snmp trap log show variables 3 o No Trap Variables for LogIndex 1 Trap trap warmStart 3 eS LogIndex 2 Trap asxLinkDown a Variable Value 7 PA GA ae ae INI A ER Ea RE EE I ee I EDAD SOE 5 hwPortName 1B3 hwPortBoard 0 hwPortModule 1 hwPortNumber 2 LogIndex 3 Trap asxSonetLOSDetected Variable Value hwPortName 1B3 hwPortBoard 0 hwPortModule 1 hwPortNumber 2 LogIndex 4 Trap asxLinkDown Variable Value Press return for more q to quit q 1 17 4 2 2 Configuring the Trap Log Threshold These commands let you configure the SNMP trap log threshold You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the threshold level myswitch configu
106. on when the threshold number is reached sig nalling congestion for this port and priority EFCI Off The value at which the EFCI is cleared turned off when the threshold number is reached gt indicating no congestion for port and priority o QO Qsize The reserved queue size for this port and priority S o CDV The maximum cell delay variation for this port and priority specified in microseconds 3 oy as o 8 3 This command also lets you display port and priority traffic information for an individual port on a Series C network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port traffic gt show lt port gt myswitch configuration port traffic show 1A3 CLP EFCI EFCI Port Prio Thrsh On Off QSize CDV 1A3 ABR UBR 55 64 1 55 N A 1A3 VBR 5 5 N A N A 55 4 1A3 CBR 55 N A N A 55 2 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 237 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 2 Configuring Port Traffic on Series LC Network Modules These commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on an individ ual port on a Series LC network module on the switch You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the 1c level myswitch configuration port traffic lc gt clpl qsize show 1 12 22 2 1 Setting the CLP Threshold on a Series LC Network Module This command lets you designate the C
107. oscillator on that network module If the port is listed as 3B down then this network module has been removed Status Shows if the timing source is available or not 1 88 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 4 6 Revertive Timing Configuration These commands allow you to enable or to disable revertive switching or to configure the length of the delay between the time that the failed primary clock is restored and the time that the TCM is told to switch back to the primary clock again You can get to this level by entering revertive at the timing level myswitch configuration cec timing gt revertive delay disable enable Revertive timing is only available when the gt mode is configured to be automatic under conf timing mode 1 5 4 6 1 Configuring the Revertive Timing Delay When revertive timing is enabled and the primary clock fails the TCM is told of the failure and is instructed to switch to the timing source that is configured as the secondary clock To ensure that the primary source is good when it returns this command lets you configure the amount of time in whole seconds between the time that the primary clock is restored and the time that the TCM is told to switch back to the primary clock again Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec timing revertive gt delay lt seconds gt The parameter for configuring is defined as follows Parameter Descript
108. port el gt timing lt port gt network internal These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the line length is to be changed The transmit clock for this port network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port network internal O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY 1 12 12 E3 Port Configuration Commands These commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on an E3 network module These commands are available only when an E3 network module is installed in the switch fabric To list the available subcommands type at the e3 level myswitch configuration port gt e3 emptycells loopback mode scrambling show timing AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 207 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 12 1 Configuring E3 Port Empty Cells Empty cells are cells that are sent as filler or place holders when there is no real data to send By sending these cells network modules that are synchronous in nature can keep an even flow of traffic moving so that distributed timing can work properly This command lets you change the type of cells sent as empty cells on an E3 network module port Enter the following myswitch configuration port e3 gt
109. remote host to which the switch s system message logs are sent 3 facility The user assigned name that identifies the facility this switch sends syslogs on The default is daemon Other valid values are local0 through loca17 The names may be assigned in any order For example to have a host with the address 192 88 243 118 be the recipient of the system log messages and to designate this switch s facility name as 1oca12 enter the following myswitch configuration system syslog gt set 192 88 243 118 local2 Remote Syslog Host 192 88 243 118 Syslog Facility is now local2 To assign the facility for other switches in your network you must log in to each one locally and set the facility You must keep track of which facility was assigned to each switch Then when you view the contents of the syslog file they can be separated according to facility when messages from different facilities are logged on the same remote host If the switch panics the panic file is ma automatically written to the syslog provided that a syslog host had been set prior to the panic This is especially useful if multiple panics occur so that each is recorded AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 339 AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 5 3 Deleting the Address of the System Log Host This command allows you to delete the address of the host to which the switch s system mes sages are being logged Enter the following parameters This
110. resulted in FI PNNI routing going down In ForeThought 5 0 x software the SPANS signalling channel VCI 15 is deleted on a path only when both SPANS and FI PNNI are deleted on it Therefore even if SPANS is deleted as long as FI PNNI is active the SPANS signalling chan nel is kept alive by sending and receiving SPANS status messages on it So FI PNNI could remain active even if SPANS is deleted The SPANS module on the other side of the link is not aware of SPANS going down on the link because it still keeps receiving status messages on it The SPANS topology will have only one E gt unidirectional link from the switch on which SPANS is deleted to the switch on which SPANS is active The other unidirectional link does not exist Therefore no one will be able to ping the switch on which SPANS is deleted 1 292 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 18 2 Creating a SPANS Signalling Path This command allows you to create a SPANS signalling path Before a SPANS signalling path can be created on E gt a given VPI an originating and a terminating path must exist for that same VPI Enter the following parameters gt myswitch configuration spans gt new lt port gt lt vpi gt edvt lt cdvt gt tag drop 9 Q advanced options 3 El sig lt vci gt els lt vci gt aal 4 5 auto ng sigbw lt Kbps gt clsupe lt index gt F S minvci lt vci gt maxvci l
111. service on this port are subjected to partial packet policing svcOn svcOn means all SVCs of the specified class of service on this port are subjected to partial packet policing PVCs are policed based on their UPC contract This is the default svcOff svcOff means no SVCs of the specified class of service on this port are subjected to par tial packet policing PVCs are policed based on their UPC contract For example to enable partial packet policing on all VBR SVCs on port 2B4 enter the follow ing parameters myswitch configuration port gt pppolicing 2b4 vbr svcOn AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 219 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 18 Showing the Port Configuration This command lets you display port information about all of the ports on an individual switch fabric or about just a specified port To show general information about all of the ports enter the following myswitch configuration port gt show Port Carrier Admin Mbps ATM Rate CDVT Policing VBROB BuffOB AIS RDI Model 1D1 no up 155 0 149 8 250 enabled 100 100 disabled 0C3 1D2 no up 155 0 149 8 250 enabled 100 100 disabled 0C3 1D3 no up 155 0 149 8 250 enabled 100 100 disabled 0C3 1D4 yes up T550 149 8 250 enabled 100 100 disabled OC3 1CTL yes up 80 0 80 0 5000 enabled N A N A disabled ASX CTL Note ATM OAM processing is disabled The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description
112. show NSAP address Mask Port VPI Cost CBR VBR FLAGS Mbs Mbs 47000580ffe1000000f21511f200204810046400 152 1c2 0 200 20 0 30 0 A 47000580ffe1000000f21511f20020481ee00000 144 1c3 0 100 70 0 60 0 AE 47000580ffe1000000f21511f20020481ff00000 144 1c1 0 100 INF INF AE 47000580ffe1000000f21511f20020481ff12300 152 1c3 0 100 INF INF The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description NSAP address Shows the 20 byte address for which the static route is configured Mask The bit mask indicating number of high order bits to use for routing purposes The default mask for a static route to a host is 152 and the default mask for a static route to another switch is 104 Port The port number on which the NSAP route exists VPI The number of the virtual path on which the NSAP static route exists Cost The routing metric for this link There is a cost for each link in a route The sum of these costs determines the overall cost of a route To expedite traffic on a route try to minimize the overall cost of a route A small cost value is assigned to a critical route while a higher cost value is assigned to a lesser important route The default is 100 CBR The maximum CBR capacity allowed for any single connection on this route INF means that you did not specify a value for this parameter when the route was created so the value defaults to the capacity available on the outgoing link VBR The maximum VBR capacity allow
113. source use the conf timing references com mand to display all of the possible clocking references their specific sources and whether or not they are actually available for you to use The freerun oscillator is not listed there because it is always available uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 87 AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 4 5 Displaying Timing References This commands lets you display all of the possible timing references from the switch Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec timing gt references Reference Source Status fabric 1 primary 1A available fabric 1 secondary 1B2 available fabric 2 primary 2A available fabric 2 secondary 2B2 available fabric 3 primary 3A available fabric 3 secondary 3B2 available fabric 4 primary 4A available fabric 4 secondary 4B2 available tom X BITS1 available tem Y BITS2 unavailable The fields in this display are defined as follows Fields Description Reference Shows the name of the timing reference Source Shows from which network module port or BITS clock the timing is being derived for this fabric or TCM If the port is listed in regular BNP notation e g 3B2 this indicates the exported timing source from this port If the port is listed as 3B no timing then this net work module does not support distributed timing If the port is listed as 3B OSC this indi cates the timing source is the crystal
114. tempSensorOverTemp inactive disabled enabled linkFailed inactive enabled disabled spansFailed active enabled disabled netmodRemovedHighPrio inactive disabled disabled netmodRemovedLowPrio inactive disabled disabled Major alarm relay status off Minor alarm relay status on AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 5 AMI Configuration Commands 1 1 5 Network Module Alarm Commands These commands used in conjunction with the conf alarm enable and disable com mands allow you to configure alarms that notify you of the physical removal of a network module from a particular slot in the switch fabric You can display the list of available subcom mands by typing module at the alarms level myswitch configuration alarms gt module show assign 1 1 5 1 Displaying the Network Module Alarm Configuration This command lets you display the current configuration of the network module alarms Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration alarms module gt show NetmodSlot NetmodPrio NetmodStatus none present B high present C low present D none absent The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description NetmodSlot The network module slot in the switch fabric NetmodPrio The priority assigned to this slot Can be none high or low high means that the net modRemovedHighPrio alarm is activated when a network module is removed from that slot low means that the netmodRemovedLowP rio
115. the EFCI threshold is to be set on off on means the EFCI is set when the threshold number is reached signalling congestion off means the EFCI is cleared when the threshold number is reached indicating no con gestion number of cells The number of cells over which the UBR and ABR cells will have EFCI set The default is 64 cells AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 235 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 1 4 Configuring Port Queue Size on a Series C Network Module This command enables you to designate the minimum queue size for a given type of traffic on a specified port on a Series C network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port traffic c gt qsize lt port gt CBR VBR ABR lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the minimum queue size is to be set CBR VBR ABR Specifies for which type of traffic CBR VBR or ABR UBR to set the minimum queue size number of cells The queue size to be assigned to the traffic designated in the previous parameter The default is 256 cells 1 The Series C network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release 2
116. the physical cable is greater than 655 ft Lt110A Use if the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft 110 220A Use if the physical cable is between 110 and 220 ft 220 330A Use if the physical cable is between 220 and 330 ft 330 440A Use if the physical cable is between 330 and 440 ft 440 550A Use if the physical cable is between 440 and 550 ft 550 660A Use if the physical cable is between 550 and 660 ft Gt655A Use if the physical cable is greater than 655 ft 1 The DS1 network module is designed to meet all applicable requirements up to 655 feet of cable Operation with cables greater than 655 feet in length is not guaranteed 1 192 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 9 3 Configuring DS1 Port Loopback This command lets you designate the type of loopback on a port on a DS1 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port dsl gt loopback lt port gt line payload diag none These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the loopback mode is to be changed line payload diag none Line connects the transmitter to the receiver The data stream received from the line is retransmitted out to the line Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over the line Payload means the DS1 stream received from the network has the DS1 overhead bits re inserted and is retransmi
117. the pools level myswitch configuration switch pools gt pp pmp show AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 321 fo 3 3 D 5 2 O uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 2 1 Configuring the Pool for Point to Point Calls This command lets you reserve memory for a specific number of total point to point calls for this switch Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration switch pools gt pp no of point to point calls5 This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description no of point to point calls The number of point to point calls you want to pre allocate for this switch The default is 256 calls for an SCP that has 16 MB of DRAM The default is 512 calls for an SCP that has 32 MB of DRAM The default is 1 024 calls for an SCP that has 64 MB of DRAM The SVC part of SPVC connections uses the pool E gt resources for point to point calls 1 20 2 2 Configuring the Pool for Point to Multipoint Calls This command lets you reserve memory for a specific number of total point to multipoint calls for this switch Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration switch pools gt pmp xno of point to multipoint calls5 This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description no of point to multipoint The number of point to multipoint calls you want to pre allocate for this switch The calls default is 8 calls for an SCP that has 16 MB of DRAM
118. to be managed Valid interfaces are ie0 and asx0 address up brings the designated interface on line down takes the interface off line If you enter conf ip admin el all down you can bring down all of the e1 interfaces at once Simi larly entering conf ip admin el a11 up brings up all of the e1 interfaces at once 1 The switch s local interface 100 must always be up to allow AMI to run on the switch 1 8 3 Configuring the IP Broadcast Address This command allows you to modify the broadcast address for an IP interface Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration ip gt broadcast lt interface gt 0 1 These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description interface The name of the IP interface to be managed Valid interfaces are ie0 asx0 and any of the el interfaces 011 The IP broadcast type for this interface This is the host portion of the IP address that is used for routing 1 causes the host portion of the IP address to be set to all 1s 0 causes the host portion of the IP address to be set to all Os 1 104 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 8 4 Configuring IP Forwarding This command allows you to turn IP forwarding on or off If IP forwarding is turned off the switch will not forward i e route IP packets from one IP interface to another IP interface It is generally not necessary to turn IP forwarding off except fo
119. type at the e1 level myswitch configuration port gt el emptycells length loopback mode scrambling show timing 1 12 11 1 Configuring E1 Port Empty Cells Empty cells are cells that are sent as filler or place holders when there is no real data to send By sending these cells network modules that are synchronous in nature can keep an even flow of traffic moving so that distributed timing can work properly This command lets you change the type of cells sent as empty cells on an El network module port Enter the following myswitch configuration port el gt emptycells lt port gt idle unassigned These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the type of empty cells is to be changed idle unassigned The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned The default is idle 1 Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting 1 202 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 11 2 Configuring E1 Port Line Length This command lets you change the line length of an E1 port to correspond to the physical cable attached to that port This allows the E1 network module to
120. uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration spvc pnni parameters reroute gt threshold lt percent gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description The minimum percentage improvement in the cost that the new SPVC path must have over the current SPVC path before a reroute is performed The default value is 50 percent The range of valid values is 1 to 99 inclusive threshold lt percent gt 1 309 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 19 2 4 Displaying PNNI SPVC Information This command allows you to display all of the PNNI SPVCs that originate and terminate on an individual switch fabric By entering show you can list the various ways of displaying PNNI SPVC information as follows myswitch configuration spvc pnni gt show usage show lt spvcid gt orig term advanced These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description show By entering show with no arguments basic information is displayed for all originating and terminating PNNI SPVCs associated with this switch spvcid By entering show with a specific lt spvcid gt lists basic information for only that PNNI SPVC orig By entering show with orig basic information is displayed for all originating PNNI SPVCs associated with this switch term By entering show with term basic information is displayed for all terminating PNNI SPVCs associated with t
121. whether the CES connection is enabled up or disabled down Input Port The incoming port on which the CES connection exists Timeslots Indicates which timeslots 1 24 for DS1 1 31 for E1 are configured for the input port a11 indicates unstructured service Input VPI The incoming VPI value of the connection Input VCI The incoming VCI value of the connection Type The type of ATM connection i e PVC or SPVC that is associated with the CES connec tion Output Port The outgoing port on which the CES connection exists Timeslots Indicates which timeslots 1 24 for DS1 1 31 for E1 are configured for the output port all indicates unstructured service Output VPI The outgoing VPI value of the connection Output VCI The outgoing VCI value of the connection To display the advanced settings of the current CES connections enter the following myswitch configuration ces gt show advanced Searching For CES ports Service Clock Partial Max Integ Service MapVPI MapVCI Type Mode Cas Fill BufSize CDVT Period 2024 0 129 structured synch basic 0 256 900 2500 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 97 AMI Configuration Commands The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description CES Service The identification number assigned by the switch of this CES connection MapVPI The incoming VPI value of the connection MapVCI The incoming VCI value of the connection Service Type Shows if t
122. you override OAM cell transmission and reception on all ports on that switch board See Section 1 12 3 for more information about the conf port aisrdi command This command is useful if an errant node that is attached to one of the ports on your switch board is flooding your board with too many OAM cells When conf board oam disable is entered the port level settings are still retained but OAM cell processing ceases on all ports on that board When conf board oam enable is entered all ports on that board use their last port level settings again so OAM cell processing starts again only on the ports on which it was last enabled z 89 myswitch configuration board gt oam lt board gt enable disable 3 EI DE sc f 25 These parameters are defined as follows Ko 3 Parameter Description board The number of the board on which OAM cell processing is being configured Can be 1 2 3 or 4 for an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 with 1 being the leftmost slot On all other switches this number is always 1 because there is only one board in those switches enable disable Entering enable returns all ports on this board to their last port level settings for OAM cell processing before this functionality was disabled Entering disable causes OAM cell processing to stop on all ports on this board despite the conf port aisrdi settings These settings are still retained The default is disable All switches respond to OAM end to e
123. you to change the state of a network module up or down This com mand should only be used when you want to test the network module Enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration module gt admin lt module gt up down These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module that is to be started or stopped up down up brings that network module back on line down causes the designated network module to be be taken off line temporarily so that it can be tested When the conf module admin lt module gt down command is entered a warning message is displayed as follows myswitch configuration module gt admin 2B down Disabling the network module will destroy all existing connections going through it Disable the network module n Entering n or pressing lt ENTER gt aborts the command Entering y tears down all of the exist ing connections and temporarily places the network module out of service To place the module back into service use the command conf module admin lt module gt up At that point PVCs that are stored in the configuration database are re established and SVCs are dynamically re established AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 141 AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 2 Resetting a Network Module This command is the software equivalent of removing and immediately re inserting a netw
124. 01 Control Direct VCC 0 719 LEC 3 at 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2 02 non proxy 06 20 48 10 13 f2 gt 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2 02 Control Direct VCC 0 721 LEC 4 at 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481a341a 00 non proxy 00 20 48 1a 34 1la gt 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481a341a 00 Control Direct VCC 0 724 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description ELAN Name The names of any ELANS associated with this switch LES When DLE is configured the first ATM address displayed is the LES unicast address that is used by the other DLE peer servers to connect to this server The second is the LES any cast address that is used by LECs to connect to the ELAN All DLE peer servers in an ELAN must use the same anycast address The Point to Multipoint VCC to Peers is the VCC on which packets are transmitted by this LES when they are flooded to all of the DLE peer servers When DLE is not configured only the single ATM address of the LES that services this particular ELAN is displayed BUS The ATM address of the BUS that services the LECs that are directly connected to this DLE peer server AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 139 AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Peer 1 The address of one of the DLE peer servers This is the address at which the LES tr
125. 096 1024 24576 1 more mcast 3 EI 7 256Kx64 64Kx32 4096 1024 32768 2 more mcast DE 8 512Kx64 64Kx32 4096 1024 65536 2 more mcast 25 3 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Model The shared memory model for this configuration This is the number to enter for the lt mode1 gt parameter when using the conf module traffic le setmodel command Cell Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports in units of 64 bit words x64 Table Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports in units of 32 bit words x32 Ucasts The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memory configu ration Mcasts The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to the net work module by this shared memory configuration Cells The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration Counters The number of per connection counters that is supported by this shared memory configu ration 0 means there are no per connection counters 1 means there are per connection counters for cells transmitted and for cells lost 2 means there are per connection counters for cells transmitted for cells lost for intentional cells lost and for unintentional cells lost Name The identifier for this shared memory model 1 For proper operation all Series LE network modules in a switch must use memory models th
126. 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3596 0020481a3596 f0 BUS 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3596 0020481a3596 f 0 Co Located LEC Information Admin Oper Index Status Status Sel Mode MACaddress IfName ELAN 1 up down 0x00 wellknown 0620481a3596 e10 default LECS 0x47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00a03e000001 00 LES 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description LECS Information Index The unique index number of the LECS that identifies it from other LECSs This number is dynamically assigned by the switch when the LECS is created AdminStatus Reflects any changes that you have made to the status of the LECS up means you have started the LECS down means you have stopped the LECS OperStatus Reflects the actual current status of the LECS up means the LECS is currently active down means the LECS is currently inactive Selector The selector byte portion 20th byte of the ATM address in hexadecimal format of the switch that is running the LECS WKA The state of the well known address for this particular LECS atm forum means the LECS is using the default address as defined by the ATM Forum This is the default value none means the well known address has been disabled other means the well known address has been redefined in which case the new address appears on the following line Database The full path to the location and name of th
127. 1 244 1 12 22 4 1 Configuring Alternate CLP Thresholds on a Series D Network Module 1 244 1 12 22 4 2 Configuring the CLP Threshold on a Series D Network Module 0 20 eee aes 1 245 1 12 22 4 3 Configuring Port Queue Size on a Series D Network Module 0 e0 eee eae 1 245 1 12 22 4 4 Configuring the Rate Limit on a Series D Network Module aa 1 246 1 12 22 4 5 Scheduling Port Traffic on a Series D Network Module 0020 eee eae 1 247 1 12 22 4 6 Displaying Port Traffic on a Series D Network Module 0 20 cee eae 1 248 1 12 23 UBR Tagging Command 2 00 e eee eee 1 251 1 12 24 VBRBuffOB Port Configuration Commands 1 252 1 12 25 VBROB Port Configuration Commands 0 000 1 253 1 13 QOS Expansion Table Commands 0 00 0c eee e eee eee 1 254 1 13 1 Deleting a QOS Expansion Table Entry 00 1 254 1 13 2 Creating a QOS Expansion Table Entry a 1 255 1 13 3 Displaying the QOS Expansion Table a 1 256 1 14 QOS Extension Table Commands 2 eee ene 1 257 1 14 1 Deleting a QOS Extension Table Entry 000 1 257 1 14 2 Modifying a QOS Extension Table Entry 0 1 257 1 14 3 Creating a QOS Extension Table Entry 00 1 257 1 14 4 Displaying the QOS Extension Table 2 0005 1 258 1 15 Serial Port C
128. 1 A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port but it does not guarantee the signal is the proper frequency 2 Please refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting 1 200 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 10 8 Configuring DS3 Port Timing This command lets you change the timing source on a port on a DS3 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port ds3 gt timing lt port gt network internal These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the line length is to be changed The transmit clock for this port network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port network internal O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonein6iju09 INY 1 201 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 11 E1 Port Configuration Commands These commands allow you to modify the configuration of the ports on an El network mod ule These commands are available only when an E1 network module is installed in the switch fabric To display the list of available subcommands
129. 100 0000 f21b 19al 104 C2 0 If no DTLs exist the following is displayed myswitch configuration nsap dtl gt show No DTLs available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 23 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 3 Configuring the FORE Area This command lets you set the value of the FORE Area ID Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt forearea lt forearea gt The switch cautions you that a reboot is necessary It asks if you want to continue with the change in case you made a mistake To abort the change type n or press lt ENTER gt No change will be made To continue with the change type y If you type y you will be asked if you want to reboot the switch You must reboot the switch for this change to take effect so type y or press lt ENTER gt This change requires a reboot to prevent any potential routing problem Do you want to continue with the change n y Reboot the switch y y This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description forearea The ID of the area in the FORE hierarchy to which this ForeThought PNNI node belongs This can be a value between 1 and 127 The default is 4 1 3 3 4 Configuring the FORE Level This command lets you set the value of the FORE Level Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt forelevel lt forelevel gt The switch cautions you
130. 12 14 4 Showing J2 Port Configuration 0 004 1 214 TOC 8 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 12 14 5 Configuring J2 Port Timing 1 215 1 12 15 LED Port Configuration Commands 20 0000 000s 1 216 1 12 15 1 LED Model Configuration 020000 eae 1 216 1 12 15 2 Displaying the LED Model Configuration 1 217 1 12 16 Port Policing Configuration Command aaas anaua 1 218 1 12 17 Partial Packet Policing Command eee eeee 1 219 1 12 18 Showing the Port Configuration 000 e ee eee 1 220 1 12 19 SONET Port Configuration Commands 00005 1 224 1 12 19 1 Configuring SONET Port Empty Cells 1 224 1 12 19 2 Configuring SONET Port Loopback 1 225 1 12 19 3 Configuring SONET Port Mode 2 1 225 1 12 19 4 Configuring the SONET Port Scrambling 1 226 1 12 19 5 Showing the SONET Port Configuration 1 226 1 12 19 6 Configuring SONET Port Timing 1 229 1 12 20 TAXI Port Configuration Commands eee 1 230 1 12 20 1 Configuring TAXI Port Loopback 04 1 230 1 12 20 2 Showing the TAXI Port Configuration 1 231 1 12 21 TP25 Port Configuration Commands aa anaana 1 231 1 12 21 1 Configuring the TP25 Port Loopback 1 232 1 12 21 2 Showing the TP25 Port Configuration 1
131. 12 4096 16352 8 16K cells DSn En 4 512Kx32 256Kx32 12288 1024 4096 32736 8 32K cells 0C 12 5 512Kx32 256Kx32 12288 1024 4096 32736 8 32K cells OC 3 6 512Kx32 256Kx32 10240 512 4096 32736 8 32K cells DSn En The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Model The shared memory model for this configuration This is the number to enter for the lt mode1 gt parameter when using the conf module traffic d setmodel command Cell Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports in units of 32 bit words x32 Table Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports in units of 32 bit words x32 Ucasts The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memory configuration Mcasts The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to the network module by this shared memory configuration MOuts The number of output multicast connections supported from the network module to the link for this shared memory model Any multicast connection can have multiple outputs on the same network module or the same port If one multicast connection has four outputs it requires 1 mcast and 4 mouts Cells The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration Counters The number of per connection counters that is supported by this shared memory configuration The counters are 1 Transmit CLP 0 counter 2 Transmit CL
132. 1C1 0 port port 1C2 0 port port 1 C3 0 port port 1C4 0 port port 1CTE 0 N A N A The fields in the advanced display are defined as follows Field Description Input Port The incoming port number of the vpt Shows originate if it is an originating path Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Output Port The outgoing port number of the vpt Shows terminate if it is a terminating path Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number Shape Indicates whether or not traffic shaping has been enabled for this originating vpt VBROB The bandwidth overbooking level assigned to this vpt specified as a percentage The default is 100 which means that no overbooking has been defined Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 denote overbooking port means this is an elastic path Since elastic paths derive their overbooking factors from their parent ports use conf port show to display the overbooking value BuffOB The buffer overbooking level assigned to this vpt specified as a percentage The default is 100 which means that no overbooking has been defined Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 denote overbooking port means this is an elastic path Since elastic paths derive their overbooking factors from their parent ports use conf port show to display the overbooking value 1 390 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 27
133. 256 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Module The network module that has been configured Cell Memory The size of this shared memory cell RAM configuration x32 Model The shared memory model used for this network module See conf module traffic d models for more information EPD The AAL5 packet drop threshold for CBR VBR and ABR traffic on this network module in cells UBR EPD The AAL5 packet drop threshold for UBR traffic on this network module in cells EFCI On The threshold value at which the EFCI bit will be set turned on signalling congestion for all traffic in cells EFCI Off The threshold value at which the EFCI bit will be cleared turned off indicating no con gestion for all traffic in cells AAL5 PktCnt enable means the network module counts the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs disable means the network module does not count the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs The default is disable AltVC Threshold CLP0 1 The alternate threshold at which cells are dropped regardless of their CLP bit when the current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold This threshold is used instead of the VC CLP0 1 threshold if the conf port traffic d altclpconfig com mand is applied or if it is enabled using the A1tCLP option under conf upc new AltVC Threshold CLP1 The alternate threshold at which cells that are CLP 1 are dropped when the current cell count for a connection is greater t
134. 344 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 5 5 3 Changing and Displaying the SNMP Auditing State This command allows you to enable or disable the logging of all of the changes that occur on a switch via SNMP SETs You can also configure with which priority level tag all of those changes will be logged Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration system syslog audit gt snmp usage emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug off These parameters are defined as follows gt Parameter Description o e emerg Indicates you are enabling the logging of all SNMP changes to syslog with a priority level S Q tag of emerg 7a ER alert Indicates you are enabling the logging of all SNMP changes to syslog with a priority levell ff tag of alert Os S crit Indicates you are enabling the logging of all SNMP changes to syslog with a priority level tag of crit err Indicates you are enabling the logging of all SNMP changes to syslog with a priority level tag of err warning Indicates you are enabling the logging of all SNMP changes to syslog with a priority level tag of warning notice Indicates you are enabling the logging of all SNMP changes to syslog with a priority level tag of notice info Indicates you are enabling the logging of all SNMP changes to syslog with a priority level tag of info debug Indicates you are enab
135. 4 2 Displaying QoS Extension Information for VPTs To display QoS extension parameter information about VPTs enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vpt gt show qosext Type Port VPI Cbr RtVbr NrtVbr Abr Ubr term 1C1 0 1 1 1 9 9 term 1C3 0 5 5 5 9 9 term 1C4 0 3 3 3 9 9 orig 1C1 0 1 1 1 1 1 orig 1C3 0 4 4 4 4 4 gt orig 1C4 0 2 2 2 2 2 O o O 3S The fields in the qosext display are defined as follows 3 a E Field Description os 0 Type Shows if this is an originating or a terminating path Port The port number VPI The virtual path number Cbr Shows the path QoS metric information for CBR service RtVbr Shows the path QoS metric information for RtVBR service NrtVbr Shows the path QoS metric information for NrtVBR service Abr Shows the path QoS metric information for ABR service Ubr Shows the path QoS metric information for UBR service AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 391 AMI Configuration Commands 1 392 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Index A ACR Available Cell Rate 1 30 AIS Alarm Indication Signal 1 178 Alarm Indication Signal AIS 1 178 alarm relay configuring on the CEC Plus 1 71 displaying on the CEC Plus 1 71 setting on the CEC Plus 1 71 alarms disabling 0 1 4 disabling on the CEC Plus 1 69 displaying 0 1 2 displayin
136. 4 hcs ESF none internal N A off Lt110 unassigned The fields in this display are defined as follows So Field Description S o 3 Port The port numbers of each E3 network module currently installed in the switch fabric 3 G sc Carrier yes means a carrier has been detected on this port no means a carrier has not been 3 S detected o 3 Stat The DS1 line status of the port Mode plcp means that the port uses PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol framing for cell delineation hes means the port uses HCS Header Check Sequence cell delineation Framing The type of framing used for the port The type of circuit affects the number of bits per sec ond that the circuit can reasonably carry as well as the interpretation of the usage and error statistics This is a read only field Loopback The loopback mode on the port Can be none line payload or diagnostic Timing The transmit clock for this port network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port PRBS on means that PRBS is enabled on this port and the Pseudo Random Bit Sequence Gener ator PRSG will provide an unframed 2415 1 test sequence as defined in Recommenda tion O 151 off means that PRBS is disabled on this port Scram on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port off
137. 4 means the connection is destined for switch board in slot 4 2E4 then becomes the input port in the second line In the first line in the second pair notice that the output port is 4E2 This is the intra fabric port The 4 means the connection is coming out of the switch board in slot 4 through the intra fabric port The E represents the intra fabric port The 2 means the connection is destined for switch board in slot 2 4E2 then becomes the input port in the second line 1 376 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 25 3 Displaying the Virtual Channel Configuration This command allows you to display existing virtual channels You can display either all of the existing virtual channels on an individual switch fabric or all of the existing virtual chan nels on a specific port To list all of the existing permanent virtual channels on an individual switch fabric enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vcc gt show Input Output Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI UPC Protocol Name 3B1 0 5 3GCTE O 49 0 uni N A z 3B1 0 4 3CTL 0 48 0 spans N A e o e 3B1 0 5 3CTL 0 47 spans N A 3 Q j EBE 3B1 0 6 3CTL 0 50 uni N A HG 3B1 0 100 3B4 0 100 0 pve N A S 3B2 0 5 3CTL 0 53 0 uni N A 3B2 0 4 3CTL 0 52 0 spans N A 3 3B2 0 5 3CTL 0 51 spans N A 3B2 0 6 3CTL 0 54 uni N A 3B2 0 145 3B3 0 145 0 pvc customer_a 3B3 0 5 3CTL 0 5 7 0 uni N A Press return for mo
138. 428 If you enter an SPVC ID that does not exist the following error message is returned myswitch configuration spvc pnni gt delete 16451 ERROR SNMP the specified value is invalid 1 302 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 19 2 2 Creating a PNNI SPVC This command lets you create a PNNI SPVC Enter the following parameters You do not need to open a session to the ma destination switch to create a PNNI SPVC because all PNNI SPVCs are bidirectional myswitch configurat spvc pnni gt new lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt destnsap destprefix destport gt spvcid lt index gt domainid lt id gt name lt name gt destvpi lt vpi gt destvci lt vci gt reroute enable disable fupe lt index gt bupe lt index gt advanced options ftpnniDtl lt index gt bearerClass X A C clip lt no yes gt QoSExpIndex lt index gt fqos class0 classl class2 class3 class4 bgos class0 class1 class2 class3 class4 Note lt destprefix destport gt option can be used only if the destination switch is a FORE switch The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows Parameter Description SPVC ID or spvcid lt index gt The index number assigned to this SPVC to identify it uniquely For PNNI SPVCs the index number may be assigned either by AMI or by the user Valid values are integers between 1 and 6
139. 5535 port The port number on the source local switch fabric vpi The virtual path number on the source local switch fabric vei The virtual channel number on the source local switch fabric destnsap The ATM NSAP address of the destination remote switch for this SPVC destprefix destport The ATM NSAP prefix and the port number of this terminating SPVC at the destination end This option is valid only if the destination switch is a FORE switch domainid lt id gt The PNNI domain ID number on the source local switch fabric name lt name gt An optional name for the user to assign to this PNNI SPVC to help uniquely identify it destvpi lt vpi gt The virtual path number on the destination switch fabric for this PNNISPVC When using this option both the dest vpi and destvci must be specified AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 303 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description destvci lt vci gt The virtual channel number on the destination switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC When using this option both the destvpi and destvci must be specified reroute enable disable enable indicates that this SPVC will be examined periodically to see if it is using a sub optimal route If it is it will be rerouted according to the parameters in conf spvc pnni parameters reroute disable indicates that this SPVC wil
140. 6 no no no no no no no off no no no No code The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The E1 CES port Alarm Indicates whether or not the port is experiencing an alarm condition Rx LOF Indicates whether or not the port is receiving a Loss of Frame LOF signal from the far end Tx LOF Indicates whether or not the port is transmitting a Loss of Frame LOF signal Rx AIS Indicates whether or not the port is receiving an Alarm Indication Signal AIS Tx AIS Indicates whether or not the port is transmitting an Alarm Indication Signal AIS LOF Indicates whether or not the port is experiencing Loss of Frame LOF LOS Indicates whether or not the port is experiencing Loss of Signal LOS Loopback Indicates whether or not the port is in loopback mode TS16 AIS Indicates whether AIS is being received in timeslot 16 FarEndTx TS16LOMF Indicates whether Loss Of Multiframe LOMF is being indicated at the far end in Timeslot 16 NearEndTx TS16LOMF Indicates that the port is experiencing a Loss Of Multiframe LOMF condition in timeslot 16 NearEnd TestCode Indicates that the port is currently transmitting a test pattern AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 187 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 7 5 Configuring E1 CES Port Loopback This command lets you designate the type of loopback on an E1 CES port Enter the following myswitch configuration po
141. 68 resetting via AMI 1 142 Series nisi a lad A a 1 144 Senes 1D want aangal dee iatise 1 158 Series LC BA a kla ata 1 148 Series LE Xa bk kets 1 153 node secret file 2 000 1 271 NSAP address displaying 08 1 11 NSAP addresses registered via ILMI displaying a 1 169 NSAP filtering oonan nannan 1 274 adding a template to a filter 1 274 adding an NSAP filter to an interface 1 283 creating afilter 1 277 creating a template 1 279 deleting a filter 1 275 deleting a filter from an interface 1 283 deleting a template 1 278 deleting a template from a AA ee eee 1 275 displaying interface filters 1 284 displaying the filters 1 277 displaying the templates 1 281 modifying a template 1 279 testing against a filter 1 276 NSAP indication messages 1 28 displaying the interval between aa 1 35 setting the interval between 1 28 NSAP prefix adding sss eee 1 167 Index 7 Index creating se cies cali gies cele s 1 30 deleting 000 1 167 displaying 1 35 1 168 NSAP prefix mask for FT PNNI displaying 0 1 35 NSAP prefix mask for PNNI SOPH Gs kaa estat BARAN 1 34 NSAP to E 164 address mapping adding AAAH APR 1 171 deleting a 1 171
142. 7 0 0 1 7d92 1 pending 1286s Do Li 326 242 2 2 2 4 0 22 2 AUG 28 11 09 50 fishtank SNMP 127 0 0 1 7d92 1 success VB Nal 326 257 622222 4 20 te 2 AUG 28 10 59 21 fishtank SNMP 169 144 87 21 289d98ca 1 bad community sl43r6brl4d lad dala te 2 You can also display the auditing state for SNMP by entering snmp without a as follows myswitch configuration system syslog audit snmp Facility Priority snmp Off 1 346 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 5 5 4 Changing and Displaying the ILMI Auditing State This command allows you to enable or disable the logging of all of the changes that occur on a switch via ILMI You can also configure with which priority level tag all of those changes will be logged Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration system syslog audit gt ilmi emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug off These parameters are defined as follows gt Parameter Description emer Indicates you are enabling the logging of all ILMI changes to syslog with a priority level Q 8 M 5 88mg 5 ystog P y 3 tag of emerg 3 Q alert Indicates you are enabling the logging of all ILMI changes to syslog with a priority level FARES tag of alert og fe crit Indicates you are enabling the logging of all ILMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of crit err
143. 7000580 fe1000000 21a00d00020481a00d00b This example only creates instance number 1 on port 1CTL On an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 you need to specify the board number e g 2CTL You can also use an asterisk as a wildcard character for the port number to register the same LECS address on all existing ports on a switch fabric as follows myswitch configuration nsap registry new lecs 1 47000580ffe1000000f21a00d00020481a00d00b This example creates instance number 1 with the specified address on all existing ports in switch fabric 1 1 174 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Additionally you can use an asterisk as a wildcard character to register the same LECS address on all ports on a specific network module The wildcard character does not apply to the CTL port Enter the in the network module portion of the port number as follows myswitch configuration nsap registry gt new lecs B 1 47000580ffe1000000f21a00d00020481b78210a This example registers the specified address as instance 1 on all ports on network module B The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows gt Parameter Description o o Q port The port number for this ILMI LECS address registry entry 32 3 gt instance A user configurable index number that distinguishes between the LECS addresses when D c multiple LECS addresses are assigned to the same port This number can be from 1
144. A 4CTL ASX CTL N A N A N A The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port number of the network module s currently installed in the switch fabric Type The type of network module it is ASX BP are the intra fabric ports on an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 ASX CTL is the control port rxLED The color of the receive LED for this port Can be off green red yellow or auto auto means that the LED is under hardware control Typically hardware control means that the LED is normally dark with green blinks to indicate data traffic txLED The color of the transmit LED for this port Can be off green red yellow or auto auto means that the LED is under hardware control Typically hardware control means that the LED is normally dark with green blinks to indicate data traffic Model The LED models 1an1 wan1 lan2 or wan2 that has been assigned to this port You can also display the LED models for a single port Enter the following myswitch configuration port led gt show lt port gt myswitch configuration port led gt show 4c3 Port Type rxLED txLED Model 4C3 O0C3 red auto lanl AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 217 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 16 Port Policing Configuration Command This command lets you decide whether or not incoming traffic is GCRA policed on a given port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port gt polic
145. A in paragraph 18 52 227 86 of the NASA Supplement to the FAR or any successor regulations Printed in the USA No part of this work covered by copyright may be reproduced in any form Reproduction adaptation or translation with out prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws This publication is provided by FORE Systems Inc as is without warranty of any kind either express or implied includ ing but not limited to the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose FORE Systems Inc shall not be liable for any errors or omissions which may occur in this publication nor for incidental or conse quential damages of any kind resulting from the furnishing performance or use of this publication Information published here is current or planned as of the date of publication of this document Because we are improving and adding features to our products continuously the information in this document is subject to change without notice RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 October 1988 and FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 The VxWorks software used in the Mini Loader is licensed from Wind River Systems Inc Copyright 1984 1996 FCC CLASS A NOTICE WARNING Changes or mo
146. A1 104 1cTL 0 o Source NSAP Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f215 11f2 002048100464 00 Destination NSAP The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Index The unique index number that identifies this template Action The action to take with addresses that match this template accept means that the call is allowed and reject means that the call is not allowed Name An optional user assigned name that identifies this template Source Port The source port of the call setup message An asterisk is a wild card that matches all ports Source VPI The source virtual path number of the call setup message An asterisk is a wild card that matches all VPIs Source Mask The mask that indicates the significant part of the source NSAP address to be used to find a matching address in the templates of authorized addresses A mask of 0 is a wild card that matches all addresses Destination Port The destination port of the call setup message An asterisk is a wild card that matches all ports Destination VPI The destination virtual path number of the call setup message An asterisk is a wild card that matches all VPIs Destination Mask The mask that indicates the significant part of the destination NSAP address to be used to find a matching address in the templates of authorized addresses A mask of 0 is a wild card that matches all addresses AMI Configurati
147. AC address Indicates the specific entry that is to be flushed from the LANE ARP cache 1 9 3 2 2 Displaying LANE ARP Cache Information This command displays the current LANE ARP cache The MAC address to ATM address mapping information for each LEC is stored here Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lec arp gt show advanced By entering show without the advanced option the basic LANE ARP cache information is displayed as follows myswitch configuration lane lec arp gt show MacAddress AtmAddress ELAN 0020481a00d5 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 00d5 0020481a00d5 0b eng net By entering show with the advanced option more LANE ARP cache information including the VPI VCI combination and any flags associated with this entry is displayed as follows myswitch configuration lane lec arp gt show advanced MacAddress AtmAddress ELAN 0020481a00d5 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 00d5 0020481a00d5 0b eng net vpi 0 vci 82 flags valid If the LANE ARP cache is empty then the following message is displayed No LANE ARP entries are available 1 118 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 3 3 Deleting a LEC This command lets you delete a LEC from an ELAN Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lec gt delete lt LEC index LEC index range x y gt The parameters for delete are defined as follows Parameter Description The uni
148. AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual F O R MANU0265 02 Rev A 12 19 97 SYSTEMS Software Version 5 1 x FORE Systems Inc 1000 FORE Drive Warrendale PA 15086 7502 Phone 412 742 4444 FAX 412 742 7742 http www fore com Legal Notices Copyright 1995 1997 FORE Systems Inc All rights reserved FORE Systems is a registered trademark and ForeRunner ForeRunnerLE ForeThought ForeView PowerHub and CellPath are trademarks of FORE Systems Inc All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders U S Government Restricted Rights If you are licensing the Software on behalf of the U S Government Government the following provisions apply to you If the Software is supplied to the Department of Defense DoD it is classified as Commercial Computer Software under paragraph 252 227 7014 of the DoD Supplement to the Federal Acquisition Regu lations DFARS or any successor regulations and the Government is acquiring only the license rights granted herein the license rights customarily provided to non Government users If the Software is supplied to any unit or agency of the Government other than DoD it is classified as Restricted Computer Software and the Government s rights in the Soft ware are defined in paragraph 52 227 19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations FAR or any successor regulations or in the cases of NAS
149. AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 2 3 Flushing the ATM ARP Cache This command enables you to delete the contents of the ATM ARP cache Only dynamic ARP cache entries are removed The switch asks you to verify that flushing the ARP cache is the desired action Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmarp gt flush Flush the ATM ARP cache n n To cancel the command type n and press lt ENTER gt or simply type lt ENTER gt To flush the ARP cache type y and press lt ENTER gt 1 2 4 Getting the NSAP Address for a Classical IP Interface This command displays the NSAP address of a Classical IP interface Enter the following O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration atmarp gt getnsap lt interface gt qaa0 NSAP address 47000580ffe1000000f21a34450020481a344500 These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description interface The name of the Classical IP interface to be displayed qaa0 qaal qaa2 or qaa3 1 If no interface is specified the NSAP address of qaa0 is displayed 1 2 5 Creating an IP to NSAP Address Mapping This command allows you to create an ATM ARP cache entry mapping a particular IP address to its corresponding NSAP address Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmarp gt mapnsap lt host gt lt NSAPaddress gt lt interface gt These parameters are defined
150. AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 19 2 3 1 1 Setting the PNNI SPVC Pacing Interval This command allows you to change the interval between call setup attempts for SPVCs that are down Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration spvc pnni parameters pacing interval lt seconds gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description interval lt seconds gt The interval in seconds between call setup attempts Values can be from 1 to 300 sec onds The default is 2 seconds 1 19 2 3 1 2 Setting the Number of PNNI SPVC Calls This command lets you configure the number of SPVCs that can be set up at one time during an attempt Enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY myswitch configuration spvc pnni parameters pacing gt number lt count gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description number lt count gt The number of SPVCs which can be set up at one time during an attempt Values can be from 1 to 1000 The default is 20 calls 1 19 2 3 1 3 Displaying the PNNI SPVC Pacing Parameters This command lets you display the parameters that have been set for attempting call setups between down PNNI SPVCs Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration spvc pnni parameters pacing gt show Pacing will setup 20 calls per cycle with 2 seconds between cycles AMI Configurat
151. ANS SPVC CLEAN a ea Aa NAN 1 298 deleting errs sana aaa aag 1 298 SPANS SPVCs displaying 0 1 301 SPVC Smart Permanent Virtual CIPCUIL fee eda elon ee ea 1 298 SPVCs SPANS aan a A tea aes 1 298 Index 12 SRTS Synchronous Residual Time Stamp etwas ck mile atin Meee eS 1 95 static route adding diy cade ine Beas Re 1 31 deleting evi neds Sense 1 31 displaying 0 1 33 switch board displaying configuration of 1 68 switch name changing 006 1 323 displaying 08 1 326 SCLIN aw eves aera ieee SA atts 1 323 switch type displaying 06 1 326 switch uptime displaying 08 1 326 switchclock configuring 00 1 351 displaying 06 1 351 Synchronous Residual Time Stamp SRT S s sees Kai ct Boat ALAGA 1 95 T TAXI network modules displaying configuration of 1 231 loopback a 1 230 TCM displaying the status of 1 79 TCM external inputs displaying a 1 79 TCM hardware version displaying 0 1 79 TCM name displaying 0 1 79 SOLE ices niin dete sent Bice et 1 77 TCM serial port displaying configuration of 1 78 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual TCM slot displaying 06 1 79 TCM software version displaying 006 1 79 TCM timing mode
152. Commands Reference Manual 1 133 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 5 4 Adding a DLE Peer This command lets you add a DLE peer server to the list of DLE peer servers for an existing DLE ELAN without destroying and recreating the existing peers Enter the following myswitch configuration lane les gt peeradd lt LES index gt lt Peer ATM Address gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description LES index The index number of the LES that you want to add to the list of DLE peer servers for a par ticular ELAN This index number is dynamically assigned by the switch when the LES is created It can be found under the Index field using the conf lane les show command Peer lt ATM Address gt The unique ATM address of the DLE peer server you want to add It is through this address that all of the DLE peer servers in a DLE ELAN connect to and communicate with each other When using this command the LES must E gt already exist and the ELAN that it services must be a DLE ELAN The LES is temporarily administered down while it is being added to the list of peers and comes back up once the process is complete Because of this a warning is shown when you issue this command and you are asked if you want to continue For example myswitch configuration lane les gt peeradd 1 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 23c0 0020481a23c0 75 WARNING This command will disa
153. ConType 3B1 0 5r BCTL 0 49 uni N A 3B1 0 14 3CTL 0 48 spans N A 3B1 0 15 SCTE 0 47 spans N A 3B1 0 16 3CTL 0 50 uni N A 3B1 O 100 3B4 0 100 pvc tran tran pp The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example To list all of the existing permanent virtual channels on a specific port path and channel e g port 3B1 VPI0 and VCI 100 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vcc gt show 3B1 0 100 advanced Input Output Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Protocol ConType 3B1 O 100 3B4 0 100 pvc tran tran pp The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example 1 380 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 26 Virtual Path Configuration Commands These commands let you configure virtual paths You can display the list of available subcom mands by typing vpe at the configuration level In ForeThought 4 1 and greater these commands E gt are only used to configure through paths To configure originating or terminating paths you must use the conf vpt commands myswitch configuration gt vpe delete new show O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY 1 26 1 Deleting a Virtual Path This command lets you delete an existing virtual through path Enter the following myswitch configuration vpc gt delete lt iport gt lt ivpi gt lt oport gt lt ovpi gt 1 26 2 Creating a Virtual
154. Disable means that NSAP address to E 164 address mapping does not occur However if you use disable but you are also using the native E 164 address format then the only address conversion performed at this signalling channel is for private NSAP addresses in E 164 format PlanType Shows the plan type used in the calling party number and called party number informa tion elements in the signalling messages By default international is used with the e164 address format This value can be specified for e164 By default unknown is used with the private address format This value cannot be modified for private AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 365 uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands To display public information for all of the signalling channels on a specific port and path for example port 1b2 and VPI 0 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show 1b2 0 public E164Address Port VPI ILMIReg AddressFmt E164Address Resolution PlanType 1B2 0 disable E 164 enable national The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example 1 23 4 6 Displaying IE Filter Information for Signalling Channels To show IE filter information element filter information about all of the signalling channels on a switch fabric enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show iefilter Port VPI 1A1 0 1A2 1 1B4 0 IE
155. Entering n or pressing lt ENTER gt aborts the command Entering y deletes the node 1 48 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 5 3 Creating a PNNI Node This command lets you create a PNNI node The maximum number of nodes that can be created per switch is 2 There can be 2 PNNI nodes or one FI PNNI node and one PNNI node Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni node gt new lt index gt level lt level gt nodeid lt nodeid gt pgid lt pgid gt atmaddr lt atmaddr gt oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 O admin up down uoneinByUuod INY domainname lt domainname gt restrict true false ptsehd lt ptsehd gt hellohd lt hellohd gt hello lt hello gt helloinactf lt helloinactf gt hlinkinact lt hlinkinact gt ptserfr lt ptserfr gt ptselftf lt ptselftf gt rxmt lt rxmt gt avcrpm lt avcrpm gt avcrmt lt avcrmt gt cdvpm lt cdvpm gt ctdpm lt ctdpm gt domain lt domain gt forelevel lt level gt forearea lt area gt AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 49 AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 5 4 Modifying a PNNI Node This command lets you modify a PNNI node Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni node gt modify lt index gt level lt level gt nodeid lt nodeid gt pgid lt pgid gt atmaddr lt atmaddr gt admin up dow
156. Filter CG CGS CDS BHLI BLLI BLLI23 AAL Default Calling Address enabled enabled Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 9999 a0145 7623 131415161718 ee disabled disabled 0z47 0005 80 fe100 9999 c01ld c552 131415161718 00 enabled disabled 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 The fields in the iefilter display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port number of the signalling channel to which the IE filters apply VPI The virtual path number that contains the signalling channel to which the IE filters apply IEFilter Shows whether or not the information element IE filter has been enabled Filters can be applied to the following IEs cg cgs cds blli b11i23 bhli aal enabled means that the IEs listed with a will not be passed to the called party they are filtered and the IEs listed with a will be passed to the called party disabled means that no IEs are filtered all are passed despite the or i e the filtering feature is turned off CG Filters on the address of the call originating entity CGS Filters on the subaddress of the call originating entity CDS Filters on the subaddress of the called party BHLI Filters on the Broadband High Layer Information BHLI which provides compatibility checking by an addressed entity e g a recipient of a call 1 366 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands
157. I domains in a switch be sure to assign each one a different prefix O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY defsum lt enable disable gt Enables or disables the ability to summarize all local addresses into a default 10 byte summary switch prefix and advertise this summary in PNNI as an internal reachable address PTSE and in FI PNNI topology Modifying this parameter does not require a reboot the change takes effect immediately The default value is disable 1 3 2 4 Displaying Domain Information This command allows you to display information about all of the existing domains Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute domain gt show ID Name Defproto Prefix Defsum 1 default ftpnni 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3445 ENABLED The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description ID The index number of this domain Name The user assigned name of this domain Defproto The default routing protocol used on all Network to Network NNI interfaces in the domain ftpnni means ForeThought PNNI is used for this switch in this domain pnni means ATM Forum PNNI is used for this switch in this domain gateway means this switch includes both the PNNI and FT PNNI networks in this domain so that reachability information can be leaked dynamically between peer groups of both types Prefix The address prefix of the domain Defsum Shows if the ability to summarize all l
158. ILMI or that ATM Forum well known address is being used manual means that the specified LECS or LES address is used The default is wellknown MACaddress The Ethernet MAC address for this LEC IfName The el interface name of this LEC ELAN The name of the ELAN to which this LEC belongs LECS The address of the LECS that services the ELAN to which this LEC belongs If the Mode is manual then no LECS address is displayed because the LEC directly connects to the LES If the Mode is wellknown then the LECS address is displayed If the LECS address was discovered via ILMI then that LECS address is displayed otherwise the ATM Forum well known address is displayed LES The anycast address of the LES that services the ELAN to which this LEC belongs 1 When you change the administrative status from down to up it takes a few seconds for the change to occur and to be reflected in the OperStatus field Therefore it is possible for the AdminStatus to be up but the OperStatus to be down If you refresh the display the change has taken place and is reflected here AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 123 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands To display information about a particular LEC that is currently configured on the switch enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lec gt show lt LEC index gt advanced For example to display information about the LEC with
159. If the telephone company finds that this equipment is exceeding tolerable parameters the telephone company can temporarily disconnect service although they will attempt to give you advance notice if possible 5 Under the FCC Rules no customer is authorized to repair this equipment This restriction applies regardless of whether the equipment is in or out of warranty 6 If the telephone company alters their equipment in a manner that will affect use of this device they must give you advance warning so as to give you the opportunity for uninter rupted service You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC CANADIAN IC CS 03 COMPLIANCE STATEMENT NOTICE The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets cer tain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Industry Canada label does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local tele communications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified con nector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may
160. If you type y all registered addresses on that switch fabric with the instance number 2 are deleted Additionally you can use an asterisk as a wildcard character to delete registered addresses from all ports on a specific network module The wildcard character does not apply to the CTL port Enter the in the network module portion of the port number as follows myswitch configuration nsap registry delete lecs C 1 This example deletes all registered addresses on all ports on network module C with instance number 1 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 173 AMI Configuration Commands 1 11 4 3 Adding an ILMI LECS Address Registry Entry This command lets you add an entry or multiple entries to the ILMI LECS address registry A maximum of 4 entries may be configured on each port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration nsap registry gt new lecs lt port gt lt instance gt lt nsap address gt If the switch port you specify is already NOTE a configured with an ATM address with the same instance that you specify the command fails For example you can create a specific instance on a specific port as follows myswitch configuration nsap registry new lecs 1A1 1 47000580ffe1000000f21a00d00020481a00d00b This example only creates instance number 1 on port 1A1 You can also create a specific instance on the control port CTL as follows myswitch configuration nsap registry new lecs 1CTL 1 4
161. Interval NSAP indication messages are those messages that update topology information between any two switches This command lets you set the interval between ForeThought PNNI NSAP indi cation messages Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt nsapindication lt msec gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description nsapindication The period of time between transmissions of NSAP indication messages The default is 10 000 microseconds 1 28 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 10 Setting the ForeThought PNNI Peer Group Mask A peer group mask is the length in the number of bits of the peer group ID of a switch This command enables you to set the ForeThought PNNI peer group mask value This value should be the same for all members of a peer group Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt pgmask lt mask gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description pgmask The mask that gives the number of leading bits in the switch prefix used to aggregate the addresses that belong to this ForeThought PNNI peer group The default is 0 1 The switch software must be restarted for this command to take effect Therefore you must be in a local AMI session to perform this command O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY 1 3 3 11 Selecting the Method
162. L TBO EF tio Cy EERE AE OBR L eRT FYI FVEVa ERE IC RPE ES AZZTCEMHND ETF MIA ERE TELOR AR ELTE V This equipment is in the Class 1 category Information Technology Equipment to be used in commercial and or industrial areas and conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control Council For Interference by Information Technology Equipment aimed at preventing radio interference in commercial and or industrial areas Consequently when used in a residential area or in an adjacent area thereto radio interference may be caused to radios and TV receivers etc Read the instructions for correct handling FCC REQUIREMENTS Notice to Users of DS1 Service The following instructions are provided to ensure compliance with the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules Part 68 1 This device must only be connected to the DS1 network connected behind an FCC Part 68 registered channel service unit Direct connection is not allowed 2 Before connecting your unit you must inform the telephone company of the following information Port ID REN SOC FIC USOC NM 6 DS1C 6 0N 04DU9 BN RJ48C 04DU9 DN NM 2 DS1C 6 0N 04DU9 1ZN and RJ48C 04DU9 1SN 3 If the unit appears to be malfunctioning it should be disconnected from the telephone lines until you learn if your equipment or the telephone line is the source of the trouble If your equipment needs repair it should not be reconnected until it is repaired 4
163. L is given a row number equal to its position in the source route Thus the entry corresponding to the first hop is row 1 the second hop is row 2 and so on Displayed in the Row field under conf atmroute ftpnni dt1 show all Used only with the delete command Indicates that you want to delete all of the entries within a given DTL prefix Indicates the 13 byte NSAP prefix of the node ID of this DTL entry In ForeThought PNNI the node IDs are prefixes that represent both the ID of the node and a summary of reach able addresses mask The subnet mask is the significant part of the prefix when matching an address Gives the length of the above prefix in number of bits Can vary from 0 104 13 bytes port The output port number for the node given by the above node ID This is also the port to which the next node in the DTL if there is one is connected You only need to specify the network module and port numbers not the board number c1 instead of 1c1 vpi The output path number in the above output port This is the signalling path to the peer given by the next node in the DTL new value Used only with the modify command Indicates the actual value that you wish to use for one of the above parameters Can be the new prefix mask port or vpi number 1 22 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 2 4 Displaying DTLs This command lets you displa
164. LANE ARP Cache Information 1 9 3 2 2 Displaying LANE ARP Cache Information 1 9 3 3 Deleting a LEG sea aaa ote wie eee tee bats Kha 1 9 3 4 LEC Default Configuration Mode Commands 1 9 3 4 1 Setting the Default LEC Configuration Mode 1 9 3 4 2 Displaying the Default LEC Configuration 1 9 3 5 Creating an Ethernet LEC 00 00005 1 9 3 6 Displaying LEC Information n n saaana a 1 9 4 LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS Commands 1 9 4 1 Configuring the LECS Administrative Status 1 9 42 Deleting a LECS 0 ee 1 9 43 CreatingaLECS 0 e a E A a a NS 1 9 4 4 Displaying LECS Information n aana a AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Table of Contents 1 9 4 5 Getting the LECS Configuration File 1 130 1 9 5 LAN Emulation Server LES Configuration Commands 1 131 1 9 5 1 Configuring the LES Administrative Status 1 131 1 9 5 2 Deletinga LES airs KNA KAMERA Paine 1 131 1 9 5 3 Creating a LES conc eid beg Kal LU nega ete hed aes 1 132 1 9 5 4 Adding a DLE Peer 0 0 c cee eee 1 134 1 9 5 5 Deleting a DLE Peer a 1 135 1 9 5 6 Enabling Disabling ELAN Access Control 1 136 1 9 5 7 Displaying LES Information uaaa aa anaa 1 137 1 10 Network Module Configuration Commands eens 1 141 1 10 1 Configuring the State of
165. LP 1 threshold at which cells that have been tagged as non conforming are dropped for a given traffic type on a specified port on a Series LC net work module Enter the following parameters myswitch configura port traffic lc gt clpl lt port gt CBR VBR ABR UBR lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the CLP threshold is to be set CBR VBR ABR UBR Specifies for which type of traffic CBR VBR ABR or UBR to set the CLP threshold number of cells The number of cells in the buffer at which the specified traffic type drops CLP 1 cells The default is 256 cells 1 The Series LC network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release 1 238 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 2 2 Configuring Port Queue Size on a Series LC Network Module This command enables you to designate the minimum queue size for a given type of traffic on a specified port on a Series LC network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configur port traffic lc gt qsize lt port gt CBR VBR ABR UBR lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows 1 The Series LC network modules offer an ABR ready ATM inter
166. Locations outside of the time zones listed above must supply the following POSIX standard 1003 1 1988 formula for switching between Daylight Savings Time and Standard Time stdoffset dst offset start time end time The time zones have the following meanings Field Description std and dst Indicates 3 or more bytes that designate standard std or Daylight Savings Time dst Only std is required if dst is omitted then it does not apply in this location Can use uppercase or lowercase letters and any characters except a leading colon digits comma minus plus and ACSII NUL offset Indicates the value to add to local time to equal Greenwich Mean Time offset is of the form hh mm ss Hour hh is required and can be a single digit between 0 and 24 Minutes mm and sec onds ss are optional and are between 0 and 59 Ifno offset follows dst it is assumed to be one hour ahead of std If preceded by a the time zone is east of the Prime Meridian otherwise it is west with an optional start time end time start indicates the date when the change occurs from std to dst end indicates the date when you change back Both start and end are of the form Mm n d d is the d th day 0 lt d lt 6 of week n of month m of the year 1 lt n lt 5 1 lt m lt 12 where week 5 is the last d day in month m which can occur in either the fourth or the fifth week Wee
167. Ls Designated Transit Lists 1 21 dual SCPs configuring autoremove 1 329 configuring autosync 1 330 configuring failover 1 331 configuring switchover 1 333 configuring the controlling SEP ha eae ee oe 1 331 displaying settings 1 332 file synchronization 1 334 resetting the standby SCP 1 332 setting the failover threshold 1 335 E E 164 address mapping from NSAP address 1 356 Plan type sides tocay naaawa 1 356 E 164 address format configuring 1 356 Index 3 Index F1 BITS interface configuring coding 1 83 configuring framing 1 84 configuring output level 1 84 F1 CES network modules CRC4 framing 1 186 displaying information 1 189 line Status sc censored kl ha 1 187 loopback 000 1 188 TSONG mka gees a 1 186 E1 network modules displaying configuration of 1 206 empty cells a 1 202 line length 1 203 loopback 0 00 cee ee 1 204 mode of operation 1 204 scrambling 00008 1 205 TIMING ada pawan Ewan cued nasama 1 207 E3 network modules displaying configuration of 1 210 empty cells a 1 208 loopback or sisnetaeeee ee 1 208 mode of operation 1 209 scrambling 00008 1 209 HMHE aa AS haves aA 1 211 Early Packet Discard EPD
168. MI Configuration Commands If you are using TFIP to perform the login file backup you must first create an empty file in the tftpboot directory on the remote host to receive the file Use the touch command to do this Then use the chmod command to change the permissions of that file so that it will let the switch write the backup login file to that file Perform the following steps to back up your login file 1 First telnet to your remote host and log in 2 Enter the following commands in sequence cd tftpboot touch lt backup file name gt chmod 777 lt backup file name gt 3 Then exit from the telnet session Telnet to the switch and log into AMI 5 Enter the following command conf security login backup lt host gt tftpboot lt backup file name gt You will receive a confirmation message that the backup was successful 1 16 1 7 2 Deleting a Userid This command lets you delete a current userid This command is only available to users with admin privileges Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security login gt delete lt userid gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description userid The userid that you want to delete Use conf security login show to display a list of the current userids 1 266 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 7 3 Enabling or Disabling Fingering This command lets you enable or disable the fi
169. NI protocol a means that the switch is trying to automatically determine the appropriate interface type SigVersion The version of the UNI or PNNI protocol being used at initialization uni 30 means that this link uses version 30 of the UNI protocol uni31 means that this link uses version 31 of the UNI protocol auto means that this link attempts to determine automatically which version of the UNI protocol to use pnni10 means this link is an ATM Forum PNNI link a means that the switch is trying to automatically determine the protocol and version of that protocol that its peers are using 1 358 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description State The current state of the interface If the state is up this interface is operational This is the normal state for a interface that is connected to another FORE Systems ATM switch or host If the state is down this interface is not operational This can be due to a lack of a physical connection or due to a software problem ILMI Up means that ILMI is operational for this interface Down means that ILMI is not opera tional for this interface Side Shows if the switch is the user side or the network side on a given signalling channel If the connection is to a host network is displayed If the connection is to another switch one switch must be user and the other switch must be network gt Re
170. OW means a fault in the transmit direction Line Remote Defect Indication AUTO GREEN means no fault Only the receive LED color is changed These models show only three states and do not reflect the status of the Path Alarm Indications and Path Remote Defect Indications lan1 is the default value for all network modules lan2 wan2 For these models RED means a line fault YELLOW means a path fault and AUTO GREEN means no fault The transmit LED shows faults in the transmit direction and the receive LED shows faults in the receive direction These models provide a unique LED color pattern for all six fault states that can be detected by SONET signalling For the lan2 and wan2 models faults in the receive direction may make it impossible to detect certain faults in the trans mit direction 1 216 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 15 2 Displaying the LED Model Configuration This command lets you display the LED models used for each port of a SONET Series C Series LC or Series D network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port led gt show Port Type rxLED txLED Model 4B1 J2 red auto N A 4B2 J2 red auto N A 4B3 J2 red auto N A 4B4 J2 red auto N A gt 4C1 0Cc3 auto auto lanl 4C2 O0C3 red auto lanl g Q 4C3 O0C3 red auto lanl 3 El 4C4 O0C3 red auto lanl 2 e 4E1 ASX BP N A N A N A a S 4E2 ASX BP N A N A N A 5 4E3 ASX BP N A N A N
171. P 1 counter 3 EPD counter 4 Unintentional cell loss counter 5 CLP 1 threshold counter 6 CLP 0 1 threshold counter 7 Intentional PPD counter and 8 Transmit packet counter Name The identifier for this shared memory model 1 The following Series D network modules can only use the following traffic memory models OC 12 network modules can only use model 4 OC 3 network modules can only use model 5 and DS3 E3 DS1 and E1 network modules can only use model 6 Models 1 2 and 3 are not used The Cell and Table Memory sizes determine which memory models are appropriate for a given network module 3 Tf the module packet counter is enabled under conf module traffic d aal5pktcount the Transmit CLP 0 and CLP 1 counters are combined into a single Transmit CLP0 1 count 1 162 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 8 6 Setting Traffic Models on a Series D Network Module This command lets you select one of the traffic memory models on a Series D network mod ule Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic d gt setmodel lt module gt lt model gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module to be configured model The predefined memory model to be used for this Series D network module The various models make different trade offs between the number of cell buffers a
172. Path This command lets you add a virtual through path There are advanced options which may be used in combination with the required parameters Enter the following myswitch configura vpc gt new lt iport gt lt ivpi gt lt oport gt lt ovpi gt upe lt index gt name lt name gt advanced options inctype orig tran term outctype orig tran term pmp mpp mpmp shapeivpi lt vpi gt The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows Parameter Description iport The incoming port number ivpi The incoming virtual path number oport The outgoing port number ovpi The outgoing virtual path number 1 381 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description upc lt index gt The integer index that refers to a specific UPC traffic contract If no index is specified then no traffic policing will take place on this VPI It is assigned a UPC index of 0 and all traffic on this VPI is treated as UBR traffic This is the default name lt name gt The name you want to assign to this through path to help identify it uniquely It is most useful for billing purposes so you can identify which paths are being used by which cus tomers Can be up to 32 ASCII characters long inctype orig tran term The path connection type for the incoming path For billing purposes it denotes on which switch this path is arrivi
173. Port The port numbers of each network module currently installed in the switch fabric Carrier yes means a carrier has been detected on this port no means a carrier has not been detected Admin The current state of this port Can be up on line or down off line Mbps The capacity of this port s link in Mbps ATM Rate The actual ATM cell rate of this port in Mbps CDVT The default value for the cell delay variation tolerance setting in microseconds Policing Shows whether traffic policing is enabled or disabled for this port VBROB The bandwidth overbooking level configured on this port specified as a percentage The default is 100 which means that no overbooking has been defined Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 denote overbooking BuffOB The buffer overbooking level configured on this port specified as a percentage The default is 100 which means that no overbooking has been defined Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 denote overbooking AIS RDI enabled means that OAM cells are generated when AISs and RDIs are detected This set ting is overridden if the ATM OAM processing is disabled message is shown at the bottom of the display disabled means that OAM cells are not generated when AISs and RDIs are detected Model The type of network module For the control port displays ASX CTL ATM OAM processing is disabled Shows that OAM cell generation is disabled on al
174. Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers of each Series LE network module installed in the switch fabric Prio The traffic type for this port CLP Thrsh The value at which cells that have been tagged as non conforming CLP 1 are dropped for this port and priority Qsize The reserved queue size for this port and priority in cells The Series LE network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release This command also lets you show port and priority traffic information for an individual port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port traffic le gt show lt port gt myswitch configuration port traffic le gt show lal Port 1A1 1A1 1A1 1A1 Prio ABR VBR CBR UBR CLP Thrsh QSize 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those listed above If there are no Series LE network modules in the fabric i e this is not an LE 155 switch then the following is displayed myswitch configuration port traffic le gt show No Series LE port traffic configuration information available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manu
175. RemoteAddress privateUNI a uni30 a down down network privateUNI a uni31 a up up network 172 19 12 141 privateUNI a uni31 a down down network privateUNI a uni30 a down down network FT PNNI a uni31 a up up user 69 144 64 59 privateUNI a uni30 a down down network FT PNNI a uni31 a up up network 172 19 12 58 privateUN uni30 up down network 172 19 12 139 privateUNI a uni30 a down down network privateUN uni3 up up network 172 19 12 140 PNNI a pnnil0 a up up network 172 19 12 57 PNNI pnnilo up up network 169 144 64 58 privateUNI a uni30 a up down network The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers that currently have a signalling interface enabled An asterisk to the left of the port number means that signalling channel is still being created and is not active yet VPI The number of the virtual path that contains the signalling channel Interface The operational type of the interface on this signalling channel publicUNI means that this signalling channel is operating between this switch and a public switch privateUNI means this signalling channel is operating between the switch and a host IISP Interim Inter Switch Signalling Protocol means this signalling channel is used between two switches FT PNNI is used between two switches using SPANS mapping messages for dynamic routing PNNI means this signalling channel is using the PN
176. SAP address by appending its 7 byte host specific part The host returns the complete 20 byte NSAP address to the switch If the switch accepts it the switch enters that information into its topology tables and all connections destined for that NSAP address are routed to that host These registration messages are sent over the reserved channel VPI 0 VCI 16 You can display the available subcommand by typing ilmi at the nsap level myswitch configuration nsap gt ilmi show O e 3 3 D 5 2 a 1 11 2 1 Displaying NSAP Addresses Registered through ILMI This command lets you display the NSAP addresses of all of the ports on a switch fabric that have been registered via ILMI Enter the following parameters uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration nsap ilmi gt show Port NsapAddress 1D1 47000580ffe1000000f215116f00204810308600 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port number for which an NSAP address has been registered via ILMI NSAPAddress The NSAP address that has been registered through ILMI for this port To display the NSAP addresses that have been registered via ILMI for a specific port enter the following parameters myswitch configuration nsap ilmi gt show lt port gt myswitch configuration nsap ilmi gt show 1B1 Port NsapAddress 1B1 47000580f fe1000000f215116f00204810046400 If no addresses have been registered via ILMI the following is d
177. ST LECS 0x47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00a03e000001 00 PEER 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020482a55a0 70 The fields in this display are defined in the same way as those listed in the previous example 1 138 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Enter the following parameters to display advanced information about every LES that is cur rently configured on the switch Information similar to the following is displayed when DLE is running myswitch configuration lane les gt show advanced ELAN Name eng LES 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 50 c5 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 10 anycast Point to Multipoint VCC to Peers 0 714 BUS 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 50 Peer 1 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3552 0020481a3552 10 Point to Point VCC to Peer 0 713 Point to Multipoint VCC from Peer 0 61 LAN Type Ethernet IEEE 802 3 Maximum Data Frame Size 18190 Non proxy Control Distribute VCC 0 716 Proxy Control Distribute VCC Multicast Forward VCC 0 718 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY Number of local clients 4 LEC 1 at 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2 00 non proxy 00 20 48 10 13 f2 gt 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2 00 Control Direct VCC 0 715 LEC 2 at 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2 01 non proxy 02 20 48 10 13 f2 gt 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2
178. Setting the Data Server Password 1 20 1 7 Displaying Call Record and Performance Monitoring Information ds cobs waa ead a ANA SNN DAWN Sada Pale Configuring Memory Pools 0 eee eee eee 1 20 2 1 Configuring the Pool for Point to Point Calls 1 20 2 2 Configuring the Pool for Point to Multipoint Calls 1 20 2 3 Displaying Configured Pools 20000e eee Setting or Changing the Switch Name 0000 eee Setting the Maximum Number of Reserved VCls for PMPs Setting the Minimum Number of Reserved VCls for PMPs Displaying the Switch Configuration a Setting the Time Zone 2 1 21 System Configuration Commands 0c eee 1 21 1 1 21 2 po a a 2 N N N pat oe ae a oR w Displaying System Information cee eee eee eee Dual SCP Configuration Commands 00 0c eee eee 1 21 2 1 Configuring Dual SCP Automatic File Removal 1 21 2 2 Configuring Dual SCP Automatic Synchronization 1 21 2 3 Configuring SCP Failover 000 a eee 1 21 2 4 Configuring the Controlling SCP 00 1 21 2 5 Resetting the Standby SCP a 1 21 2 6 Displaying Dual SCP Information 1 21 2 7 Switching over to the Standby SCP 1 21 2 8 Synchronizing Files Manually 00 1 21 2 9 Setting the Failover Threshold 00 Displaying or
179. The network module must be reset for this command to take effect 1 12 22 1 5 Displaying Port Traffic on a Series C Network Module This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on all of the Series C network modules Enter the following myswitch configuration port traffic c gt show Port Prio 1C1 ABR U 1C1 VBR 1C1 CBR 1C2 ABR U 1C2 VBR 1C2 CBR TGS ABR U Ics VBR 103 CBR 1C4 ABR U 1C4 VBR 1C4 CBR 1 236 CLP Thrsh 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 EFCI 64 EFC OLE N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A QSize 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 CDV N A 449 724 N A 449 724 N A 449 724 N A 449 724 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands The fields in this display are defined as follows 1 The Series C network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release Field Description Port The port numbers of each Series C network module installed in the switch fabric Prio The traffic type for this port CLP Thrsh The value at which cells that have been tagged as non conforming CLP 1 are dropped for this port and priority EFCI On The value at which the EFCI is set turned
180. The port numbers of each network module currently installed in the switch fabric Input CDV The Cell Delay Variation on the input side of this port in microseconds Input maxCTD The Cell Transfer Delay on the input side of this port in microseconds Output CDV The Cell Delay Variation on the output side of this port in microseconds computed means that the switch has automatically determined this value Output maxCTD The Cell Transfer Delay on the output side of this port in microseconds computed means that the switch has automatically determined this value AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 221 gt O e 3 ve i O fe 3 AMI Configuration Commands This command also lets you display port traffic management information Enter the following myswitch configuration port gt show lt port gt advanced tm myswitch configuration port gt show tm Port CAC 1A1 disabled 1A2 enabled 1A3 enabled 1A4 enabled 1CTL enabled GCRA Policing AAL5 PP Pol AAL5 Packet Discard Tag All CBR VBR CBR VBR CBR VBR UBR UBR svcOn svcOn alloOff allOff svcOn svcOn svcOn svcOff svcOn svcOn alloOff allOff svcOn svcOn svcOn svcOff svcOn svcOn alloOff allOff svcOn svcOn svcOn svcOff svcOn svcOn alloOff allOff svcOn svcOn svcOn svcOff svcOn svcOn alloff alloff N A N A N A svcOff The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers of each networ
181. The reason for the last call setup failure for this PNNI SPVC This field is only displayed for originating SPVCs that are down Uptime If applicable shows in hundredths of a second the time since this PNNI SPVC was cre ated or the time since the last successful call setup occurred The STATE shows up Downtime If applicable shows in hundredths of a second the time that this PNNI SPVC has been down The STATE shows down Retry Count Displays the number of times the call setup has been attempted since the PNNISPVC was created or since the last successful call setup occurred This is only displayed when the STATE is down If no PNNI SPVCs have been configured you receive the following message myswitch configuration spvc pnni gt show Originating PNNI SPVCs No originating PNNI SPVC information is available Terminating PNNI SPVCs No terminating PNNI SPVC information is available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 313 O e 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 Switch Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure default settings for the switch You can display the list of available subcommands by typing switch at the configuration level myswitch configuration gt switch callrecord gt pools gt name pmpmaxvci pmpminvci show timezone 1 20 1 Configuring Call Records and Performance Monitoring These commands let the user configur
182. This command lets you create a new filter that contains the templates you specify in the order in which you specify them myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering filters gt new lt filter id gt lt template id gt lt template id gt The parameters for new are defined as follows Parameter Description filter id The unique user assigned identifier for this filter A filter id can be either a positive deci mal integer index or a string name A name may be up to 20 characters Zero is not a valid index If the filter already exists you receive an error message If a name is specified without a numeric index an index is assigned to the filter and shown to you O e 3 3 D 5 2 O The unique user assigned identifier for this template A template id can be either a posi tive decimal integer index or a string name A name may be up to 20 characters Zero is not a valid index The in this command means that you can add as many template ids to this filter as you wish uoneinByuod INY template id 1 16 1 8 1 5 Displaying NSAP Filter Information This command lets you display all of the NSAP filters that have been configured on the switch Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering filters gt show Index Name Template IDs 1 1 2 48 2 3 256 5 okay let_these_in 15 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Inde
183. V Bus Connector SELV CE NOTICE Marking by the symbol CE indicates compliance of this system to the EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility directive of the European Community and compliance to the Low Voltage Safety Directive Such marking is indicative that this system meets or exceeds the following technical standards EN 55022 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Tech nology Equipment EN 50082 1 Electromagnetic compatibility Generic immunity standard Part 1 Residential commercial and light industry IEC 1000 4 2 Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial process measurement and control equipment Part 2 Electrostatic discharge requirements IEC 1000 4 3 Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial process measurement and control equipment Part 3 Radiate electromagnetic field requirements IEC 1000 4 4 Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial process measurement and control equipment Part 4 Electrical fast transient burst requirements SAFETY CERTIFICATIONS ETL certified to meet Information Technology Equipment safety standards UL 1950 CSA 22 2 No 950 and EN 60950 Table of Contents Preface Chapter Summaries 0 0 0 0000 cc etn i Related Manuals sssaaa aa a a a a E a a E a e a a a a e aA i Technical Support aa oe ed a a mag ee Ea aaa O E A aE EA AEE EA E E a Ge ii Typographical Styles 0 0 0 cect eens iii Impo
184. VCs and PVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port will use the alternate CLP thresholds svcOn svcOn means all SVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port will use the alternate CLP thresholds PVCs are based on their UPC contract flags svcOff svcOff means no SVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port will use the alternate CLP thresholds PVCs are based on their UPC contract flags This is the default 1 244 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 4 2 Configuring the CLP Threshold on a Series D Network Module This command lets you apply the CLP 1 and CLP 0 1 thresholds for a given traffic type on a specified port on a Series D network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port traffic d gt clpthresh lt port gt cbr vbr abr ubr clpl clp01 lt threshold gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the CLP threshold is being applied cbr vbr abr ubr Specifies for which type of traffic CBR VBR ABR or UBR the CLP 1 or CLP 0 1 threshold is being applied clp1 The threshold is being set for CLP 1 cells Applying a CLP 1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port and class is greater than this threshold cells that have a CLP 1 are dropped This threshold must be less than the clp01 thres
185. a maximum of 32 entries Flag State If ssr is allowed all incoming IP packets that are strict source routed are accepted provided that they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses If ssr is disallowed all incoming IP packets that are strict source routed are rejected even if they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses If 1sr is allowed all incoming IP packets that are loose source routed are accepted provided that they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses If 1sr is disallowed all incoming IP packets that are loose source routed are rejected even if they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses If a11 is allowed all incoming IP packets are accepted provided that they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses If a11 is disallowed all incoming IP pack ets are rejected even if they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses If an entry in the table is preceded by an asterisk this means that the entry has been created via SNMP but is not active yet The switch will not change its filtering policy based on that entry until the entry has become active AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 263 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands If no addresses have been configured in the table and no flags have been set to disallow packets then something similar to the followi
186. a new one AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 167 AMI Configuration Commands 1 11 1 3 Displaying NSAP Prefixes This command enables you to display the current list of NSAP prefixes Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration nsap prefix gt show Port VPI NSAP Prefix LAL O Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f124 00de LA2 0 Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f124 00de LA3 0 Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f124 00de LA4 O Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f124 00de LB1 O Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f124 00de LB2 O Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f124 00de LCTL O Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f124 00de The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port number for this NSAP prefix VPI The virtual path number on which this NSAP prefix exists NSAP Prefix The NSAP prefix for this entry If you have not configured any NSAP prefixes then the following message is displayed myswitch configuration nsap prefix gt show No user configured NSAP prefix information is available 1 168 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 11 2 NSAP ILMI Configuration Command This command lets you display the NSAP addresses of all of the ports on a switch fabric that have been registered via ILMI ILMI address registration occurs between the switch and host The switch sends the host its 13 byte NSAP prefix If the host accepts the prefix the host builds its own N
187. a sum so it can represent multiple defects simultaneously The various bit positions are as follows 1 sonetPathNoDefect 2 sonetPathLOP Path Loss Of Pointer was detected Path LOP is declared when a nor mal pointer value is not found for eight consecutive frames 4 sonetPathAIS Path Alarm Indication Signal was detected Path AIS is asserted when an all ones pattern is detected in the pointer bytes H1 and H2 for three consecutive frames 8 sonetPathRDI Path RDI alarm has been detected RDI alarm is declared when bit 5 of the path status byte is high for ten consecutive frames 16 sonetPathUnequiped Path is not provisioned idle PathSignalLabel hex 00 32 sonetPathSignalLabelMismatch A received Path Signal Label mismatch A received Signal Label is considered mismatched if it does not equal either the standard value for an ATM payload hex13 or the value for an equipped non specific payload 1 hex Atm The ATM Status of the interface The variable is a bit map represented as a sum so it can represent multiple defects simultaneously The various bit positions areas follows 1 sonetAtmNoDefect 2 sonetAtmLCD Loss of Cell Delineation was detected LCD is declared when a nor mal pointer value is not found for eight consecutive frames LA carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port It does not guarantee that the signal is the proper frequency
188. al 1 243 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 4 Configuring Port Traffic on Series D Network Modules These commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on an individ ual port on a Series D network module on the switch You can display the list of available sub commands by typing at the d level myswitch configuration port traffic d gt altclpconfig clpthresh qsize ratelimit scheduling show 1 12 22 4 1 Configuring Alternate CLP Thresholds on a Series D Network Module This command lets you apply the alternate per connection CLP 1 or CLP 0 1 threshold for various classes of service The alternate threshold is configured using the conf module traffic d altclpthresh command This alternate threshold can then be applied per port for some all or none of these connections using this command Enter the following parame ters myswitch configuration port traffic d gt altclpconfig lt port gt cbr vbr ubr allon allOff svcOn svcOff These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the alternate CLP thresholds are being applied cbr vbr ubr Specifies for which type of traffic CBR VBR or UBR the alternate CLP 1 or CLP 0 1 thresholds are being applied allOn al110n means all connections SVCs and PVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port will use the alternate CLP thresholds allOff alloff means no connections S
189. amed default This command will delete the ELAN named default that was started using the conf lane default new command Enter the following parameters If the ELAN named default was started using the other conf lane commands and the les option was specified under conf lane lecs new then this command will delete that ELAN named default as well myswitch configuration lane default gt delete Do you really want to delete the ELAN named default LES BUS LECS LEC n y Entering n or pressing lt ENTER gt aborts the command Entering y deletes the ELAN named default If no ELAN named default exists you receive the following message when you enter y myswitch configuration lane default gt delete Do you really want to delete the ELAN named default LES BUS LECS LEC n y Default LANE is not configured AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 111 Q e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 1 3 Displaying a Default ELAN This command lets you show information for the ELAN named default Enter the following myswitch configuration lane default gt show LECS Information Index AdminStatus OperStatus 1 up Selector WKA Database up Oxf1 atm forum lecs cig Default LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3596 0020481a3596 0 LES BUS Information Index AdminStatus OperStatus LesSel Type MTU ELAN SECURE TLVs HE up up Oxf0 ethernet 1516 default disable enable LES
190. an disable lt NSAPaddress gt and enable means that this address will be used as the default CPN for incoming call setup messages without a CPN Specifying an lt NSAPaddress gt address and disable means that an incoming call setup message without a CPN will be treated as if it has a CPN of all zeros A template can be created to check for this condition incomingfilter lt filter id gt none lt filter id gt indicates the NSAP filter from conf security nsapfilter filters show to be applied to calls arriving at this signalling channel You can remove this filter later by using conf signalling modify incomingfilter none outgoingfilter lt filter id gt none lt filter id gt indicates the NSAP filter from conf security nsapfilter filters show to be applied to calls leaving on this signalling channel You can remove this filter later by using conf signalling modify outgoingfilter none AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 357 O e 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 23 4 Displaying Signalling Channels This command allows you to list an individual switch fabric s current signalling channel infor mation Enter the following parameters myswitch Port VPI 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 1B1 1B2 1B3 1B4 1C1 1C2 Ics 1C4 ICTL O O 40 O dd O O O OOGG configuration signalling gt show Interface SigVersion State ILMI Side
191. anced options for cr memory lt percentage gt action lt rejectCall noRecord gt Note lt primary URL gt and lt secondary URL gt are of the form lt ip address gt port lt pathname gt lt filename gt The following is an example of how to modify the variables for a call record transfer myswitchi c onfiguration switch callrecord gt modify cr action noRecord These parameters for new and modify are defined as follows Parameter Description cr Indicates a call record transfer variable perf Indicates a performance monitoring transfer variable primary URL The primary URL for call record transfers in the form lt ip address gt port lt pathname gt lt filename gt If the Admin status is on and this URL is changed the change takes effect at the next recording interval ip address The IP address of the host to contact port The port on the host to contact pathname The directory on the host into which the data should be put filename The filename on the host into which the data should be put The pathname and filename are each strings of characters consisting of the following special tokens oT The type of switch YN The SerialNumber for an ASX 200BX or TNX 210 or the EnclosureNumber Serial Number for an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 I The switch s IP address e g 169 144 1 90 D The date and time formatted as follows YYYYMMDDhhmm
192. and powerSupply5VoltFailed alarms are only available on a DC powered ASX 1000 and TNX 1100 Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration alarms gt show AlarmType AlarmStatus MinorAlarm MajorAlarm powerSupplyInputFailed inactive disabled enabled powerSupplyOutputFailed inactive disabled enabled fanBankFailed inactive disabled enabled tempSensorOverTemp inactive disabled enabled linkFailed inactive enabled disabled spansFailed inactive enabled disabled netmodRemovedHighPrio inactive disabled disabled netmodRemovedLowPrio inactive disabled disabled Major alarm relay status off Minor alarm relay status off The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description AlarmType The name of the alarm AlarmStatus Shows if the state of the alarm is active alarming or inactive not alarming An alarm is active if the underlying condition is detected For power supplies the input failed alarm condition is active if the input voltage is not within the nominal range for the supply This does not necessarily mean that an output failure will result A power supply output fail ure condition is active if any power supply is failing or if it is physically removed MinorAlarm Disabled means that this alarm type will not cause a minor alarm Enabled means that this alarm type will cause a minor alarm MajorAlarm Disabled means that this alarm type will not cause a major alarm Enabled means
193. and reas sembly SAR engine The range for this parameter is 100 to 24000 in us and the default is 2000 i e 2 ms bufSize The amount of reassembly buffer space allocated for the connection The default is 512 bytes per timeslot integ The amount of time allocated to re establish the connection before while or after the call is established or in the case of interruption The default is 2500s 1 6 2 Deleting a CES Connection To delete a CES connection enter the following parameters myswitch configuration ces gt delete lt service gt The parameter for delete is defined as follows Parameter Description service The CES service ID of the connection to be deleted 1 96 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 6 3 Displaying CES Connections To display the current CES connections enter the following myswitch configuration ces gt show Searching For CES ports CES Input Output Service State Port Timeslots VPI VCI Type Port TimeSlots VPI VCI 24 down 1A1 1 0 T29 7 31 down 1A1 2 3 0 130 spve 1D3 0 32 32 down 1A1 4 5 0 131 pve 1D4 0 150 a 33 down 1A1 6 7 0 132 spve 1D3 0 35 Q o So 3 The fields in this display are defined as follows DIO o Bia og Field Description o 3 CES Service The identification number assigned by the switch of this CES connection State Indicates
194. ane lec gt new 0x0 eng net ip 169 144 224 222 mask 255 255 255 0 1 122 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 3 6 Displaying LEC Information This command lets you display the current LEC information To display information about all of the LECs that are currently configured on the switch enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lec gt show Index 1 Admin Status up Oper Status Sel Mode MACaddress IfName ELAN up 0x00 wellknown 0220481c10bb e10 eng net LECS 0x47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00a03e000001 00 LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 20 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Index The unique index that identifies this LEC It is dynamically assigned by the switch when the LEC is created Admin Status Reflects any changes that you have made to the status of the LEC Up means you have started the LEC Down means you have stopped the LEC Oper Status Reflects the actual current status of the LEC Up means the LEC is currently active Down means the LEC is currently inactive Joining means that the LEC is in the process of reg istering with the ELAN Sel The selector byte portion 20th byte of the ATM address of the LEC in hexadecimal for mat Mode The configuration mode that is used when a LEC joins the ELAN wellknown means that the LECS address was discovered via
195. ankback Configuration Commands 1 41 1 3 4 2 1 Displaying the Crankback Setting 1 41 TOC 2 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 4 1 5 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 3 4 2 2 Configuring the Crankback Setting 1 41 1 3 4 3 PNNI Interface Configuration Commands 1 42 1 3 4 3 1 Modifying a PNNI Interface 1 42 1 3 4 3 2 Displaying a PNNI Interface 1 43 1 3 4 4 PNNI Metric Configuration Commands 1 44 1 3 4 4 1 Deleting a Metric Set 1 44 1 3 4 4 2 Modifying a Metric Set 1 44 1 3 4 4 3 Creating a Metric Set 1 44 1 3 4 4 4 Displaying Metric Set Information 1 46 1 3 4 5 PNNI Node Configuration Commands 1 48 1 3 4 5 1 Configuring the PNNI Node State 1 48 1 3 4 5 2 Deleting a PNNI Node 0a 1 48 1 3 4 5 3 Creating a PNNI Node 0a 1 49 1 3 4 5 4 Modifying a PNNINode 1 50 1 3 4 5 5 Displaying PNNI Node Information 1 52 1 3 4 6 PNNI Profile Configuration Commands 1 56 1 3 4 6 1 Deleting a PNNI Profile 1 56 1 3 4 6 2 Modifying a PNNI Profile 1 56 1 3 4 6 3 Creating a PNNI Profile 1 56 1 3 4 6 4 Displaying PNNI Profile Information 1 58 1 3
196. annels on a switch fabric enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show nsapfilter Port VPI Incoming Filter ID Outgoing Filter ID 1A1 0 21L 1A2 0 625 49 1B4 0 keep them out 68 ICTL 0 42 The fields in the nsapfilter display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port number of the signalling channel to which the filter applies VPI The virtual path number of the signalling channel to which the filter applies Incoming Filter ID The unique index number or name that identifies this incoming filter See the Index and Name fields under conf security nsapfilter show Outgoing Filter ID The unique index number or name that identifies this outgoing filter See the Index and Name fields under conf security nsapfilter show To display NSAP filter information for all of the signalling channels on a specific port and path for example port 1B4 and VPI 0 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show 1B4 0 nsapfilter Port VPI Incoming Filter ID Outgoing Filter ID 1B4 0 keep them out 68 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example 1 368 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 24 Usage Parameter Control Configuration Commands These commands let you create delete or display usage parameter control UPC traffic con tracts These contracts can then be a
197. ans you have stopped the LES OperStatus Reflects the actual current status of the LES up means the LES is currently active down means the LES is currently inactive LesSel The selector byte portion 20th byte of the ATM address in hexadecimal format of the host or switch that is the LES This address is used by the peers of this DLE server when they need to contact it Type Shows what type of ELAN this is ethernet means that the LAN type is Ethernet token ring means that the LAN type is Token Ring MTU The maximum data frame size Can be 1516 4544 9234 or 18190 The default for Ethernet is 1516 The default for Token Ring is 4544 ELAN The name of the ELAN that this LES serves AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 137 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands Field Description SECURE enable means that ELAN access control is running disable means that ELAN access control is not running TLVs enable means the LES accepts TLV parameters from LEC MPCs that register with it and distributes these TLVs to LEC MPCs in response to LE ARP queries disable means the LES collects TLV parameters from LEC MPCs that register with it but does not distribute these TLVs to LEC MPCs in response to LE ARP queries LES The full ATM address of the LES which the DLE peers use to connect to this server If DLE is not running then the LECs that wish to join the ELAN use this
198. ap is sent to the trap destination or management station Otherwise no trap is sent TimePeriod If the amount of time between two consecutive occurrences of a given trap exceeds the time period number shown then the latest trap is sent to the trap destination or manage ment station Otherwise no trap is sent You can also display the threshold and time period for a specific trap as follows myswitch configuration snmp trap log threshold show lt index gt myswitch configuration snmp trap log threshold gt show 10 Index Trap Threshold TimePeriod 10 asxPsOutputUp 1 1 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 291 AMI Configuration Commands 1 18 SPANS Configuration Commands These commands allow you to manage SPANS Simple Protocol for ATM Network Signal ling FORE Systems pre standard signalling protocol You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the spans level myswitch configuration spans gt delete new show 1 18 1 Deleting a SPANS Signalling Path This command lets you delete an existing SPANS signalling path Enter the following parame ters myswitch configuration spans gt delete lt port gt lt vpi gt ForeThought PNNI FI PNNI uses the SPANS reserved signalling channel VCI 15 for exchanging its routing information In the previous releases of ForeThought software when SPANS was deleted on a path the SPANS signalling channel VCI 15 was also deleted This
199. arameter Description board The number of the board 1 4 on which the clockscale is being configured factor The factor by which you want to scale the clock The scaling factor multiplied by 0 838 sec onds should be greater than the burst tolerance of the connection The default is 1 1 The HDCOMP ASIC must be version 1 or greater to support changing the clockscale To display the ASIC version use the conf board show advanced command 2 This command is only useful when performing traffic policing on VBR traffic with an extremely large burst tolerance that is destined for a very low speed DS1 link If these conditions are not represented in your network it is recom mended that you leave this value at the default setting If you change the clockscale setting the following warning is displayed myswitch configuration board gt clockscale 1 2 KKKKK WARNING KKKKK Changing the Clock Scale Factor will have undesired effects on existing policed connections until the switch software is restarted Restart the switch software n Entering n or pressing lt ENTER gt aborts the command Entering y causes the switch to restart and use the new clockscale setting 1 66 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 4 2 Configuring OAM Cell Processing on a Switch Board If you have enabled OAM cell processing on some ports on a switch board using the conf port aisrdi enable command this command lets
200. arameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show atm LAL LA2 LA3 LA4 LB1 LB2 LB3 0 5 Admin Admin Oper Oper Port VPI SigVCI ILMIVCI MinVCI MaxVCI MinVCI MaxVCI InSigUpe OutSigUpc 6 32 5 BZ 5 0 N A 6 32 5 32 5 0 N A 6 32 5 32 5 0 N A 6 32 5 32 5 0 N A 6 32 5 32 5 0 N A 6 32 5 32 5 0 N A 6 32 5 32 5 0 N A 6 32 5 32 5 0 N A LB4 Ga GOG ao a GG a OG a am a Aa a UA wu The fields in the ATM display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers that currently have a signalling interface enabled VPI The number of the virtual path that contains the signalling channel Sig VCI The VCI on the signalling channel The default reserved VCI is 5 ILMIVCI The VCI to be used for ILMI signalling messages The default reserved VCI is 16 Admin MinVCI The user requested bottom number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for UNI SVCs on this path If no value is entered the default is 32 Admin MaxVCI The user requested top number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for UNI SVCs on this path If no value is entered the default is the maximum number of VCIs on the containing path Oper MinVCI The actual operational bottom number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for UNI SVCs on this path A value that is displayed in brackets indicates that negotiation of this value with the UNI peer via ILMI is not complete because either ILMI is
201. as follows Parameter Description host The IP address to be mapped NSAPaddress The NSAP address to be mapped interface The Classical IP interface that should be used to open connections to this NSAP address qaa0 qaal qaa2 or qaa3 The default is qaa0 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 11 AMI Configuration Commands 1 2 6 Creating a Classical IP PVC This command allows you to create a new Classical IP PVC ARP entry All data is sent LLC SNAP encapsulated Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmarp gt newclassicalip lt host gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt interface gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description host The host IP address of the remote IP endstation vpi The virtual path number of the Classical IP PVC vci The virtual channel number of the Classical IP PVC interface The Classical IP interface to be used for this connection qaa0 qaa1 qaa2 or qaa3 The default is qaa0 1 2 7 Creating a FORE IP PVC ARP Entry This command enables you to create a FORE IP PVC ARP entry Data on this PVC is encapsu lated using null encapsulation also known as VC based multiplexing as specified in RFC 1483 Enter the following parameters myswitch conf atmarp gt newforeip lt host gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt 4 5 lt interface gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Desc
202. at non compliant cells are discarded Remote Address The IP address of the remote endstation if it is available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 295 AMI Configuration Commands To show advanced SPANS signalling path information about all of the ports enter the follow ing parameters myswitch configuration spans gt show advanced 1A1 142 143 1A4 1A5 1A6 1C1 1C2 1C3 1C4 0 Port VPI SigVCI CLSVCI AAL MinVCI MaxVCI SigBW CLSUPC OpenT O CloseT O OutServ 5 14 4 32 9 0 0 300 500 vbr 5 14 4 32 5 0 0 300 500 vbr 5 14 4 32 5 0 0 300 500 vbr 3 14 4 32 5 0 0 300 500 vbr 5 14 4 32 5 0 0 300 500 vbr J 14 4 32 5 0 0 300 500 vbr 5 14 4 32 5 0 0 300 500 vbr 3 14 4 32 5 0 0 300 500 vbr 5 14 4 32 5 0 0 300 500 vbr 9 14 4 32 5 0 0 300 500 vbr 5 14 4 32 1023 0 0 300 500 vbr ICTL oo O O O O O QO a o The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port number of the SPANS signalling path VPI The virtual path number of the SPANS signalling path SigVCI The virtual channel number used for SPANS messages on the SPANS path CLSVCI The VCI used for connectionless messages AAL The AAL type used for SPANS messages MinVCI The bottom number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for SPANS SVCs on this path MaxVCI The top number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for SPANS SVCs on this path SigBW The amount of
203. at support the same number of unicast connections Therefore all Series LE modules in a switch should either use models 1 3 OR model 6 The Series LE network modules can only use the following traffic memory models 1 2 3 and 6 2 The Cell and Table Memory sizes determine which memory models are appropriate for a given network module 3 Only one multicast output is supported per port for each multicast connection AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 155 AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 7 4 Setting Traffic Models on a Series LE Network Module This command lets you select one of the traffic memory models on a Series LE network mod ule Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic le gt setmodel lt module gt lt model gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module to be configured model The predefined memory model to be used for this Series LE network module The various models make different trade offs between the number of cell buffers and the number of unicast and multicast connections and the number of per connection counters Enter the number found in the Model field of the conf module traffic le models AMI com mand for the shared memory configuration that you want to use L For proper operation all Series LE network modules in a switch must use memory models that support the same number of unicast conn
204. ate a originating path myswitch configuration vpt gt new 3b4 88 orig Would you like to create the terminating side also y y If you do not specify term or orig the switch automatically creates both sides of the path myswitch configuration vpt gt new 3b4 88 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 387 AMI Configuration Commands The parameters for new modify and delete are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number for this vpt vpi The path number for this vpt term Specifies that the vpt to be created is a terminating path If this option is not used an elas tic path is created Elastic paths allocate and de allocate bandwidth for their channels from the link orig Specifies that the vpt to be created is an originating path reserved The amount of bandwidth in Kbps that you want to reserve on this vpt minvci The bottom number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for VCCs on this vpt The default isi maxvci The top number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for VCCs on this vpt The default is 511 shapeovpi The output port of a traffic shaping originating vpt Setting this value configures traffic shaping on the originating path Cells bound for the network leave the traffic shaping port with this VPI When the traffic shaping port is the WAN port this value equals the input VPI of the originating path If the traffic shaping
205. ation Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Comma 1 2 ATM ARP Configuration Commands These commands allow you to manage the ATM ARP address resolution protocol features You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the atmarp level myswitch configuration atmarp gt arpserver gt delete flush getnsap mapnsap newclassicalip newforeip show 1 2 1 ARP Server Configuration Commands These commands let you configure the RFC 1577 ATM ARP server You can get to this level by entering arpserver at the configuration level By entering at the arpserver level the list of available subcommands for arpserver is displayed myswitch configuration atmarp arpserver gt show set 1 2 1 1 Displaying the ARP Server Address This command shows which interfaces are enabled to be the RFC 1577 ATM ARP server for the IP network Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmarp arpserver gt show lt interface gt myswitch configuration atmarp arpserver gt show Interface ARP Server Addr Enabled qaa0 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3445 0020481a3445 00 Yes qaal 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3445 0020481a3445 01 Yes qaa2 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 06db 0020481c06db 02 No qaa3 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3445 0020481a3445 03 Yes The fields in this display are defined as follows nds Field Description Interface The classical IP interfaces for this switch ARP Server Addr The ARP s
206. ation timing gt mode show switchclock 1 22 1 Configuring the Timing Mode This command lets you configure the method of timing operation used on the switch Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration timing gt mode switch tcm These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description switch All network modules that support distributed timing import their clock source from the port designated under conf timing switchclock This is the default mode tcm All network modules that support distributed timing import their clock source from the Timing Control Module TCM If either of the primary or secondary clocks set under conf timing switchclock are on this switch they are exported as the board primary and secondary clocks The TCM must also be configured either to use these clocks under conf cec timing or to provide a BITS or the on board oscillator as a timing source for the switch fabrics You must have a TCM installed in your switch to use this mode 1 350 For more information about configuring timing using the switch mode see the Network Configuration manual for your switch For more information about configuring timing using the tcm mode see the CEC Plus Installation and User s manual for your TCM AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 22 2 Displaying Timing Information This command lets you show the timing configuration
207. bandwidth reserved on the VCI for SPANS signalling messages CLSUPC The integer index that refers to a specific UPC contract used to police the connectionless VCI OpenT O The timeout in msec for SPANS open requests CloseT O The timeout in msec for SPANS close requests OutServ The service queue in which the output SPANS VCC resides Can be VBR or UBR The default is VBR 1 296 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands To list SPANS information for a specific port for example port 1C1 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration spans gt show 1C1 Port VPI State Type CDVT Action RemoteAddress 1C1 0 down uni 1000 tag The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example To list SPANS information for a specific port and path for example port 1C1 and VPI 0 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration spans gt show 1c1 0 Port VPI State Type CDVT Action RemoteAddress oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 O 1C1 0 down uni 1000 tag uoneinByUuod INY The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example To list advanced SPANS information for a specific port and path for example port 1c3 and VPL0 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration spans gt show 1b3 0 advanced Port VPI SigVCI CLSVCI AAL MinVCI MaxVCI SigBW CLSUPC OpenT O CloseT O OutServ 1C3 0 15 14 4 32 511 0 0 300 500 vb
208. ber of cells The queue size to be assigned to the traffic designated in the previous parameter The default is 256 cells 1 The Series D network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release 2 The network module must be reset for this command to take effect AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 245 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 4 4 Configuring the Rate Limit on a Series D Network Module This command lets you limit a given port to a specified amount of bandwidth effectively set ting a new logical line rate for the port This command allocates that bandwidth to the rate controller To free the allocated bandwidth the option disable should be specified instead of the number of cells Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port traffic d gt ratelimit lt port gt lt cps gt disabled These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which you want to change the rate limit cps The new cell rate for the port in cells per second disabled Indicates you want to reset the bandwidth to the default value You should not modify the rate limit to a value gt lower than the following values for OC12 network modules 15 183 cells sec per port
209. ble the LES service for the duration of execution Full ELAN connectivity may not be restored until all the LANE clients reconnect to the LES service Do you want to continue n y Type n or lt ENTER gt to abort the command or type y to continue adding the peer 1 134 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 5 5 Deleting a DLE Peer This command lets you delete a DLE peer server from the list of DLE peer servers for an exist ing ELAN without destroying and recreating the existing peers Enter the following myswitch configuration lane les gt peerdelete lt LES index gt lt Peer ATM Address gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description LES index The index number of the LES that you want to delete from the list of DLE peer servers for a particular ELAN This index number is dynamically assigned by the switch when the LES is created It can be found under the Index field using the conf lane les show command Peer lt ATM Address gt The unique ATM address of the DLE peer server you want to delete It is through this address that all of the DLE peer servers in a DLE ELAN connect to and communicate with each other O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY When using this command the LES must already exist and the ELAN that it services must be a DLE ELAN The LES is temporarily administered down while it is being deleted fr
210. bled tempSensorOverTemp inactive disabled enabled Major alarm relay status on Minor alarm relay status off 1 5 1 2 Enabling an Alarm This command lets you enable an alarm Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec alarms gt enable major minor lt alarm type gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description major minor Designates whether the alarm type causes a major alarm or a minor alarm when that con dition occurs alarm type Indicates the kind of alarm condition Valid parameters are displayed in the AlarmType field when the command string conf alarms show is entered at the prompt For example to enable an overtemperature condition that is detected by the overtemperature sensor as a major alarm enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec alarms gt enable major tempSensorOverTemp To verify that the change has taken effect you can display the alarms myswitch configuration alarms5 show AlarmType AlarmStatus MinorAlarm MajorAlarm powerSupplyInputFailed active disabled enabled powerSupplyOutputFailed active disabled enabled fanBankFailed active disabled enabled tempSensorOverTemp inactive disabled enabled Major alarm relay status on Minor alarm relay status off 1 70 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 1 3 Configuring an Alarm Relay These commands let you configure or display alarm relays
211. bmenu lets you configure alarm conditions that are a result of various environmental and synchronization timing conditions You can display the list of available subcommands by typing alarms at the cec level O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration cec gt alarms disable enable relays show 1 5 1 1 Disabling an Alarm This command lets you disable an alarm Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec alarms disable major minor lt alarm types These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description major minor Designates whether the alarm type causes a major alarm or a minor alarm when that con dition occurs alarm type Indicates the alarm condition Valid parameters are displayed in the AlarmType field when the command string conf alarms show is entered For example to disable an overtemperature condition that is detected by the overtemperature sensor as a minor alarm enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec alarms disable minor tempSensorOverTemp AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 69 AMI Configuration Commands To verify that the change has taken effect you can display the alarms myswitch configuration alarms gt show AlarmType AlarmStatus MinorAlarm MajorAlarm powerSupplyInputFailed active disabled enabled powerSupplyOutputFailed active disabled enabled fanBankFailed active disabled ena
212. can be filtered by setting an outgoing filter on the control port AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 283 AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 8 4 3 Displaying NSAP Filter Interface Information This command lets you display all of the incoming and outgoing filters that have been config ured on a specific interface Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering interfaces gt show Port VPI Incoming Filter ID Outgoing Filter Id Al 0 21 0 A2 0 459 keep_them_out 94 A3 0 0 0 A4 0 0 36 filter 36 DI 0 0 0 D2 0 0 0 D3 0 0 0 D4 0 0 0 CTL 0 0 37 ctlport The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port number of the interface to which the filter applies VPI The virtual path number of the interface to which the filter applies Incoming Filter ID The unique index number or name that identifies this incoming filter Outgoing Filter Id The unique index number or name that identifies this outgoing filter You can also display the filters for a specific port and or VPI or the actual filters themselves which shows all of the templates in each filter or the actual templates themselves myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering interfaces gt show lt port gt lt vpi gt filters templates For example to display the filters enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering interfaces
213. cates that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port off means that cell pay load scrambling is disabled on this port Only the payload of the ATM cells is scrambled The default is on O e 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinByuod INY 1 The scrambling mode should be set to the same status on both the transmitting side and the receiving side 1 205 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 11 6 Showing the E1 Port Configuration This command lets you display information about all of the ports on El network modules Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port el gt show Port Carrier Stat Mode LineType Loopback Timing Scram Length EmptyCells 1C1 no 0x244 N A CRC none internal on Lt110 idle 1C2 no 0x244 N A CRC none internal on Lt110 idle 1C3 no 0x244 N A CRC none internal on Lt110 idle 1C4 no 0x244 N A CRC none internal on Lt110 idle The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers of each E1 network module currently installed in the switch fabric Carrier yes means a carrier has been detected on this port no means a carrier has not been detected Stat The E1 line status of the port Mode plcp means that the port uses PLCP framing for cell delineation hes means that the port uses HCS cell delineation LineType The variety of E1 line implementing this circuit The type of circ
214. ce in the same class Found under the Index field using the conf lane bus show command BUS index range x y The range of index numbers of the BUSs that you want to start or stop The index is found under the Index field using conf lane bus show up down up changes the administrative status of the designated BUS index to up down changes the administrative status of the designated BUS index to down 1 114 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 2 3 Creating a BUS This command lets you create a BUS for an ELAN Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane bus gt new lt BUS Selector byte HEX gt lt BUS name gt type ethernet token ring mtu 1516 4544 9234 18190 The parameters for new are defined as follows Parameter Description gt BUS Selector byte The 20th byte of the ATM address of the switch that is to run a BUS service entered in AJP o O hexadecimal format Use conf atmarp getnsap to display the entire ATM address 3 Q 3 BUS name The name for this BUS Identifies which ELAN this BUS services D c E type ethernet means that the LAN type is Ethernet token ring means that the LAN type PJE is Token Ring The default is ethernet z mtu Indicates which maximum transmission unit MTU size you wish to use Valid values are 1516 4544 9234 and 18190 Defaults are 1516 for Ethernet and 4544 for
215. cece eee eee 1 73 Table of Contents TOC 4 1 5 3 1 IP Configuration Commands 000002 0 eee 1 73 1 5 3 1 1 Configuring the IP Address 1 74 1 5 3 1 2 Configuring the IP State 1 74 1 5 3 1 3 Configuring the IP Broadcast Address 1 74 1 5 3 1 4 Configuring the IP Subnet Mask 1 75 1 5 3 1 5 Configuring IP Routes 1 75 1 5 3 1 5 1 Adding an IP Route 1 75 1 5 3 1 5 2 Deleting an IP Route 1 76 1 5 3 1 5 3 Showing the IP Routes 1 76 1 5 3 1 6 Displaying the IP Interface Configuration 1 77 1 5 3 2 Setting or Changing the TCM s Name 1 77 1 5 3 3 Serial Port Configuration 00 0c eee ee eee 1 78 1 5 3 3 1 Displaying Serial Port Information 1 78 1 5 3 4 Displaying TCM Information aaaea 1 79 1 5 3 5 SNMP Configuration Commands aa 1 80 1 5 3 5 1 Configuring SNMP Traps 1 80 1 5 3 5 1 1 Deleting an SNMP Trap Entry 1 80 1 5 3 5 1 2 Creating an SNMP Trap Entry 1 81 1 5 3 5 1 3 Displaying the SNMP Trap Ene EE masama NG 1 81 1 5 3 6 Setting or Changing the Timezone 1 82 1 5 4 CEC Timing Configuration 000 eee eee 1 83 1 5 4 1 BITS Timing Configuration Commands 1 83 1 5 4 1 1 BITS Coding Configuration 1 83 1 5 4 1 2 BITS Framing Configu
216. cess you will lose your configuration information AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 333 AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 2 8 Synchronizing Files Manually To ensure a reliable failover mechanism the information contained on both SCPs should be synchronized Synchronizing the FLASH between SCPs is requested manually by the user via AMI The CDB password file LECS configuration and switch software version can also be synchronized between SCPs If free space on the FLASH of the standby SCP is depleted dur ing a synchronization attempt the standby SCP removes unused files and directories if autoremove is enabled However if autoremove is enabled and there are no files that can be deleted the synchronization attempt fails If aut oremove is disabled the synchronization attempt fails To synchronize information between SCPs enter the following myswitch configuration system dualscp gt synchronize Flash CDB LECS OS Password Securid Secret Init Loader These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description Flash Indicates that all directories and files in FLASH on the controlling SCP will be copied to the standby SCP CDB Indicates that the Configuration Database CDB will be copied from the controlling to the standby SCP LECS Indicates that the LAN Emulation Configuration Services LECS configuration database file will be copied from the controllin
217. change this range if you want to limit the number of SVCs on this path limit the number of SPANS SVCs with respect to UNI SVCs or divide the VCI range into a region reserved for SPANS SVCs and a region reserved for UNI SVCs maxvci lt vci gt The top number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for SPANS SVCs on this path The default is the maximum number of VCIs that the path supports You can change this range if you want to limit the number of SVCs on this path limit the number of SPANS SVCs with respect to UNI SVCs or divide the VCI range into a region reserved for SPANS SVCs and a region reserved for UNI SVCs opentimeout The timeout for SPANS open requests This option should be used on links that have a high propagation delay such as satellite links The default is 300 msec closetimeout The timeout for SPANS close requests This option should be used on links that have a high propagation delay such as satellite links The default is 500 msec outsigservice Configures the SPANS signalling channel to be put into either the UBR or VBR queue on the output side at the time the SPANS channel is created By putting the SPANS signalling channel in the VBR queue the SPANS signalling messages receive higher priority on the output side This keeps UBR traffic from congesting the signalling traffic The default is vbr The following is an example of how to configure SPANS to use only VCIs 32 100 on port 1A1 VPI
218. cified class of service arriving on this port will use the alternate CLP threshold svcOn means all SVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port will use the alternate CLP threshold All PVCs arriving on this port have the alternate threshold applied if their UPC contract specifies to do so This is the default svcOff means no SVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port will use the alternate CLP threshold All PVCs arriving on this port have the alternate threshold applied if their UPC contract specifies to do so Field Description z o Port The port numbers of each Series D network module installed in the switch fabric S Q 3 Alt CLP Thresh Config Specifies for which type of traffic CBR VBR or UBR the alternate CLP 1 or CLP 0 1 3 Fi threshold is set a110n means all connections SVCs and PVCs of the specified class of 4 CE 3 RateLimit Rate limit lets you limit a given port to a specified amount of bandwidth effectively set ting a new logical line rate for the port If a number is displayed this is the new cell rate for the port in cells per second If disabled is displayed it means rate limit is not enabled on this port AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 249 AMI Configuration Commands Additionally you can show scheduling information Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port traffic d gt show scheduling SVC Scheduling PVC Sched
219. ck is out of specification 1 92 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Current Timing Reference Shows the actual timing reference that is currently being used Can be BITS1 BITS2 primary secondary or freerun Requested Timing Reference Shows the timing reference that was configured If this source fails it will not match what is currently being used Can be bits automatic primary secondary or freerun Primary Reference Shows the timing source configured as the primary source Can be one of the primary or secondary clocks exported from one of the switch fabrics Primary Status Shows whether the timing source configured as the primary source is currently available or unavailable Secondary Reference Shows the timing source configured as the secondary source Can be one of the primary or secondary clocks exported from one of the switch fabrics Secondary Status Shows whether the timing source configured as the secondary source is currently available or unavailable Revertive Switching Shows whether revertive switching is enabled or disabled Revertive Switching Delay Shows the amount of time in seconds between the time that the primary clock is restored and the time that the TCM switches back to the primary clock again Failover Switching Delay Shows the amount of time in seconds after the failure o
220. command is only available on the local switch myswitch configuration system syslog gt delete Remove 192 88 243 118 as remote syslog host n y Remote syslog host removed Syslog messages will not be sent Syslog Facility local7 The switch prompts you to confirm that the address should be deleted Entering y causes the switch to delete the address as shown above If you do not want the address to be deleted enter n or press lt RETURN gt and you will be sent back to the syslog prompt Once the host s address has been deleted the switch s system messages are no longer logged until a new host address is set However if a facility has been assigned to the switch that facil ity assignment remains intact So if you assign another host without changing the facility the new host will list this switch s syslog messages under the same facility For example myswitch configuration system syslog gt show Remote Syslog Host 169 144 48 41 Syslog Facility local7 myswitch configuration system syslog gt delete Remove 169 144 48 41 as remote syslog host n y Remote syslog host removed Syslog messages will not be sent myswitch configuration system syslog gt show No remote syslog host set Syslog messages will not be sent Syslog Facility local7 myswitch configuration system syslog gt set 204 95 89 84 Remote Syslog Host 204 95 89 84 myswitch configuration system syslog gt show Remote Syslog Host 204 95 89 84
221. configuration 1 86 TCM type displaying 08 1 79 TCM uptime displaying 06 1 79 Technical Support 0 00 ee eee ii terminating paths adding 00 1 388 deleting 00 1 386 displaying a 1 389 displaying advanced information 1 390 through path addig a wus corded inii Meee baa 1 381 deleting os ie ise cies aniti 1 381 through paths displaying 66 1 384 displaying advanced information 1 385 time zone displaying 0 0 1 326 se UNG Ka aves e aka KaT hard 1 327 timeout displaying for an AMI SESSION 55 1 328 timezone setting onthe TCM 1 82 timing configuring on a switch 1 351 displaying on a switch 1 351 timing information displaying for TCM 1 92 timing references displaying for TCM 1 88 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Index TP25 network modules displaying configuration of 1 232 loopback a 1 232 traffic contracts 1 369 traffic policing displaying fora port 1 220 transfer protocol configuring onan SCP 1 337 U UNI protocol configuring on a signalling channel 1 354 units displaying for UPC contracts 1 328 unlisted users changing privilege level 1 273 displaying privile
222. configuration atmroute pnni node gt show Node PnniNodeID Level Lowest Rstrn dh 80 160 47 000580ffe1000000f21a3509 ff1a35090001 00 80 true false PeerGroupID PnniAtmAddress 80 47 000580ffe1000000f2000000 47 000580ffe1000000f21a3509 ff1a35090001 00 Ptses OperStat AdminStat Shutdown ForeLevel ForeArea DomainId DomainName 60 up false 5 5 1 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Node The index number of this node PnniNodeID The peer group identifier of the peer group to which this node belongs Level The PNNI hierarchy level of the node Lowest True means that this node is a lowest level node This is a read only field Rstrn Shows whether or not this is a restricted transit node true means that it is and false means that it is not PeerGroupID The peer group ID of the peer group to which this node belongs PnniAtmAddress The node s ATM end system address Ptses The number of PTSEs that belong to this node i e the number of PTSEs that are present in this node s database OperStat The current status of this node Up means the node is currently active Down means the node is currently inactive 1 52 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description AdminStat Reflects any changes that you have made to the status of the node Up means you want the node to become active Down means you want the no
223. configure NSAP prefixes to display ILMI registered NSAP addresses to configure NSAP to E 164 address mappings and to configure a table of LECS addresses that switches can query when attached LECs ask for the registered LECS address To list the available commands type at the nsap level myswitch configuration nsap gt prefix gt ilmi gt e1645 registry 1 11 1 NSAP Prefix Configuration Commands These commands enable you to delete an NSAP prefix create an NSAP prefix and display NSAP prefix information You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the prefix level O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration nsap prefix delete new show 1 11 1 1 Deleting an NSAP Prefix This command lets you remove an existing NSAP prefix Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration nsap prefix gt delete lt port gt lt vpi gt lt prefix gt 1 11 1 2 Creating an NSAP Prefix This command lets you create an NSAP prefix Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration nsap prefix gt new lt port gt lt vpi gt lt prefix gt The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number for this NSAP prefix vpi The virtual path number for this NSAP prefix prefix The NSAP prefix for this entry 1 Because multiple prefixes are not supported on the same port delete the old prefix before creating
224. currently configured on the switch enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane les gt show Index AdminStatus OperStatus LesSel Type MTU ELAN SECURE TLVs L up up 0x10 ethernet 516 default disable enable LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481a42bb 10 BUS 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481a42bb 10 Co Located 2 up up 0x50 ethernet 516 eng enable disable LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 50 BUS 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 50 Co Located c5000580ffe1000000f21c10bb0020481c10bb10 ANYCAST LECS 0x47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00a03e000001 00 PEER 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020482a55a0 70 3 up up 0x90 ethernet 516 mktg disable enable LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c16bb 90 BUS 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c16bb 90 Co Located c5000580ffe1000000f21c10bb0020481c10bb66 ANYCAST PEER 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 24aa 0020481a6754 33 PEER 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 26bb 0020481b4852 44 PEER 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 32bb 0020481c6940 50 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Index The unique index number of the LES that identifies it from other LESs This number is dynamically assigned by the switch when the LES is created AdminStatus Reflects any changes that you have made to the status of the LES up means you have started the LES down me
225. d lt new local password gt Retype new local password lt new local password gt New userid mktg created with local authentication user privileges and network login access The parameters for modify and new are defined as follows Parameter Description userid The name of the userid that you want to create modify The maximum size is 16 charac ters Any characters are allowed except the colon character and a blank return auth local securid The authentication method for this userid local means that the correct local password for this userid must be supplied to log in to a switch securid means that the correct SecurID passcode must be supplied to log into a switch There are some exceptions See the Network Configuration manual for your switch for more information about these authentication methods and the exceptions The default is local priv admin user The privilege level for this userid admin means a person with this userid is allowed to use all AMI commands user means a person with this userid can use all AMI com mands except the following conf security login backup conf security login delete conf security login modify conf security login new conf security login password to modify passwords other than your own conf security login restore conf security login show all conf security login securid com mands all conf security ipaccess commands all conf security nsapfiltering comma
226. d the new switch name is stored in the CDB and persists across reboots Also the prompt name changes immediately to match new switch name as long as the prompt name has not been changed explicitly using the lt new prompt option under conf system prompt For example myswitch configuration switch name fishtank fishtank configuration switch 1 1f the switch name is changed using SNMP you must log out and then log in again for the prompt name to change over to match the new switch name AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 323 AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 4 Setting the Maximum Number of Reserved VCls for PMPs This command lets you change the upper end of the range of the block of VCIs that are reserved for point to multipoint PMP SVCs on all paths and all ports on this switch fabric This range defaults to 155 255 which ensures that 101 PMP SVCs can always be created regardless of the number of point to point PP SVCs PVCs can be created on these VCIs but no PP SVCs may use these VCIs PMP SVCs attempt to allocate a VCI outside this range only if all of the VCIs in the range have already been allocated You should change the default range only if the number of PMP SVCs that the switch must always be able to set up is greater than 101 Each LANE 1 0 ELAN requires two or three PMP SVCs so if you are using more than 33 ELANs you should increase the PMP reserved VCI range However since older versions of soft
227. d 1b1 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual If you configure a PNNI SPVC on a Circuit Emulation Services CES connection you must set the following appropriate values for the options under conf spvc pnni new For bearerClass X A C use X For clip no yes use no When creating an SPVC the fqos and bgos options must be either both class0 or both a non zero class For example the fqos cannot be class0 and the bgos be classi This combination is invalid Having an fqos of class0 and a bqos of class is a valid combination and having an fgos of class1 and a bgos of class4 is a valid combination but having an fqos of class2 and a bqgos of class0 is not valid 1 305 oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinByUuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 19 2 3 Configuring PNNI SPVC Parameters The pacing parameters under conf spvc pnni parameters pacing regulate the call setup cycle for SPVCs that are down established but currently not active The pacing cycle is as follows 1 For all SPVCs in the down state attempt the lt number gt of SPVC call setups 2 Pause for lt interval gt seconds between attempts 3 If unsuccessful go to step 1 Rerouting parameters regulate whether or not to evaluate periodically the efficiency of the routes used by the PNNI SPVCs that are up established and currently active If enabled the rerouting cycle is as follows 1 Check the current call rou
228. d allows you to display information about the configuration of the IP interfaces Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration ip gt show interface state address 100 up 127 0 0 1 ie0 up 169 144 229 45 asx0 down qaao up 169 144 230 45 qaal down qaa2 down qaa3 down IP Forwarding State not forwarding The fields in this display are defined as follows netmask broadcast mtu 255 0 0 0 N A 4096 255 255 255 0 169 144 229 255 1500 255 255 255 0 N A 9180 Field Description interface The name of the IP interface state The administrative state of the IP interface address The IP address of the IP interface netmask The netmask address of the IP interface broadcast The broadcast address of the IP interface mtu The MTU size of the IP interface Only the Classical IP interfaces qaa0 qaal qaa2 and qaa3 have a configurable MTU size You may also designate a single interface to be displayed by entering show and the specific interface name at the prompt as follows myswitch configuration ip show ie0 address 169 144 229 45 interface state ied up IP Forwarding State not forwarding netmask 255 255 255 0 broadcast 169 144 229 255 mtu 1500 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those listed above in the example for showing the configuration of all of the IP interfaces 1 108 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configurati
229. d primary data transfers 0 Failed secondary data transfers 0 File transfer status 0 File transfer error message Primary trap status crXfrNoError Secondary trap status crXfrNoError The fields in these displays are defined as follows Field Description Admin status Shows if call recording is on enabled or off disabled The default is off Primary URL The primary URL for call record or performance monitoring transfers Secondary URL The URL is to be used in the event that the transfer to the primary URL is not successful Recording The interval at which the the relevant information is transferred to the host The default is interval 5 minutes Data server The userid to be used for the data transfer sessions to the primary and secondary data userid servers Memory Specifies what portion of the processor DRAM is to be reserved for call records The allocated default is 15 Valid values are from 1 50 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 319 AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Memory overflow action The action that the switch fabric takes if the memory allocated for call records runs out rejectCall means that the call is rejected noRecord means that the call is allowed but no call record is generated for that call The default is rejectCall Failed primary data trans fers The number of failed data transfers to the primary data server Faile
230. d secondary data trans fers The number of failed data transfers to the secondary data server File transfer status One of the following messages describing the status of the current file transfer primary InProgress secondaryInProgress primarySucceeded secondarySuc ceeded bothFailed If the data transfer is not successful refer to the message in the Primary trap status or Secondary trap status field File transfer error message A text message describing the status of the last failed file transfer Primary trap status The trap status of the file transfer to the primary URL The trap status is crXfrNoError at the start of the data transfer process If an error condition occurs a trap is generated and this field is updated to reflect one of the following error conditions crXfrNoResponseFromServer crXfrAccessViolation crXfrDiskFullorAllocationExceeded crXfrOtherError Secondary trap status The trap status of the file transfer to the secondary URL The trap status is crXfrNoEr ror at the start of the data transfer process If an error condition occurs a trap is gener ated and this field is updated to reflect one of the error conditions listed above If call records have not been configured you receive the following message myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt show cr Callrecords not configured If performance monitoring has not been configured you receive the following message
231. de to become inactive so you can modify one or more of the parameters Shutdown On a rare occasion the topology database TDB can get into an unrecoverable error state which causes the PNNI logical node to shut down If this happens the OperStat field is set to down the Shut down field is set to t rue and an error message is sent to the console Then the node quits participating in PNNI activities such as sending hello packets per forming the database exchange performing path computation etc Other AMI conf atmr pnni node commands such as admin modify and delete are disabled Other AMI commands under display atmr pnni are disabled except for link and peer and debug dump atmr pnni tdb is disabled To clear the condition and bring the node up again you must reboot the switch The default value is false ForeLevel The level of the area to which this PNNI node belongs in the FORE hierarchy The default is 5 ForeArea The ID of the area in the FORE hierarchy to which this PNNI node belongs The default is 5 Domainld The index number of the domain to which this node belongs The default is 1 DomainName The name of the domain to which this node belongs if one has been assigned 1 When you change the administrative status from down to up it takes a few seconds for the operational change to occur and to be reflected in the Operstat field Therefore it is possible for the display to show the Adm
232. defined as follows So Parameter Description 3 8 ftp tftp ftp means that FIP is the transfer protocol to be used when performing file transfers on 4 o S 3 To display the protocol that is currently being used enter protocol at the system level myswitch configuration system protocol Default transfer protocol tftp This field is defined as follows Parameter Description Default Transfer Protocol ftp means that FIP is the transfer protocol that is being used when performing file trans fers on this SCP and tftp means that TFIP is being used When the transfer protocol is set to FIP each time that you use a command that requires the use of FIP you are prompted for the remote userid and password of the remote host to which you are transferring a file or from which you are retrieving a file For example myswitch operation gt upgrade lt remotehost gt lt full path to remotefile gt Will upgrade directly to flash remote userid lt remote userid gt remote password lt remote password gt AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 337 AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 5 System Log Configuration Commands Syslog is a tool that can send system messages to be logged to a user specified remote host These commands let you configure the address of the remote syslog host and whether or not these messages are sent to the console Enter syslog at the system level to show the list of availab
233. difications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void this user s authority to operate this equipment NOTE The ASX 200WG the ASX 200BX the ASX 1000 and the ForeRunnerLE 155 have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide rea sonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equip ment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of the equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense DOC CLASS A NOTICE This digital apparatus does not exceed Class A limits for radio noise emission for a digital device as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le present appareil numerique n emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils nume riques de la class A prescrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communica tions du Canada VCCI CLASS 1 NOTICE CORE B HAHLARE ALERE BV CHA SNARE HRE CHM LEWMCORRBMER ILE HE LARUE S RMSE ERG BAA VCCHEM IAA
234. dify and new are defined as follows Parameter Description nodeix The index number of the source node for which a static route is being configured address The source address prefix 19 bytes long len The number of significant bits in the source address prefix index The index number for this static route This is used in combination with address and len More than one static route can be configured on a given port with the same address and len values as long as the index numbers are different port lt port gt The number of the port to which the static route is attached vpi lt vpi gt The virtual path number to which the static route is attached mtag lt mtag gt The metrics tag from the conf pnni metric menu that is associated with this static route domain_id The domain identifier of this domain the domain from which the static route is originating address The destination address prefix 19 bytes long len The number of significant bits in the destination address prefix dest_domain_id The domain identifier of the destination domain 1 38 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 1 4 Displaying PNNI Exterior Reachability Address Information This command lets you display information about any statically configured reachability addresses between this domain and other domains These routes allow two directly connected d
235. display the list of available subcommands by typing ip at the configuration level myswitch configuration cec slotx ip gt address admin broadcast mask route gt show AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 73 AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 3 1 1 Configuring the IP Address This command lets you configure an IP address for one of the TCM s IP interfaces Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec slotx ip gt address lt interface gt lt address gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description interface Indicates the name of the IP interface to be managed address Indicates the IP address for this interface 1 5 3 1 2 Configuring the IP State This command lets you enable or disable the IP interfaces on the TCM Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec slotx ip gt admin lt interface gt up down These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description interface Indicates the name of the IP interface to be managed up down Entering up enables the designated interface Entering down disables the designated inter face 1 5 3 1 3 Configuring the IP Broadcast Address This command allows you to modify the broadcast address for one of the TCM s IP interfaces Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec slotx ip gt broadcast lt interface gt 0 1 These parameters are defined as follows
236. e gt These parameters are defined as follows So Parameter Description 3 92 7a port The port number on which CAC is to be configured D o Bia enable disable enable means CAC is active on this port disable means CAC is not active on this port ii The default is enable 3 If you change the CAC state on a port you will be asked to reset the network module For example myswitch configuration port cac la3 disable Changing the CAC state on a port must be followed by a reset of the network module for the new CAC setting to become effective Note that changing the CAC state from disabled to enabled may result in the loss of previously provisioned connections Change the CAC state n y Reset the network module n y Network module 1A reset The CAC state is always enabled on the control NOTE a port CTL and is always disabled on CEM network modules and on the backplane module E on an ASX 1000 and a TNX 1100 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 179 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 5 CDVT Port Configuration Command This command lets you modify the input Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT on a per port basis Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port gt edvt lt port gt lt us gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the CDVT is to be changed us The new value for t
237. e A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 149 AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 6 3 Displaying Traffic Models for a Series LC Network Module This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on a Series LC network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic Ic models Cell Table Model Memory Memory Ucasts Mcasts Cells Counters Name 1 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 32768 0 default 2 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 16384 1 one counter 3 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 8192 2 two counters 4 256Kx64 64Kx32 6144 512 32768 2 default 5 512Kx64 64Kx32 6144 512 65536 2 default 6 256Kx64 32Kx32 4096 1024 24576 1 more mcast 7 256Kx64 64Kx32 4096 1024 32768 2 more mcast 8 512Kx64 64Kx32 4096 1024 65536 2 more mcast The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Model The shared memory model for this configuration This is the number to enter for the lt mode1 gt parameter when using the conf module traffic lc setmodel command Cell Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports in units of 64 bit words x64 Table Memory The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports in units of 32 bit words x32 Ucasts The maximum number of unicast connections supp
238. e LECS database file The default is lecs cfg Default LES The default LES address to use in case the LECS configuration file is inaccessible If a default LES address has not been specified this field is not displayed LES BUS Information Index The unique index number of the LES that identifies it from other LESs This number is dynamically assigned by the switch when the LES is created 1 112 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description AdminStatus Reflects any changes that you have made to the status of the LES up means you have started the LES down means you have stopped the LES OperStatus Reflects the actual current status of the LES up means the LES is currently active down means the LES is currently inactive LesSel The selector byte portion 20th byte of the ATM address in hexadecimal format of the switch that is the LES Type ethernet means the LAN type is Ethernet token ring means the LAN type is Token Ring MTU The maximum data frame size Can be 1516 4544 9234 or 18190 The default for Ethernet is 1516 The default for Token Ring is 4544 ELAN The name of the ELAN that this LES services SECURE enable means that ELAN access control is running disable means that ELAN access control is not running TLVs enable means the LES accepts TLV parameters from LEC MPCs that register with it and distributes these TLVs to LEC MPCs in response to
239. e Stamp SRTS clock recovery is to be enabled on this connection on indicates that SRTS is enabled off indicates that SRTS is disabled The default is off fupc lt index gt The UPC contract type to be used in the ingress direction of the connection See Section 1 24 in this manual for more information about UPC contracts bupc lt index gt The UPC contract type to be used in the egress direction of the connection See Section 1 24 in this manual for more information about UPC contracts cas Indicates whether Channel Associated Signalling CAS is to be used on the connection basic indicates that CAS will not be used cas indicates that CAS will be used The default is basic partialfill Indicates how many of the available 47 payload bytes in each cell are used before they are deemed full and ready for transmission across the ATM network i e how much of the ATM cell contains data and how much is filler The range for this parameter is 5 to 47 The default value is 47 for 47 bytes of data partialfill is used to minimize network transmis sion latency and is useful especially with time sensitive robbed bit signalling sources AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 95 O e 3 3 D 5 2 O uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description reassCDVT lt cdvt gt The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance for cells being received by the segmentation
240. e call records and performance monitoring used for bill ing purposes You can display the list of available subcommands by typing callrecord at the switch level myswitch configuration switch callrecord new modify enable disable delete password show 1 20 1 1 Creating Call Record and Performance Monitoring Variables This command lets you configure new call record or performance monitoring transfer vari ables Enter the following parameters myswitch conf switch callrecord gt new cr perf lt primary URL gt lt secondary URL gt lt userid gt interval lt recording interval in minutes gt Note lt primary URL gt and lt secondary URL gt are of the form lt ip address gt port lt pathname gt lt filename gt The following is an example of how to set up the variables for a call record transfer myswitch conf switch callrecord gt new cr 169 14 149 90 us bob info cr switcha 169 14 0 90 us bob info cr switcha bob interval 1 1 314 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 1 2 Modifying Call Record and Performance Monitoring Variables This command lets you modify the call record or performance monitoring transfer variables Enter the following parameters myswitch conf switch callrecord gt modify cr perf primary lt primary URL gt secondary lt secondary URL gt userid lt userid gt interval lt recording interval in minutes gt Adv
241. e changed on off on means that PRBS is enabled on this port and the Pseudo Random Bit Sequence Gener ator PRSG will provide an unframed 215 1 test sequence as defined in Recommenda tion O 151 on this port off means that PRBS is disabled on this port The default is off 1 12 9 6 Configuring DS1 Port Scrambling This command allows you to change the scrambling mode on a port on the DS1 network mod ule Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port dsl gt scrambling lt port gt on off These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the scrambling mode is to be changed on off on indicates that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port off means that cell pay load scrambling is disabled on this port Only the payload of the ATM cells is scrambled The default is off The scrambling mode should be set to the same status on both the transmitting side and the receiving side 1 194 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 9 7 Showing the DS1 Port Configuration This command allows you to display current information about all of the ports on a DS1 net work module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port dsl gt show Port Carrier Stat Mode Framing Loopback Timing PRBS Scram Length EmptyCells 1A1 no 0x124 hcs ESF none internal N A off Lt110 unassigned 1A2 no 0x12
242. e improvement threshold forrerouting 1 309 setting the interval for rerouting 1 308 setting the number to check for rerouting 1 308 setting the number to pace 1 307 setting the pacing interval 1 307 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Index point to multipoint connections PMP3 paggamit ba 4n wane 1 324 point to multipoint SVCs PMPs 1 325 policing displaying fora port 1 220 pools configuring 0 1 321 configuring for PMP calls 1 322 configuring for PP calls 1 322 displaying 1 323 port and priority traffic information displaying on a Series C network module 1 236 displaying on a Series D network module 005 1 248 displaying on a Series LC network module 005 1 239 displaying on a Series LE network module 1 242 port configuration displaying 1 220 port queue size configuring on a Series C network module 1 236 configuring on a Series D network module 1 245 configuring on a Series LC network module 1 239 configuring on a Series LE network module 1 242 port state configuring 1 177 primary clock source TEM AA AA 1 87 primary timing mode 1 86 prompt name changing 00 1 336 displaying
243. e information see the Network Configuration manual for your switch ilmi Enables ILMI for this interface only when a host is connected However this parameter must be set to down if you set the interface type parameter to IISP The default is up side The switch user side or network side If the connection is to a host choose network If the connection is to another switch one switch must be user and the other switch must be network when configuring the interface type as IISP or as publicUNT If the type is not IISP or publicUNI then you do not need to specify this value it is determined auto matically type The interface type to use for this signalling channel auto means the interface type is determined dynamically publicUNI means this signalling channel is used between this switch and a public switch IISP is used for switch to switch signalling privateNNI means this signalling channel is using the PNNI protocol privateUNI means this signal ling channel is used between this switch and a host The default is auto You must specify both the version and the type if you want one of them to be something other than auto For a list of the allowable combinations and more information see the Network Configuration manual for your switch sigvci The VCI to use for signalling messages ilmivci The VCI to use for ILMI messages insigupc The index number of the UPC traffic contract to be applied to the inp
244. e listed in the example above If no Series C network modules are installed the following is displayed myswitch configuration module traffic c gt show No Series C traffic information is available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 147 AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 6 Configuring Traffic on a Series LC Network Module These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series LC net work modules To list the available subcommands type 1c at the traffic level myswitch configuration module traffic gt le epd efci models setmodel show 1 10 4 6 1 Setting EPD on a Series LC Network Module This command lets you set a threshold value for AAL5 Early Packet Discard EPD on a Series LC network module This is the static threshold in terms of a specified number of cells at which EPD is activated AAL5 packets that arrive when the shared buffer is over this thresh old are discarded in whole Enter the following parameters myswitch conf module traffic lc gt epd lt module gt UBR lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module to be configured for Early Packet Discard UBR If UBR is entered the AAL5 packet drop threshold is used for AAL5 UBR connections only If UBR is not entered the AAL5 packet drop threshold is used for all other AAL5 con nections number of cells The AAL5 packet drop threshold to
245. e port level All 155 Mbps and 622 Mbps network modules E gt use this same set of commands regardless of whether they are singlemode multimode OC 3 OC 12 or UTP network modules myswitch configuration port gt sonet emptycells loopback mode scrambling show timing 1 12 19 1 Configuring SONET Port Empty Cells Empty cells are cells that are sent as filler or place holders when there is no real data to send By sending these cells network modules that are synchronous in nature can keep an even flow of traffic moving so that distributed timing can work properly This command lets you change the type of cells sent as empty cells on a SONET network module port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port sonet gt emptycells lt port gt idle unassigned These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the type of empty cells is to be changed idle unassigned The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned The default is unassigned 1 Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting 1 224 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 19 2 Con
246. e remote userid and password of the remote host from which you are retrieving the file If you have configured the transfer protocol to be TFIP this is the default using conf system protocol the remote host from which the file will be retrieved must be running the TFIP server code If you are unsure of how to do this see the Installation and Maintenance manual for your switch 1 270 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 7 8 2 Deleting a SecurID File This command lets you delete either the SecurID configuration file sdconf rec or the node secret file The configuration file contains information that the SecurID server and the switch need to communicate with each other The node secret file is a string of about 16 bytes that the switch receives the first time it contacts the server This string which is known only to the server and this switch is used in encrypting messages between the server and the switch Both of these files are stored in the FLASH This command is only available to users with admin privileges Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security login securid gt delete conf secret gt So These parameters are defined as follows S fe 33 Parameter Description 5 E o conf Indicates the SecurID configuration file sdconf rec is to be deleted from FLASH bid A secret Indicates the node secret file is to be deleted from FLASH
247. e requested quality of service for this SPVC in the forward called to calling direction Clip no means this PNNI SPVC is not susceptible to clipping an yes means it is susceptible to clipping Cost The current call routing cost for this originating PNNI SPVC If the SPVC is down shows N A Reroute Enable means this SPVC will be examined to see if it is using a sub optimal route If it is it is rerouted according to the parameters in conf spvc pnni parameters reroute Disable means this SPVC will not be examined to see if it is using a sub optimal route FtpnniDtl The Designated Transit List DTL index assigned to this SPVC The DTL specifies the pre ferred call routing for the SVC portion of the SPVC An asterisk before the DTL index means the SVC is not currently being routed according to the specified DTL because the route in the DTL has failed or because the switch cannot locate the route 1 312 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Name The optional name assigned to this PNNI SPVC to help identify it If no name is assigned N A is displayed Domainid The PNNI domain ID number on the source local switch fabric QoSExpIndex The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class to parameter expansion when sending the SPVC call set up message across a PNNI link See the QoSExpIndex field under conf qos show for this number Last Failure Cause
248. e round robin and smoothed modes Service for these connec tions are scheduled with both fixed rate R from the rate controller and they have an entry in the appropriate round robin queue Multicast connections cannot be shaped using E gt the rate controller all multicasts use the round robin queues When using the Series D memory models under conf module traffic d setmodel1 models 1 and 4 limit you to a maximum of 8K connections in the rate controller models 2 and 5 limit you to a maximum of 12K connections in the rate controller and models 3 and 6 limit you to a maximum of 10K connections in the rate controller AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 247 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 4 6 Displaying Port Traffic on a Series D Network Module This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on all of the Series D network modules Enter the following myswitch configuration port traffic d gt show Queue Thresholds Port Class Size CLPO 1 CLP1 1C1 ABR 256 15000 256 1C1 VBR 256 15000 256 1C1 CBR 256 15000 256 1C1 UBR 256 15000 256 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers of each Series D network module installed in the switch fabric Class The traffic type for this port Queue Size The reserved queue size for this port and priority in cells CLP0 1 Threshold The value at which cells a
249. ec slotx gt name linus AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 77 AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 3 3 Serial Port Configuration This command lets you display configuration information for the RS 232 serial port on the front panel of the TCM You can display the available subcommand by typing at the rs232 level myswitch configuration cec slotx rs232 gt show 1 5 3 3 1 Displaying Serial Port Information This command allows you to display the settings for the RS 232 serial port on the TCM Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec slotx rs232 gt show Port Type Speed Flow Bits Stops Parity A rs232 9600 none 8 one none The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port Shows the physical port designation Type Shows the signalling standard used Speed Shows the receive transmit rate in bits per second Flow Shows the type of flow control implemented on the given port Bits Shows the number of bit times in a single character Stops Shows the number of stop bits in a character frame Parity Shows the parity setting for the ports 1 78 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 3 4 Displaying TCM Information This command lets you display information about the TCM to which you are logged in Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec slotx gt show TCM linus Type cec plus up 0 da
250. ections Therefore all Series LE modules in a switch should either use models 1 3 OR model 6 The Series LE network modules can only use the following traffic memory models 1 2 3 and 6 2 The switch software must be restarted for this command to take effect 1 156 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 7 5 Displaying Traffic on a Series LE Network Module This command lets you display traffic model information on the Series LE network modules Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic le gt show Cell Table UBR EFCI EFCI Module Memory Memory Model EPD EPD On Off 1B 256Kx64 32Kx32 2 16499 16499 64 L 1C 256Kx64 32Kx32 2 16499 16499 64 1 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description o Z Module The network module that has been configured S 9 Cell Memory The size of this shared memory cell RAM configuration x64 3 a Table Memory The size of this shared memory table RAM configuration x32 a PI Model The shared memory model used for this network module See conf module trafficle S models for more information EPD The AAL5 packet drop threshold for CBR VBR and ABR traffic on this network module in cells UBR EPD The AAL5 packet drop threshold for UBR traffic on this network module in cells EFCI On The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set turned on signalling congestion for ABR traffic in ce
251. ed for any single connection on this route INF means that you did not specify a value for this parameter when the route was created so the value defaults to the capacity available on the outgoing link FLAGS A means this link supports ABR traffic E means that this route supports Early Packet Dis card EPD AE means this link supports both ABR traffic and EPD No flags indicate that neither EPD nor ABR traffic are supported on this link If you have not configured any static routes then the following message is displayed myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni staticroute gt show No NSAP static route information is available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 33 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 15 Setting the ForeThought PNNI Switch Prefix Mask This command allows you to select the ForeThought PNNI switch prefix mask value Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt swmask lt mask gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description swmask The mask that gives the number of leading bits in the switch prefix used to aggregate the addresses that belong to the switch in ForeThought PNNI The default is 104 1 The switch software must be restarted for this command to take effect Therefore you must be in a local AMI session to perform this command 1 3 3 16 Setting a Minimum Virtual
252. ed for the BITS interface on the TCM SF consists of 12 frames of 192 bits each with the 193rd bit provid ing error checking and other functions esf Indicates that Extended Superframe ESF framing should be used for the BITS interface on the TCM ESF provides frame synchronization cyclic redundancy and data link bits mf MF indicates that multiframe E1 framing is used crc4mf CRC4MF indicates that multiframe E1 framing with CRC 4 checksums is used 1 5 4 1 3 BITS Level Configuration This command lets you configure the output level dB of the DS1 BITS interface or E1 BITS interface for this TCM This command is only applicable to DS1 BITS interfaces myswitch configuration cec timing bits gt level 0 6 1 2 1 8 2 4 3 0 The parameters for configuring are defined as follows Parameter Description 0 6 Indicates that the output level for the BITS interface is 0 6 dB 1 2 Indicates that the output level for the BITS interface is 1 2 dB 1 8 Indicates that the output level for the BITS interface is 1 8 dB 2 4 Indicates that the output level for the BITS interface is 2 4 dB 3 0 Indicates that the output level for the BITS interface is 3 0 dB 1 84 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 4 2 Failover Timing Configuration This command lets you configure the timing failover delay You can display the available sub command by typing failove
253. ed on the UPC contract of the connection svcOff means no AAL5 VBR SVCs are sub jected to packet discard For VBR PVCs AAL5 packet discard is enabled based on the UPC contract of the connection AAL5 Packet Discard UBR allon means all AAL5 UBR connections are subjected to packet discard allof means no AAL5 UBR connections are subjected to packet discard svcOn means all AAL5 UBR SVCs are subjected to packet discard For UBR PVCs AAL5 packet discard is enabled based on the UPC contract of the connection svcOff means no AAL5 UBR SVCs are sub jected to packet discard For UBR PVCs AAL5 packet discard is enabled based on the UPC contract of the connection Tag All UBR allon means all UBR connections are tagged as non compliant set to CLP 1 a110ff means no UBR connections are tagged svcOn means all UBR SVCs are tagged UBR PVCs are tagged based on their UPC contract svcOff means no UBR SVCs are tagged UBR PVCs are tagged based on their UPC contract AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 223 O e 3 3 D 5 2 O uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 19 SONET Port Configuration Commands These commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of all of the ports on a SONET network module The following SONET commands are available only when a SONET network module is installed in the switch fabric You can display the list of available subcommands by typing sonet at th
254. ed within the metric set Cbr RtVbr NrtVbr Abr true means that the RAIG applies to this type of traffic false means that it does not Ubr ClpType clpEqual0 means that the advertised GCAC parameters apply to CLP 0 traffic clpEqual0Or1 means that the advertised GCAC parameters apply to CLP 0 1 traffic Adminw The administrative weight PCR The peak cell rate ACR The available cell rate CTD The cell transit delay CDV The cell delay variation CLR The cell loss ratio for CLP 0 traffic CLR1 The cell loss ratio for CLP 0 1 traffic CRM The cell rate margin VF The variance factor 1 46 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands You can also display information about a specific node tag direction or index as follows myswitch configuration atmroute pnni metric gt show lt nodeix gt lt tag gt incoming outgoing lt index gt myswitch configuration atmroute pnni metric gt show 1 1 Node Tag Direction Index Cbr 1 1 incoming 1 PCR 4294967295 CLR 4294967295 RtVbr NrtVbr Abr Ubr false false false false false ACR 4294967295 CLR 4294967295 CTD usec 4294967295 CRM 4294967295 If no metrics have been configured then the following is displayed myswitch configuration atmroute pnni metric gt show No metric information is available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual ClpType clpEqual0
255. eference Manual 1 369 AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description cbr Indicates CBR traffic cbr0 Indicates CBRO traffic vbr Indicates VBR traffic vbr0 Indicates VBRO traffic pcro Indicates the peak cell rate for cells with CLP 0 per01 Indicates the peak cell rate for all cells scr0 Indicates the sustainable cell rate for cells with CLP 0 scr01 Indicates the sustainable cell rate for all cells mbs0 Indicates the maximum burst size for cells with CLP 0 mbs01 Indicates the maximum burst size for all cells tag tag means that non conforming CLP 0 cells are tagged Otherwise they are dropped The default is that they are dropped This option only applies to the PCRO parameter of the CBRO contract and to the SCRO and MBSO parameters of the VBRO contract cdvt us The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT associated with the peak cell rates in micro seconds If the CDVT is not specified here the default CDVT value associated with the port will be used See conf port show and conf port cdvt for more information noGCRA noGCRA means that GCRA policing is disabled on CBR or VBR depending on what is configured connections using this contract If noGCRA is not entered then GCRA policing is enabled on CBR or VBR depending on what is configured connections using this con tract By default noGCRA is not entered GCRA policing is enabled You must use
256. el myswitch configuration security ipaccess gt accept delete ssr Isr all show These commands are only available to users who NOTE d have admin privileges See Section 1 16 1 7 5 for more information about admin privileges 1 16 1 1 Configuring an Authorized IP Address This command lets you create an entry in the table of authorized IP addresses from which IP packets will be accepted The switch performs inbound filtering by determining if there is a match between the header source address and the table of authorized incoming IP addresses If the addresses match the packets are accepted provided that they meet the requirements set up by the conf security ipaccess ssr Isr and all commands otherwise they are rejected The table of authorized IP addresses which can contain a maximum of 32 entries will persist across a reboot Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security ipaccess gt accept lt ipaddr gt lt mask gt By applying a mask to an IP address entry you can specify a wild card range of allowable addresses For example an IP address of 163 26 54 6 with a mask of 255 255 255 255 means only address 163 26 54 6 is accepted against that entry However an IP address of 163 26 54 6 with a mask of 255 255 0 0 means addresses 163 26 are accepted against that entry 1 260 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 2 Deleting an Authorized IP Address This command let
257. el 4 Cost of link to PGSN 100 Cost of link to PGSN computing method default FORE PNNI border switch functionality is enabled The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Switch NSAP prefix The switch s NSAP prefix Switch Prefix Mask The switch prefix mask value of high order bits to use for aggregating addresses on the switch for routing purposes Peer Group Mask The peer group mask value of high order bits to use for aggregating addresses on the switch for routing purposes Hello Indication Interval The period of time between transmissions of hello indication messages NSAP Indication Interval The period of time between transmissions of NSAP indication messages Max hop count for NSAP router The maximum number of hops to use when routing a connection for the NSAP router Proportional Multiplier The threshold above which the change in ACR on any link is considered to be significant Minimum Threshold for NSAP updates The minimum threshold bandwidth value for triggering NSAP updates Minimum VC level The minimum number of VCs that need to be available on a path to make that path usable again after the number of available VCs has dropped to 0 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 35 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Fore Area The ID of the area in the FORE
258. emote loopback causes received data to be transferred to the upstream system as well as to be looped back to the transmitter on this port none none designates that no loopback will take place on this port This is the default setting 1 12 21 2 Showing the TP25 Port Configuration This command allows you to display current information about a TP25 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port tp255 show Port Carrier Media Loopback RxTiming Al no A2 no A3 no A4 no A5 no A6 no B1 yes B2 yes B3 no B4 yes B5 no B6 yes 1 232 TD Tp TD TD none Yes none Yes none Yes none Yes none Yes none Yes none Yes none Yes none Yes none Yes none Yes none Yes AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands The fields in this display are defined as follows 1 A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port but it does not guarantee the signal is the proper frequency Field Description Port The TP25 port number of the network module s currently installed in the switch Carrier yes means a carrier has been detected on this port no means a carrier has not been detected on this port Media The kind of physical medium connected to the TP25 interface UTP means that it is Unshielded Twisted Pair Loopback The loopback mode on the port Can be either line or none RxTimin
259. emptycells lt port gt idle unassigned These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the type of empty cells is to be changed idle unassigned The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned The default is unassigned 1 Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting 1 12 12 2 Configuring the E3 Port Loopback This subcommand allows you to designate the type of loopback on a port on an E3 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port e3 gt loopback lt port gt cell payload diag line none These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the loopback mode is to be changed cell payload diag line ce11 loopback means the E3 stream received from the network is unframed into ATM none cells The cells are then reframed and transmitted back to the network payload loopback means the E3 stream received from the network has the E3 overhead bits re inserted and is retransmitted to the network diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the trans mitter The E3 stream transmitted by the switch to a port is l
260. entify this service from any other service in the same class Found under the Index field using the conf lane les show command LES index range x y The range of index numbers of the LES that you want to start or stop The index is found under the Index field using conf lane les show up down up changes the administrative status of the designated LES index to up down changes the administrative status of the designated LES index to down AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 131 AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 5 3 Creating a LES This command lets you create a new LES Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane les gt new lt LES Selector Byte HEX gt lt LES name gt bus lt BUS Selector Byte HEX gt type ethernet token ring mtu 1516 4544 9234 18190 N secure wka lt LECS ATM Address gt registertlvs enable disable anycast lt LES Anycast ATM Address gt peers lt atm addr gt The parameters for new are defined as follows Parameter Description LES Selector Byte HEX The 20th byte of the ATM address of the switch that is to run a LES service entered in hexadecimal format This command starts a co located BUS which means that the LES and BUS services for a particular ELAN are running on the same switch You cannot create a BUS separately By default the LES and BUS will use the same selector byte BUS Selector By
261. entries in the QOS expansion table Enter the following myswitch configuration qos gt show QoSExp Qos Index Class fCtd us fCdv us bCdv us ECLe bClr Name 0 0 ANY_VAL ANY_VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL def class 0 expn 0 1 ANY_VAL ANY_VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL def class 1 expn 0 2 ANY_VAL ANY_VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL def_class_2_expn 0 3 ANY_VAL ANY_VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL def_class_3_expn 0 4 ANY_VAL ANY_VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL def class 4 expn The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description QoSExpIndex The index into the QOS expansion table that is used to associate signalling interfaces with expansion table entries QoSClass Specifies the QOS class that is to be expanded into parameterized QOS IEs Can have a value of 0 to 4 fCtd us The maximum acceptable forward CTD value to be used for this expansion Can range from 0 to 16777215 microseconds any_value means that any amount of cell transfer delay is acceptable fCdv us The maximum acceptable forward CDV value to be used for this expansion Can range from 0 to 16777215 microseconds any_value means that any amount of cell delay varia tion is acceptable bCdv us The maximum acceptable backward CDV value to be used for this expansion Can range from 0 to 16777215 microseconds any_value means that any amount of cell delay varia tion is acceptable fClr The maximum acceptable forward CLR value to be
262. er of the ISP table entry get getnext get means the SNMP request you are creating is a get which searches for the object that you are requesting gnext means the SNMP request you are creating is a getnext which searches for the next greatest entry in the MIB after the object that you specify oid The object identifier OID for the SNMP request that you want to get or getnext comm The SNMP community string to use doOnce The SNMP request is to be performed only once doEveryllmiRestart The SNMP request is to be performed each time that ILMI restarts on the specified path 1 100 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 7 4 Displaying the ISP Table Entries This command lets you display the current ISP table entries Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration ilmiproxy gt show ISP Entry Port 1Al Vpi 0 Index 3 Req_Oid pli 3h Ba Idee od Rsp_Oid iiss Ba bada leet Operation get Community private z When to do doOnce OT o O Value OI 1 3 6 Loka ES A 3 Q h Operation Status success 32 na na AA centr AOE EER AMA RN Ee Nah a Ba AD MR DD ODS EOD Ng 3c o Bia ISP Entry Port 1Al Vpi 0 Index 12 ET AA ee See et AA ee AL a ko Req Oid gleS Gale 8d 826 dhaLahaLL60 Rsp_Oid N A Operation get Community private When to do doOnce Value N A Operation Status failure Req_Oid mio L22 LIN LO Rsp_Oid PLS HOw Pe 2a ls ts 30 Operation get Community public When to do doOnce
263. er server adding aaa ae aerate wa eee tae 1 134 configuring addresses 1 133 deleting 00 1 135 domain CLEAHNG suse eset a ama ka 1 18 deleting iue mers earan e a 1 18 displaying information 1 19 modifying 08 1 18 DS1 BITS interface configuring coding 1 83 configuring framing 1 84 configuring output level 1 84 DS1 CES network modules displaying information 1 184 framing a 1 181 line coding 1 183 line length 00 1 181 line status 00 00 0000 1 182 loopback paaa aa aaah NG 1 183 DS1 network modules displaying configuration of 1 195 empty cells a 1 191 line length 1 192 loopback 0 0 cee eee 1 193 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual mode of operation 1 193 PRBS osetia he ee ot es 1 194 scrambling 06 1 194 Labag LA AA 1 196 DS3 network modules displaying configuration of 1 200 empty cells 1 197 AMING a na mau edna 1 197 line length a 1 198 loopback a 1 198 mode of operation 1 199 scrambling a 1 199 TIMING 33ANG Kain 1 201 DTL adding m ap eek SER Bae 1 22 deleting 0 0008 1 21 displaying all 1 23 displaying an individual list 1 23 modifying 08 1 21 DT
264. ered in dotted decimal notation e g 255 255 255 0 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 121 AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description wellknown manual The configuration mode that is used when this LEC joins the ELAN wellknown means that the LEC first attempts to discover the LECS address using ILMI If the LEC discovers more than one LECS address the LEC tries to connect to the LECS in the order that the addresses appear in the list This list can be configured using conf nsap registry new and displayed using conf nsap registry show If there are no addresses in this list then the LEC attempts to contact the LECS using the ATM Forum well known address manual and the lecs option means that the LEC attempts to contact the LECS using the LECS address you specified here manual and the les option means that the LEC bypasses the LECS and directly contacts the LES address specified here The default is wellknown lecs lt LECS address gt The LECS address to use instead of the well known LECS address les lt LES address gt The LES address to use for this ELAN If you create a LEC and then change the NSAP prefix of the switch at a later time the change is NOT automatically reflected in the LEC s address You must delete the LEC and recreate it using the new NSAP prefix The following is an example of how to create a LEC myswitch configuration l
265. erver address for this interface Enabled Shows whether or not ARP server service is enabled for this interface AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 2 1 2 Setting the ARP Server Address This command allows you to set the address of the RFC 1577 ATM ARP server Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration atmarp arpserver gt set lt NSAPaddress gt lt interface gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description NSAPAddress The ATM network layer address for the RFC 1577 ATM ARP server interface Enter the Classical IP interface that will be the arpserver qaa0 qaal qaa2 or qaa3 The default is qaa0 The switch itself can be used as an ARP server To do this set the ARP server address to be the NSAP address of the switch s control port port CTL 1 2 2 Deleting an ARP Entry This command allows you to remove an ARP entry from the ATM ARP cache Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration atmarp gt delete lt host gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description host The IP address of the endstation for which the outgoing ARP entry is to be deleted If you have ILMI enabled on your switch ILMI gt creates an ATM ARP cache entry for each address that it registers These entries cannot be deleted using this command 1 10
266. es 1 148 configuring EPD 1 148 displaying traffic memory models 1 150 displaying traffic model information 1 152 setting traffic memory models 005 1 151 Series LE network modules 1 153 configuring EPD 1 153 displaying traffic memory models 0005 1 155 displaying traffic model information 1 157 setting traffic memory models 0005 1 156 signalling channel adding 00 1 353 applying NSAP filters 1 357 carrier loss 1 355 changing the default VCI 1 354 configuring the mode 1 355 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual configuring the scope 1 355 deleting a 1 352 displaying 1 358 displaying ATM information 1 360 displaying ATM routing information 1 363 displaying IE filter information 1 366 displaying NSAP filter information 1 368 displaying protocol information 1 361 displaying public information 1 365 displaying timer information 1 364 modifying 00 1 352 QOS expansion 1 355 SSCOP no response timer 1 355 Smart Permanent Virtual Circuit 1 298 SNMP community changing oe nra enes na a n 1 285 SNMP SETs disabling 00 1 285 displaying
267. ex gt cas basic cas partialfill lt partialfill gt reassCDVT lt cdvt gt bufSize lt bufSize gt integ lt integ gt 1 94 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands SRTS is only available on unstructured connections which are created by specifying a11 for the lt timeslots gt parameter The cas and partialfill options are not applicable to unstructured mode Structured mode is selected by indicating the exact timeslots to be used For example timeslots 1 2 and 3 would be entered as 1 3 timeslots 2 4 and 6 would be entered as 2 4 6 and combinations such as 1 4 9 11 12 are allowed The parameters for new are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the CES connection is to be created timeslots Indicates which timeslots 1 24 for DS1 1 31 for E1 are being configured for a particular PVC a11 indicates unstructured service The time slot assignments may be either contig uous or non contiguous DS0s oport The output port of the CES connection which can be a CES port or an ATM port ovpi The output Virtual Path Identifier VPI of the CES connection when the output port is not a CES port ovci The output Virtual Channel Identifier VCI of the CES connection when the output port is not a CES port ots The output timeslots of the CES connection when the output port is a CES port srts Indicates whether Synchronous Residual Tim
268. f an expansion entry is created without some of the values specified for some of the QOS classes then it is assumed that any value is acceptable for all the parameters If such a partially specified QOS expansion table is used to create a signalling interface or originating SPVC then no new expansion entries can be added to this table You will be able to add the unspecified expansion entries once all of the signalling interfaces and originating SPVCs referencing the partially specified table are deleted Enter the following myswitch configuration qos gt new lt QoSExpIndex gt lt QoSclass gt name lt name gt z fwdCtd lt ctd us any_value gt o Npa fwdCdv lt cdv us any value backCdv lt cdv us any_value gt S 9 fwdClr lt clr any value backClr lt clr any_value gt 32 25 o g These parameters are defined as follows o 53 Parameter Description QosExpIndex The index into the QOS expansion table that is used to associate signalling interfaces with expansion table entries QoSclass Specifies the QOS class that is to be expanded into parameterized QOS IEs Can have a value of 0 to 4 name lt name gt An optional text string associated with this entry to help you identify it fwdCtd The maximum acceptable forward CTD value to be used for this expansion Can range lt ctd us any_value gt from 0 to 16777215 microseconds Specifying any_value or 16777215 means that you are
269. f the primary clock source before the TCM switches to the secondary clock source If no TCM is installed then the following is displayed myswitch configuration cec timing gt show No ESI board found AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 93 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 6 CES Configuration Command The ces commands let the user create and delete CES connections as well as display the sta tus of existing connections You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the ces level myswitch configuration ces gt new delete show These commands are not available locally on an gt LE 155 switch 1 6 1 Creating a New CES Connection To create anew CES connection you must set several parameters Enter the following to create a new CES connection myswitch configuration ces gt new lt port gt lt timeslots gt The CES new command can also be used as shown below When the following parameters are used by default an appropriate entry is made in the UPC table and a bidirectional PVC is cre ated with the proper UPC index or new lt port gt lt timeslots gt oport lt oport gt ots lt ots gt or new lt port gt lt timeslots gt oport lt oport gt ovpi lt ovpi gt ovci lt ovci gt The following advanced options can be used when creating CES connections advanced options srts on off fupc lt index gt bupe lt ind
270. f this interface for UBR traffic The default is 5040 You can also display the PNNI interface of a specific port or specific port and vpi as follows myswitch configuration atmroute pnni gt interface show lt port gt lt vpi gt myswitch configuration atmroute pnni gt interface show la2 0 Port VPI Node PortID AggrT VPCap CbrW RtVbrW NrtVbrW AbrW UbrW 1A2 0 N A Ox10000001 O false 5040 5040 5040 5040 5040 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 43 AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 4 PNNI Metric Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure PNNI metric sets You can display the list of avail able subcommands by typing at the metric level myswitch configuration atmroute pnni metric gt delete modify new show 1 3 4 4 1 Deleting a Metric Set This command lets you delete a metric set Enter the following parameters myswitch conf atmroute pnni metric gt delete lt nodeix gt lt tag gt incoming outgoing lt index gt 1 3 4 4 2 Modifying a Metric Set This command lets you modify a metric set Enter the following parameters myswitch config atmroute pnni metric gt modify lt nodeix gt lt tag gt incoming outgoing lt index gt cbr rtvbr nrtvbr abr ubr clpEqual0 clpEqual00r1 adminw lt adminw gt per lt pcr gt acr lt acr gt ctd lt ctd gt edv lt cdv g
271. face A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release Parameter Description port The port on which the minimum queue size is to be set z CBR VBR ABR I UBR Specifies for which traffic type CBR VBR ABR or UBR to set the minimum queue size Q o 32 number of cells The queue size to be assigned to the traffic type designated in the previous parameter The Ej 3 default is 256 cells 52 o Bia CI 3 2 The network module must be reset for this command to take effect 1 12 22 2 3 Displaying Port Traffic on a Series LC Network Module This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on all of the Series LC network modules Enter the following myswitch configuration port traffic lc gt show CLP Port Prio Thrsh QSize LD1 ABR 256 256 LD1 VBR 256 256 LD1 CBR 256 256 LD1 UBR 256 256 LD2 ABR 256 256 LD2 VBR 256 256 LD2 CBR 256 256 LD2 UBR 256 256 LD3 ABR 256 256 LD3 VBR 256 256 LD3 CBR 256 256 LD3 UBR 256 256 LD4 ABR 256 256 LD4 VBR 256 256 LD4 CBR 256 256 LD4 UBR 256 256 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 239 AMI Configuration Commands The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers of each Series LC network module installed in the switch fabric Prio The traffic type for this port
272. figuration of the ports on a El CES network module The following cesel commands are available only when a El CES network module is installed in the switch fabric To list the available subcommands type cesel at the port level myswitch configuration port cesel admin crc4 ts16 linestatus loopback show gt So These commands are not available locally on an 39 NOTE a ASX 200WG nor on an LE 155 switch 3S 3c oS 3 1 12 74 Enabling Disabling CES on a Port This command lets you enable or disable Circuit Emulation Services CES on a particular E1 CES port Enter the following myswitch configuration port cesel gt admin lt port gt up down These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The E1 CES port on which CES is to be enabled or disabled up down Indicates whether CES is to be enabled or disabled on the selected port up means that CES will be enabled down means that CES will be disabled 1 185 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 7 2 Configuring CRC4 Framing on an E1 CES Port This command lets you change the CRC4 framing type on a E1 CES port This command lets you specify whether or not the E1 CES port performs a CRC4 error check Enter the following myswitch configuration port cesel gt crc4 lt port gt ON OFF These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The
273. figuring SONET Port Loopback This command enables you to configure the type of loopback mode on a SONET port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port sonet gt loopback lt port gt line diag path none These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description ort The port number on which the loopback mode is to be changed P P p 8 line Line connects the transmitter to the receiver The data stream received from the fiber is retransmitted out to the fiber In line loopback the port acts as if it were an optical repeater Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over the fiber This option is valid for all SONET network modules O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY diag Diagnostic connects the receiver to the transmitter The SONET stream transmitted by the fiber to a port is looped back to the fiber The stream is still transmitted over the fiber but the incoming stream is ignored This option is valid for all SONET network modules except for Series C OC 12 network modules path path means that the loopback point is between the TPOP and RPOP blocks and the trans mit parallel stream is connected to the receive stream This option is valid ONLY for Series C OC 12 network modules none none means no loopback will take place on this port The default is none 1 12 19 3 Configuring SONET Port Mode This command lets you designate the mode to be used on a
274. for OC3 network modules 3 796 cells sec per port and for DS3 E3 DS1 and E1 network modules 1 898 cells sec per port When you change the rate limit the software will ask you if you want to update the configura tion database To abort the command type n or press lt ENTER gt If you wish to change the rate limit enter y at the prompt as follows myswitch configuration port traffic d gt ratelimit lal 1412830 Changes to the rate limiting state of a port are stored in the configuration database and do not take effect until the network module is reset Do you want to proceed with a change to the configuration database rate limiting entry for this port Proceed with database update n y The switch will then calculate the rate limit and give you the closest value to your requested value that it can It then responds with the actual rate that it will give you Actual rate limit is 1412829 You must reset the network module for this command to take effect so the switch will then prompt you to reset the network module If you wish to reset the network module enter y at the prompt as follows Reset the network module n y 1 246 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 4 5 Scheduling Port Traffic on a Series D Network Module This command lets you schedule the way that traffic is serviced on the output side of a Series D network module for SVCs and PVCs Enter the following para
275. for Computing the Cost of a Link This command lets you select the method of computing the cost of a link from a border node to the peer group summary node PGSN Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt pgsncost default user cost lt cost gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description default The border node automatically calculates the cost to the PGSN by taking half of the aver age cost from this node to all other border nodes in this peer group This cost is dynamic The link to the PGSN from this border node will be advertised using the value that you specify with the cost parameter user cost lt cost gt Enter the administrative weight for the link that you want the border node to use during path computation The route which takes the least cost is chosen The default cost for all links in the network is 100 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 29 AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 12 Setting the ForeThought PNNI Switch Prefix When using ForeThought PNNI a switch fabric is identified by an NSAP switch prefix which consists of 13 fixed bytes The variable 13 byte mask configured using conf atmroute ftpnni swmask determines which bytes are actually significant This command lets you set the ForeThought PNNI prefix on the switch Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt prefix lt prefix gt
276. g AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 171 AMI Configuration Commands 1 11 4 ILMI LECS Address Registry Commands These commands let you configure a table of LECS addresses per port The LAN Emulation Client LEC on the user side of the ATM UNI port uses ILMI to query the attached switch for the registered LECS address You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the registry level myswitch configuration nsap registry gt show delete new 1 11 4 1 Displaying the ILMI LECS Address Registry This command lets you display the contents of the ILMI LECS address registry Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration nsap registry gt show Port Type Instance Nsap Address 1A1 LECS HE 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 23c0 0020481a23c0 55 1A1 LECS 2 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 00d0 0020481b7821 00 1A1 LECS 1 Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 116f 002048103086 02 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port number for the interface An to the left of the port number means that entry is still being created and is not active yet Type This is a read only field that indicates the type of service that is available at the given NSAP address Instance A user configurable index number that distinguishes between addresses when multiple LECS addresses are assigned to the same port Nsap Address The LECS address assigned to this port
277. g Indicates whether or not the port is receiving an 8kHz timing sync marker These markers can be used to derive an 8kHz signal that can be transmitted from all ports on the network o module and back to the switch fabric on switches that support timing features No means Re the port is not receiving sync pulses Yes means the port is receiving sync pulses 3 2 3 Q 7 uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 233 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 Port Traffic Configuration Commands These commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on an individ ual port on a network module on the switch You can display the list of available subcom mands by typing at the traffic level myswitch configuration port traffic gt c gt 1c les d gt 1 12 22 1 Configuring Port Traffic on Series C Network Modules These commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on an individ ual port on a Series C network module on the switch You can display the list of available sub commands by typing at the c level myswitch configuration port traffic c gt cdv clpl efci qsize show 1 12 22 1 1 Configuring Cell Delay Variation on a Series C Network Module On a Series C network module there are two output queues that are 256 cells deep by default one for Constant Bit Rate CBR and one for Variable Bit Rate VBR The Cell Delay Variation CDV for CBR is calcula
278. g channel AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 361 AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Allocation Scope The allocation policy for a network side signalling channel If set to vp the network side signalling channel allocates connections in its containing VP only If set to link the sig nalling channel allocates connections in its containing VP and may allocate connections in other VPs in the range 0 to 255 that are available to it The link option is only available for UNIs on VP 0 The default is vp for FI PNNI and link for PNNI Mode The mode to be used for signalling If set to nonAssoc Non associated signalling the signalling channel encodes the connection identifier with Non associated signalling bits If set to vpAssoc VP associated signalling the signalling channel encodes the connec tion identifier with the VP associated signalling bits The default is nonAssoc for FT PNNI and vpAssoc for PNNI except VP 0 which must be nonAssoc QosExpIndex The index number of the set of QoS expansion entries See the QosExpIndex field under conf qos show for this number For call set up messages that originate on this signalling channel and are routed through a PNNI network these entries are used to perform the QoS expansion procedures For more information see the ATM Forum PNNI Specifica tion A value of 0 means that the default QoS expansion entries will be used CarrierLossAction The actio
279. g configured cbr vbr ubr The class of service for which you are configuring packet discard allOn a1lOn means all connections SVCs and PVCs of the specified class of service leaving on this port are subjected to packet discard allOff alloff means no SVCs and PVCs connections of the specified class of service leaving on this port are subjected to packet discard svcOn svcOn means all SVCs of the specified class of service leaving on this port are subjected to gt packet discard PVCs are subjected to packet discard based on their UPC contract This is o the default S Q svcOff svcOff means no SVCs of the specified class of service leaving on this port are subjected E to packet discard PVCs are subjected to packet discard based on their UPC contract 2 o5 3 For example to enable packet discard on all CBR SVCs and PVCs on port 2B4 enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration port gt aal5packetdiscard 2b4 cbr allOn 1 12 2 Configuring the State of a Port This command allows you to change the state of a port to be up on line or down off line When a port is down all signalling and communication is disabled This command is useful for taking a port out of service temporarily to perform diagnostics Enter the following param eters myswitch configuration port gt admin lt port gt up down These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description
280. g for network modules 1 6 displaying on the CEC Plus 1 72 enabling 000 1 3 enabling on the CEC Plus 1 70 fesetting carrere ion BASAG 1 5 setting for network modules 1 7 alternate CLP threshold configuring on a Series D network module 1 244 Alternate Mark Inversion AMI CODING Pada Serta act Ja ick Oeics 1 83 AMI displaying the inactivity timeout 005 1 328 setting the inactivity timeout 1 349 AMI session timeout displaying 06 1 328 anycast address configuring 0 1 132 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual ATM ARP cache adding a Classical IP PVC CUILY ama Gin Stet ahas 1 12 adding a FORE IP PVC entry 1 12 adding an IP to NSAP address mapping entry 1 11 deleting an entry 1 10 displaying a 1 13 flushing ases oioi sat adai a 1 11 ATM ARP server address displaying ooe h h 1 9 Senp o o Ms iti 1 10 audit logging AMI 2 aanak hatte aie aa ia 1 343 disabling sok see aa asana 1 342 displaying the state 1 342 enabling 008 1 342 MAK ABA ANA 1 347 SNMP a aaa AGANG 1 345 authentication method for logins 1 268 automatic timing mode 1 86 Available Cell Rate ACR 1 30 B B8ZS coding 0c eee eee 1 83 bandwidth overbooking on a port configuring
281. g from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric UPC contract index associated with this PNNI SPVC Source The NSAP ATM address for the originating side of the PNNISPVC Destination PORT The port number of this terminating PNNI SPVC at the destination end if the destination end is a FORE switch If the port at the destination switch cannot be determined a ques tion mark is displayed Destination VPI The virtual path number on the destination switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC Destination VCI The virtual channel number on the destination switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC Destination UPC The backward going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric UPC con tract index associated with this PNNI SPVC Destination VPVC SEL NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI VCI combination that the destination switch should use when this PNNI SPVC was created If the destination switch is a FORE switch the values are displayed in the Dest ination VPI and Destination VCI fields If the destination switch is not a FORE switch a is displayed in the Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields Require means that the destination switch must use the VPI VCI combination given when the PNNI SPVC was created Destination STATE The state of this SPVC Can be up or down Destination The NSAP ATM address for the terminating side of the PNNI SPVC AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 311
282. g on an E1 CES Port 12 7 3 Reserving TS16 for Signalling on an E1 CES Port AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Table of Contents 1 12 7 4 Displaying E1 CES Port Line Status 1 187 1 12 7 5 Configuring E1 CES Port Loopback 1 188 1 12 7 6 Displaying the E1 CES Port Configuration 1 189 1 12 8 Configuring Port Delay aaaea eee eee 1 190 1 12 9 DS1 Port Configuration Commands aaaea 1 191 1 12 9 1 Configuring DS1 Port Empty Cells 1 191 1 12 9 2 Configuring DS1 Port Line Length 1 192 1 12 9 3 Configuring DS1 Port Loopback 1 193 1 12 9 4 Configuring DS1 Port Mode 00 005 1 193 1 12 9 5 Configuring Pseudo Random Bit Sequence Generation 1 194 1 12 9 6 Configuring DS1 Port Scrambling 1 194 1 12 9 7 Showing the DS1 Port Configuration 1 195 1 12 9 8 Configuring DS1 Port Timing a 1 196 1 12 10 DS3 Port Configuration Commands eee 1 196 1 12 10 1 Configuring DS3 Port Empty Cells 1 197 1 12 10 2 Configuring the DS3 Port Framing 1 197 1 12 10 3 Configuring DS3 Port Line Length 1 198 1 12 10 4 Configuring the DS3 Port Loopback 1 198 1 12 10 5 Configuring the DS3 Port Mode 1 199 1 12 10 6 Configuring the DS3 Port Scrambli
283. g to the standby SCP os Indicates that the switch software will be copied from the controlling SCP to the standby SCP Password Indicates that the password file will be copied from the controlling SCP to the standby SCP The password file contains all of the userid information Securid Indicates that the SecurID sdconf rec configuration file will be copied from the control ling SCP to the standby SCP Secret Indicates that the SecurID node secret file will be copied from the controlling SCP to the standby SCP Init Indicates that the FLASH on the standby SCP will be re initialized Loader Indicates that the Mini Loader will be copied from the controlling to the standby SCP 1 Only the version of switch software to which CURRENT is pointing is copied to the standby SCP CAUTION 1 334 Using the Init option formats the FLASH on the standby SCP This removes all information from the FLASH AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 2 9 Setting the Failover Threshold This command lets you set the threshold time in seconds that the standby SCP will wait to receive a heartbeat from the controlling SCP before taking control of the switch Enter the fol lowing at the prompt myswitch configuration system dualscp gt threshold lt seconds gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description The threshold time in seconds that the standby SCP waits for a heartbeat f
284. ge level 1 273 UPC contract adding ana Ee 1 369 configuring on the input signalling channel anan HA Gens 1 354 configuring on the output signalling channel 1 354 deleting a 1 369 displaying 4 1 372 displaying traffic management fags sce eee 1 373 UPC contracts displaying the type of units used 1 328 userid changing a password 1 269 changing login access 1 267 changing privileges 1 267 changing the authentication method 04 1 267 Greatness 1 268 deleting sj oie eee ee 1 266 Index 13 Index displaying all enabling disabling the finger mechanism modifying 00 setting a password setting login access setting privileges setting the authentication method whoamicommand userid login file backing up 000 restoring aa V VCI allocation range configuring a vemark displaying aa SQN Vii nk NA NENA KAG virtual channel displaying maximum number 005 virtual path Ad GING AA AA deleting canis wa baa eevee es displaying 08 displaying advanced information displaying maximum number 005 virtual path terminator CLEANING wa Pear Ma deleting cos otac anisa ini eaa displaying 08 displaying
285. ged explicitly using the lt new prompt gt option If you want to change the prompt name back to the default switch name prompt use the default option This command is useful for shortening the mp prompt name if the switch name is very long However if you change the switch name after you have changed the prompt name ensure that you go back and update the prompt name If you open a remote AMI session using the open command an asterisk is displayed in front of the remote switch s prompt to designate which one is the local switch and which is the remote one Remote switches always use the remote switch s name as the prompt 1 1f the switch name is changed using SNMP you must log out and then log in again for the prompt name to change over to match the new switch name 1 336 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 4 Changing the System Protocol This command lets you configure which transfer protocol is used when performing file trans fers for the following AMI commands conf lane lecs get conf security login backup and conf security login restore oper upgrade oper cdb backup oper cdb restore oper flash get and oper flash put To change the protocol that is used enter the following parameters myswitch configuration system gt protocol ftp tftp this SCP and t tp means that TFIP is to be used The default value is tftp A i gt This parameter is
286. gnalling gt delete lt port gt lt vpi gt 1 23 2 Modifying a Signalling Channel This command allows you to modify an existing signalling channel Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt modify lt port gt lt vpi gt incomingfilter lt filter id gt none defaultcpn lt NSAPaddress gt enable disable outgoingfilter lt filter id gt none iefilter one or more of eg cgs cds bl1i b11i23 bh1li aal enable disable iepass one or more of cg cgs cds blli b1li23 bhli aal 1 352 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 23 3 Creating a Signalling Channel This comm and lets you create a signalling channel Enter the following parameters Before a signalling channel can be created on a given VPI an originating and a terminating path must exist for that same VPI myswitch configuration signalling gt new lt port gt lt vpi gt atm laye protocol atmroute timer op public o iefilter version auto uni30 uni31 pnnil0 ilmi up down side user network type auto publicUNI IISP privateNNI privateUNI r options sigvci lt vci gt ilmivci lt vci gt insigupe lt upc index gt outsigupe lt upc index gt minvei lt vci gt maxvei lt vci gt options sig_alloc vp link auto sig_mode nonAssoc vpAssoc auto qos exp lt QoSExpIndex g
287. h configuration switch callrecord gt disable cr Are you sure you want to disable Callrecords n y Callrecords disabled These parameters for enable and disable are defined as follows Parameter Description perf The performance monitoring functionality is to be enabled disabled cr The call recording functionality is to be enabled disabled memory Specifies what portion of the processor DRAM is to be reserved for call records Changing this value affects the amount of memory available for signalling and routing and may result in increased call blocking A change in this value takes effect only after the next call record initialization i e when the Admin status changes from off to on or when the switch fabric is rebooted Valid values are from 1 50 The default is 15 action The action that the switch fabric should take if the memory allocated for call records runs out rejectCall means that the call is rejected noRecord means that the call is allowed but no call record is generated for that call If this value is changed it takes effect immediately The default is rejectCall 1 Ensure that the switch time and date are set correctly using oper date before enabling the call recording feature using conf switch callrecord enable cr Otherwise your call records will not be accurate Disabling call records or performance monitoring means that this information will not be recorded or transferred H
288. h this switch belongs This num ber goes into the most significant byte of the SPANS ATM address SPANS NNI border switch If this functionality is enabled this switch is a SPANS NNI border switch If it is functionality is disabled disabled this switch is not a SPANS NNI border switch AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 65 AMI Configuration Commands 1 4 Switch Board Configuration Commands This submenu lets you configure default values for the switch board Type at the board level to display the available subcommands myswitch configuration board gt clockscale oam show 1 4 1 Configuring the Clock Scaling Factor on a Switch Board This is an advanced command that lets you set the clock scaling factor for traffic policing on a switch board The switch board represents units of time i e burst tolerances in internal units of clock ticks Because of the 40 MHz clock used on the switch fabric the maximum unit of time that can be used by the traffic policing hardware is 0 838 seconds However the burst tol erance of some VBR connections is larger than 0 838 seconds so they can not be correctly policed by the switch To accommodate these cases it is possible to scale the clock to represent larger amounts of time with the same number of ticks Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration board gt clockscale lt board gt lt factor gt These parameters are defined as follows P
289. han this threshold This threshold is used instead of the VC CLP1 threshold if the conf port traffic daltclpconfig command is applied or if it is enabled using the A1tCLP option under conf upc new 1 164 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands You can also display traffic model information about an individual Series D network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic d gt show lt module gt myswitch configuration module traffic d gt show 1A Cell UBR EFCI EFCI AAL5 Module Memory Model EPD EPD On Off PktCnt 1A 256Kx32 2 14717 14717 256 192 disable The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those listed previously You can also display traffic information about the Series D network modules on a per class basis Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic d gt show lt module gt myswitch configuration module traffic d gt show perclass VC Thresholds Module Priority CLPO 1 CLP1 LA CBR 3072 2048 A VBR 3072 2048 A UBR 3072 2048 A ABR 3072 2048 B CBR 3072 2048 B VBR 3072 2048 B UBR 3072 2048 B ABR 3072 2048 C CBR 3072 2048 VBR 3072 2048 C UBR 3072 2048 C ABR 3072 2048 D CBR 3072 2048 D VBR 3072 2048 D UBR 3072 2048 D ABR 3072 2048 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual perclass AltVC Thresholds CLPO 1 CLP1 4080 256 fo 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinByuod INY
290. has taken effect you can display the alarms myswitch configuration alarms5 show AlarmType AlarmStatus MinorAlarm MajorAlarm powerSupplyInputFailed inactive disabled enabled powerSupplyOutputFailed inactive disabled enabled fanBankFailed inactive disabled enabled tempSensorOverTemp inactive disabled enabled linkFailed inactive enabled disabled spansFailed inactive enabled disabled netmodRemovedHighPrio inactive disabled disabled netmodRemovedLowPrio inactive disabled disabled Major alarm relay status off Minor alarm relay status off AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 3 AMI Configuration Commands 1 1 3 Disabling an Alarm This command lets you disable an alarm Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration alarms gt disable major minor alarm type These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description major Indicates that a major alarm is being disabled minor Indicates that a minor alarm is being disabled alarm type Indicates the kind of alarm condition Valid alarm types are displayed in the AlarmType field for configuration alarms show For example to disable a link failure as a minor alarm enter the following parameters myswitch configuration alarms gt disable minor linkFailed To verify that the change has taken effect you can display the alarms myswitch configuration alarms gt show AlarmType AlarmStatus MinorAlarm MajorAlarm powerSupplyInputFailed
291. he standby SCP every time the CDB is written to FLASH on the controlling SCP The standby SCP then rereads the CDB once it has been completely received In addition you can configure the controlling SCP to automatically copy the password file to the standby SCP if changes are made to it The automatic synchronization of the CDB and E gt password file can be disabled but you must remember to manually update these files to the standby SCP when they are modified on the controlling SCP To configure automatic synchronization enter the following at the prompt myswitch configuration system dualscp gt autosync enable disable These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description enable Indicates that automatic synchronization will be enabled on the SCP This is the default disable Indicates that automatic synchronization will not be enabled on the SCP CAUTION Enabling autosync does not cause the automatic synchronization of switch software only the CDB password file and other system configuration files are synchronized 1 330 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 2 3 Configuring SCP Failover This command lets you enable or disable failover to a second SCP in the event of a hardware failure on the controlling SCP CAUTION If failover is disabled the standby SCP will not take control of the switch fabric if the controlling SCP fails regardless of how
292. he CDVT setting in microseconds 1 12 6 DS1 CES Port Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure the ports on a DS1 CES network module The follow ing cesds1 commands are valid only when a DS1 CES network module is installed in the switch fabric You can display the list of subcommands by typing cesds1 at the port level myswitch configuration port gt cesdsl admin framing length linestatus loopback mode show These commands are not available locally on an E gt ASX 200WG nor on an LE 155 1 12 6 1 Enabling Disabling CES on a Port This command lets you enable or disable CES on a DS1 CES port Enter the following myswitch configuration port cesdsl gt admin lt port gt up down These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The DS1 CES port on which CES is to be enabled or disabled up down Indicates whether CES is to be enabled or disabled on the selected port up means that CES will be enabled down means that CES will be disabled 1 180 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 6 2 Configuring DS1 CES Port Framing This command lets you change the framing mode on a DS1 CES port Enter the following myswitch configuration port cesdsl gt framing lt port gt ESF SF These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The DS1 CES port for which the framing mode is being set
293. he LANE BUS The parameters for delete new and modify are defined as follows Parameter Description template id The unique user assigned identifier for this template A template id can be either a posi tive decimal integer index or a string name If it is specified as a numerical index then the Name field is left blank Zero is not a valid index A name may be up to 20 characters If a name is specified without an index the switch assigns a numerical index and shows it to you srcport lt port gt The source port of the call setup message An asterisk is a wild card that matches all ports srcvpi lt vpi gt The source virtual path number of the call setup message An asterisk is a wild card that matches all VPIs AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 279 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description srcnsap lt nsap gt The source NSAP address of the call setup message srcmask lt mask gt The mask that indicates the significant part of the source NSAP address to be used to find a matching address in the templates of authorized addresses A mask of 0 is a wild card that matches all addresses dstport lt port gt The destination port of the call setup message An asterisk is a wild card that matches all ports dstvpi lt vpi gt The destination virtual path number of the call
294. he connections to the host clearance and creepage distances shown in the table below are maintained between the network module and any other assemblies which use or generate a voltage shown in the table below The larger distance shown in brackets applies where the local environment within the host is subject to conductive pollution or dry non conductive pollution which could become conductive due to condensation Failure to maintain these minimum distances invalidates the approval Voltage Used or Generated Creepage mm by Host or by Network Modules Clearance mm 2 0 2 4 3 8 Up to 50 Vins OF Vac 2 6 3 0 4 8 Up to 125 Vims or Vdc 4 0 5 0 8 0 Up to 250 Vims Of Vdc 4 6 6 4 10 0 Up to 300 Vims OF Vac For a host or other expansion card fitted in the host using or generating voltages greater Above 300 Vims Or Vac than 300V rms or dc advice from a competent telecommunications engineer must be obtained before installation of the relevant equipment NOTE Installing the network modules in the appropriate FORE Systems hosts according to the installation instructions provided satisfies the requirements listed above The following tables show the available ports and their safety status NM 6 E1C and NM 2 E1C Ports Safety Status E1 Ports TNV operating at SELV Bus Connector SELV NM 4 E3C and NM 2 E3C Ports Safety Status E3 Ports TNV operating at SEL
295. he following example demonstrates this convention cd usr lt ENTER gt File names that appear within the text of this manual are represented in the following style the fore install program installs this distribution Command names that appear within the text of this manual are represented in the following style using the flush cache command clears the bridge cache Subsystem names that appear within the text of this manual are represented in the following style to access the bridge subsystem Parameter names that appear within the text of this manual are represented in the following style using lt seg list gt allows you to specify the segments for which you want to display the specified bridge statistics Any messages that appear on the screen during software installation and network interface administration are shown in Courier font to distinguish them from the rest of the text as fol lows Are all four conditions true AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual a0eJO1d Preface Important Information Indicators To call your attention to safety and otherwise important information that must be reviewed to ensure correct and complete installation as well as to avoid damage to the FORE Systems product or to your system FORE Systems utilizes the following WARNING CAUTION NOTE indicators WARNING statements contain information that is critical to the safety of the operator
296. hest level at which this reachability information can be advertised If the address has a scope indicating a level lower than the level of the node the node will not advertise it If the address has a scope indicating a level higher than or equal to the level of the node the node will advertise it to its peer group The default is 0 which means that the address will be advertised to all levels This field is read only VPcap true means that this interface has VP switching capability and false means that it does not This field is read only and set to false Mtag The metrics tag from the conf pnni metric submenu that is associated with this static route This field is read only AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 39 AMI Configuration Commands Field Description OperStatus Shows if just the summarized prefix of this address will be announced to the node s peer group if the entire address will be advertised to the node s peer group or if this address will not be announced to the node s peer group at all This field is read only Domain The domain identifier of this domain the domain from which the static route is originating Address The destination address prefix 19 bytes long Plen The number of significant bits in the destination address prefix Destn The domain identifier of the destination domain You can also display just certain portions of the reachability inf
297. hierarchy to which this ForeThought PNNI node belongs Fore Level The level of the area to which this ForeThought PNNI node belongs in the FORE hierarchy Cost of Link to PGSN The administrative weight for the link that the border node uses during path computation to the PGSN The route which takes the least cost is chosen This field is displayed on bor der switches only Cost of Link to PGSN computing method The method used for computing the link cost from the border switch to the PGSN This field is displayed on border switches only Can be default or user FORE PNNI border switch functionality is disabled If this functionality is enabled this switch acts as a ForeThought PNNI border switch If this functionality is disabled this switch does not act as a ForeThought PNNI border switch 1 36 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 ATM Forum PNNI Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure ATM Forum PNNI on a switch You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the pnni level myswitch configuration atmroute pnni gt address gt crankback gt interface gt metric gt node gt profile gt 1 3 4 1 PNNI Address Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure ATM Forum PNNI exterior reachability addresses You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the address level oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 O
298. his connection uses structured or unstructured service Clock Mode Synch means that the connection is in synchronous mode either structured or unstruc tured SRTS means that the connection is in asynchronous unstructured mode Syn chronous Residual Time Stamp SRTS clock recovery is enabled on this connection Cas basic indicates that Channel Associated Signalling CAS will not be used cas indicates that CAS will be used Partial Fill Indicates how many of the available 47 payload bytes in each cell are used before they are deemed full and ready for transmission across the ATM network i e how much of the ATM cell contains data and how much is filler The range for this parameter is 5 to 47 The default value is 47 for 47 bytes of data partialfill is used to minimize network transmis sion latency and is useful especially with time sensitive robbed bit signalling sources Max BufSize The amount of reassembly buffer space allocated for the connection The default is 512 bytes per timeslot CDVT The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance for cells being received by the segmentation and reas sembly SAR engine The range for this parameter is 100 to 24000 in us and the default is 2000 i e 2 ms Integ Period The amount of time allocated to re establish the connection before while or after the call is established or in the case of interruption The default is 2500s If no CES network modules are installed the
299. his switch advanced By entering show with advanced both basic and advanced information is displayed for the PNNI SPVCs specified in the option For example to display basic information about all PNNISPVCs on this switch enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration spvc pnni gt show Originating PNNI SPVCs Source Destination INDEX PORT VPI VCI UPC PORT VPI VCI UPC VPVC SEL STATE 402 1B4 0 402 0 3A1 0 402 0 require down Destination 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 28c8 0020480d0072 00 Terminating PNNI SPVCs Source Destination INDEX PORT VPI VCI PORT VPI VCI STATE 2 4B2 0 401 1D3 0 401 up Source 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 28d8 0020480d00b4 00 1 310 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Source INDEX The index number assigned to this PNNI SPVC by AMI to identify it uniquely from other PNNISPVCs that have this switch fabric as their source Source PORT The port number on the local switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC Source VPI The virtual path number on the local switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC any means that the user did not specify the VPI to be used at the destination Source VCI The virtual channel number on the local switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC any means that the user did not specify the VCI to be used at the destination Source UPC The forward goin
300. his threshold cells that have a CLP 1 are dropped This threshold must be less than the CLP 0 1 threshold clp01 The threshold is being set for CLP 0 1 cells Applying a CLP 0 1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold cells are dropped regardless of their CLP bit This threshold must be greater than the CLP 1 threshold threshold The number of cells in the per connection buffer at which the connection drops CLP 1 or CLP 0 1 cells These thresholds can only be adjusted in increments of multiples of 16 cells e g 16 32 48 For CLP 1 the minimum value is 0 the maximum is the CLP 0 1 thresh old 16 cells and the default is 256 cells For CLP 0 1 the minimum value is the CLP 1 threshold 16 cells the maximum is 4 080 cells and the default is 4 080 cells AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 159 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinbyuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 8 3 Setting EPD on a Series D Network Module This command lets you set a threshold value for AAL5 Early Packet Discard EPD for UBR traffic and a different threshold value for AAL5 EPD for CBR VBR and ABR traffic on a Series D network module This works differently than it does for other network modules Ona Series D network module this is the static threshold in terms of a specified number of cells at which EPD is activated AAL5 packets are discarded in whole if the
301. hold clp01 The threshold is being set for CLP 0 1 cells Applying a CLP 0 1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port and class is greater than this threshold cells are dropped regardless of their CLP bit This threshold must be greater than the clp1 threshold threshold The number of cells in the buffer at which the specified traffic type drops CLP 1 or CLP 0 1 cells This number must be entered in multiples of 8 The maximum value is the size of cell memory The default is 256 cells for CLP 1 cells and the size of cell memory for CLP 0 1 cells The Series D network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release 1 12 22 4 3 Configuring Port Queue Size on a Series D Network Module This command enables you to designate the minimum dedicated queue size for a given type of traffic on a specified port on a Series D network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configur port traffic d gt qsize lt port gt cbr vbr abr ubr lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the minimum dedicated queue size is to be set CBR VBR ABR UBR Specifies for which type of traffic CBR VBR ABR or UBR to set the minimum dedicated queue size num
302. hose in the previous example AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 63 AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 6 SPANS ATM Route Configuration Commands These commands allow you to modify various aspects of SPANS NNI on a switch You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the spans level myswitch configuration atmroute spans gt area border show In order for part of a FORE ATM cloud to be a NOTES hierarchical SPANS area all switches in that cloud must be running a software version that is at least ForeThought 4 0 or greater Otherwise SPANS connectivity between the hierarchical area and the SPANS area will be lost 1 3 6 1 Setting the SPANS Area ID This command enables you to set the SPANS area ID Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute spans gt area lt area gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description area The ID of the area in the SPANS routing hierarchy to which this switch belongs This num ber goes into the most significant byte of the SPANS ATM address The default area ID for all switches is 242 in decimal 1 The switch must be rebooted for this command to take effect Therefore you must be in a local AMI session to perform this command 1 64 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 6 2 Setting the SPANS NNI Border Switch Functionality A switch that has a link to another switch belo
303. ible limits of Class 1 for applicable wavelengths and durations These lasers are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation Do not view beam with optical instruments Single mode fiber optic network modules contain a Class 1 laser This Laser Notice section only applies to E gt products or components containing Class 1 lasers V AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Preface Safety Precautions For your protection observe the following safety precautions when setting up equipment e Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the equipment e Ensure that the voltage and frequency of your power source matches the voltage and frequency inscribed on the equipment s electrical rating label e Never push objects of any kind through openings in the equipment Dangerous voltages may be present Conductive foreign objects could produce a short circuit that could cause fire electric shock or damage to your equipment Modifications to Equipment Do not make mechanical or electrical modifications to the equipment FORE Systems Inc is not responsible for regulatory compliance of a modified FORE product Vi AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual This chapter contains a detailed description of the AMI configuration commands The main configuration menu can be found at the root level There are several commands avail able under configuration Commands that are submenus are immediately followed by a gt
304. ich the line length is to be changed The transmit clock for this port network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port network internal O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 215 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 15 LED Port Configuration Commands These commands let you configure the a model for the front panel LEDs on a Series C Series LC or a Series D SONET network module You can display the list of available subcommands by typing led at the port level myswitch configuration port gt led model show 1 12 15 1 LED Model Configuration This command lets you select an LED model to use for setting the LED colors on a per port basis on a SONET Series C Series LC or a Series D network module Typically the LAN LEDs blink when transmitting or receiving data on a port Typically the WAN LEDs illuminate solid green unless an error condition exists on a port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port led gt model lt port gt lanl wanl lan2 wan2 These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which you want to configure an LED model lanl wan1 For these models RED means a fault in the receive direction YELL
305. icted only to allow support of SVCs originating or terminating at this node true means that transit capabilities are restricted i e transit connections are not allowed and false means that transit connections are allowed The default is false ptsehd lt ptsehd gt The PTSE hold down time or the minimum interval between updates of any given PTSE The default is 10 seconds hellohd lt hellohd gt The hello hold down time or the minimum interval between successive hello message transmissions The default is 10 seconds hello lt hello gt The period of time between transmissions of hello messages keep alive messages that two nodes send to one another to verify their existence in the absence of event triggered hellos The default is 15 seconds helloinactf lt helloinactf gt The number of hello intervals allowed to pass without receiving a hello message before a link is declared down The default is 5 counts hlinkinact lt hlinkinact gt The amount of time that a node continues to advertise a horizontal link for which it has not received and processed the logical group node LGN horizontal link IG The default is 120 seconds ptserfr lt ptserfr gt The interval between two successive refreshes of a self originated PTSE in the absence of triggered updates A node re originates its PNNI Topology State Elements PTSEs at this rate to prevent other nodes from flushing these PTSEs The defa
306. ies to connect to this DLE peer server The Point to Point VCC to Peer is the VCC that is used to send or receive packets to or from this particular DLE peer server The Point to Multipoint VCC from Peer is the VCC on which packets are received by the LES from this DLE peer server when they are flooded to all of the DLE peer servers LAN Type The type of emulated LAN Can be either Ethernet IEEE 802 3 or TokenRing IEEE 802 5 Maximum Data Frame Size The length in bytes of the largest frame field Can be 1516 4544 9234 or 18190 Non proxy Control Distrib ute VCC The point to multipoint connection that the LES maintains to all of the non proxy LECs that it services Proxy Control Distribute VCC The point to multipoint connection that the LES maintains to all of the proxy LECs that it services This entry is blank if no proxy LECs have joined this ELAN Multicast Forward VCC The VCC on which the BUS forwards broadcast and multicast traffic to all the LECs Number of local clients This is the number of clients connected to this server LEC The LEC ATM address shows the MAC to ATM address mapping for each LEC in this ELAN and shows whether or not this LEC is a proxy Control Direct VCC The point to point connection that the LES maintains to this particular LEC Enter the following parameters to display advanced information about each LES that is cur rently configured on the switch I
307. igured cbr vbr abr ubr The class of service for which this threshold applies clp1 The threshold is being set for CLP 1 cells Applying a CLP 1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold cells that have a CLP 1 are dropped This threshold must be less than the CLP 0 1 threshold clp01 The threshold is being set for CLP 0 1 cells Applying a CLP 0 1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold cells are dropped regardless of their CLP bit This threshold must be greater than the CLP 1 threshold threshold The number of cells in the buffer at which the specified traffic type drops CLP 1 or CLP 0 1 cells This threshold can only be adjusted in increments of multiples of 16 cells e g 16 32 48 For CLP 1 the minimum value is 0 the maximum is the CLP 0 1 thresh old 16 cells and the default is 256 cells For CLP 0 1 the minimum value is the CLP 1 threshold 16 cells the maximum is 4 080 cells and the default is 4 080 cells 1 The Series D network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release 1 166 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 11 NSAP Configuration Commands These commands allow you to
308. iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description ilmireg disable means no prefix registration messages are sent by the network side and no address registration messages are generated by the user side ignore means the network side performs as it normally would except that addresses registered are not published into the routing database This is not recommended except in public network situations in which CPE2 equipment needs ILMI address registration in order to function correctly The default is disable This option may be used for signalling channels other than public UNIs i e specifying aut omode or IISP above However for those signalling channels ILMI registration is enabled by default even though it is not an option to be specified here This means that ILMI address and prefix registration will occur across those signal ling channels addressformat Indicates whether to use the native E 164 address format used by public UNI across this signalling channel or to use the private address format If you specify e164 you can also specify a plantype If you specify private the switch automatically uses the correct cor responding plantype For a list of the allowable combinations and more information see the Network Configuration manual for your switch e164address The native e164 address used by public UNI across this signalling channel e164mapping Indicates whether or not to resolve
309. iming Rev Serial ProductNumber 1C C up 100 0 6 no 1 0 N A NM 6 100MMSCC 1D C up 155 0 4 yes 1 1 N A NM 4 155MMSCC The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Module Shows each network module currently installed in the switch fabric 1 means that it is the switch fabric in slot 1 The letter shows the position of the network module in the switch fabric E is the intra fabric port to the other switch fabrics in an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 chassis Series The hardware series of the network module C is a Series C module LC is a Series LC mod ule C2 is a circuit emulation services CES module LE is an interface on an LE 155 switch D is a Series D module Admin up means this module is on line down means this module has been taken off line Speed The speed in Mbps of the ports Ports The number of ports on the network module Timing yes means this network module supports distributed timing and no means that it does not Rev The hardware revision level of this network module Serial The serial number of this network module Product Number The FORE Systems product number for this module NM is network module CE is circuit emulation BPB is the ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 intra fabric module 1 This field is only available for Series D modules AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 143 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Command
310. inStat as up but the OperStat as down If you refresh the display after two or three seconds the change will have taken place and be reflected You can also display timer information information about significant changes or information about a specific node Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni node show timer sigchange lt nodeix gt To display timer information enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni node gt show timer Node PtseHD HelloHD Hello HelloInactF HLinkInact PtseRfr PtseLftF Rxmt 100 msec sec sec sec sec 10 15 5 120 1800 200 5 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 53 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinbyuod INY AMI Configuration Commands The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Node The index number of this node PtseHD The minimum interval in microseconds between updates of any given PTSE HelloHD The minimum interval in microseconds between successive hello message transmissions Hello The period of time in seconds between transmissions of hello or keep alive messages in the absence of event triggered hellos HelloInactF The number of hello intervals allowed to pass without receiving a hello message before a link is declared down HLinkInact The amount of time in seconds that a node continues to advertise a horizontal link for which
311. inactive disabled enabled powerSupplyOutputFailed inactive disabled enabled fanBankFailed inactive disabled enabled tempSensorOverTemp inactive disabled enabled linkFailed inactive disabled enabled spansFailed inactive enabled disabled netmodRemovedHighPrio inactive disabled disabled netmodRemovedLowPrio inactive disabled disabled Major alarm relay status off Minor alarm relay status off 1 4 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 1 4 Resetting an Alarm This command lets you reset either the 1inkFailed alarm the spansFailed alarm or both alarms Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration alarms gt reset lt alarm type gt all These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description alarm type Indicates which alarm to reset Can be either linkFailed or spansFailed all Indicates that both the linkFai led and the spansFailed alarms will be reset For example to reset the 1inkFailed alarm enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration alarms gt reset linkFailed Alarm linkFailed reset To verify that the change has taken effect you can display the alarms myswitch configuration alarms gt show AlarmType AlarmStatus MinorAlarm MajorAlarm powerSupplyInputFailed inactive disabled enabled powerSupplyOutputFailed inactive disabled enabled fanBankFailed inactive disabled enabled
312. ing lt port gt enable disable These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which GCRA traffic policing is to be enabled or disabled enable disable enable means that GCRA traffic policing will take place on all incoming traffic on this port depending on what has been configured using conf port gcrapolicing and using the noGCRA option in the conf upc new command disable means that traffic policing will not take place on incoming traffic on this port depending on what has been configured using conf port gcrapolicing and using the noGCRA option in the conf upc new command The default is enable To enable or disable GCRA policing on incoming E gt traffic on a per port or on a per class basis it is recommended that you use the conf port gcrapolicing command instead of this command To enable or disable GCRA policing on incoming traffic on a per PVC basis for CBR and VBR connections use the noGCRA option in the conf upc new command If you change the policing settings using this command the switch issues a warning as shown in the following example myswitch configuration port gt policing 1bi1 disable This change will cause the GCRA policing state of all connections on port 1b1 to be updated to alloOff Are you sure you want to make this change n 1 218 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 17 Partial Packet Polic
313. ing CE mark applies CE168X The E1 and E3 network modules conform to safety standard EN60950 1992 following the provisions of Low Voltage Product Safety Directive 73 23 EEC and CE Marking Directive 93 68 EEC and can be marked accordingly with the CE symbol The E1 and E3 network modules conform to EN55022 1994 and EN50082 1 1992 following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and can be marked accordingly with the CE symbol National Approvals UK Network Module Connects to Approval Number with 75 Q interfaces El Structured and unstructured AA60953 PTO provided private circuits with 75 Q interfaces E3 PTO provided private circuits NS 4387 1 T 605954 Germany Network Module Connects to Approval Number E3 Structured PTO provided private circuits with 75 Q interfaces A127535H for the ASX 1000 A127534H for the ASX 200BX or ASX 200WG Switzerland Network Module Connects to Approval Number El Structured PTO provided private circuits 96 0872 J N with 120 Q interfaces E3 Structured PTO provided private circuits 96 0873 J N with 75 Q interfaces Required User Guide Statements UK Installation The use of auxiliary products not authorized by FORE Systems in FORE Systems ATM Switches may cause the power spec ification to be exceeded and is a potential safety hazard The equipment must be installed such that with the exception of t
314. ing Command When partial packet policing is enabled on a connection the GCRA policer looks for AAL5 packet boundaries by checking for cells with an EOM indicator in their cell header If the policer decides that a cell in the middle of the AAL5 packet is non conforming then all remaining cells in that AAL5 packet up to but not including the EOM cell are considered non conforming This command lets you configure partial packet policing on a per port per class basis for all CBR and or VBR PVCs and or SVCs Enter the following parameters GCRA policing must be used on any connection on which partial packet policing is being implemented This command applies only to AALS connections O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY The HDCOMP ASIC must be version 1 or greater to support AAL5 partial packet policing To display the ASIC version use the conf board show advanced command II myswitch configuration port gt pppolicing lt port gt cbr vbr a110n allOff svcOn svcOff These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which partial packet policing is being configured cbr vbr The class of service for which you are configuring partial packet policing allOn a110n means all connections SVCs and PVCs of the specified class of service on this port are subjected to partial packet policing allOff alloff means no connections SVCs and PVCs of the specified class of
315. ing enable and rebooting means that this switch will act as a ForeThought PNNI border switch disable Entering disable and rebooting means that this switch will not act as a ForeThought PNNI border switch 1 20 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 2 DTL Configuration Commands These commands let you create delete and display Designated Transit Lists DTLs A DTL is a source route for the ForeThought PNNI FI PNNI router which specifies the preferred call routing for the SVC portion of a directed SPVC A DTLis a source route index and each entry row in the DTL represents a single hop in the source route Each hop is represented by a FT PNNI node and the logical output port at that node The FI PNNI node s address is deter mined by the switch s NSAP prefix and mask The logical port is determined by the link ID and the VPI You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the dt1 level myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni dtl gt delete modify new show 1 3 3 2 1 Deleting a DTL Entry This command enables you to remove an existing DTL Enter the following parameters oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinByUuod INY myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni dtl gt delete lt index gt lt row gt all For example if you want to delete row 2 of index entry 9 enter the following myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni dtl gt delete 9 2 Similarly if you want t
316. ion delay Indicates the amount of time after the restoration of the primary timing reference before the TCM is instructed to return to the primary timing reference The default is 3 seconds AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 89 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 4 6 2 Disabling Revertive Timing Delay This command lets you disable the revertive switching for timing sources on this TCM When you disable revertive switching you only turn it off If you enable it again the TCM uses the value that you last configured for the delay using conf timing revertive delay To dis able the revertive timing delay enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec timing revertive gt disable The parameter for disabling is defined as follows Parameter Description disable Indicates that the revertive timing delay is going to be turned off This command takes effect as soon as you enter 1 5 4 6 3 Enabling the Revertive Timing Delay This command lets you enable the revertive switching delay for timing sources on this TCM When you enable the delay the TCM uses the value that you last configured for the delay using conf timing revertive delay To enable the revertive timing delay enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration cec timing revertive gt enable The parameter for enabling is defined as follows Parameter Descrip
317. ion AMI coding should be used for the BITS inter face on the TCM This means zeros are represented by 01 during each bit cell and ones are represented by 11 or 00 alternately during each bit cell This technique requires that the sending device maintain ones density Ones density is not maintained independent of the data stream b8zs Indicates that Binary 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS coding should be used for the TCM This means a special code is substituted whenever eight consecutive zeros are sent through the link This code is then interpreted at the remote end of the connection This technique guarantees ones density independent of the data stream hdb3 Indicates that High Density Bipolar HDB3 coding should be used for the TCM HDB3 is a bipolar coding method that does not allow more than 3 consecutive zeroes AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 83 AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 4 1 2 BITS Framing Configuration This command allows you to configure the framing format of the DS1 BITS interface or E1 BITS interface for this TCM You can get to this level by entering framing at the bits level Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec timing bits gt framing d4 esf for DS1 interface or framing mf crc4mf for El interface The parameters for configuring are defined as follows Parameter Description d4 Indicates that D4 also known as Superframe SF framing should be us
318. ion Commands Reference Manual 1 307 AMI Configuration Commands 1 19 2 3 2 Configuring Rerouting for PNNI SPVCs Sometimes SPVCs are forced to use a less than optimal route because of temporary link fail ures or because of an inconsistent routing database This command lets you configure the SPVC controller to check for SPVCs that are using less than optimal routes and reroute them if a better route becomes available For PNNI a path is considered better than another path if its administrative weight is lower by a specified percentage For ForeThought PNNI a path is considered better than another path if it has a lower link cost You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the reroute level myswitch configuration spvc pnni parameters reroute gt interval number show threshold 1 19 2 3 2 1 Setting the Interval between the Rerouting of PNNI SPVCs This command lets you indicate the number of seconds between callbacks to the SPVC con troller to reroute PNNI SPVCs Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration spvc pnni parameters reroute gt interval lt seconds gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description interval lt seconds gt The time interval in seconds between successive callbacks to the SPVC controller to check for and reroute existing SPVC connections if a better path becomes available The default is 10 seconds The range of valid values is 1 to 3600 incl
319. ion atmroute policy gt modify lt nodeix gt lt address gt lt len gt type internal exterior both action summary suppress advertise mtag lt tag gt 1 3 5 3 Creating a PNNI Policy Prefix This command allows you to create a new policy prefix Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute policy gt new lt nodeix gt lt address gt lt len gt type internal exterior both action summary suppress advertise mtag lt tag gt AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 61 AMI Configuration Commands The parameters for delete modify and new are defined as follows Parameter Description nodeix The index number of the node to which the policy applies address The 19 byte address prefix of the policy len The address prefix length of the policy type internal exterior both The type of reachable addresses to which the policy applies internal means the policy applies to internal reachable addresses within that node s FORE hierarchy area exterior means the policy applies to exterior reachable addresses outside of that node s FORE hierarchy area both means the policy applies to both internal and exterior addresses The default is both action summary press advertise sup The policy for exchanging dynamic reachability address prefixes Addresses matching a summary policy cause just the summarized prefix of the address to be a
320. is board despite the conf port aisrdi settings enabled returns all ports on this board to their last conf port aisrdi settings before this functionality was disabled You can also display advanced information about a switch board Enter the following myswitch configuration board gt show lt board gt advanced myswitch configuration board gt show advanced Board 1 ClockScale HDCOMPversion 1 0 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Board The number of the slot in which the board switch fabric is installed ClockScale The factor by which the clock is scaled for traffic policing HDCOMPversion The version number of the HDCOMP ASIC on this switch board 1 The HDCOMP ASIC must be version 1 or greater to support the AALS partial packet policing command under conf port pppolicing and to support changing the clockscale under conf board clockscale 1 68 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 CEC Configuration The cec commands let you configure the Timing Control Module TCM on a CEC Plus The CEC Plus is an environmental timing management subsystem To display the cec com mands a TCM must be installed in the switch You can display the list of available subcom mands by typing at the cec level myswitch configuration cec gt alarms gt slotx gt sloty gt timing gt 1 5 1 Alarms Configuration Commands This su
321. is level by entering timeout at the system level Enter the follow ing parameters myswitch configuration system gt timeout lt minutes gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description The number of minutes of non activity after which an AMI session will time out and exit you out of the session The default is 5 minutes To configure the switch so that an AMI session does not time out enter 0 It is displayed as off when you use conf system show minutes O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinbyuod INY 1 21 7 Configuring the Units for UPC Contracts This command allows you to change the type of units that are being used when configuring and displaying UPC contracts You can get to this level by entering units at the system level Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration system gt units cps kbps This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description Using cps indicates that UPC contracts are being configured and displayed in cells per second Using kbps means that UPC contracts are being configured and displayed in kilo bits per second The default is cps units AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 349 AMI Configuration Commands 1 22 Timing Configuration Commands These commands let you configure distributed timing on a switch You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the timing level myswitch configur
322. is none For example to configure slot D with a high priority enter myswitch configuration alarms module gt assign D high This assigns a high priority to slot D Then you need to decide if you want the high priority to be a major or minor alarm the major and minor alarms for network module removal are dis abled by default and enable it as such as follows myswitch configuration alarms gt enable major netmodRemovedHighPrio This makes the high priority a major alarm If a network module is then removed from slot D the NetmodStatus field shows absent as follows myswitch configuration alarms module gt show NetmodSlot NetmodPrio NetmodStatus none present B none present C low present D high absent AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 7 AMI Configuration Commands Also the AlarmStatus for netmodRemovedHighPrio is active and the Major alarm relay status is on as follows myswitch configuration alarms gt show AlarmType AlarmStatus MinorAlarm MajorAlarm powerSupplyInputFailed inactive disabled enabled powerSupplyOutputFailed inactive disabled enabled fanBankFailed inactive disabled enabled tempSensorOverTemp inactive disabled enabled linkFailed inactive enabled disabled spansFailed inactive enabled disabled netmodRemovedHighPrio active disabled enabled netmodRemovedLowPrio inactive enabled disabled Major alarm relay status on Minor alarm relay status off 1 8 AMI Configur
323. is not Applies only to CBR and VBR class of service vponly true false true means that the profile is for a VP connection and false means that it is not AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 57 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 6 4 Displaying PNNI Profile Information This command lets you display PNNI path computation profile information Enter the follow ing parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni profile gt show Node Profile Service MinFwdCR MinRevCR FwdClpType RevClpType FwdCLR RevCLR 1 1 State inactive N A N A clpEqual0 clpEqual0 N A N A ProfileType LoadBal VPOnly OptCTID OptCDV OptAdmWt NumAvd NumPref mgmtEntry false false false false aw N A N A Node Profile Service MinFwdCR MinRevCR FwdClpType RevClpType FwdCLR RevCLR I 2 State computed N A N A clpEqual0 clpEqual0 N A N A ProfileType LoadBal VPOnly OptCTD OptCDV OptAdmWt NumAvd NumPref cacheEntry false false false false aw 0 0 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Node The index number of the node to which this profile belongs Profile The index number of the profile Service Shows for which class of service this profile is used either cbr rtVbr nrtVbr abr or ubr MinFwdCR The minimum forward cell rate requirement MinRevCR The minimum reverse cell rate requirement
324. isplayed No NSAP address information is available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 169 AMI Configuration Commands 1 11 3 NSAP to E 164 Configuration Commands These commands let you display NSAP to E 164 address mapping information create an NSAP to E 164 address mapping and delete an NSAP to E 164 address mapping You can display the list of available subcommands by typing e164 at the nsap level myswitch configuration nsap gt e164 show new delete 1 11 3 1 Displaying NSAP to E 164 Address Mapping Information This command enables you to display the current NSAP to E 164 address mapping informa tion Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration nsap e1645 show Port VPI NSAP Address Mask Native El64Address 3B2 O 47000580ffe1000000f21a00d00020481a00d000 152 4126352756 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port number on which the NSAP to E 164 address mapping exists VPI The virtual path number on which the NSAP to E 164 address mapping is to be created NSAP Address The NSAP address for this mapping Mask The number of leading significant bits for this NSAP address Native E164Address The E 164 address which can be up to 15 ASCII digits 0 9 long If no NSAP to E 164 mapping information has been configured you receive the following message myswitch configuration nsap gt e164 show No NSAP lt gt E 164 Mapping infor
325. it you out of the session The default is 5 minutes A value of off means that the AMI ses sion will not time out File transfer protocol ftp means that FIP is the transfer protocol that is being used when performing file trans fers on this SCP and tftp means that TFIP is being used UPC Units cps indicates that UPC contracts are being configured and displayed in cells per second kbps means that UPC contracts are being configured and displayed in kilobits per sec ond The default is cps 1 328 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 2 Dual SCP Configuration Commands These commands let you configure failover support in the ASX 200BX ASX 1000 TNX 210 or TNX 1100 when two SCPs are installed in a single switch fabric Only SCP ASXHAs or later support the dual E gt SCP configuration Using an earlier version SCP in a redundant configuration can cause irreparable damage to your switch fabric These commands are not available locally on an ASX 200WG or on an LE 155 For proper synchronization of information between SCPs ensure that the amount of free space on both SCPs is roughly equal before performing these commands O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration system dualscp autoremove autosync failover primary reset show switchover synchronize threshold 1 21 2 1 Configuring Dual SCP Automatic File Removal You can configure
326. itch and if you want to specify how much delay will be introduced at a given port The PNNI router can use this information in determining the best hop by hop route to take However the CDV and maximum CTD are automatically calculated for you by the switch so if these conditions are not represented in your network it is highly recommended that you leave these values at the default settings myswitch configuration port gt delay lt port gt lt input output gt default lt cdv gt lt maxctd gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the CDV and CTD are being set input output input means the modified values apply to the input side of the port output means the modified values apply to the output side of the port default Resets the CDV and CTD to the default values cdv The new value for Cell Delay Variation on this port in microseconds The default is 1 microsecond maxctd The new value for Cell Transfer Delay on this port in microseconds The default is 21 microseconds 1 190 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 9 DS1 Port Configuration Commands These commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on a DS1 network module The following DS1 commands are available only when a DS1 network module is installed in the switch fabric To list the available subcommands t
327. its per second The default is 0 source destination bidi rectional source means a unidirectional SPANS SPVC going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric will be created destination means a unidirectional SPANS SPVC going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric will be created bidirectional means the pair of unidirectional SPANS SPVCs will be created The default direction if you do not specify one is bidirectional AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual To create a bidirectional SPANS SPVC you must either specify bidirectional or you must set up two unidirectional SPANS SPVCs with one going in each direction 1 299 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands To create a SPANS SPVC you need to configure the two ends concurrently on the two switch fabrics Therefore you first need to open an AMI session to the destination switch fabric by using the SCP s IP address along with the SNMP read write community string The following example depicts how to create a bidirectional SPVC from the local switch fabric myswitch to a remote switch fabric 198 29 22 46 named fishtank The asterisk in front of the prompt indicates that it is a remote session To return to the local session you must type localhost instead of the prompt name myswitch gt open 198 29 22 46 private Opening a session for 198 29 22 46 please wai
328. k 1 is the first week in which the d th day occurs Day 0 is Sunday t ime is of the same format as offset except that no leading or is allowed If time is not entered the default of 02 00 00 is used 1 82 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 4 CEC Timing Configuration These commands let you configure external synchronization timing Type timing at the cec level to display the list of available subcommands myswitch configuration cec gt timing bits gt failover gt mode primary references revertive gt secondary show 1 5 4 1 BITS Timing Configuration Commands These commands let you configure the timing input and output for the BITS clock You can dis play the list of available subcommands by entering bits at the timing level Enter the fol lowing O e 3 3 D 5 2 a myswitch configuration cec timing gt bits uonjein6iju09 INY coding framing level 1 5 4 1 1 BITS Coding Configuration This command lets you configure the coding of the DS1 BITS interface or the E1 BITS interface for this TCM You can get to this level by entering coding at the bits level Enter the follow ing parameters myswitch configuration cec timing bits gt coding ami b8zs for DS1 interface or coding ami hdb3 for El interface The parameters for configuring are defined as follows Parameter Description ami Indicates that Alternate Mark Invers
329. k module Enter the following parameters myswitch configur port traffic le gt qsize lt port gt CBR VBR ABR UBR lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description ort The port on which the minimum queue size is to be set P P q CBR VBR ABR UBR Specifies for which type of traffic CBR VBR ABR or UBR to set the minimum queue size number of cells The queue size to be assigned to the traffic type designated in the previous parameter The default is 256 cells 1 The Series LE network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release 2 The network module must be reset for this command to take effect 1 12 22 3 3 Displaying Port Traffic on a Series LE Network Module This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on all of the Series LE network modules Enter the following myswitch configuration port traffic le gt show CLP Port Prio Thrsh QSize 1A1 ABR 256 256 1A1 VBR 256 256 1A1 CBR 256 256 1A1 UBR 256 256 1A2 ABR 256 256 1A2 VBR 256 256 142 CBR 256 256 1A2 UBR 256 256 1A3 ABR 256 256 1A3 VBR 256 256 1A3 CBR 256 256 1A3 UBR 256 256 1A4 ABR 256 256 1A4 VBR 256 256 IBI ABR 256 256 Press return for more q to quit q 1 242 AMI Configuration Commands
330. k module currently installed in the switch fabric CAC enabled means CAC is active on this port the default state disabled means CAC is not active on this port GCRA Policing CBR allon means all CBR connections arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing alloff means no CBR connections arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing svcOn means all CBR SVCs arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing svcOff means no CBR SVCs arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing CBR PVCs are policed based on the state of their UPC contract GCRA Policing VBR allon means all VBR connections arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing alloff means no VBR connections arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing svcOn means all VBR SVCs arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing svcOff means no VBR SVCs arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing VBR PVCs are policed based on the state of their UPC contract AAL5 PP Pol CBR allon means all AAL5 CBR connections are subjected to partial packet policing a110ff means no AAL5 CBR connections are subjected to partial packet policing svcOn means all AAL5 CBR SVCs are subjected to partial packet policing For AAL5 CBR PVCs partial packet policing is performed based on the UPC contract of the connection svcO means no AAL5 CBR SVCs are subjected to partial packet policing For AAL5 CBR PVCs partial packet policing
331. l not be examined periodi cally to see if it is using a sub optimal route The default state for PNNI SPVCs is disabled If you want to change this value for this PNNI SPVC after you create it you must delete it and then recreate it fupe lt index gt The forward going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric UPC contract index assigned to this SPVC To find the index you want use the conf upc show com mand If no index is specified the default index of 0 UBR best effort is used bupc lt index gt The backward going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric UPC con tract index assigned to this SPVC To find the index you want use the conf upc show command If no index is specified the default index of 0 UBR best effort is used ftpnniDtl lt index gt The Designated Transit List DTL index assigned to this SPVC The DTL specifies the pre ferred call routing for the SVC portion of the SPVC To find the index you want use the conf atmroute ftpnni dt1 show command bearerClass X A IC The requested broadband bearer class for this SPVC X is for all types of ATM media A is for non ATM CBR media C is for non ATM VBR UBR and ABR media The default is X clip lt no yes gt During speech transmission clipping is the loss of a brief interval at the beginning of a speech spurt no indicates this SPVC is not susceptible to clipping yes indicates this SPVC is su
332. l ports on this switch board despite the conf port aisrdi settings To return all ports on this board to their last port settings shown in the AIS RDI field use the conf board oam enable command See Section 1 4 2 for more information 1 A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port It does not guarantee that the signal is the proper frequency 1 220 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands To list port information for just a specified port for example port 1B1 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port gt show 1B1 Port Carrier Admin Mbps CellRate CDVT Policing VBROB BuffOB AIS RDI Model 1B1 yes up 15540 149 8 250 enabled 100 100 disabled OC3 Note ATM OAM processing is disabled The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example This command also lets you display advanced information about all of the ports Enter the fol lowing parameters 9 3 3 myswitch configuration port gt show lt port gt advanced tm 2 myswitch configuration port gt show advanced 2 Input Output Port CDV maxCTD CDV maxCTD B1 1 21 computed computed B2 1 21 computed computed B3 1 21 computed computed B4 1 21 computed computed D1 1 21 computed computed D2 1 21 computed computed CTL 0 0 computed computed The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port
333. l unlisted users logging to this switch are given user level privileges the ability to access only a certain subset of the AMI commands admin means all unlisted users logging to this switch are given admin level privileges the ability to access all of the AMI commands The default is admin admin user 1 16 1 7 11 Displaying the Current Userid This command shows the userid of the user who is currently logged into the switch Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security login gt whoami ami AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 273 AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 8 Configuring NSAP Filtering These commands provide a mechanism for filtering calls based on a combination of the calling source and called destination addresses as well as the source ports VPIs NSAP addresses and NSAP address masks and the destination ports VPIs NSAP addresses and NSAP address masks To display the list of available subcommands type at the nsapfiltering level myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering gt filters gt templates gt interfaces gt More information about NSAP filtering and gt other methods of security can be found in the Network Configuration manual for your switch 1 16 1 8 1 Configuring NSAP Filters These commands allow you to configure NSAP filters To display the list of available subcom mands type at the filters level myswitch configuration secu
334. lable subcommands by typing at the qosext level myswitch configuration qosext gt delete modify new show 1 14 1 Deleting a QOS Extension Table Entry This command allows you to delete a QOS extension table entry Enter the following O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration qosext gt delete lt QoSExt Index 1 14 2 Modifying a QOS Extension Table Entry This command allows you to modify a set of QOS extension table entry Enter the following myswitch configuration qosext gt modify lt QoSExtIndex gt maxctd lt maxctd gt maxcdv lt maxcdv gt maxclr lt maxclr gt 1 14 3 Creating a QOS Extension Table Entry This command lets you create a set of QOS extension table entry Enter the following myswitch configuration qosext5 new lt QoSExtIndex gt lt maxctd gt lt maxcdv gt lt maxclr gt The parameters for delete modify and new are defined as follows Parameter Description QoSExtIndex The index number of the set of QOS extension parameters maxctd The maximum cell transfer delay in microseconds maxcdv The maximum cell delay variation in microseconds maxclr The maximum cell loss ratio AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 257 AMI Configuration Commands 1 14 4 Displaying the QOS Extension Table This command allows you to display the QOS extension table Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration qosext gt show
335. le The External Synchronization Interface ESI card status from the viewpoint of this TCM This should always be present absent indicates a failure of the ESI interface logic Other TCM status If another TCM is not plugged in nothing is displayed If another TCM is plugged in shows the software status of the other TCM from the viewpoint of this TCM If this TCM is the controller normal means the standby TCM is actively updating and waiting to be called into service and unknown means the standby TCM is down If this TCM is the standby act ive means the controller TCM is functioning normally AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 79 AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 3 5 SNMP Configuration Commands These commands enable you to manage the SNMP communities and traps You can display the list of available subcommands by typing snmp at the configuration level myswitch configuration cec slotx gt snmp trap gt 1 5 3 5 1 Configuring SNMP Traps These commands help you to manage SNMP traps You can display the list of available sub commands by typing trap at the snmp level myswitch configuration cec slotx snmp gt trap delete new show 1 5 3 5 1 1 Deleting an SNMP Trap Entry This command allows you to delete an existing SNMP trap destination Before deleting a trap that may need to be recreated later show the list of current SNMP traps and either copy and save the screen or write down the trap destinations
336. le syslog commands myswitch configuration system gt syslog show set delete console audit gt 1 21 5 1 Displaying the Address of the System Log Host This command allows you to display the address of the host to which the switch s system messages are logged Enter the following parameters This command is only available on the local NOTES aah myswitch configuration system syslog gt show Remote Syslog Host 169 144 1 216 Syslog Facility daemon Console enabled If the host s address has never been set or if it has been deleted and not set again the follow ing is shown myswitch configuration system syslog gt show No remote syslog host set Syslog messages will not be sent Syslog Facility daemon Console enabled 1 338 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 5 2 Setting the Address of the System Log Host This command sets the address of the host to which the switch s system messages are being logged You may also opt to assign a specific facility name so that the remote syslog can auto matically differentiate between switches with different facilities Enter the following This command is only available on the local E gt ka D gt myswitch configuration system syslog gt set lt address gt lt facility gt Fa o7 o QO 35 These parameters are defined as follows ENE Q 25 Parameter Description o 2 address The IP address of the
337. lete new show get 1 9 4 1 Configuring the LECS Administrative Status This command lets you change the administrative status of the LECS to up start a LECS ser vice or down stop a LECS service Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lecs gt admin lt LECS index LECS index range x y gt up down 1 9 4 2 Deleting a LECS This command lets you delete stop a specified LECS service Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lecs gt delete lt LECS index LECS index range x y gt The parameters for admin and delete are defined as follows Parameter Description LECS index The unique integer index of the LECS that is dynamically assigned by AMI when a LECS is created to identify this service from any other service in the same class Found under the Index field using the conf lane lecs show command LECS index range x y The range of index numbers of the LECSs that you want to start or stop The index is found under the Index field using conf lane lecs show up down up changes the administrative status of the designated LECS index to up down changes the administrative status of the designated LECS index to down 1 126 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 4 3 Creating a LECS This command lets you create start a LECS service Enter the following parameters myswitch configurat lane lecs gt new lt LECS Selecto
338. licy applies to exterior reachable addresses outside of that node s FORE hierarchy area both means the policy applies to both internal and exterior addresses Action The action to take when using this policy Addresses matching a summary policy cause just the summarized prefix of the address to be announced to the node s peer group Addresses matching a suppress policy are not announced to the node s peer group at all Addresses matching an advertise policy cause the entire address to be announced to the node s peer group State Indicates the current state of this policy If there are no reachable addresses that match this policy then the state is listed as inactive When a summary policy is matched and is being used the state is listed as summarizing When a suppress policy is matched and is being used the state is listed as suppressing When an advertise policy is matched and is being used the state is listed as advertising Mtag The metric tag associated with this policy See the Tag field under conf atmroute pnni metric show You can also display specific policy information as follows myswitch configuration atmroute policy gt show lt nodeix gt lt address gt lt len gt myswitch configuration atmroute policy gt show 1 Node Address Plen Type Action 1 47 000580ffe1000000f21a355200204806790b00 72 both summary State MTag inactive 0 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as t
339. ling the logging of all SNMP changes to syslog with a priority level tag of debug off Indicates you are disabling the logging of all SNMP changes to syslog This is the default state In order for the actual logging to begin you must ma first have a remote syslog host configured to receive the messages Use the command conf system syslog set to do this AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 345 AMI Configuration Commands Because the logging of each change can generate a lot of extra traffic it is recommended that you enable this feature only after you have reached your initial desired configuration This tool is most useful for logging any minor modifications which occur after that The SNMP syslog messages generally come in pairs with the result of the first message saying Pending and the second message giving the outcome There are some exceptions such as the SNMP bad community message or any change that makes it impossible to send the result to syslog such as rebooting the switch The SNMP syslog messages are output in a format that is similar to the following date time IP address or switch name SNMP IP address SNMP request ID index of this varbind within the SNMP packet result of the command either pending success error number no change or bad community object ID for this varbind value For example the output will be something similar to the following AUG 28 11 09 50 fishtank SNMP 12
340. lls EFCI Off The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared turned off indicating no conges tion for ABR traffic in cells The Series LE network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release You can also display traffic model information about an individual Series LE network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic le gt show lt module gt myswitch configuration module traffic le gt show 1B Cell Table UBR EFCI EFCI Module Memory Memory Model EPD EPD On Off 1B 256Kx64 32Kx32 2 16499 16499 64 L The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those listed in the example above If no Series LE network modules are installed this is not an LE 155 switch then the following is displayed myswitch configuration module traffic le gt show No Series LE traffic information is available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 157 AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 8 Configuring Traffic on a Series D Network Module These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on on Series D network modules To list the available subcommands type at the d level myswitch configuration module traffic d gt aal5pktcount altclpthresh epd efci models setmodel show vceclpthresh
341. lowing Currently AIS RDI OAM cell generation is E gt supported only for point to point connections myswitch configuration port gt aisrdi lt port gt enable disable These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description enable disable enable means OAM cells are generated when AISs and RDIs are detected disable means AISs and RDIs are ignored when they are detected No OAM cells are generated If OAM cell generation is enabled on any ports NOTE a using this command that condition may be overridden using conf board oam disable In that case the port level settings are still retained but OAM cell generation ceases on all ports on the board When conf board oam enable is entered all ports on the board use their last port level settings again so OAM cell generation starts again only on the ports on which it was last enabled 1 178 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 4 CAC Port Configuration Command By disabling Connection Admission Control CAC on a particular port you allow connec tions to be set up without restrictions on the available bandwidth However note that if CAC is disabled on a given port care must be taken The switch may not be able to guarantee the bandwidth that has been allocated on the port To configure CAC on a particular port enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port gt cac lt port gt enable disabl
342. lowing parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni interface gt modify lt port gt lt vpi gt nodeix lt nodeix gt aggrtoken lt aggrtoken gt cbrw lt cbrw gt rtvbrw lt rtvbrw gt nrtvbrw lt nrtvbrw gt abrw lt abrw gt ubrw lt ubrw gt The parameters for modify are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number of the interface to be modified vpi The virtual path number of the interface to be modified nodeix lt nodeix gt The index of the node to which the interface is attached aggrtoken lt aggrtoken gt The link aggregation token value that is advertised in the Hello protocol Currently this parameter is not supported cbrw lt cbrw gt The administrative weight of this interface for CBR traffic rtvbrw lt rtvbrw gt The administrative weight of this interface for real time VBR traffic nrtvbrw lt nrtvbrw gt The administrative weight of this interface for non real time VBR traffic abrw lt abrw gt The administrative weight of this interface for ABR traffic ubrw lt ubrw gt The administrative weight of this interface for UBR traffic 1 42 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 3 2 Displaying a PNNI Interface This command lets you display information about the PNNI interfaces Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni interface gt show
343. ls set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned The default is unassigned 1 Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting 1 212 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 14 2 Configuring J 2 Port Line Length This command enables you to change the line length of a J2 network module port Enter the following parameters long myswitch configuration port j2 gt line lt port gt short These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description The port number on which the line length is to be changed port The length of the physical cable attached to this port If the line attached to the receive port has greater than 4 db of attenuation then the line must be configured as long If other wise then it must be configured as short In general if the cable is less than 20 feet then configure the line as short short long O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY 1 12 14 3 Configuring J2 Port Loopback This command lets you configure the loopback mode on a J2 port Enter the following diag none myswitch configuration port j2 gt loopback lt port gt line These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the loopback mode is to be changed
344. lt level myswitch configuration lane default gt new delete show 1 9 1 1 Creating a Default ELAN This command lets you create a simple default ELAN You can use this command only if you do not already have an ELAN named default This command creates and starts an ELAN named default that consists of an LECS a co located LES BUS and a single LEC This ELAN uses the ATM Forum well known address for the LECS It is an Ethernet ELAN with an MTU size of 1516 and it has ELAN access control disabled and TLV registration enabled You must assign an IP address to the e10 interface for the LEC using conf ip address and then bring it up using conf ip admin lt interface gt up You cannot use DLE with this ELAN unless you delete the ELAN and recreate it using the conf lane les command so that you can assign the DLE peer server addresses 1 110 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Enter the following parameters AMI Configuration Commands myswitch configuration lane default gt new Do you want to create default ELAN LES BUS LECS LEC n y Entering n or pressing lt ENTER gt aborts the command Entering y creates anew ELAN named default If you enter y you receive the following message when the ELAN is created Created LANE Services and a LEC for the default ELAN If an ELAN named default already exists you will receive an error message 1 9 1 2 Deleting a Default ELAN This command lets you delete the ELAN n
345. lues for these pools depend greatly on the requirements of your particular network There is no specific maximum value for the pool sizes they are only limited by the amount of memory available at the time of configuration However a pool configuration fails when there is not enough memory or when there is memory available but it is not available in the required block sizes due to memory fragmentation It is possible to allocate all of the mem ory to a pool by setting the pool to a very large value Similarly you can release all of the mem ory from a pool by setting the value to 0 CAUTION You should adjust these values only after careful consideration of your network s needs It is important not to allocate more connections than you can possibly use when setting these pool sizes When pools are configured the memory in those pools is not available to any other operations such as the creation of static entities PVCs SPVCs static routes UPC contracts etc call recording and performance monitoring Improper configuration can have an adverse effect on your network s operation You can configure the amount of memory allocated for call processing The default memory pools setting is 2 0 MB on a 16 MB SCP and 2 8 MB on a 32 MB SCP If you have too many PVCs you can change the default configuration for point to point calls or point to multipoint calls or both to 0 You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at
346. maam haahaha hasa 1 261 SSL NAG assess eta gaps NANA ADA NN ANAL 1 261 IP forwarding configuring 8 1 105 IP interface state configuring 8 1 104 IP interfaces displaying 0 1 108 displaying for TCM 1 77 unconfiguring 1 109 IP route adding a 1 106 adding for TCM 1 75 deleting o 1 106 deleting for TCM 1 76 displaying 1 107 displaying for TCM 1 76 IP subnet mask configuring 1 105 configuring for TCM 1 75 ISP table adding anentry 1 100 deleting an entry 1 99 displaying all entries 1 101 displaying an individual IA sacle T EET ETE 1 102 J J2 network modules displaying configuration of 1 214 empty cells 1 212 Index 5 Index line length 0 0 loopback a F9 141111 4PUBS ine he ae is L LAN Emulation configuring on a switch LAN Emulation LANE LAN Emulation Client LEC LAN Emulation Configuration Server LEC S PAA LAN Emulation interfaces LAN Emulation Server LES LANE LAN Emulation LANE ARP cache configuring a deleting an entry displaying 0 flushing seii reru iese LEC changing the administrative Stats oi ese wkd seks
347. mands 1 10 4 6 4 Setting Traffic Models on a Series LC Network Module This command lets you select one of the traffic memory models on a Series LC network mod ule Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic lc gt setmodel lt module gt lt model gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module to be configured The predefined memory model to be used for this Series LC network module The various models make different trade offs between the number of cell buffers and the number of unicast and multicast connections and the number of per connection counters Enter the number found in the Model field of the conf module traffic 1c models AMI com mand for the shared memory configuration that you want to use model O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY 1 For proper operation all Series LC network modules in a switch must use memory models that support the same number of unicast connections Therefore all Series LC modules in a switch should either use models 1 5 OR models 6 8 The following Series LC network modules can only use the following traffic memory models OC 3 MM and UTP can only use models 1 2 3 and 6 OC 3 SM can only use models 4 and 7 and OC 12 MM and SM can only use models 5 and 8 2 The switch software must be restarted for this command to take effect 1 151 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual
348. mation is available 1 170 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 11 3 2 Adding an NSAP to E 164 Address Mapping This command lets you map an NSAP address to an E 164 address format Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration nsap e1645 new lt port gt lt vpi gt lt NSAP gt lt mask gt lt E 164 gt The following is an example of how to add an NSAP to E 164 mapping to the mapping table myswitch configuration nsap e1645 new 3b2 0 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 00d0 0020481a00d0 0b 152 4126352756 1 11 3 3 Deleting an NSAP to E 164 Address Mapping This command lets you remove an existing NSAP to E 164 address mapping Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration nsap e1645 delete lt port gt lt vpi gt lt NSAP gt lt mask gt O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY The following is an example of how to delete an NSAP to E 164 mapping from the mapping table myswitch configuration nsap e1645 del 3B2 0 47000580ffe1000000f21a00d00020481a00d000 152 The parameters for new and delete are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number for this NSAP to E 164 address mapping vpi The virtual path number for this NSAP to E 164 address mapping NSAP The NSAP address for this entry mask The number of leading significant bits for this NSAP address E 164 The E 164 address which can be up to 15 ASCII characters lon
349. meter Description port The port number on which the buffer overbooking level for VBR traffic is to be configured Overbooking cannot be configured on the control CTL port percent The buffer overbooking level assigned to this path specified as a percentage Enter an integer value greater than or equal to 1 The default is 100 which means that no over booking has been defined Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 denote overbooking The maximum value is 32 767 1 252 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 25 VBROB Port Configuration Commands This command is an advanced option that allows you to set an output bandwidth overbook ing level for VBR traffic on a particular port The overbooking factors affect the amount of bandwidth that is associated with VBR connections When a VBR connection is created or destroyed a quantity of bandwidth is allocated de allocated from the port for the connection lt It is recommended that you reset the network module after making any modification to the port overbooking factors so that VBR bandwidth is accurately accounted for by the switch control software See Section 1 10 2 for more information about conf module reset A change to the overbooking factors that is not followed by a reset may result in an incorrect amount of bandwidth being de allocated for any existing VBR connections when those connections
350. meters myswitch configuration port traffic d gt scheduling lt port gt sve cbr vbr roundrobin smoothed guaranteed OR scheduling lt port gt pve cbr vbr perupc roundrobin smoothed guaranteed These parameters are defined as follows gt Parameter Description g Q port The port on which you want to change the scheduling mode 3 2 P E F 3c svc cbr Indicates that this scheduling mode will apply to all CBR SVCs output on this port 2 S svc vbr Indicates that this scheduling mode will apply to all VBR SVCs output on this port 5 pvc cbr Indicates that this scheduling mode will apply to all CBR PVCs output on this port pvc vbr Indicates that this scheduling mode will apply to all VBR PVCs output on this port perupc Indicates that the PVCs output on this port will use the scheduling mode configured by the UPC contract that is applied to them The UPC contract can be configured using the scheduling parameter under the conf upc new command This option only applies to PVCs roundrobin All service for these connections comes from one of the round robin queues in the net work module This is the default mode for both SVCs and PVCs smoothed All service for these connections comes from the network module s rate controller which ensures that cells for these connections are transmitted into the network at a fixed rate of R cells per second guaranteed This is a combination of th
351. modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on a DS3 network module The following DS3 commands are available only when a DS3 network mod ule is installed in the switch fabric You can display the list of available subcommands by typ ing at the ds3 level myswitch configuration port ds3 gt emptycells framing length loopback mode scrambling show timing 1 196 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 10 1 Configuring DS3 Port Empty Cells Empty cells are cells that are sent as filler or place holders when there is no real data to send By sending these cells network modules that are synchronous in nature can keep an even flow of traffic moving so that distributed timing can work properly This command lets you change the type of cells sent as empty cells on a DS3 network module port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port ds3 gt emptycells lt port gt idle unassigned These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description The port number on which the type of empty cells is to be changed port O e 3 3 D 5 2 a The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned The default is unassigned idle unassigned uoneinByuod INY 1 Refer to page 57 of
352. moteAddress The IP address of the remote endstation if it is available p ge To display information for all of the signalling channels on a specific port for example port 3 Es 1B1 enter the following parameters po E fe myswitch configuration signalling gt show 1bl 3 Port VPI Interface SigVersion State ILMI Side Remot eAddress 1B1 O ftPNNI uni31 a up up network The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example To display information for all of the signalling channels on a specific port and path for exam ple port 1B1 and VPI 0 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show 1b1 0 Port VPI Interface SigVersion State ILMI Side RemoteAddress 1B1 0 ftPNNI uni31 a up up network The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example Additionally there are several options you can use to show different types of information about the signalling channels myswitch configuration signalling gt show lt port gt lt vpi gt iefilter nsapfilter public timers atmroute atm protocol These options are described in the following subsections AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 359 AMI Configuration Commands 1 23 4 1 Displaying ATM Layer Information for Signalling Channels To show ATM layer information about all of the signalling channels on a switch fabric enter the following p
353. mount of bandwidth in Kbps that is reserved for the virtual channels using this vpt A value of N A indicates that this path is an elastic path Elastic paths allo cate and de allocate bandwidth for their channels from the link CurBW The amount of bandwidth in Kbps that is being used by the virtual channels using this vpt MinVCI The bottom number for the range of VCIs that are reserved for VCCs on this virtual path terminator The default is 1 MaxVCI The top number for the range of VCIs that are reserved for VCCs on this virtual path ter minator The default is 511 VCs The number of virtual channels that are currently using this vpt Protocol The type of protocol running on this channel AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 389 AMI Configuration Commands 1 27 4 1 Displaying Advanced VPT Information You can also display advanced or QoS extension parameter information about VPTs myswitch configuration vpt gt show lt port gt lt vpi gt advanced qosext To list all of the advanced options about all of the existing virtual path terminators enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vpt gt show advanced Input Port VPI 1C1 0 1C2 0 1C3 0 1C4 0 1cTL 0 originate originate originate originate originate Output Port VPI Shape VBROB BuffOB terminate N A N A N A terminate N A N A N A terminate N A N A N A terminate N A N A N A terminate N A N A N A
354. n domainname lt domainname gt restrict true false ptsehd lt ptsehd gt hellohd lt hellohd gt hello lt hello gt helloinactf lt helloinactf gt hlinkinact lt hlinkinact gt ptserfr lt ptserfr gt ptselftf lt ptselftf gt rxmt lt rxmt gt avcrpm lt avcrpm gt avcrmt lt avcrmt gt cdvpm lt cdvpm gt ctdpm lt ctdpm gt domain lt domain gt forelevel lt level gt forearea lt area gt If you want to modify level nodeid pgid atmaddr domain forelevel or forearea you must first administer the node down using admin down The parameters for admin delete new and modify are defined as follows Parameter Description index The index number of the node admin The administrative status of the node up means the node is active down means the node is inactive level lt level gt The PNNI hierarchy level of this node The default is 80 nodeid lt nodeid gt The ID of this node pgid lt pgid gt The peer group ID of the peer group to which this nodes belongs atmaddr lt atmaddr gt This node s ATM end system address 1 50 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description domainname The name of the domain to which this node belongs lt domainname gt restrict true false Indicates whether or not the originating node is restr
355. n the following is displayed myswitch configuration ces5 show Searching For CES ports No services found 1 98 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 7 ILMI SNMP Proxy Configuration Commands These commands let you configure the ILMI SNMP Proxy ISP table Through this table you can discover the topology of the network to which your switch is connected because your switch registers its address via ILMI if ILMI is running on each switch with its neighboring switches You can add delete or display ISP table entries and you can send SNMP requests to the ISP table Type ilmiproxy at the configuration level to display the available sub commands myswitch configuration gt ilmiproxy delete go new show 1 7 1 Deleting an ISP Table Entry This command lets you delete an entry from the ISP table Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration ilmiproxy gt delete lt port gt lt vpi gt lt index gt For example to delete an entry from the table enter something similar to the following myswitch configuration ilmiproxy gt del la2 0 19 1 7 2 Resending an ILMI SNMP Proxy Request oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinByUuod INY This command allows you to resend an ILMI SNMP proxy request Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration ilmiproxy gt go lt port gt lt vpi gt lt index gt For example to resend a request enter something similar to
356. n this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port through which the link is attached to the node VPI The virtual path number on the port Node For FI PNNI shows ftpnni For PNNI shows the index number of the node for which the ATM routing information is being displayed Domain The index number of the domain to which this node belongs SigProto The signalling protocol being used on this port a means that the switch is trying to automatically configure the protocol and version of that protocol that its peers are using SigSt The current state of this interface If the state is up this interface is operational This is the normal state for a interface that is connected to another FORE Systems ATM switch or host If the state is down this interface is not operational This can be due to a lack of a physical connection or due to a software problem NodeSt The administrative state of this node up means the node is active down means the node is inactive 1 14 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description HelloSt The state of the hello protocol running between the peer nodes down means that the link is not usable so no routing packets are sent or received over it attempt means that either no hellos or hellos with mismatch information have been received from the neighbor and attempts are being made to reach the neighbo
357. n to be taken on this signalling channel upon sensing a carrier loss clearCalls means that upon sensing a carrier loss the switch will immediately tear down all the con nections both those in progress as well as the established ones on this signalling chan nel noClear means that upon sensing a carrier loss the switch will wait for the SSCOP timers to expire before the in progress connections on that signalling channel are torn down The established connections on that signalling channel will take even longer to be torn down The default is noClear To display protocol information for all of the signalling channels on a specific port and path for example port 4B3 and VPI 2 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show 3al 0 protocol Allocation Port VPI Scope Mode QoSExpIndex CarrierLossAction 4B3 2 VP a VP Associated a 0 noClear The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example 1 362 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 23 4 3 Displaying ATM Routing Information for Signalling Channels To show ATM routing information about all of the signalling channels on a switch fabric enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show atmroute Port VPI OrigCost TermCost Domain Node LAL 0 00 0 N A LA2 0 00 0 N A LA3 0 00 0 N A LA4 0 00 0 N A gt LAS 0 00 0 N A O
358. n turn enables SNMP access By setting the IP address of the asx0 interface or one of the qaa interfaces in band over ATM access to the switch control processor SCP is enabled By setting the IP address of the ie0 interface out of band access to the SCP is enabled On an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 the IP addresses must be configured individually on each SCP myswitch configuration ip gt address lt interface gt lt address gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description interface The name of the IP interface to be managed Valid interfaces are ie0 the Ethernet inter face asx0 the switch s SPANS interface qaa0 gaal qaa2 qaa3 the Classical IP interfaces 100 the switch s local interface that allows AMI to run and e10 e11 etc the LAN Emulation interfaces address The IP address for this interface The state of the interface must be up before setting the address This can be changed using conf ip admin AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 103 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 8 2 Configuring the IP State This command allows you to change the state of the IP interface to up or down Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration ip admin lt interface gt up down These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description interface The name of the IP interface
359. n which the templates are listed in the filter will change as you add or delete more templates O e 3 3 D 5 2 a 1 16 1 8 1 2 Deleting an NSAP Filter This command lets you delete a template from a filter or delete an entire filter Enter the fol lowing parameters uoneinbyuod INY myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering filters delete lt filter id gt lt template id gt all The parameters for delete are defined as follows Parameter Description filter id The unique user assigned identifier for this filter A filter id can be either a positive deci mal integer index or a string name A name may be up to 20 characters Zero is not a valid index template id all The unique user assigned identifier for this template A template id can be either a posi tive decimal integer index or a string name A name may be up to 20 characters Zero is not a valid index If lt template id gt is specified then only that template is deleted from the filter If a11 is specified then the entire filter is deleted AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 275 AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 8 1 3 Testing Against an NSAP Filter This command allows the user to enter components of a call setup message to test whether a call setup attempt with the supplied addresses and ports would be accepted or rejected by a specific filter Enter the following parameters myswitch configura
360. nabling or Disabling the Logging of Changes This command allows you to enable or disable the logging of all changes that occur on a switch via AMI via SNMP or via ILMI Enter at the audit level to show the list of available commands myswitch configuration system syslog audit gt show ami snmp ilmi 1 21 5 5 1 Displaying the Auditing State This command allows you to display whether the changes that occur on a switch via AMI via SNMP or via ILMI will be logged to syslog and at what priority level those changes will be logged Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration system syslog audit gt show Facility Priority ami debug snmp notice ilmi off The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Facility Shows for which facility the changes will be logged Priority Shows with which priority level tag the changes will be logged You can also display the auditing state for a specific facility as follows myswitch configuration system syslog audit gt show ami snmp ilmi myswitch configuration system syslog audit gt show ami Facility Priority ami debug The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example 1 342 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 5 5 2 Changing and Displaying the AMI Auditing State This command allows you to enable or disable the logging of all of the change
361. name of the IP interface for this connection VPI The virtual path number VCI The virtual channel number AAL The AAL type of the given connection Type Shows what kind of connection this is Can be foreIpPVC foreIpSVC classicalIp PVC or classicalIpSVC Direction Outgoing means this is an outgoing connection Incoming means this is an incoming connection Pending means that a connection has not yet been established Incom plete means that the IP to ATM address mapping is not yet known for the given IP address NSAP Address The NSAP address for this connection AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 13 AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 ATM Route Configuration Commands These commands let you configure ATM routing on a switch You can display the list of avail able subcommands by typing at the atmroute level myswitch configuration atmroute gt show domain gt ftpnni gt pnni gt policy gt spans gt 1 3 1 Displaying ATM Routing Information This command lets you display all of the ATM routing information from various menus in one screen Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute gt show Port VPI Node Domain SigProto SigSt NodeSt HelloSt PeerSt 1B O ftpnni 1 FT PNNI a up up N A N A 1B2 0 1 1 privateUNI a up up attempt N A 1B3 O 1 1 privateUNI a up up attempt N A 1B4 0 1 1 privateUNI a up up attempt N A 1CTL 0 N A 1 privateUNI a up N A N A N A The fields i
362. nd loopback requests for originating terminating VPTs All switches also pass through OAM end to end loopback requests and responses that are received for VPCs and VCCs transparently ASX 1000s and TNX 1100s respond to all OAM segment loopback requests while ASX 200BXs ASX 200WGs LE 155s and TNX 210s only respond to OAM segment loopback requests received for originating terminating VPTs OAM segment loopback requests received for VPCs and VCCs are dropped by these types of switches Also the insertion of OAM loopback request cells is not supported AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 67 AMI Configuration Commands 1 4 3 Displaying the Board Configuration This command shows the current configuration of the switch board switch fabric Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration board gt show Board Model 2 HW Ver Mfg Rev S N NMs ATM OAM 0 D 4084 3 disabled The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Board The number of the slot in which the board switch fabric is installed Model The type of switch this is HW ver The hardware version of this board Mfg Rev The manufacturing revision number S N The serial number of this switch board NMs The number of network modules installed in this board ATM OAM Shows if OAM cell processing is enabled or disabled on this switch board disabled means OAM cell processing is stopped on all ports on th
363. nd the number of unicast and multicast connections and the number of per connection counters Enter the number found in the Model field of the conf module traffic d models AMI com mand for the shared memory configuration that you want to use O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY 1 The following Series D network modules can only use the following traffic memory models OC 12 network modules can only use model 4 OC 3 network modules can only use model 5 and DS3 E3 DS1 and E1 network modules can only use model 6 Models 1 2 and 3 are not used 2 The network module must be reset for this command to take effect AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Since there is currently only one valid model for each type of network module the software will not allow you to change the memory model for a Series D network module 1 163 AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 8 7 Displaying Traffic on a Series D Network Module This command lets you display traffic information about the Series D network modules Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic d gt show Cell UBR EFCI EFCI AAL5 AltVC Thresholds Module Memory Model EPD EPD On Off PktCnt CLPO 1 CLP1 1A 256Kx32 2 14717 14717 256 192 disable 4080 256 1B 256Kx32 1 14717 14717 256 192 disable 4080 256 1C 256Kx32 3 14717 14717 256 192 disable 4080 256 1D 256Kx32 3 14717 14717 256 192 disable 4080
364. nds conf snmp sets and all debug commands The default is admin access all network serial none A person with the userid serial is allowed to login only via the serial port A person with the userid network is allowed to login only via telnet A person with the userid a11 is allowed to login via the serial port and via telnet A person with the userid none is not allowed to log in to the switch at all The default is a11 1 268 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 7 6 Setting or Changing a Password for a Userid This command lets you set or change the local password for a userid This command replaces the oper password command Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security login gt password lt userid gt When the password is changed the old password must be entered correctly before a new password can be entered However a user logged in with admin privileges can change any userid password without first entering the old local password except their own For example myswitch configuration security login gt password mktg Old local password lt old local password gt z New local password lt new local password gt Q o Retype new local password lt new local password 3 Q These parameters are defined as follows ze o Mia o Parameter Description o userid The userid for which you want to set or change the local login password
365. network side allocates connections in its containing VP only link means the signalling channel allocates connections in its containing VP and may allocate connections in other VPs in the VPI range 0 to 255 that are available to it The link option is only available for signalling channels on VP 0 The link option cannot be specified when sig mode is specified as vpAssoc The default is vp for FI PNNI and link for PNNI You must specify both the sig_alloc and the sig_mode if you want one of them to be something other than auto For a list of the allowable combinations and more information see the Network Configuration manual for your switch sig_mode The mode to be used for signalling nonAssoc Non associated signalling means the sig nalling channel encodes the connection identifier with Non associated signalling bits vpAssoc VP associated signalling means the signalling channel encodes the connection identifier with the VP associated signalling bits The default is nonAssoc for FI PNNI and vpAssoc for PNNI except VP 0 which must be nonAssoc You must specify both the sig_alloc and the sig_mode if you want one of them to be something other than auto For a list of the allowable combinations and more information see the Network Configuration manual for your switch qos_exp lt QoSExpIndex gt The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class to parameter expansion when calls originating on this interface are ro
366. nformation for all of the signalling channels on a specific port and path for example port 1B2 and VPI 0 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show 1b2 0 atm Admin Admin Oper Oper Port VPI SigVCI ILMIVCI MinVCI MaxVCI MinVCI MaxVCI InSigUpc OutSigUpc 1B2 0 5 16 32 511 32 511 0 N A O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example 1 23 4 2 Displaying Protocol Information for Signalling Channels To show protocol information about all of the signalling channels on a switch fabric enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show protocol Allocation Port VPI Scope Mode QoSExpIndex CarrierLossAction 4B1 0 VP a Non Associated a 0 noClear 4B3 0 Link a Non Associated a 0 noClear 4B3 VP a VP Associated a 0 noClear 4B3 2 VP a VP Associated a 0 noClear 4B3 3 VP a VP Associated a 0 noClear 4B3 4 VP a VP Associated a 0 noClear 4B4 0 Link a Non Associated a 0 noClear 4E1 0 VP a VP Associated a 0 noClear 4E2 0 VP a Non Associated a 0 noClear 4E3 0 VP a Non Associated a 0 noClear 4cTL 0 VP a Non Associated a 0 noClear The fields in the protocol display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers that currently have a signalling interface enabled VPI The number of the virtual path that contains the signallin
367. nformation similar to the following is displayed when DLE is not running myswitch configuration lane les gt show advanced v ELAN Name eng LES 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481a341a 20 BUS 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481a341a 20 LAN Type Ethernet IEEE 802 3 Maximum Data Frame Size 1516 Non proxy Control Distribute VCC 0 728 Proxy Control Distribute VCC Multicast Forward VCC 0 730 Number of local clients 3 LEC 1 at 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2 00 non proxy 00 20 48 10 13 f2 gt 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2 00 Control Direct VCC 0 727 LEC 2 at 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2 01 non proxy 02 20 48 10 13 f2 gt 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2 01 Control Direct VCC 0 731 LEC 3 at 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2 02 non proxy 06 20 48 10 13 f2 gt 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 341a 0020481013f2 02 Control Direct VCC 0 733 1 140 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 Network Module Configuration Commands These commands let you configure the network modules in your switch fabric The list of available subcommands is displayed by typing module at the configuration level myswitch configuration gt module admin reset show traffic gt 1 10 1 Configuring the State of a Network Module This command allows
368. ng 1 199 1 12 10 7 Showing the DS3 Port Configuration 1 200 1 12 10 8 Configuring DS3 Port Timing 0 05 1 201 1 12 11 E1 Port Configuration Commands eee 1 202 1 12 11 1 Configuring E1 Port Empty Cells 1 202 1 12 11 2 Configuring E1 Port Line Length 1 203 1 12 11 3 Configuring E1 Port Loopback 1 204 1 12 11 4 Configuring E1 Port Mode aaa 1 204 1 12 11 5 Configuring E1 Port Scrambling 1 205 1 12 11 6 Showing the E1 Port Configuration 1 206 1 12 11 7 Configuring E1 Port Timing a 1 207 1 12 12 E3 Port Configuration Commands ee eee 1 207 1 12 12 1 Configuring E3 Port Empty Cells 1 208 1 12 12 2 Configuring the E3 Port Loopback 1 208 1 12 12 3 Configuring E3 Port Mode aaa 1 209 1 12 12 4 Configuring E3 Port Scrambling 1 209 1 12 12 5 Showing the E3 Port Configuration 1 210 1 12 12 6 Configuring E3 Port Timing 2 00005 1 211 1 12 13 GCRA Policing Command 000060 eee 1 211 1 12 14 J2 Port Configuration Commands cae eee 1 212 1 12 14 1 Configuring Empty Cells on a J2 Port 1 212 1 12 14 2 Configuring J 2 Port Line Length 1 213 1 12 14 3 Configuring J2 Port Loopback 0a 1 213 1
369. ng Orig originating means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran transit means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to a node within the network and term ter minating means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to the destination node which is outside the network outctype orig tran term The path connection type for the outgoing path For billing purposes it denotes on which switch this path is leaving Orig originating means that the egress endpoint of the path is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran transit means that the egress endpoint of the path is connected to a node within the network and term ter minating means that the egress endpoint of the path is connected to the destination node which is outside the network pmp Indicates this is a point to multipoint path mpp Indicates this is a multipoint to point path mpmp Indicates this is a multipoint to multipoint path shapeivpi lt vpi gt The incoming VPI for this through path When the traffic shaping port is not the port con nected to the WAN a through path must be created from the WAN port to the traffic shap ing port Cells arrive from the network at the traffic shaping port with this value equal to the VPI of the terminating path at the traffic shaping port 1 The valid range of incoming and outgoing VPIs i
370. ng Metric Set Information 1 27 1 3 3 8 Setting a Minimum Threshold for NSAP Updates 1 28 1 3 3 9 Setting the NSAP Indication Interval 1 28 1 3 3 10 Setting the ForeThought PNNI Peer Group Mask 1 29 1 3 3 11 Selecting the Method for Computing the Cost of aLink 1 29 1 3 3 12 Setting the ForeThought PNNI Switch Prefix 1 30 1 3 3 13 Setting the Proportional Multiplier 1 30 1 3 3 14 Static Route Configuration Commands 1 31 1 3 3 14 1 Deleting a Static Route 1 31 1 3 3 14 2 Creating a Static Route 1 31 1 3 3 14 3 Displaying Static Routes 1 33 1 3 3 15 Setting the ForeThought PNNI Switch Prefix Mask 1 34 1 3 3 16 Setting a Minimum Virtual Channel Mark 1 34 1 3 3 17 Displaying ForeThought PNNI Parameters 1 35 1 3 4 ATM Forum PNNI Configuration Commands 4 1 37 1 3 4 1 PNNI Address Configuration Commands 1 37 1 3 4 1 1 Deleting a PNNI Exterior Reachability Adress maa arama kana Pew aha UA Da 1 37 1 3 4 1 2 Modifying a PNNI Exterior Reachability AAOS SS ata 2 tiki peed a paMealne dat fe oan Peed amp 1 37 1 3 4 1 3 Creating a PNNI Exterior Reachability ACOrOSS 3s si a ngana woe Pha Te Gen ae 1 37 1 3 4 1 4 Displaying PNNI Exterior Reachability Address Information 2000085 1 39 1 3 4 2 PNNI Cr
371. ng is displayed myswitch configuration security ipaccess gt show Accepting IP traffic from the following addresses All IP source addresses are being accepted Configuration Flags Flag State all allow ssr allow lsr allow CAUTION When the IP address table is empty all addresses are accepted This is the default state Therefore it is recommended that at least one address be entered into the table Otherwise anyone may access the switch via the control port The address you enter must be the address of the machine you are using Otherwise you will lock yourself out of the switch You can also display information about a specific IP address as follows myswitch configuration security ipaccess gt show lt ipaddr gt lt mask gt myswitch configuration security ipaccess gt show 198 67 0 3 Table information for 198 67 0 3 IpAddress Mask 198 67 20 3 25542552557255 If that address is not in the table then the following message is displayed No table information for 198 67 0 3 is available 1 264 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 7 Login Userid Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure various login userids to assign privilege levels to the userids and to display information about the userids To display the list of available subcom mands type at the Login level myswitch configuration security login gt backup delete finger modify
372. ng parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration cec slotx snmp trap new lt ipaddress gt The parameter for specifying is defined as follows Parameter Description ipaddress Indicates the IP address of the trap destination to be created 1 5 3 5 1 3 Displaying the SNMP Trap Entries This command enables you to list all of the current SNMP traps Enter the following myswitch configuration cec slotx snmp trap gt show Trap 1 oO a W N Destination 243 18 192 229 s23 s29 29 198 198 198 198 88 16 16 239 31 5 23 14 18 130 If no SNMP traps have been configured the following message is displayed No trap information is available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 81 AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 3 6 Setting or Changing the Timezone This command enables you to set or change the timezone on the TCM Enter the following myswitch configuration cec slotx gt timezone lt timezone gt The parameter for setting or changing is defined as follows Parameter Description timezone The time zone configured for this TCM The TCM supports and automatically converts from Standard to Daylight Savings time for the following time zones EST5EDT Eastern Standard Time CST6CDT Central Standard Time MST7MDT Mountain Standard Time PST8PDT Pacific Standard Time AKST9AKDT Alaska Standard Time
373. ng parameters myswitch configuration rs232 gt show A B These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description AIB The port letter of the serial port to be displayed Port B is not available myswitch configuration rs2325 show Port Type Speed Flow Bits Stops Parity A rs232 9600 none 8 one none The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The physical port designation Type The signalling standard used Speed The receive transmit rate Flow The type of flow control implemented on the given port Bits The number of bit times in a single character Stops The number of stop bits in a character frame Parity The parity setting for the ports 1 All of these fields are read only AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 259 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 Security Configuration Commands These commands let you configure various security methods on a switch You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the security level myswitch configuration security gt ipaccess gt login gt nsapfiltering gt 1 16 1 IP Access Configuration Commands These commands let you configure IP filtering at the control port of the switch to prevent unauthorized access to the switch You can display the list of available subcommands by typ ing at the ipaccess lev
374. ng the switch The ILMI syslog messages are output in a format that is similar to the following date time IP address or switch name ILMI port VPI VCI on which the request arrived for ILMI SNMP request ID index of this varbind within the SNMP packet result of the command either pending success error number no change or bad community object ID for this varbind value For example the output will be something similar to the following AUG 28 11 10 54 fishtank ILMI 1A2 0 16 432b 1 pending sdx3765 144 21s 353625 Pelle 3 0013 712065 61286255 6225 0 060 242 26 41 212 se 1 AUG 28 11 10 54 fishtank ILMI 1A2 0 16 432b 1 success a phe Ses V14 353 267 el v1 3 0 013 7106 30128 255 225 000 242 26 81 6212 s7 1 AUG 28 11 10 54 fishtank ILMI 1A1 0 16 4330 1 pending Har sl 3 56 1481 353224 Ta Lol 3 0013 71 140 50L28 255 225 0 0042421 26 41 212 32 1 AUG 28 11 10 54 fishtank ILMI 1A1 0 16 4330 1 success Pa IB By dts lease Dala B0 LB FB LIB 295 225 0s A Z6 AL BIL ee You can also display the auditing state for ILMI by entering ilmi without a as follows myswitch configuration system syslog audit gt ilmi Facility Priority ilmi notice 1 348 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 6 AMI Timeout Configuration Command This command lets you set the amount of time of non activity after which an AMI session will time out You can get to th
375. nger mechanism which displays information about the user who is currently logged into the switch This information includes the userid of the person who is currently logged in how long the person has been logged on the IP address of the machine on which the person logged in the amount of time the system has been idle the current percentage of processor utilization the minimum percentage of proces sor utilization and the maximum percentage of processor utilization Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security login finger enable disable These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description enable Enables the finger mechanism This allows you to view information about the user who is currently logged into the switch To view this information log in to a host that is attached to the switch Then run the finger command on the host using either the switch s IP address or name For example finger 169 144 21 8 disable Disables the finger mechanism so that no information is displayed about the user who is currently logged into the switch This is the default If you enter the finger command with no parameter specified the current state of the finger mechanism is displayed as follows myswitch configuration security login gt finger The finger port is disabled 1 16 1 7 4 Modifying a Userid This command lets you modify the authentication method privileges and or login acces
376. nging Unlisted User PrIVIIGQES 2 maa bowed a na Meee EA Bee a ee 16 1 7 11 Displaying the Current Userid daa mi naaa a mk 1 16 1 8 Configuring NSAP Filtering sanasana a 4 16 1 8 1 Configuring NSAP Filters 1 16 1 8 1 1 Adding a Template to an NSAP 1 16 1 8 1 2 Deleting an NSAP Filter 1 16 1 8 1 3 Testing Against an NSAP Filter 1 16 1 8 1 4 Creating an NSAP Filter 1 16 1 8 1 5 Displaying NSAP Filter Information a 16 1 8 2 Configuring Templates 1 16 1 8 2 1 Deleting a Template 1 16 1 8 2 2 Creating a Template 1 16 1 8 2 3 Modifying a Template k 1 16 1 8 3 Displaying Template Information 1 16 1 8 4 Configuring NSAP Filter for Interfaces 1 16 1 8 4 1 Deleting an NSAP Filter from an Interacts 2 244 Shed a thawing Nag 1 16 1 8 4 2 Configuring an NSAP Filter on an meraca se aan ala kaaa whaha 1 16 1 8 4 3 Displaying NSAP Filter Interface Information a 1 17 SNMP Configuration Commands 2 cece eee 1 17 1 1 17 2 1 17 3 1 17 4 Configuring the SNMP Community Access 20005 Enabling or Disabling SNMP SETS 0 0000 eee eeee Displaying SNMP SET Information aaan aaa Configuring SNMP Traps 0 000 e eee eee eee 1 17 4 1 Configuring Trap Destinations a 117 4 1 1 Deleting a Trap Destination
377. nging to a different SPANS area is considered a border switch A border switch advertises reachability to its area to switches outside of its area but it does not share its area s topology with the other switches You should enable bor der switch functionality on all switches that are on the outside edges of all of the areas that you have established This command lets you designate whether or not this switch will act as a SPANS NNI border switch Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute spans gt border enable disable Entering disable and rebooting means that this switch will not be a SPANS border switch The default is disable gt 3 This parameter is defined as follows 96 a 35 Parameter Description Ja ER enable disable Entering enable and rebooting means that this switch will be a SPANS border switch 2 3 3 1 The switch software must be restarted for this command to take effect Therefore you must be in a local AMI session to perform this command 1 3 6 3 Displaying SPANS NNI Parameters This command let you display all of the SPANS NNI topology parameters Enter the follow ing parameters myswitch configuration atmroute spans gt show SPANS Area ID 242 SPANS NNI border switch functionality is disabled The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description SPANS Area ID The ID of the area in the SPANS routing hierarchy to whic
378. nnounced to the node s peer group Addresses matching a suppress policy are not announced to the node s peer group at all Addresses matching an advertise policy cause the entire address to be announced to the node s peer group An advertise policy is only used to advertise exceptions to a suppress policy The default is summary mtag lt tag gt The metric tag associated with this policy Look in the Tag field under conf atmroute pnni metric show to find the appropriate tag number The default is 0 1 62 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 5 4 Displaying PNNI Policy Prefix Information This command allows you to display information about existing policy prefixes Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration atmroute policy gt show Node Address Plen Type Action 1 47 000580ffe1000000f21a355200204806790b00 72 both summary State MTag inactive 0 The fields in this display are defined as follows gt Field Description o QO Node The index number of the node to which this policy applies 3 9 3 gt R amp Address The address prefix of the policy 5 Plen The address prefix length of the policy the significant part of the address oS fe Type The type of reachable addresses to which the policy applies internal means the policy gt applies to internal reachable addresses within that node s FORE hierarchy area exterior means the po
379. no means a carrier has not been detected on this port Line Coding The type of line coding used on the port Loopback State The loopback mode on the port Port Timing The source of the timing on this port The values are one of lt BNP gt indicating the board network module port from which the timing is being extracted srt s indicating that srts is being used on this port fabric Xx5 where X is 1 2 3 or 4 indicating that timing is being sourced from another switch fabric only applicable to an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 network indicating that the clock is being derived from the line itself or crystal indi cating that the crystal on the network module itself is being used Line Imp The value of the line impedance in ohms either 75 or 120 Signalling Mode The type of signalling used on the line Line Status The line status of the E1 CES port 1 A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port but it does not guarantee the signal is the proper frequency AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 189 O e 3 3 D 5 2 O uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 8 Configuring Port Delay This command lets you specify the amount Cell Delay Variation and the maximum Cell Trans fer Delay that is introduced by the hardware on the input or output side of a given port This command is only useful if you are running E gt PNNI on your sw
380. not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunica tions company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate E1 AND E3 NOTICE The El NM 6 E1C and NM 2 E1C and E3 NM 4 E3C and NM 2 E3C network modules that are described in this manual are approved for use in FORE Systems host systems providing that the instructions below are strictly observed Failure to follow these instructions invalidates the approval Pan European Approval CE Marking Pan European approval of the El network module was issued by BABT following assessment against CTR12 This means that it can be connected to ONP and unstructured PTO provided private circuits with 120 Q interfaces in all European countries according to Telecommunications Terminal Equipment TTE Directive 91 263 EEC Thus the follow
381. nserted and is retransmitted to the network Diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter The E1 stream transmitted by the SCP to a port is looped back to the SCP The stream is still transmitted over the cable but the incoming stream is ignored none means that no loopback will take place on this port The default is none 1 12 11 4 Configuring E1 Port Mode This command allows you to change the method used for cell delineation on an E1 network module port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port el mode lt port gt picp hes These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the framing type is to be changed plcp hes plcp means that the port uses PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol framing G 751 for cell delineation hes means that the port uses HCS Header Check Sequence based framing G 832 for cell delineation The default is hes 1 204 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 11 5 Configuring E1 Port Scrambling This command allows you to change the scrambling mode on a port on an E1 network mod ule Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port el gt scrambling lt port gt on off These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the scrambling mode is to be changed on off on indi
382. nt all CBR SVCs and PVCs to be policed on port 2B4 enter the follow ing parameters myswitch conf port gt gcrapolicing 2b4 cbr allOn AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 211 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 14 J2 Port Configuration Commands These commands let you modify various aspects of the configuration of a J2 network module The following J2 commands are available only when a J2 network module is installed in the switch fabric To display the list of available subcommands type j2 at the port level myswitch configuration port gt j2 emptycells line loopback show timing 1 12 14 1 Configuring Empty Cells on a J2 Port Empty cells are cells that are sent as filler or place holders when there is no real data to send By sending these cells network modules that are synchronous in nature can keep an even flow of traffic moving so that distributed timing can work properly This command lets you change the type of cells sent as empty cells on a J2 network module port Enter the following myswitch configuration port j2 gt emptycells lt port gt idle unassigned These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the type of empty cells is to be changed idle unassigned The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cel
383. ntee the signal is the proper frequency Status The J2 line status of the port LineLength The length of the physical cable that is attached to this port Can be short or long Loopback The loopback mode on the port Can be diagnostic line or none Timing The transmit clock for this port network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port EmptyCells The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned 1 A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port but it does not guarantee the signal is the proper frequency 2 Please refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting 1 214 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 14 5 Configuring J2 Port Timing This command lets you change the timing source on a port on a J2 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port j2 gt timing lt port gt network internal These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on wh
384. o Section 1 21 4 in this manual If you have configured the transfer protocol to be TFIP this is the default using conf system protocol the remote host from which the LECS file will be retrieved must be run ning the TFIP server code If you are unsure of how to do this see Installation and Maintenance manual for your switch 1 130 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 5 LAN Emulation Server LES Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure the LAN Emulation Server LES You can display the list of available subcommands by typing les at the lane level myswitch configuration lane gt les admin delete new peeradd peerdelete security show 1 9 5 1 Configuring the LES Administrative Status This command lets you change the administrative status of the LES to up start a LES service or down stop a LES service Enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a myswitch configuration lane les gt admin lt LES index LES index range x y gt up down uonjein6iju09 INY 1 9 5 2 Deleting a LES This command lets you delete a specified LES Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane les gt delete lt LES index LES index range x y gt The parameters for admin and delete are defined as follows Parameter Description LES index The unique integer index of the LES that is dynamically assigned by AMI when a LES is created to id
385. o delete every row in index entry 9 enter the following myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni dti delete 9 all 1 3 3 2 2 Modifying a DTL Entry This command allows you to modify a DTL entry Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni dtl gt modify lt index gt lt row gt prefix mask port vpi lt new_value gt For example to modify the port of index entry 9 row 2 to port D1 enter the following myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni dtl gt modify 9 2 port DI Similarly to modify the mask of index entry 12 row 1 to a mask of 104 enter the following myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni dtl gt modify 12 1 mask 104 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 21 AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 2 3 Creating a DTL Eniry This command allows you to create a DTL Enter the following parameters myswitch configur atmroute ftpnni dtl gt new lt index gt lt row gt lt prefix gt lt mask gt lt port gt lt vpi gt For example if you want to create a DTL enter something similar to the following myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni dtl gt 10 1 0x47000580ffe1000000f21b19c3 104 C1 0 The parameters for delete modify and new are defined as follows Parameter Description index The index number of a DTL Displayed in the Index field under conf atmroute ftpnni dt1 show TOW The row number of the individual entry within a given DTL An entry in the DT
386. o drive the transmit line of this port Scrambling on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port off means that payload scram bling is disabled on this port EmptyCells The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set pty yp P P 8 the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned The timing option displays N A on all OC 12 network modules because they always use internal timing 2 Please refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY You can also display information about an individual port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port sonet gt show 4c1 Port Width Line Mode Loopback Timing Scrambling EmptyCells 4C1 sts3c MM sonet none internal on unassigned The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example This command also lets you display information about the section line path and ATM status of all of the ports on the SONET network modules Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port sonet gt show status Port Carrier Section Line Path Atm 4C1 yes Ox1 0x1 0x1 0x1 4C2 no 0x6 0x2 Oxc 0x2 4C3 no 0x6 0x2 Oxc 0x2 4C4 no 0x6 0x2 Oxc 0x2 The fields in this dis
387. o lets you display all of the traffic management flags for the UPC contracts Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration upc gt show lt index gt flags myswitch configuration upc gt show flags Index GCRApol PPpol AAL5 PktDisc UBRtag AltCLP Scheduling Name 0 roundrobin default_ubr The fields in this display are defined as follows z Bae gt Field Description o Index The UPC contracts listed by index number S Q 3 GCRApol GCRApol means that GCRA policing is enabled on connections that use this contract If 3 Fi GCRApol is not displayed then GCRA policing is disabled on all connections that use this EN o Bia contract o S fe PPpol PPpol means that partial packet policing is enabled on connections that use this contract 5 If PPpol is not displayed then partial packet policing is disabled on all connections that use this contract AAL5 AAL5 means that this is an AAL5 connection If AAL5 is not displayed then this is not an AAL5 connection PktDisc PktDisc means that packet discard is enabled on connections that use this contract If PktDisc is not displayed then packet discard is disabled on all connections that use this contract UBRtag UBRtag means that all UBR traffic is tagged set to CLP 1 as non compliant on connec tions that use this contract If UBRtag is not displayed then UBR traffic is not tagged on connections that use this contract AltCLP This field
388. o no no no yes off no no no no yes off The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The DS1 CES port number Alarm Indicates whether or not the port is experiencing an alarm condition Rx LOF Indicates whether or not the receiving port is experiencing a Loss of Frame LOF Tx LOF Indicates whether or not the transmit port is experiencing a Loss of Frame LOF Rx AIS Indicates whether or not the receiving port is experiencing an Alarm Indication Signal AIS Tx AIS Indicates whether or not the transmit port is experiencing an Alarm Indication Signal AIS LOF Indicates whether or not the DS1 CES connection is experiencing a Loss of Frame LOF LOS Indicates whether or not the DS1 CES connection is experiencing a Loss of Signal LOS Loopback Indicates whether or not the port is in loopback mode 1 182 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 6 5 Configuring DS1 CES Port Loopback This command lets you designate the type of loopback on a DS1 CES port Enter the following myswitch configuration port cesdsl gt loopback lt port gt line none These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The DS1 CES port on which the loopback mode is to be changed line line loopback connects the transmitter to the receiver The data stream received from the Rx line is retransmitted out to the
389. o the physical cable attached to that port This lets the DS1 network module receive the signal on the cable Check the unit Series Revision and Part numbers To check the Series and Revision numbers use the conf mod show command and look under the Series and Rev fields respectively To check the Part number ACCA remove the network module from the switch and look at either the right edge of the top of the printed circuit board or the top of the rear connector Series C Revision 2 network modules with gt ACCA0055 part numbers should use ONLY the parameters that are appended with an A e g Lt110A in the table below To select the appropriate port line length enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port dsl gt length lt port gt Lt110 110 220 220 330 330 440 440 550 550 660 Gt655 Lt110A 110 220A 220 330A 330 440A 440 550A 550 660A Gt 655A These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the line length is to be changed Lt110 Use if the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft 110 220 Use if the physical cable is between 110 and 220 ft 220 330 Use if the physical cable is between 220 and 330 ft 330 440 Use if the physical cable is between 330 and 440 ft 440 550 Use if the physical cable is between 440 and 550 ft 550 660 Use if the physical cable is between 550 and 660 ft Gt655 Use if
390. ocal addresses into a default 10 byte summary switch prefix is enabled or disabled AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 19 AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 ForeThought PNNI Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure ForeThought PNNI on a switch You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the ftpnni level 1 3 3 1 myswitch config border hello nsapindication propmult show uration atmroute ftpnni gt dti forearea forelevel maxhop metric gt minthresh pgmask pgsncost prefix staticroute gt swmask vemark Changing the ForeThought PNNI Border Switch Functionality A switch that has a link to another switch that belongs to a different peer group is considered a border switch A border switch advertises reachability information about its peer group to switches outside of its peer group You should enable border switch functionality on all switches in a peer group that have direct outside links to other peer groups This command lets you designate whether or not this switch will act as a ForeThought PNNI border switch Enter the following parameters myswitch config uration atmroute ftpnni gt border enable disable The switch software must be restarted for this command to take effect Therefore you must be in a local AMI session to perform this command These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description enable Enter
391. odule E 1 247 sdconf rec file retrieving eee 1 270 secondary clock source TEM a ont ete Renda bahaw 1 91 secondary timing mode 1 86 SecurID configuring 0 1 270 deleting the configuration flera Pas SS Becerra 1 271 deleting the node secret file 1 271 deleting the sdconf rec file 1 271 displaying the configuration file aai anna 1 271 displaying the sdconf rec file 1 271 SecurlD file retrieving a 1 270 serial number displaying for a fabric 1 68 displaying fora TCM 1 79 serial port displaying configuration of 1 259 Series Cnetwork modules 1 144 configuring EPD 1 144 displaying traffic memory models 0005 1 145 displaying traffic model information 1 147 FIFO blocking 1 145 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual setting traffic memory models 05 1 146 Series D network modules 1 158 applying an alternate CLP threshold 1 159 CLP threshold 1 166 configuring EPD 1 160 disabling the AAL5 PDU counter 0 0 eee 1 158 displaying traffic memory models 005 1 162 displaying traffic model information 1 164 enabling the AAL5 PDU COUNTER ise ee heida eee aoe 1 158 setting traffic memory models 005 1 163 Series LC network modul
392. off unassigned Gt225 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The DS3 port number of the network module s currently installed in the switch Carrier yes means a carrier has been detected on this port no means a carrier has not been detected on this port A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port but it does not guarantee the signal is the proper frequency Status The DS3 line status of the port Mode Plcp means the port uses PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol framing for cell delineation Hes means the port uses HCS Header Check Sequence based framing for cell delineation Framing The type of framing used for the port Can be cchannel or cbit Loopback The loopback mode on the port Can be cell payload diagnostic line or none Timing The transmit clock for this port network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port Scrambling On means payload scrambling is enabled on the port Off means payload scrambling is disabled on the port EmptyCells The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned
393. oftware Idle means that synchronization is not tak ing place between SCPs Manual means that a manual synchronization is taking place between SCPs Automatic means an automatic synchronization is taking place between SCPs O e 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinbyuod INY 1 When manual or automatic synchronization is taking place between SCPs the name of the file being synchronized is also displayed 1 21 2 7 Switching over to the Standby SCP If you wish to force the standby SCP to take control of the switch this command provides the ability to force a switchover from the controlling to the standby SCP To force the standby SCP to take control of the switch enter the following at the prompt myswitch configuration system dualscp gt switchover You will be asked to confirm this command Type y at the prompt to reset the backup SCP Type n or press lt Enter gt at the prompt to cancel the command myswitch configuration system dualscp gt switchover Switch over to the standby processor n n If you answer y to the above question you will be prompted with the following question only if the standby SCP is in the process of synchronizing with the controlling SCP Dual SCP synchronization pending continue anyway n n CAUTION If this question is displayed you should always answer n Wait until the synchronization process is complete then try the switch over again If you switch over during the synchronization pro
394. ollowing parameters myswitch configuration port traffic c gt clpl lt port gt CBR VBR ABR lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the CLP threshold is to be set CBR VBR ABR Specifies for which type of traffic CBR VBR or ABR UBR the CLP threshold is being set number of cells The number of cells in the buffer at which the specified traffic type drops CLP 1 cells The default is 256 cells 1 The Series C network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release 1 12 22 1 3 Configuring EFCI on a Series C Network Module This command allows you to designate the cell buffer threshold over which Unspecified Bit Rate UBR and Available Bit Rate ABR cells have their explicit forward congestion indicator EFCI code point set on a Series C network module When the EFCI code point is set this sig nals congestion to downstream switch fabrics and flow control mechanisms Once this thresh old is surpassed EFCI continues to be set until the queue empties Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port traffic c gt efci lt port gt on off lt threshold gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which
395. om the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port 1 12 13 GCRA Policing Command Generic Cell Rate Algorithm GCRA policing ensures that traffic is regulated at the ATM layer on the input side of the network This command allows you to configure GCRA policing on a per port per class basis for all CBR and or VBR PVCs and or SVCs Enter the following parameters myswitch conf port gt gcrapolicing lt port gt cbr vbr a110n all0ff svcOn svcOff These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which GCRA policing is being configured cbr vbr The class of service for which you are configuring GCRA policing allOn a11lOn means all connections SVCs and PVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing allOff alloOff means no connections SVCs and PVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing svcOn svcOn means all SVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing PVCs are policed based on their UPC contract This is the default svcOff svcOff means no SVCs of the specified class of service arriving on this port are subjected to GCRA policing PVCs are policed based on their UPC contract For example if you wa
396. om the list of peers and comes back up once the process is complete Because of this a warning is shown when you issue this command and you are asked if you want to continue For example myswitch configuration lane les gt peerdelete 2 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 23c0 0020481a23c0 65 WARNING This command will disable the LES service for the duration of execution Full ELAN connectivity may not be restored until all the LANE clients reconnect to the LES service Do you want to continue deleting the peer n y Type n or lt ENTER gt to abort the command or type y to continue deleting the peer mg The local DLE peer server address cannot be deleted using this command AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 135 AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 5 6 Enabling Disabling ELAN Access Control This command lets you enable or disable ELAN access control for an existing ELAN without destroying and recreating the LES For more information about ELAN access control see the Network Configuration manual for your switch Enter the following myswitch configuration lane les security lt LES index gt disable enable lt wka LECS Addr gt LECS address required for enabling security These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description disable enable disable means that you want to de activate ELAN access control on this LES enable means that you want to activate ELAN access control on this LES
397. omains to share reachability information Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni address gt show PNNI Route Addr Information Node Address Plen Index 1 47 000580ffe1000000f21a0141 000000000000 104 1 Port VPI Type Proto Scope VPcap Mtag OperStatus gt ici 0 exterior mgmt 0 false 0 advertised ATMR Inter Domain Route Information 9 2 fe Domain Address Plen Destn 3 El 1 47 000580ffe1000000f21a0140 002048aabbcc 104 2 DE o Bia The fields in this display are defined as follows a 53 Field Description Node The index number of the node for which the static route is being displayed Address The source address prefix 19 bytes long Plen The number of significant bits in the source address prefix Index The index number for this static route used in combination with Address and Plen More than one static route can be configured on a given port with the same Address and Plen values as long as the index numbers are different Port The number of the port to which the static route is attached VPI The virtual path number to which the static route is attached Type Shows what type of reachability address this is based on what was configured in the conf atmr policy menu This field is read only Proto mgmt means that the addresses displayed are those addresses that are configured via AMI configured from SNMP This field is read only Scope Shows the scope which is the hig
398. on Commands 1 8 9 Unconfiguring an IP Interface This command lets you unconfigure an IP interface This process removes the IP address asso ciated with the interface Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration ip gt unconfigure lt interface gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description The name of the IP interface to be unconfigured Valid interfaces are ie0 asx0 qaa0 qaal qaa2 and qaa3 interface O e 3 3 D 5 2 a You will be asked to confirm this action To confirm the action type y at the prompt To cancel the action type n or press lt Enter gt at the prompt For example uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration ip gt unconfigure qaal Unconfiguring an interface requires the switch to be rebooted Continue with unconfigure n y Reboot the switch y y The switch must be rebooted for this command gt to take effect 1 109 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 LAN Emulation Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure LAN Emulation LANE on a switch You can dis play the list of available subcommands by typing at the lane level myswitch configuration lane gt default bus lec lecs gt les gt 1 9 1 Default LANE Configuration Commands These commands let you configure a default ELAN You can display the list of available sub commands by typing at the defau
399. on Commands Reference Manual 1 281 AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Source NSAP The source NSAP address of the call setup message An asterisk is a wild card that matches all NSAP addresses Destination NSAP The destination NSAP address of the call setup message An asterisk is a wild card that matches all NSAP addresses You can also display an individual template Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering templates gt show lt template id gt myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering templates gt show 3 Source Destination Index Action Name Port VPI Mask Port VPI Mask 4 reject keep_these_out 1A1 k 104 ICTL 0 Source NSAP O0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f215 11f2 002048100464 00 Destination NSAP If no templates exist then the following message is displayed myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering templates gt show No Address Filtering Templates are present 1 282 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 8 4 Configuring NSAP Filter for Interfaces These commands let you configure filters for incoming call setup requests and for outgoing call setup requests for ATM Forum signalling interfaces such as UNI NNI IISP etc To dis play the list of available subcommands type at the interfaces level myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering interfaces gt delete set show 1 16 1 8 4
400. on a switch fabric Enter the following myswitch configuration timing gt show Mode Primary switch N A Secondary Current N A crystalC The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Mode The method of timing being used by the switch switch means all network modules that support distributed timing import their clock source from the port designated under conf timing switchclock tcm means all network modules that support distributed timing import their clock source from the TCM Primary The port that has been configured as the primary switchclock for all of the network mod ules on all of the boards in this switch These are the sources that this board is offering as primary timing sources Any further behavior is dependent on the current mode Secondary The port that has been configured as the secondary switchclock for all of the network modules on all of the boards in this switch These are the sources that this board is offering as secondary timing sources Any further behavior is dependent on the current mode Current The current switchclock source for all of the network modules on all of the boards in this switch If neither the primary nor secondary clocks are available the switch fabric uses the crystal of the first available timing network module as the switchclock going from A to D For example if network module A supports distributed timing then the crystal from A is
401. on might not fail Cells The total amount of cell buffering that is supported for this shared memory model Name The identifier for this shared memory model 1 Memory model 4 has been removed 2 The Series C network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release 1 10 4 4 Setting Traffic Models on a Series C Network Module This command lets you select one of the traffic memory models for a specific network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic c gt setmodel lt module gt lt model gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module to be configured model The predefined memory model to be used for this network module The models make dif ferent trade offs between the number of cell buffers and the number of unicast and multi cast connections Enter the number found in the Model field of the conf module traffic c models command for the shared memory configuration that you want to use 1 The following Series C network modules can only use the following traffic memory models NM 6 25UTPEC and NM 4 155UTP5EC can only use models 1 and 7 all other Series C network modules can only use models 2 6 2 The network module must be reset for this command to take effect
402. on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release You can also display traffic model information about an individual Series LC network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic lc gt show lt module gt myswitch configuration module traffic lc gt show 1B Cell Table UBR EFCI EFCI Module Memory Memory Model EPD EPD On Off 1B 256Kx64 32Kx32 3 256 256 256 1 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those listed in the example above If no Series LC network modules are installed the following is displayed myswitch configuration module traffic lc gt show No Series LC traffic information is available 1 152 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 7 Configuring Traffic on a Series LE Network Module These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series LE net work modules To list the available subcommands type le at the traffic level myswitch configuration module traffic gt le epd efci models setmodel show The conf module traffic le commands are NOTE a only valid on an LE 155 switch O e 3 3 D 5 2 a 1 10 4 7 1 Setting EPD on a Series LE Network Module This command lets you set a threshold value for AAL5 Early Packet Discard EPD on a Series LE network module This is the static threshold in terms of a specified number of cells a
403. onf qosext show for this number The QoSExt Index must exist before it can be applied to a vpt 1 The valid range of VPIs is 0 1022 1023 is used for multicast However Series D E3 and DS3 network modules can only use VPIs 0 510 511 is used for multicast 1 388 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 27 4 Displaying Virtual Path Terminators This command lets you display virtual path terminators for all of the ports on a switch board Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vpt gt show Input Output Port VPI Port VPI ResBW CurBW MinVCI MaxVC VCs Protocol I I 0 terminate N A 0 8K 5 6 pvc 1C2 0 terminate N A 0 8K 5 7 pve 1C3 0 terminate N A 0 8K 5 6 pve z LC4 0 terminate N A 0 8K 5 5 pve e o fo LCTL 0 terminate N A 0 0K 1023 19 pvc 3 Q originate 1C1 0 N A 0 8K 5 6 pve 3 Fi originate 1C2 0 N A 0 8K 5 7 pve S originate 1C3 0 N A 0 8K 5 6 pvc o A originate 1C4 0 N A 0 8K 5 5 pve 3 originate ICIL 0 N A 0 0K 1023 22 pve The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Input Port The incoming port number of the vpt Shows originate if it is an originating path Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Output Port The outgoing port number of the vpt Shows the number of the output port of the vpt Shows terminate if it is a terminating path Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number ResBW The maximum a
404. onfiguration Commands 000 cece eee 1 259 1 15 1 Displaying Serial Port Information 200000e esau 1 259 116 Security Configuration Commands ccc eee eee 1 260 1 16 1 IP Access Configuration Commands a 1 260 1 16 1 1 Configuring an Authorized IP Address 1 260 1 16 1 2 Deleting an Authorized IP Address 1 261 1 16 1 3 Rejecting Accepting Strict Source Routed Packets 1 261 1 16 1 4 Rejecting Accepting Loose Source Routed Packets 1 261 1 16 1 5 Rejecting Accepting All Packets 1 262 1 16 1 6 Displaying IP Access Information 1 263 1 16 1 7 Login Userid Configuration Commands 1 265 1 16 1 7 1 Backing Up the Login Userid File 1 265 116 1 7 2 Deleting a Userid a 1 266 TOC 10 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 16 1 7 3 Enabling or Disabling Fingering 16 1 7 4 Modifying a Userid 00 416 1 7 5 Creating a Userid 0a 416 1 7 6 Setting or Changing a Password for a Userid 16 1 7 7 Restoring the Login File 146 1 7 8 Configuring SecurID aa 1 16 1 7 8 1 Getting the Securld Configuration APA PA eae 1 16 1 7 8 2 Deleting a SecurlD File 1 16 1 7 8 3 Displaying the SecurID File 416 1 7 9 Displaying Userid Information 16 1 7 10 Displaying and Cha
405. onfiguration Commands 1 26 3 Displaying Virtual Paths This command lets you display existing virtual through paths You can show either all of the existing virtual paths on an individual switch fabric or all of the existing virtual paths on a specific port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vpc gt show Input Port 3B1 3B1 3B2 3B6 3B6 VPI 40 75 95 62 68 Output Port VPI 3B4 40 3B5 75 3B3 95 3B2 62 3B3 68 UPC Oo O Prot pvc pvc pvc pvc pvc Name customer_a customer_b customer_e customer_c customer_d The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Input Port The incoming port number of the through path Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Output Port The outgoing port number of the through path Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number UPC The integer index that refers to a specific traffic contract assigned to this through path UPC contracts can be displayed using conf upc show Prot The type of protocol running on this channel Name The user assigned name which helps to identify this through path uniquely 1 384 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands To list advanced options about all of the existing virtual through paths enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vpc gt show advanced Input Output Port VPI Po
406. onfiguration Commands 1 5 1 4 Displaying Alarm Conditions This command lets you display the status of all alarms Enter the following myswitch configuration cec alarms gt show AlarmType AlarmStatus MinorAlarm MajorAlarm powerSupplyInputFailed active disabled enabled powerSupplyOutputFailed active disabled enabled fanBankFailed active disabled enabled tempSensorOverTemp inactive disabled enabled Major alarm relay status on Minor alarm relay status off The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description AlarmType Displays the name of the alarm AlarmStatus Shows whether the state of the alarm is active alarming or inactive not alarming An alarm is active if the underlying condition is detected For power supplies the input failed alarm condition is active if the input voltage is not within the nominal range for the supply This does not necessarily mean that an output failure will result A power supply output failure condition is active if any power supply is failing or if it is physically removed MinorAlarm disabled means that this alarm type will not cause a minor alarm enabled means that this alarm type causes a minor alarm MajorAlarm disabled means that this alarm type will not cause a major alarm enabled means that this alarm type causes a major alarm Major Alarm relay status off means that no major alarms are currently active on means that one or more major alarms are cu
407. onfiguration Commands Reference Manual 1 331 AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 2 5 Resetting the Standby SCP This command lets you force the standby SCP to reboot To do this enter the following at the prompt myswitch configuration system dualscp gt reset You are asked to confirm this command Type y at the prompt to reset the standby SCP Type n or press lt Enter gt at the prompt to cancel the command myswitch configuration system dualscp gt reset Reset the standby processor n n 1 21 2 6 Displaying Dual SCP Information This command lets you display the settings for dual SCP mode To view these settings enter the following at the prompt myswitch configuration system dualscp gt show Auto CDB Sync Sync SCP State Primary Failover Threshold Remove SyncMode Requests Failures 3X standalone X enable 2 secs disable automatic 0 0 Synchronization queue empty Synchronization state Suspended The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description information for the SCP in slot X of switch fabric 3 is being displayed SCP The SCP for which the information is being displayed For example 3X indicates that State The state of the SCP standalone means that there is only one SCP in the switch fabric dual means that there are two SCPs installed in the switch fabric and the SCPs are com municating with one another other means that there are two SCPs installed in the switch fabric but the
408. ong to this ForeThought PNNI peer group This field is displayed only if the protocol is FI PNNI FtpnniPrefix The default NSAP prefix for this ATM switch that is used in the ILMI address registration message and in the hello indication FI PNNI message This field is displayed only if the protocol is FI PNNI Border A border switch has a link to at least one other switch that belongs to a different peer group A border switch advertises reachability information about its peer group to switches outside of its peer group enabled means this switch acts as a ForeThought PNNI border switch disabled means this switch does not act as a ForeThought PNNI border switch This field is displayed only if the protocol is FI PNNI PnniPgld The peer group ID of the peer group to which this node belongs This field is displayed only if the protocol is PNNI Ptses The number of PTSEs that belong to this node This field is displayed only if the protocol is PNNI PnniNodeld The ID of this node This field is displayed only if the protocol is PNNI The first nine fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those listed in the previ ous show command AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 17 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 2 Configuring a Domain These commands allow you to configure a domain on a switch An ATM routing domain is a group of a
409. only applies to connections on Series D network modules It indicates that the alternate CLP threshold configured using conf module traffic d altclpthresh should be used for all connections created with this UPC contract The default is for the connections not to use the alternate CLP threshold Scheduling The scheduling mode that dictates the way traffic is serviced on the output side of a Series D network module roundrobin means that all service for these connections comes from one of the round robin queues in the network module This is the default mode for both SVCs and PVCs smoothed means that all service for these connections comes from the network module s rate controller which ensures that cells for these connections are trans mitted into the network at a fixed rate of R cells per second guaranteed is a combina tion of the round robin and smoothed modes Service for these connections are scheduled with both fixed rate R from the rate controller and they have an entry in the appropriate round robin queue Name The user defined name associated with this UPC traffic contract AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 373 AMI Configuration Commands 1 25 Virtual Channel Configuration Commands These commands let you configure permanent virtual channels PVCs You can display the list of available subcommands by typing vec at the configuration level myswitch configuration gt vee delete new show 1
410. ontains 5 default entries with an index of 0 When a new signalling interface is created an expansion table index will be associated with it If no index is specified while creating the signalling interface the default entries with index 0 will be used to associate this signalling interface with the QOS expansion table entries You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the qos level myswitch configuration qos gt delete new show 1 13 1 Deleting a QOS Expansion Table Entry These commands let you delete an entry from the QOS expansion table If a QOS expansion table is currently being used by one or more signalling interfaces or originating SPVCs then the expansion entries in that table cannot be deleted Also the entries in the default QOS expansion table index 0 cannot be deleted Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration qos gt delete lt QoSExpIndex gt lt QoSclass gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description QosExpIndex The index into the QOS expansion table that is used to associate signalling interfaces with expansion table entries QoSclass Specifies the QOS class that is to be expanded into parameterized QOS IEs Can have a value of 0 through 4 1 254 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 13 2 Creating a QOS Expansion Table Entry These commands let you add an entry to the QOS expansion table I
411. ooped back to the switch The E3 stream is still transmitted to the network but the incoming E3 stream is ignored line loopback connects the transmitter to the receiver The data stream received from the line is retransmitted out to the line Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over the line none means that no loopback will take place on the port The default is none 1 208 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 12 3 Configuring E3 Port Mode This command allows you to change the method used for cell delineation on an E3 network module port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port e3 gt mode lt port gt picp hes These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the framing type is to be changed plcp hes plcp means that the port uses PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol framing G 751 for cell delineation hes means that the port uses HCS Header Check Sequence based framing G 832 for cell delineation The default is hes O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY 1 12 12 4 Configuring E3 Port Scrambling This command allows you to change the scrambling mode on a port on an E3 network mod ule Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port e35 scrambling lt port gt on off These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Desc
412. or all of the LECS configured on the switch AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual If there is an error in the LECS CFG file that prevents the LECS from starting an error is printed to the console if the console is enabled indicating the line number in which the error occurred 1 129 oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByUuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 4 5 Getting the LECS Configuration File This command lets you download the LECS configuration file Enter the following myswitch configuration lane lecs gt get lt host gt lt remotefile gt lt localfile gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description host The IP address of the host from which the LECS database file is to be retrieved remotefile The name of the LECS database file that is to be retrieved localfile The name of the file where the retrieved LECS database file is to be stored 1 The default local file is lecs cfg For information about configuring this file refer NOTES to the Network Configuration manual for your switch If you have configured the transfer protocol to be FIP using conf system protocol you only need to enter the command shown above to retrieve the LECS file After you enter the command shown above you are prompted for the remote userid and password of the remote host from which you are retrieving the file For information about the conf system protocol command refer t
413. ore filters then it must be deleted from each filter list using the conf security nsapfiltering filters delete lt template id gt command Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering templates gt delete lt template id gt 1 278 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 8 2 2 Creating a Template This command lets you create a template Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering templates new lt template id gt srcport lt port gt srcvpi lt vpi gt srcnsap lt nsap gt srcmask lt mask gt dstport lt port gt dstvpi lt vpi gt dstnsap lt nsap gt dstmask lt mask gt action accept reject 116 1 8 2 3 Modifying a Template This command lets you modify individual items in a template If the template is currently in use by a filter then the changes take effect immediately Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering templates modify lt template id gt action accept reject srcport lt port gt srevpi lt vpi gt srcnsap lt nsap gt srcmask lt mask gt dstport lt port gt dstvpi lt vpi gt dstnsap lt nsap gt dstmask lt mask gt name lt string gt If you apply an NSAP filter to a port connected to a LANE client the client may still receive traffic from the blocked source indirectly through t
414. ork module while the switch is under power This allows you to reset the connections on a given net work module without having physical access to the switch Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module gt reset lt module gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module you want to reset All SVCs associated with this network module NOTE are torn down upon a reset and attempt to reconnect as needed All PVCs associated with this network module are torn down and set up again upon a reset Depending on the number of PVCs involved it may take a few seconds for all of the PVCs to be re established after a reset For example if you want to reset network module 3B enter the following myswitch configuration module gt reset 3b The switch then cautions you that all connections will be torn down To abort the reset type n or press lt ENTER gt To continue with the reset type y Resetting the network module will destroy the existing connections temporarily Reset the network module n y 1 142 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 3 Displaying Network Module Configuration Information This command lets you display general information about network modules that are currently installed in a switch fabric Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module gt show Module Series Admin Speed Ports T
415. ormation Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni gt address show pnni interdomain lt nodeix gt lt address gt lt len gt lt index gt If no PNNI addresses have been configured then the following is displayed myswitch configuration atmroute pnni address gt show No route address information is available No Inter Domain Route information available 1 40 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 2 PNNI Crankback Configuration Commands These commands let you configure crankback on a switch During PNNI signalling a call being processed according to a DTL may encounter a blocked node or link along the desig nated route Crankback allows a partial reroute of such a rejected call so that it does not have to be cleared all the way back to the source Additionally an indication of the blockage is sent to the originator of the DTL You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the crankback level myswitch configuration atmroute pnni crankback gt show set 1 3 4 2 1 Displaying the Crankback Setting This command lets you display the number of times a PNNI call is attempted through crank back on this switch before it is rejected Enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinbyuod INY myswitch configuration atmroute pnni crankback gt show Number of tries per call 2 The field in
416. ort VPI SscopNoResponse LAL 0 LA2 LA3 LA4 LBL LB2 1B3 LB4 LCTL oa aa a co a a GOG D l O GG Il GG Il TJ J The fields in the timer display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers that currently have a signalling interface enabled VPI The number of the virtual path that contains the signalling channel SScopNoResponse The value that has been set for the duration of the SSCOP no response timer This is the time in seconds to wait before bringing the SSCOP connection down The default value is 10 seconds for UNI 3 0 and 7 seconds for UNI 3 1 To display timer information for all of the signalling channels on a specific port and path for example port 1A3 and VPI 0 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show 1A3 0 timers Port VPI SscopNoResponse 1A3 0 7 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example 1 364 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 23 4 5 Displaying Public UNI Information for Signalling Channels To show public UNI information about all of the signalling channels on a switch fabric enter the following parameters myswitch configuration signalling gt show public E164Address Port VPI ILMIReg AddressFmt E164Address Resolution PlanType 1B1 0 disable E 164 enable international 1B2 TBS 1B4 1CTL D os O GO disable E 164 enable national
417. ort traffic le gt qsize show The conf port traffic le commands are only valid on an LE 155 switch 1 12 22 3 1 Setting the CLP Threshold on a Series LE Network Module This command lets you designate the CLP 1 threshold at which cells that have been tagged as non conforming are dropped for a given traffic type on a specified port on a Series LE network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configura port traffic le gt clpl lt port gt CBR VBR ABR UBR lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the CLP threshold is to be set CBR VBR ABR UBR Specifies for which type of traffic CBR VBR ABR or UBR to set the CLP threshold number of cells The number of cells in the buffer at which the specified traffic type drops CLP 1 cells The default is 256 cells 1 The Series LE network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 241 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 3 2 Configuring Port Queue Size on a Series LE Network Module This command enables you to designate the minimum queue size for a given type of traffic on a specified port on a Series LE networ
418. orted by this shared memory configu ration Mcasts The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to the net work module by this shared memory configuration Cells The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration Counters The number of per connection counters that is supported by this shared memory configu ration 0 means there are no per connection counters 1 means there are per connection counters for cells transmitted and for cells lost 2 means there are per connection counters for cells transmitted for cells lost for intentional cells lost and for unintentional cells lost Name The identifier for this shared memory model 1 For proper operation all Series LC network modules in a switch must use memory models that support the same number of unicast connections Therefore all Series LC modules in a switch should either use models 1 5 OR models 6 8 The following Series LC network modules can only use the following traffic memory models OC 3 MM and UTP can only use models 1 2 3 and 6 OC 3 SM can only use models 4 and 7 and OC 12 MM and SM can only use models 5 and 8 2 The Cell Memory and Table Memory sizes determine which memory models are appropriate for any given network module 3 Only one multicast output is supported per port for each multicast connection 1 150 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Com
419. other dualscp parameters are set To configure failover enter the following at the prompt gt So myswitch configuration system dualscp gt failover enable disable 3 Q 3 gt These parameters are defined as follows De o Bia o2 Parameter Description o 3 enable Indicates that SCP failover will be enabled This is the default disable Indicates that SCP failover will be disabled 1 21 2 4 Configuring the Controlling SCP This command lets you designate which SCP is to control the switch at start up To designate the primary SCP enter the following at the prompt myswitch configuration system dualscp gt primary X Y These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description X Indicates that the SCP in the left slot of the ASX 200BX or TNX 210 switch fabric the top slot in an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 is the primary SCP This is the default Y Indicates that the SCP in the right slot of the ASX 200BX or TNX 210 switch fabric the bottom slot in an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 is the primary SCP The primary SCP and the controlling are not gt necessarily the same Primary refers to the SCP that is supposed to control the switch after it boots Controlling refers to the SCP that actually controls the switch For example if the SCP in slot X fails at start up the SCP in slot Y will control the switch even though it is not designated as the primary SCP AMI C
420. ou must first have a remote syslog host configured to receive the messages Use the command conf system syslog set to do this AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 343 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands Because the logging of each change can generate E gt a lot of extra traffic it is recommended that you enable this feature only after you have reached your initial desired configuration This tool is most useful as a security feature for logging any minor modifications which occur after that The AMI syslog messages generally come in pairs with the result of the first message saying Pending and the second message giving the outcome There are some exceptions such as any change that makes it impossible to send the result to syslog such as rebooting the switch The AMI syslog messages are output in a format that is similar to the following date time IP address or switch name AMI userid IP address or serial port where the user logged in AMI command string result of command For example the output will be something similar to the following AUG 28 12 36 40 fishtank AMI ami 169 144 87 22 snmp off Pending AUG 28 12 36 41 fishtank AMI ami 169 144 87 22 snmp off Success You can also display the auditing state for AMI by entering ami without a as follows myswitch configuration system syslog audit gt ami Facility Priority ami debug 1
421. ourth or the fifth week Week 1 is the first week in which the d th day occurs Day 0 is Sunday time is of the same format as offset except that no leading or is allowed If time is not entered the default of 02 00 00 is used AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 327 AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 System Configuration Commands These commands let you configure dual SCP functionality configure the transfer protocol to be used when transferring files configure system message log features configure the amount of time of non activity after which an AMI session times out and change the units for desig nating UPC contracts You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the system level myswitch configuration system show dualscp gt prompt protocol syslog gt timeout units 1 21 1 Displaying System Information This command lets you display the amount of time of non activity after which an AMI session will time out and display what type of units will be used when designating UPC contracts You can get to this level by entering show at the system level Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration system gt show AMI Session Timeout off File transfer protocol EEEp UPC Units cps The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description AMI Session Timeout The number of minutes of no activity after which an AMI session will time out and ex
422. ow ever the configuration information for the transfer variables i e the primary URL secondary URL recording interval will still be present AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 317 AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 1 5 Deleting Call Record and Performance Monitoring Transfer Variables This command allows you to delete call record transfer variables or performance monitoring transfer variables Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt delete cr perf These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description perf The performance monitoring feature is to be deleted cr The call record feature is to be deleted The following is an example of how to delete call record transfer variables Are you sure you want to disable and delete Callrecords configuration n y Callrecords configuration deleted myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt show Callrecords has not been configured 1 20 1 6 Setting the Data Server Password This command allows you to change the data server password for call records or for perfor mance monitoring Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt password cr perf These parameters for enable and disable are defined as follows Parameter Description password The password to be used for the data transfer sessions to the primary and secondary data servers perf The
423. password is being set for performance monitoring cr The password is being set for call recording l Ifthe Admin status is on and the password is changed the change takes effect at the next recording interval gt For security reasons the switch will not echo your password but will ask you to confirm the password by retyping it myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt password cr Enter password Retype new password 1 318 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 1 7 Displaying Call Record and Performance Monitoring Information This command allows you to display call records or performance monitoring information for the entire switch fabric Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt show cr perf advanced myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt show cr Admin status on 169 14 149 90 us bob info cr switcha 169 14 0 90 us bob info cr switcha Primary URL Secondary URL Recording interval 1 Data server userid bob gt So To display advanced information enter the following parameters 3 3 Y Q 3c myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt show cr advanced 25 Admin status on 5 Primary URL 169 14 149 90 us bob info cr switcha Secondary URL 169 14 0 90 us bob info cr switcha Recording interval 1 Data server userid bob Memory allocated 20 percent Memory overflow action dontRecordCall Faile
424. path through which this static route can be reached cost lt cost gt Used only with the new command The routing metric for this link There is a cost for each link in a route The sum of these link costs determines the overall cost of a route To expe dite traffic on a route try to minimize the overall cost of a route For a critical route then choose a small cost value For a lesser important route choose a higher cost value cbr_cap lt cbr_cap gt Used only with the new command The maximum CBR Constant Bit Rate capacity allowed for any single connection on this route This number is limited by the actual CBR capacity available on the output link specified for this route vbr_cap lt vbr_cap gt G sed only with the new command The maximum VBR Variable Bit Rate capacity llowed for any single connection on this route This number is limited by the actual VBR apacity available on the output link specified for this route a p abr Used only with the new command Use the abr parameter only for links that support ABR traffic epd Used only with the new command Use the epd parameter only for links that support Early Packet Discard 1 32 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 14 3 Displaying Static Routes This command lets you display the current static routes Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni staticroute gt
425. play are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers of each SONET network module currently installed in the switch fabric 1 Carrier yes means a carrier has been detected on this port no means a carrier has not been detected AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 227 AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Section The Section Status of this interface The variable is a bit map represented as a sum so it can represent multiple defects simultaneously The various bit positions are as follows 1 sonetSectionNoDefect 2 sonetSectionLOS Loss Of Signal was detected LOS is declared when 20 3us of all zero patterns is detected 4 sonetSectionLOF Loss Of Frame was detected LOF is declared when an out of frame condition persists for 3ms Line The Line Status of this interface It is a bit map represented as a sum so it can represent multiple defects simultaneously The various bit positions are 1 sonetLineNoDefect 2 sonetLineAIS Line Alarm Indication Signal was detected Line AIS is asserted when a 111 binary pattern is detected in bits 6 7 8 of the K2 byte for five consecutive frames 4 sonetLineRDI Line Remote Defect Indication was detected RDI is asserted when a 110 binary pattern is detected in bits 6 7 8 of the K2 byte for five consecutive frames Path Shows the Path Status of this interface The variable is a bit map represented as
426. port network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port Scram on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port off means that payload scram bling is disabled on this port EmptyCells The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned 1 A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port It does not guarantee that the signal is the proper frequency 2 Please refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting 1 210 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 12 6 Configuring E3 Port Timing This command lets you change the timing source on a port on an E3 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port e3 gt timing lt port gt network internal These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the line length is to be changed network internal The transmit clock for this port network means that the clock that is recovered fr
427. port The particular port to be managed up down up brings the designated port on line down takes the designated port off line AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 177 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 3 AISRDI Port Configuration Commands When a physical layer fault loss of carrier loss of frame etc is detected on a port that has AIS RDI Alarm Indication Signal Remote Defect Indication enabled OAM cells are gener ated for all through paths originating paths PVCs and PNNI SPVCs that originate on that port If a virtual path AIS condition is indicated by receipt of F4 AIS cells on a terminating path OAM cells are generated for only that path and for channels PVCs and PNNI SPVCs that originate on that path SVCs and SPANS SPVCs do not generate AIS cells RDI cells are generated upstream from a terminating path whenever an OAM condition exists on the receiving side of that port An AIS is sent in the downstream direction away from the failure Receiving an AIS cell indicates that a physical layer failure condition is present upstream from the receiver An RDI cell is sent toward the failure when a physical fault or AIS condition is detected on the virtual path and channel Receiving an RDI cell means that a fault exists in the transit pathway of the virtual connection described by the RDI cell This command lets you enable or disable ATM layer AIS RDI OAM cell generation on a specific port Enter the fol
428. port is not the WAN port this value equals the input VPI of the through path from the shaping port to the WAN port vbrob The bandwidth overbooking level for this vpt specified as a percentage Valid values are integers from 1 to 32 767 100 means that no overbooking has been defined Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 cause overbooking Overbooking cannot be specified on an elastic path Therefore you can only specify an overbooking fac tor for an originating path when you also have reserved bandwidth for the path i e spec ified the reserved lt Kbs gt parameter vbrbuffob The buffer overbooking level for this vpt specified as a percentage Valid values are inte gers greater than or equal to 1 100 means that no overbooking has been defined Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 cause overbooking Over booking cannot be specified on an elastic path Therefore you can only specify an over booking factor for an originating path when you also have reserved bandwidth for the path i e specified the reserved lt Kbs gt parameter none The specified class of service CBR real time VBR non real time VBR UBR or ABR is not supported default The default parameters of 0 CTD 0 CDV and 0 CLR are to be used for the CBR class of ser vice QoSExtIndex The index number of the set of QoS extension parameters See the QoSExt Index field under c
429. pplied to PVCs using the conf vcc new or the conf vpe new command You can display the list of available subcommands by typing upc at the configuration level myswitch configuration gt upe delete new show 1 24 1 Deleting a UPC Traffic Contract This command allows you to delete an existing UPC contract Enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a myswitch configuration upc gt delete lt index gt uonjein6iju09 INY 1 24 2 Creating a UPC Traffic Contract This command lets you create a UPC contract Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration upc gt new lt index gt ubr aal5 noPktDisc ubrTagging AltCLP name lt name gt OR new lt index gt lt UPC gt edvt lt us gt noGCRA aal5 noPktDisc PPPol AltCLP scheduling roundrobin smoothed guaranteed name lt name gt Where UPC is one of the following combinations of traffic parameters cbr lt pcr01 gt cbr0 lt pcr0 gt lt pcr01 gt tag vbr lt pcr01 gt lt scr01 gt lt mbs01 gt vbr0 sper015 lt scr0 gt smbs05 tag The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows Parameter Description index The integer index that refers to this specific traffic contract Valid index numbers are from 0 to 32 767 UPC One of the types of traffic contracts shown above The parameters in these contracts are defined as follows ubr Indicates UBR traffic AMI Configuration Commands R
430. pport the entire range it is better to lower the minimum reserved PMP VCI instead of increasing the maximum O e 3 3 D 5 2 a Enter the following parameters uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration switch pmpminvci lt vci gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description vci The bottom number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for PMP SVCs The default is 155 For example to set the minimum reserved VCI to 100 which effectively increases the PMP reserved VCI range to support the creation of 156 PMP SVCs enter the following parameters myswitch configuration switch gt pmpminvci 100 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 325 AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 6 Displaying the Switch Configuration This command lets you display switch configuration information including the switch name the type of switch the amount of time in days hours and minutes since the switch has been rebooted the hardware version the software version the number of maximum virtual paths the number of maximum virtual channels the SPANS address of the switch the range of the minimum and maximum number of reserved VCIs for point to multipoint connections and the time zone set for the switch Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration switch gt show Switch fishtank Type asx200bxtnx210 up 2 days 19 40 Hardware version B Software version S_ForeThought_5 0 0 1 13304
431. private NSAP addresses into native E 164 addresses Enable means NSAP address to E 164 address mapping occurs Disable means NSAP address to E 164 address mapping will not occur However if you use disable but you are also using the native E 164 address format then the only address conversion per formed at this signalling channel is for private NSAP addresses in E 164 format plantype international national subscriber The plan type to be used in the calling party number and called party number information elements in the signalling messages You can set this variable if the address format is spec ified as e164 You cannot set it if the address format is specified as private By default international is used with the e164 address format By default unknown is used with the private address format iefilter enable disable The information element IE filter which controls the filtering of signalling elements of the UNI 3 x signalling channels Filters can be applied to the following UNI 3 x IEs cg cgs cds blli b11i23 bhli aal enable means that the listed elements will not be passed to the called party they are filtered Any IEs that are not listed here will be passed to the called party When using this parameter with conf signalling new filter ing is enabled for any IEs that you specify You can then later use this parameter with conf signalling modify to disable filtering of the specified IEs without changing the lis
432. putation profile Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni profile gt delete lt nodeix gt lt profileix gt 1 3 4 6 2 Modifying a PNNI Profile This command lets you modify an existing PNNI path computation profile Enter the follow ing parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni profile gt modify lt nodeix gt lt profileix gt minfwdcer lt minfwdcr gt minrever lt minrevcr gt fwdclptype clpEqual0 clpEqual0Orl1 revclptype clpEqual0 clpEqual00Or1 fwdclr lt fwdclr gt revclr lt revclr gt optctd true false optcdv true false loadbal true false vponly true false 1 3 4 6 3 Creating a PNNI Profile This command lets you create a PNNI path computation profile Enter the following parame ters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni profile gt new lt nodeix gt lt profileix gt cbr rtVbr nrtVbr abr ubr minfwder lt minfwdcr gt minrever lt minrevcr gt fwdclptype clpEqual0 clpEqual0Orl1 revclptype clpEqual0 clpEqual0Or1 fwdclr lt fwdclr gt revclr lt revclr gt optctd true false optcdv true false loadbal true false vponly true false 1 56 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands The parameters for delete new and modify are defined as follows Parameter Description nodeix The index number of the node to which the profile belongs profileix
433. que positive integer index of the LEC that is dynamically assigned by AMI when a LEC is created to identify this LEC from any others in the same ELAN Found under the Index field using the conf lane lec show command LEC index The range of index numbers of the LECs that you want to delete The index is found under LEC index range x y the Index field using conf lane lec show O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY Before you can delete a LEC you must first NOTE a administer its e1 interface down using the conf ip admin interface down command 1 9 3 4 LEC Default Configuration Mode Commands These commands allow you to set or to display the default LEC configuration mode You can show the list of available subcommands by typing default at the lec level myswitch configuration lane lec default mode show 1 119 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 3 4 1 Setting the Default LEC Configuration Mode This command lets you set the default mode for configuring all of the ELANs that may be cre ated on this switch If you use manual mode you must specify the gt LECS address of the machine that will be used as the LECS If you use wellknown mode then the well known LECS address is used Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lec default gt mode manual wellknown lt LECS address gt LECS address is required for
434. r The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 297 AMI Configuration Commands 1 19 SPVC Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure SPVCs Smart Permanent Virtual Circuits An SPVC is a connection that goes across multiple switch fabrics An SPVC looks like a PVC at the local and remote endpoints with an SVC in the middle SPVCs are more robust than PVCs If a link carrying a PVC goes down then the PVC goes down If a link carrying an SPVC goes down and there is an alternate route then the end switch fabrics of the SPVC automatically reroute the SPVC around the failed link To display the list of available subcommands type spvc at the configuration level myswitch configuration gt spve spans gt pnni gt 1 19 1 SPANS SPVC Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure SPANS SPVCs To create a SPANS SPVC you must configure the two ends concurrently on the two switch fabrics Therefore you must have an AMI session open on both the local switch fabric and the destination switch fabric To display the list of available subcommands type spans at the spvc level myswitch configuration spvc gt spans delete new show 1 19 1 1 Deleting a SPANS SPVC This command allows you to delete an existing SPANS SPVC There are two different ways to delete an SPVC Enter the following parameters myswitch
435. r at the timing level myswitch configuration cec timing gt failover delay 1 5 4 2 1 Configuring the Failover Timing Delay This command lets you set the delay in whole seconds between the time that the primary ref erence fails and the time that the TCM is told to switch over to the secondary reference Enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 O myswitch configuration cec timing failover gt delay lt seconds gt uoneinByuod INY The parameter for setting is defined as follows Parameter Description Indicates the amount of time after the failure of the primary reference before the TCM is instructed to switch to the secondary reference The default is 0 seconds seconds The failover delay should be left at 0 under NOTES normal circumstances This parameter is only meaningful when the timing mode is automatic 1 85 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 4 3 Timing Mode Configuration This command lets you configure the timing reference to be used on the TCM You can get to this level by entering mode at the timing level Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration timing gt mode freerun primary secondary automatic bits The parameters for configuring are defined as follows Parameter Description freerun Indicates that the TCM must use the local oscillator as its timing source p
436. r and they have an entry in the appropriate round robin queue If there are no Series D network modules in the switch fabric then the following is displayed myswitch configuration port traffic d gt show No Series D port traffic configuration information available 1 250 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 23 UBR Tagging Command When UBR tagging is enabled on a connection all cells on the connection are tagged by the policer so that they can be discarded using the CLP 1 threshold when congestion is experi enced This prevents UBR traffic on a given port from using an unfair amount of buffer resources on a network module This command lets you tag cells on a per port and per con nection basis for all UBR connections Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port gt ubrtagging lt port gt These parameters are defined as follows all10n allOff svcOn svcOff O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY Parameter Description port The port number on which UBR tagging is being configured allOn allon means all UBR connections SVCs and PVCs arriving on this port are subjected to UBR tagging allOff alloff means no UBR connections SVCs and PVCs arriving on this port are subjected to UBR tagging svcOn svcOn means all UBR SVCs arriving on this port are subjected to UBR tagging PVCs are tagged based on their UPC contract This i
437. r by sending hellos at the specified hello interval oneWay Inside means that hellos have been received from the neighbor and the neighbor has established that they are peers but the neighbor s remote node ID and remote port ID are 0 twoWayInside means that hellos have been received from the neighbor the neighbor has established that they are peers and the neighbor has sent the correct remote node ID and remote port ID Bi directional communication can occur over this link oneWayOut side means that hellos have been received from the neighbor and the neighbor has established that they are from different peer groups but the neighbor s remote node ID and remote port ID are 0 twoWayOut side means that hellos have been received from the neighbor the neighbor has established that they are from different peer groups and the neighbor has sent the correct remote node ID and remote port ID but the nodal hierarchy list does not include a common peer group commonOut side means that a common level of the routing hierarchy has been found and bi directional communica tion can occur over this link PeerSt N A means the protocol is something other than PNNI so this field is not applicable When the protocol is PNNI shows the state of the database exchange protocol running between this node and the neighboring peer listed npdown means there are no active links to the neighboring peer negot iat ing means the two peers are deciding which one will
438. r byte HEX gt db lt LECS database file gt default lt LES atm address gt lt LECS wka gt none The parameters for new are defined as follows Parameter Description LECS Selector byte HEX The 20th byte of the ATM address of the host or switch that is to run a LECS service entered in hexadecimal format Use the conf atmarp getnsap command to display the entire ATM address db lt LECS database file gt The full path to the location and name of the LECS database file The default file is lecs cfg For information about configuring this file refer to the Network Configuration manual for your switch default lt LES atm address gt The default LES address to use in case the LECS configuration file is inaccessible lt LECS wka gt none none means the well known address is disabled so that the LECS can only be contacted by using the switch s actual address with selector byte LECS wka means that the ATM address that you enter is going to be used as the well known address instead of the one defined by the ATM Forum Although more than one LECS can be created on a switch you must ensure that no two LECS are listening on the same address If you create a LECS and then change the NSAP prefix of the switch at a later time the change is NOT automatically reflected in the LECS s address You must delete the LECS and recreate it using the new NSAP prefix AMI Config
439. r cache profiles only showing the number of avoided links in this pro file NumPref A read only field for cache profiles only showing the number of preferred links in this profile You can also display information about a specific node or profile as follows myswitch configuration atmroute pnni gt profile show lt nodeix gt lt profileix gt advanced myswitch configuration atmroute pnni gt profile show 1 1 Node Profile Service MinFwdCR MinRevCR FwdClpType RevClpType FwdCLR RevCLR 1 1 cbr N A N A clpEqual0 clpEqual0 N A N A State ProfileType LoadBal VPOnly OptCTD OptCDV OptAdmWt NumAvd NumPref inactive mgmtEntry false false false false aw N A N A The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 59 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands You can also display advanced information about all of the nodes and profiles or a specific node or profile as follows myswitch configuration atmroute pnni profile gt show advanced 1 2 Node Profile Service MinFwdCR MinRevCR FwdClpType RevClpType FwdCLR RevCLR 1 2 ubr N A N A clpEqual0 clpEqual0 N A N A State ProfileType LoadBal VPOnly OptCTD OptCDV OptAdmWt NumAvd NumPref computed cacheEntry false false false false aw 0 0 No avoided link information for this profile No preferred link information for this profile The fields in this displa
440. r reject all loose source routed packets Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security ipaccess gt lsr allow disallow AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 261 AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 5 Rejecting Accepting All Packets This command lets you configure an IP filtering flag to specify whether the switch should accept or reject all IP packets Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security ipaccess gt all allow disallow The parameters for ssr Isr and all are defined as follows Parameter Description allow Setting ssr to allow means that all incoming IP packets that are strict source routed are accepted provided that they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses Setting 1sr to allow means that all incoming IP packets that are loose source routed are accepted provided that they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses Setting a11 to allow means that all incoming IP packets are accepted provided that they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses Setting a11 to allow is the default setting disallow Setting ssr to disallow means that all incoming IP packets that are strict source routed are rejected even if they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses Setting 1sr to disallow means that all incoming IP packets that are loose source routed are rejected even if they match an IP address in the table of
441. r security reasons Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration ip forwarding on off These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description Using on turns IP forwarding on Using off turns IP forwarding off on off O e 3 3 D 5 2 a 1 8 5 Configuring the IP Subnet Mask This command allows you to modify the IP subnet mask Enter the following parameters uoneinByuod INY myswitch configuration ip gt mask lt interface gt lt mask gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description interface The name of the IP interface Valid interfaces are ie0 asx0 qaa0 qaal qaa2 and qaa3 mask The subnet mask for this IP interface It should be entered in dotted decimal notation e g 255 255 255 0 1 8 6 Configuring the MTU Size of a Classical IP Interface This command allows you to configure the MTU size of a Classical IP interface Although the default MTU size should work in most installations you may need to modify this value when connected to non FORE equipment Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration ip mtu lt qaax gt lt size gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description The name of the Classical IP interface Valid interfaces are qaa0 qaal qaa2 and qaa3 qaaX The MTU size for this Classical IP interface Valid values are from 1 to 65535 The default is 9180
442. r when the switch fabric is rebooted Valid values are from 1 50 The default is 15 action The action that the switch fabric should take if the memory allocated for call records runs out rejectCall means that the call should be rejected noRecord means that the call should be allowed but no call record should be generated for that call If this value is changed it takes effect immediately The default is reject Ca11 1 316 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 1 3 Enabling Call Record and Performance Monitoring Transfers This command allows you to enable turn on call recording or performance monitoring trans fers for the switch fabric Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt enable perf or cr memory lt percentage gt action lt rejectCall noRecord gt The following is an example of how to enable a call record transfer myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt enable cr memory 20 action noRecord 1 20 1 4 Disabling Call Record and Performance Monitoring Transfers This command allows you to disable turn off call recording or performance monitoring transfers for the switch fabric Enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration switch callrecord gt disable cr perf The following is an example of how to disable a call record transfer myswitc
443. rameters from LEC MPCs that register with it but does not distribute these flow descriptors to LEC MPCs in response to LE ARP queries The default is enable anycast lt LES Anycast ATM Address gt The unique anycast ATM address that all LECs in a given ELAN use to connect to one of the Distributed LAN Emulation DLE servers for that ELAN If this option is not used then the LES address is used meaning that this is a stand alone LES BUS pair i e DLE services are not running The anycast address must be unique within the first 19 bytes Anycast addresses cannot be all zeros and the first 19 bytes cannot be all zeros 1 132 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description peers lt atm addr gt The unique ATM address es of this DLE server s peer s It is through these addresses that all servers in a DLE ELAN connect to and communicate with each other You must explicitly enter the local LES ATM address in the list of DLE peers It does not matter in which order the local address appears in the list If you create a LES and then change the NSAP prefix of the switch at a later time the change is NOT automatically reflected in the LES s address You must delete the LES and recreate it using the new NSAP prefix If you are using DLE you must also change the LES s address in the lists of all of the other DLE peers AMI Configuration
444. ration 1 84 1 5 4 1 3 BITS Level Configuration 1 84 1 5 4 2 Failover Timing Configuration 0020005 1 85 1 5 4 2 1 Configuring the Failover Timing Delay 1 85 1 5 4 3 Timing Mode Configuration ee eee 1 86 1 5 4 4 Primary Timing Configuration 0 00 0005 1 87 1 5 4 5 Displaying Timing References 1 88 1 5 4 6 Revertive Timing Configuration 0055 1 89 1 5 4 6 1 Configuring the Revertive Timing Delay 1 89 1 5 4 6 2 Disabling Revertive Timing Delay 1 90 1 5 4 6 3 Enabling the Revertive Timing Delay 1 90 1 5 4 7 Secondary Timing Configuration 1 91 1 5 4 8 Displaying TIMMO esris curuk 02 e eee eee 1 92 CES Configuration Command 00 e eee eee 1 94 1 6 1 Creating a New CES Connection 0c cee eae 1 94 1 6 2 Deleting a CES Connection 0000 cece ee 1 96 1 6 3 Displaying CES Connections 0000 e eee ee eee 1 97 ILMI SNMP Proxy Configuration Commands cee eens 1 99 1 7 1 Deleting an ISP Table Entry 0 0000 cee eee eee 1 99 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 7 2 Resending an ILMI SNMP Proxy Request aa 1 7 3 Creating an ISP Table Entry cece eee eee 1 7 4 Displaying the ISP Table Entries a 1 8 IP Configuration Commands 2 22 e eee 1 8 1 Configuring
445. ration snmp trap log threshold gt modify reset show AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 289 AMI Configuration Commands 1 17 4 2 2 1 Modifying the Trap Log Threshold This command lets you specify the threshold and time period for sending traps to the trap destination or to a management station The first occurrence of a trap is always transmitted After that if the number of occurrences of that trap exceeds the specified threshold or if the time lag between two occurrences of that trap is greater than the specified time period the lat est trap gets transmitted out to the trap destination Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration snmp trap log threshold gt modify lt index gt thresh lt value gt time lt seconds gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description index The index number of the trap whose threshold you want to modify thresh lt value gt If the number of occurrences of a given trap since the first occurrence of the trap exceeds this number then the latest trap is sent to the trap destination or management station Otherwise no trap is sent The default is 1 The lowest acceptable value is 1 The upper limit is the size of an integer time lt seconds gt If the amount of time between two consecutive occurrences of a given trap exceeds this number then the latest trap is sent to the trap destination or management station Other wise no trap is sen
446. re q to quit q The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Input Port The incoming port number of the virtual channel Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Input VCI The incoming virtual channel number Output Port The outgoing port number of the virtual channel Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number Output VCI The outgoing virtual channel number UPC The integer index that refers to the specific UPC traffic contract assigned to this VCI Protocol The type of protocol is running on this channel which can be spans pvc uni or spvc Name The unique user assigned name for this channel If no name is assigned shows N A AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 377 AMI Configuration Commands To list all of the existing permanent virtual channels on a specific port for example port 3B1 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vcc gt show 3B1 Input Output Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI UPC Protocol Name 3B1 0 5 3CTL 0 49 0 uni N A 3B1 0 14 3CTL 0 48 0 spans N A 3B1 0 15 SCTE 0 47 spans N A 3B1 0 16 3CTL 0 50 uni N A 3B1 O 100 3B4 0 100 0 pvc N A The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example To list all of the existing permanent virtual channels on a specific port and path for example port 3B1 and VPI 0 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration vcc gt show 3b1 0 Input Output Port
447. re dropped for this port and priority regardless of their CLP bit CLP1 Threshold The value at which cells that have been tagged as non conforming CLP 1 are dropped for this port and priority 1 The Series D network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release This command also lets you show port and priority traffic information for an individual port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port traffic d gt show lt port gt myswitch configuration port traffic d gt show 1c1 Queue Thresholds Port Class Size CLPO 1 CLP1 1C1 ABR 256 15000 256 1C1 VBR 256 15000 256 1C1 CBR 256 15000 256 1C1 UBR 256 15000 256 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those listed above 1 248 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands This command also lets you show advanced traffic information Enter the following myswitch configuration port traffic d gt show lt port gt advanced scheduling myswitch configuration port traffic d gt show advanced Alt CLP Thresh Config Port CBR VBR UBR RateLimit 1C1 svcOff svcOff svcOft disabled The fields in this display are defined as follows service arriving on this port will use the alternate CLP threshold a110ff means no con nections SVCs and PVCs of the spe
448. reas that are configured to dynamically exchange reachability information with one another This allows connectivity between end systems belonging to different areas Reach ability information is exchanged between domains through static configuration only A switch may be part of multiple domains and there may be multiple domains configured on a switch For more information about domains and areas see the Network Configuration manual for your switch You can display the available subcommands by typing at the domain level myswitch configuration atmroute domain delete modify new show 1 3 2 1 Deleting a Domain This command allows you to delete an existing domain Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute domain gt delete lt domain ID gt 1 3 2 2 Modifying a Domain This command allows you to modify an existing domain Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute domain gt modify lt domain ID gt name lt name gt lt ftpnni pnni gateway gt prefix lt prefix gt defsum enable disable gt If you modify the domain the switch prompts NOTE d for a reboot You must type y and reboot the switch for your change to take effect If the existing domain is pnni or gateway and NOTE d the prefix of the domain is changed you must first disable the PNNI node using conf atmr pnni node admin lt nodeid gt down This removes any transient routes related to the node addres
449. receive the signal on the cable Check the unit Series Revision and Part numbers To check the Series and Revision numbers use the conf mod show command and look under the Series and Rev fields respectively To check the Part number ACCA remove the network module from the switch and look at either the right edge of the top of the printed circuit board or the top of the rear connector Series C Revision 2 network modules with i gt ACCA0055 part numbers should use ONLY the parameters that are appended with an A e g Lt110A in the table below To select the appropriate port line length enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a myswitch configuration port el gt length lt port gt Lt110 110 220 220 330 330 440 440 550 550 660 G703 75 G703 120 Lt110A 110 220A 220 330A 330 440A 440 550A 550 660A G703 75A G703 120A uoneinByuod INY These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the line length is to be changed Lt110 Use if the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft 110 220 Use if the physical cable is between 110 and 220 ft 220 330 Use if the physical cable is between 220 and 330 ft 330 440 Use if the physical cable is between 330 and 440 ft 440 550 Use if the physical cable is between 440 and 550 ft 550 660 Use if the physical cable is between 550 and 660 ft G703 75 U
450. reserved VCIs 1 325 PNNI exterior reachability address Creatine cathe ces ee ALS 1 37 Pelt Seiten See hee ais 1 37 modifying snn 1 37 PNNI exterior reachability addresses displaying a 1 39 PNNI interface displaying a 1 43 modifying sssuas sssr 1 42 PNNI link configuring 0 1 354 PNNI node administering up or down 1 48 Creates sas agama Ana bkas 1 49 deleting an aaa Saang 1 48 displaying a 1 52 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual displaying significant changes 1 54 displaying timer information 1 53 modifying 00008 1 50 PNNI policy Creatine aasa ea ete Gite Iwan NA 1 61 deleting 234 asia See ei Si 1 61 displaying 08 1 63 Modifying a aman 1 61 PNNI profile CLEANED a Na WG NGA LANA NALANG 1 56 deleting ws aaa ones Nag 1 56 displaying 08 1 58 modifying cr rosser eee eee 1 56 PNNI SPVC creating a 1 303 deleting a eel a 1 302 PNNISPVCS oora e a eed ees 1 302 disabling rerouting 1 304 displaying 00 1 310 displaying advanced information 1 312 displaying general information 1 310 displaying pacing information 1 307 displaying rerouting information 1 309 enabling rerouting 1 304 PACING aaa kawalang id eel ees 1 306 rerouting a 1 308 setting th
451. rimary Indicates that the TCM must use the primary timing source secondary Indicates that the TCM must use the secondary timing source automatic This is the default mode See the CEC Plus Installation and User s Manual for a description of how this mode works bits Indicates that the TCM will automatically use the most appropriate BITS input It is recommended that the freerun primary i gt and secondary modes only be used during diagnostics and maintenance because the TCM will not failover to another source when it is in one of these modes automatic mode is only valid when the NOTES primary and secondary sources are recovered from network modules 1 86 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 4 4 Primary Timing Configuration This command enables you to select the primary clock source from any of the switch fabrics exported clocks Enter the following parameters primary secondary myswitch configuration cec timing gt primary fabric 1 2 3 4 The parameter for configuring is defined as follows Parameter Description fabric 1121314 Indicates the primary timing source is to be taken from one of the exported clocks either primary primary or secondary from one of the switch fabrics 1 first leftmost slot 2 second secondary slot 3 third slot 4 fourth slot switch fabric O e 3 3 D 5 2 a Before you configure the primary timing
452. ription host The IP address of the remote host vpi The virtual path number of the FORE IP PVC Must be 0 vci The virtual channel number of the FORE IP PVC 415 The connection s ATM Adaptation Layer AAL type The default is 4 interface The FORE IP interface to be used for this connection The default is asx0 1 12 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 2 8 Displaying the ATM ARP Entries This command displays the current ATM ARP cache Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmarp gt show myswitch configuration atmarp gt When the prompt is returned with no information displayed as shown above then the ATM ARP cache is empty The following is an example of an ATM ARP cache 2 Sa myswitch configuration atmarp gt show 3 S Paddress If VPI VCI AAL Type Direction 3 amp L983 29 22 29 asx0 0 63 aal5 foreIpSVC outgoing 2 S 198 29 22 15 asx0 0 231 aal5 foreIpSVC pending o 198 229 22 37 asx0 0 65 aal34 foreIpSVvc pending si Paddress If NSAP Address 198 29 17 3 qaa0 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21b 0138 002048102754 00 198 29 17 10 qaa0 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21b 0137 002048100be6 00 198 29 17 15 qaa0 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21b 0137 00204810048d 00 198 29 17 52 qaa0 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21b 0138 0020481b0138 00 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description IPaddress The IP address for this connection If The
453. ription port The port number on which the scrambling mode is to be changed on off on indicates that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port off means that cell pay load scrambling is disabled on this port Only the payload of the ATM cells is scrambled The default is on The scrambling mode should be set to the same status on both the transmitting side and the receiving side AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 209 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 12 5 Showing the E3 Port Configuration This command allows you to display current information about an E3 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port e3 gt show Port Carrier Status Mode Loopback Timing Scrambling EmptyCells 1D1 no 0x58 hes none internal on unassigned 1D2 no 0x58 hes none internal on unassigned 1D3 no 0x58 hes none internal on unassigned 1D4 no 0x58 hes none internal on unassigned The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers of each E3 network module currently installed in the switch fabric Carrier yes means a carrier has been detected on this port no means a carrier has not been detected Status The E3 line status of the port Mode plcp means that the port uses PLCP framing for cell delineation hes means that the port uses HCS cell delineation Loopback The loopback mode on the port Timing The transmit clock for this
454. rity login restore conf security login show all conf security login securid com mands all conf security ipaccess commands all conf security nsapfiltering commands conf snmp sets and all debug commands The default is admin Login Access A person with the userid serial is allowed to login only via the serial port A person with the userid network is allowed to login only via telnet A person with the userid a11 is allowed to login via the serial port and via telnet A person with the userid none is not allowed to log in to the switch at all 1 272 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 7 10 Displaying and Changing Unlisted User Privileges This command allows you to display the privileges on the switch To display this information enter upriv at the login level myswitch configuration security login gt upriv Unlisted users privileges set to admin This command also lets you change the privileges of any users who are not listed on the switch To set or change this information enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security login gt upriv lt admin user gt The fields in this display are defined as follows O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinbyuod INY Parameter Description If a user is not listed on the switch but is authenticated by the SecurID server then the user is assigned the privilege level that is configured here user means al
455. rity nsapfiltering filters gt add delete lookup new show 1 16 1 8 1 1 Adding a Template to an NSAP Filter This command lets you add a new template to a filter that already exists It creates the filter if the filter does not already exist To create a new filter you can also use the conf security nsapfiltering filters new command Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering filters gt add lt filter id gt lt template id gt before lt template id gt 1 274 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands The parameters for add are defined as follows Parameter Description filter id The unique user assigned identifier for this filter A filter id can be either a positive deci mal integer index or a string name A name may be up to 20 characters Zero is not a valid index template id The unique user assigned identifier for this template A template id can be either a posi tive decimal integer index or a string name A name may be up to 20 characters Zero is not a valid index before lt template id gt When adding a template to a filter indicates that the template you are adding will be placed before the specified lt template id gt in the filter s ordering scheme If this parameter is not specified then the template is added to the end of the list in the filter 1 When you specify before lt template id gt the order i
456. rnate CLP threshold 1 370 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description scheduling roundrobin smoothed guaranteed Indicates the scheduling mode to be used for servicing traffic on the output side of a Series D network module roundrobin means that all service for these connections comes from one of the round robin queues in the network module This is the default mode for both SVCs and PVCs smoothed means that all service for these connections comes from the network module s rate controller which ensures that cells for these connections are trans mitted into the network at a fixed rate of R cells per second guaranteed is a combina tion of the round robin and smoothed modes Service for these connections are scheduled with both fixed rate R from the rate controller and they have an entry in the appropriate round robin queue name lt name gt The user defined name associated with this UPC traffic contract This helps you remember for what traffic type this specific contract is used If you do not specify a name a default name that relates to this type of traffic contract is assigned automatically 1 The units for pcro pcr01 scr0 scr01 mbs0 and mbs01 are specified either in cells per second or in kilobits per sec ond depending on what you used for conf system units To display the current setting use conf system show The default is cps cell
457. rom the con seconds trolling SCP The minimum and default value is 2 seconds O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY 1 335 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 3 Displaying or Changing the Prompt This command allows you to display the prompt name on the switch Enter prompt at the system level as follows myswitch configuration system prompt Current prompt is myswitch This command also lets you change the prompt name on the switch Enter the following myswitch configuration system prompt myswitch configuration system prompt default lt new prompt gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description default Changes the prompt name to match the switch name that was set using conf switch name If the name was null changes the prompt to ATM SWITCH gt After an oper cdb init changes the prompt to Unknown new prompt Allows you to change the prompt name to something other than the switch name that was set using conf switch name Changing the prompt name using the lt new prompt gt option overrides the default prompt which matches the switch name that has been set using conf switch name The new prompt is stored in the CDB and persists across reboots When the switch name is changed using conf switch name the prompt name changes immediately to match it as long as the prompt name has not been chan
458. rough paths can be created across the intra fabric ports as shown in the following example oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneans uopo INY TNX 1100 To create a through path going in port 2A1 vpi 1 on the switch board installed in slot 2 and going out port 4B1 vpi 1 on the switch board installed in slot 4 enter the following myswitch myswitch myswitch myswitch configuration configuration configuration configuration vpc gt vpc gt vpc gt vpc gt new 2al 1 2e4 1 new 2e4 1 2al 1 new 4b1 1 4e2 1 new 4e2 1 4b1 1 In the first line in the first pair notice that the output port is 2E4 This is the intra fabric port The 2 means the connection is coming out of the switch board in slot 2 through the intra fabric port The E represents the intra fabric port The 4 means the connection is destined for switch board in slot 4 2E4 then becomes the input port in the second line In the first line in the second pair notice that the output port is 4E2 This is the intra fabric port The 4 means the connection is coming out of the switch board in slot 4 through the intra fabric port The E represents the intra fabric port The 2 means the connection is destined for switch board in slot 2 4E2 then becomes the input port in the second line lt Through paths cannot use VPI 0 on the intra fabric port connections on an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 383 AMI C
459. rrently active Look at the AlarmStatus field to see which condition is in a state of alarm Minor Alarm relay status off means that no minor alarms are currently active on means that one or more minor alarms are currently active Look at the AlarmStatus field to see which condition is in a state of alarm 1 72 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 2 TCM Selection The slotx and sloty submenus allow you to choose a TCM for further configuration To configure parameters on the TCM in slot X the top slot type slotx at the cec level To con figure the TCM in slot Y the bottom slot type sloty at the cec level 1 5 3 TCM Configuration Commands Once an individual TCM has been selected for configuration you can configure IP parame ters change the name of the TCM display information about the TCM and so on You can dis play the list of available subcommands by typing at the slotx or sloty sublevel The z commands for both levels are the same but they are only described once with examples that 05 read slotx S fe 52 NG sc myswitch configuration cec slotx gt 25 ip name rs232 gt show 5 snmp gt timezone 1 5 3 1 IP Configuration Commands The ie0 and iel interfaces of all installed E gt TCMs and the ie0 interface of all installed SCPs must all reside on the same subnet These commands let you change the IP configuration of the TCM s interfaces You can
460. rror message from the peer like a NOSUCHNAME error or the ILMI UNI link on which to send this request is down You can also display an individual ISP table entry Enter the following myswitch configuration ilmiproxy gt show lt port gt lt vpi gt lt index gt myswitch configuration ilmiproxy gt show lal 0 15 ISP Entry Port 1Al Vpi 0 Index 15 Req Oid 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 0 Rsp_Oid sL 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 0 Operation get Community public When to do doOnce Value FORE Systems ASX 200BXTNX 210 Operation Status success If there are no current entries in the ISP table then the following is displayed 1 102 myswitch configuration ilmiproxy gt show ISP information not available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 8 IP Configuration Commands These commands let you change the IP configuration You can display the list of available sub commands by typing ip at the configuration level myswitch configuration gt ip 1 8 1 address mask unconfigure admin broadcast forwarding mtu route gt show Configuring the IP Address This command allows you to configure the IP address of each of the switch s IP interfaces Enter the following parameters lt On a new switch the ie0 asx0 qaa0 qaal qaa2 qaa3 interfaces are NOT configured An IP address must be configured for at least one of the interfaces to allow IP access to the switch which i
461. rt VPI Shape ConType 3B1 40 3B4 40 N A 3B1 75 3B5 75 N A 3B2 95 3B3 95 tran tran pmp 3B6 62 3B2 62 tran tran pp 3B6 68 3B3 68 N A z Sg The fields in the advanced display are defined as follows 3 3 D E P pi 3 c Field Description 25 Input Port The incoming port number of the through path 3 Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Output Port The outgoing port number of the through path Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number Shape Indicates whether or not traffic shaping has been enabled for this path ConType The connection type for the endpoints of this path with respect to a particular network Orig originating means that the ingress egress endpoint of the path is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran transit means that the ingress egress endpoint of the path is connected to a node within the network and term terminating means that the ingress egress endpoint of the path is connected to the destination node which is outside the network pp means this is labelled as a point to point path pmp means this is labelled as a point to multipoint path mpp means this is labelled as a multi point to point path mpmp means this is labelled as a multipoint to multipoint path If you have not configured any virtual through paths then the following is displayed myswitch configuration vpc gt show No virtual path information is available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 385
462. rt cesel gt loopback lt port gt line none These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The E1 CES port on which the loopback mode is to be changed line line loopback connects the transmitter to the receiver The data stream received from the Rx line is retransmitted out to the Tx line Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over the line none none designates that no loopback will take place This is the default setting 1 188 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 7 6 Displaying the E1 CES Port Configuration This command lets you display the current configuration of each El CES port Enter the fol lowing myswitch Port 3C1 up 3C2 up 3C3 down 3C4 down 3C5 down 3C6 down configuration port cesel gt show Framing Carrier Line Loopback Port Line Signalling Line Mode State Coding State Timing Imp Mode Status CRC yes HDB3 none internal 120 none 1 CRC yes HDB3 none internal 120 none ak CRC yes HDB3 none internal 120 none ak CRC yes HDB3 none internal 120 none 1 CRC yes HDB3 none internal 120 none ak CRC yes HDB3 none internal 120 none 1 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The E1 CES port number and the state of the port up or down Framing Mode The type of framing used on the line Carrier State yes means a carrier has been detected on this port
463. rtant Information Indicators 1 0 0 cee eee iv Invisible Laser Radiation Notice 0 0 0 eee v Safety Precautions ununun aaan vi Modifications to Equipment 0 0 0 eee vi CHAPTER1 AMI Configuration Commands 1 1 Alarms Configuration Commands 2 aeaaeae 1 1 1 1 1 Displaying Alarm Conditions sssaaa uaaa 1 2 1 1 2 Enabling an Alarm 0 0 eee 1 3 1 1 3 Disabling an Alarm 0 tee 1 4 1 1 4 Resetting an Alarm 2 tee eee 1 5 1 1 5 Network Module Alarm Commands 00000ee ee eeeee 1 6 1 1 5 1 Displaying the Network Module Alarm Configuration 1 6 1 1 5 2 Configuring Network Module Alarm Priorities 1 7 1 2 ATM ARP Configuration Commands 00000 cece eee eee 1 9 1 2 1 ARP Server Configuration Commands 00000ee eee 1 9 1 2 1 1 Displaying the ARP Server Address 1 9 1 2 1 2 Setting the ARP Server Address 1 10 1 2 2 Deleting an ARP Entry 0 2c eee 1 10 1 2 3 Flushing the ATM ARP Cache 0000 cece e eee 1 11 1 2 4 Getting the NSAP Address for a Classical IP Interface 1 11 1 2 5 Creating an IP to NSAP Address Mapping aa 1 11 1 2 6 Creating a Classical IP PVC nunana 00 000 cc eee 1 12 1 2 7 Creating a FORE IP PVC ARP Entry 2 000 000 1 12 1 2 8 Displaying the ATM ARP Entries 0 2 0 0 ee eee eee 1 13 1 3 ATM Ro
464. s Parameter Description trap Indicates the index number of the trap that you want to delete Use the conf snmp trap destinations show command and look at the Trap field to find this number 1 286 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 17 4 1 2 Creating a Trap Destination This command lets you add an SNMP trap destination Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration snmp trap destinations gt new lt ipaddress gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description ipaddress The IP address of the SNMP trap destination that you want to add Z 1 17 4 1 3 Displaying Trap Destination Information 9o This command lets you display all of the existing SNMP trap destinations Enter the following 3 El parameters 5 e S o myswitch configuration snmp trap destinations show 3 Trap Destination 1 169 144 28 33 2 169 129 45 90 If no trap destinations have been configured then the following is displayed myswitch configuration snmp trap destinations show No trap information is available 1 17 4 2 Configuring the SNMP Trap Log These commands let you configure the SNMP trap log You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the log level myswitch configuration snmp trap log gt show threshold gt AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 287 AMI Configuration Commands 1 17 4 2 1 Displaying the SNMP
465. s 1 10 4 Configuring Traffic on a Network Module These commands enable you to configure or to display information about the traffic on the network modules To list the available subcommands type traffic at the module level myswitch configuration module gt traffic c gt IG le gt d gt 1 10 4 1 Configuring Traffic on a Series C Network Module These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series C network modules To list the available subcommands type c at the traffic level myswitch configuration module traffic gt c epd fifoblock models setmodel show 1 10 4 1 1 Setting Early Packet Discard on a Series C Network Module This command lets you set a threshold value for AAL5 Early Packet Discard EPD on a speci fied network module This is the static threshold in terms of a specified number of cells at which EPD is activated AAL5 frames that arrive when the shared buffer is over this threshold are discarded in whole Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic c gt epd lt module gt lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module to be configured for Early Packet Discard number of cells The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set in number of cells By default this value is set to 90 of the shared buffer size 1 144 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI
466. s 0 1022 1023 is used for multicast However Series D E3 and DS3 network modules can only use VPIs 0 510 511 is used for multicast a By indicating pmp mpp or mpmp you are only assigning a label for record keeping purposes The switch does not neces sarily create the type of path you have specified If you assign a connection type but do not assign a pmp mpp or mpmp label the switch assigns a label of pp point to point 3 If you want to shape traffic on more than two ports on a given network module it is recommended that you set the traf fic memory model to model number 5 for that network module Please see the sections Displaying Traffic Models for a Network Module and Setting Traffic Models on a Network Module found earlier in this chapter for information about how to do this 1 382 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands The following is an example of how to create a virtual path which specifies a name myswitch configuration vpc gt new 3b1 75 3b5 75 name customer b The following is an example of how to create a virtual path which specifies a name and a con nection type myswitch configura vpc gt new 3b6 62 3b2 62 name customer_c inctype tran outctype tran The following is an example of how to create a simple virtual path on an ASX 1000 or Terminating and originating paths cannot be created across the intra fabric ports on an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 only th
467. s of the current userids This command fails if the specified userid does not exist This command is only available to users with admin privileges A user with admin privileges can change his own authentication method or login access however the change will not take effect until that user logs in again A user with admin privileges can also change his own password and privi lege level these changes take effect immediately Enter the following myswitch configuration security login gt modify lt userid gt auth local securid priv admin user access all network serial none AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 267 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 7 5 Creating a Userid This command lets you create a userid This command is only available to users with admin privileges Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security login gt new lt userid gt auth local securid priv admin user access all network serial none This command fails if the specified userid already exists The switch software prompts you to assign a password to the userid regardless of the authentication method used Null local pass words are accepted The switch does not echo your keystrokes when you enter the password For example myswitch configuration security login new mktg auth local priv user access network New local passwor
468. s per second N The HDCOMP ASIC must be version 1 or greater to support AAL5 partial packet policing To display the ASIC version use the conf board show advanced command Aa The scheduling option has an effect only on connections with outputs on Series D network modules All other net work module platforms only use roundrobin scheduling The following is an example of how to create a UPC contract myswitch configuration upc gt new 5 vbr0 500 200 250 cdvt 1000 aa15 PPPol name vbr0 upc This example specifies a contract named vbr0 upc which is a VBRO contract with an index of 5 a pcr01 of 500 cells sec or kbps an scr0 of 200 cells sec or kbps an mbs0 of 250 cells or kilobits a CDVT of 1 000 microseconds and partial packet policing enabled lt For more information about traffic contracts please refer to Table 5 7 in the ATM Forum UNI 3 0 Specification PVCs that use UPC contracts that contain any of the noGCRA aal5 noPktDisc PPPol and ubrTagging parameters are valid only when the conf port gcrapolicing conf port aal5packetdiscard conf port pppolicing and conf port ubrtagging parameters are set to svcOn or svcOff Use conf port show tm to check these settings AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 371 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 24 3 Displaying the UPC Traffic Contracts This command lets you display all of the UPC con
469. s that occur on a switch via AMI You can also configure with which priority level tag all of those changes will be logged Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration system syslog audit gt ami usage emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug off These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description emerg Indicates you are enabling the logging of all AMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of emerg alert Indicates you are enabling the logging of all AMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of alert crit Indicates you are enabling the logging of all AMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of crit err Indicates you are enabling the logging of all AMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of err warning Indicates you are enabling the logging of all AMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of warning notice Indicates you are enabling the logging of all AMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of notice info Indicates you are enabling the logging of all AMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of info debug Indicates you are enabling the logging of all AMI changes to syslog with a priority level tag of debug off Indicates you are disabling the logging of all AMI changes to syslog This is the default state In order for the actual logging to begin y
470. s the default svcOff svcOff means no UBR SVCs arriving on this port are subjected to UBR tagging PVCs are tagged based on their UPC contract For example to enable tagging on all UBR SVCs and PVCs on port 2B4 enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port gt ubrtagging 2b4 allon AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 251 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 24 VBRBuffOB Port Configuration Commands This command is an advanced option that allows you to set an output buffer overbooking level for VBR traffic on a particular port The overbooking factors affect the amount of band width that is associated with VBR connections When a VBR connection is created or destroyed a quantity of bandwidth is allocated de allocated from the port for the connection It is recommended that you reset the network E gt module after making any modification to the port overbooking factors so that VBR bandwidth is accurately accounted for by the switch control software See Section 1 10 2 for more information about conf module reset A change to the overbooking factors that is not followed by a reset may result in an incorrect amount of bandwidth being de allocated for any existing VBR connections when those connections are destroyed Enter the following parameters to modify the overbooking factor myswitch configuration port gt vbrbuffob lt port gt lt percent gt These parameters are defined as follows Para
471. s with the old prefix 1 3 2 3 Creating a Domain This command allows you to create a new domain Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute domain gt new lt domain ID name lt name gt prefix lt prefix gt defsum lt enable disable gt 1 18 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands The parameters for delete modify and new are defined as follows Parameter Description domain ID The index number of this domain Displayed in the the Index field under conf atmroute domain show name The optional user assigned name of this domain Displayed in the Name field under conf atmroute domain show ftpnni The default routing protocol to use on all Network to Network NNI interfaces in the pnni domain ftpnni means ForeThought PNNI is used for this domain pnni means ATM gateway Forum PNNI is used for this domain gateway means this domain includes both the PNNI and FI PNNI networks so that reachability information can be leaked dynamically between peer groups of both types This will be a gateway switch a switch that has one FT PNNI node and one PNNI node The default routing protocol is ftpnni prefix The 13 byte prefix of the domain used in ILMI registration used in the FI PNNI switch prefix and used in determining the PNNI node ID PNNI peer group and PNNI ATM address This prefix is also used as the default 13 byte policy summary If you have two PNN
472. s you delete an entry in the list of authorized IP addresses from which IP packets will be accepted Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security ipaccess gt delete lt ipaddr gt lt mask gt These parameters for accept and delete are defined as follows Parameter Description ipaddr The authorized incoming IP address mask The mask that indicates the significant part of the incoming IP address to be used to find a matching address in the table of authorized addresses A mask of 0 0 0 0 is a wild card that matches all addresses A mask must have contiguous higher order 1 bits set to be valid e g mask 255 255 0 128 is not valid but 255 255 128 0 is valid O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY CAUTION If you delete all entries from the table of authorized IP addresses be sure that the last entry you delete is the one that matches the address of the machine at which you are sitting Otherwise you will be locked out of the switch 1 16 1 3 Rejecting Accepting Strict Source Routed Packets This command lets you configure an IP filtering flag to specify whether the switch should accept or reject all strict source routed packets Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security ipaccess gt ssr allow disallow 1 16 1 4 Rejecting Accepting Loose Source Routed Packets This command lets you configure an IP filtering flag to specify whether the switch should accept o
473. sceptible to clipping The default is no QoSExpIndex lt index gt The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class to parameter expansion when sending the SPVC call set up message across a PNNI link See the QoSExpIndex field under conf qos show for this number The qosindex that is specified for this SPVC must already be present in the switch fqos class0 class1 class2 class3 class4 The requested QoS class for this SPVC in the forward calling to called direction The fqos and bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non zero class bqos classO classi class2 class3 class4 The requested QoS class for this SPVC in the backward called to calling direction The fqos and bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non zero class 1 The forward and backward UPC contracts that you specify must be compatible with the bearerClass parameter for the SPVC e g all parameters are for VBR traffic or CBR traffic 2 If you configure an SPVC to use a specific FI PNNI DTL that you have created the SVC portion of the SPVC always uses that path as long as it is available even if there is another path that has a lesser link cost 1 304 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands The following is an example of how to create a simple PNNI SPVC myswitch configuration spvc pnni gt new lal O 100 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21b 19c
474. se if the physical cable is a G703 standard 75 ohm coaxial line G703 120 Use if the physical cable is a G703 standard 120 ohm symmetrical line Lt110A Use if the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft 110 220A Use if the physical cable is between 110 and 220 ft 220 330A Use if the physical cable is between 220 and 330 ft 330 440A Use if the physical cable is between 330 and 440 ft 440 550A Use if the physical cable is between 440 and 550 ft 550 660A Use if the physical cable is between 550 and 660 ft G703 75A Use if the physical cable is a G703 standard 75 ohm coaxial line G703 120A Use if the physical cable is a G703 standard 120 ohm symmetrical line AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 203 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 11 3 Configuring E1 Port Loopback This command lets you designate the type of loopback on a port on an E1 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port el loopback lt port gt line payload diag none These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the loopback mode is to be changed line payload diag none Line loopback connects the transmitter to the receiver The data stream received from the line is retransmitted out to the line Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over the line Payload loopback means the stream received from the network has the E1 over head bits re i
475. setup message An asterisk is a wild card that matches all VPIs dstnsap lt nsap gt The destination NSAP address of the call setup message dstmask lt mask gt The mask that indicates the significant part of the destination NSAP address to be used to find a matching address in the templates of authorized addresses A mask of 0 is a wild card that matches all addresses action lt accept reject gt The action to take with addresses that match this template accept means that the call will be allowed and reject means that the call will not be allowed name lt string gt An optional user assigned name that helps to identify this template 1 280 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 8 3 Displaying Template Information This command lets you display all of the templates that have been configured on the switch Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering templates gt show Source Destination Index Action Name Port VPI Mask Port VPI Mask 1 accept let_these_in 1A1 5 128 152 Source NSAP 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3596 0020481a3596 0 Destination NSAP 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 2a1d 0020481a2a17 00 gt 3 reject 104 1CTL 152 Q o Source NSAP Ox47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f215 11f2 0020487a3751 00 3 S Destination NSAP 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f215 11f2 00204825c418 00 po oo 4 reject keep_these_out 1
476. sonet none internal on unassigned 1C2 sts3c MM sonet none internal on unassigned 1C3 sts3c MM sonet none internal on unassigned 1C4 sts3c MM sonet none internal on unassigned 1D1 stsl2c MM sonet none N A on unassigned The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers of each SONET network module currently installed in the switch fabric Width The type of the SONET path st s3c is 155 52 Mbps and st s12c is 622 08 Mbps The SDH transmission rate STM 1 is equivalent to SONET rate STS 3 and STM 4 is equivalent to STS 12 This is a read only field Line The line type for this interface The line type for optical SONET signals may be SMSR 155 Mbps single mode short reach SMIR 622 Mbps single mode intermediate reach other 155 Mbps single mode long reach or MM 155 Mbps or 622 Mbps multi mode fiber For electrical interfaces the line type is UTP 155 Mbps Unshielded Twisted Pair Mode The mode of operation for this port Can be sonet or sdh 1 226 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Loopback The loopback mode on the port Can be one of the following line diagnostic path or none Timing The transmit clock for this port network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used t
477. start the initial topology database exchange exchanging means this node is sending its topology database to the neighboring node loading means this node is receiving the neighboring node s topology database full means this node has received all PTSEs known to be available from the neighboring peer Links to the neighboring peer can now be advertised in PTSEs AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 15 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands You can also display advanced ATM routing information as follows myswitch configuration atmroute gt show lt port gt lt vpi gt myswitch configuration atmroute gt show advanced Port VPI 1B1 Port VPI 1B2 0 advanced Node Domain SigProto NodeSt HelloSt PeerSt ftpnni 1 FT PNNI a up N A N A ConfNode ILMI ForeLevel ForeArea PnniLinkType 0 up 4 4 N A DomainProto DomainPrefix gateway Ox47 0005 80 ffel100 afce efed 0000 FtpnniPgMask FtpnniPrefix Border 0 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 afce efed 0000 disabled Node Domain SigProto NodeSt HelloSt PeerSt 1 L privateUNI a up attempt N A ConfNode ILMI ForeLevel ForeArea PnniLinkType 1 up 5 5 unknown DomainProto DomainPrefix gateway 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 afce efed 0000 PnniPgId Ptses 80 47 000580ffe100afcefe000000 3 PnniNodelId 80 160 47 000580ffel00afceefed0000 ff1a2d0f0001 00 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Descrip
478. t iepass Allows the specified IEs to be passed to the called party Can use the following UNI 3 x IEs cg cgs cds blli b11i23 bhli aal cg Filters the address of the calling party on calls going out on this interface cgs Filters the subaddress of the calling party on calls coming in on this interface cds Filters the subaddress of the called party on calls coming in on this interface blli Filters all first second and third Broadband Low Layer Information BLLI IEs which provides compatibility checking by an addressed entity on calls coming in on this inter face This information is transferred transparently between the calling and the called party 1 356 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description blli23 Filters only the second and third Broadband Low Layer Information BLLI IEs on calls coming in and going out on this interface bhli Filters the Broadband High Layer Information BHLI which provides compatibility checking by an addressed entity e g a recipient of a call on calls coming in on this inter face aal Filters the AAL ATM Adaptation Layer information on calls coming in and going out on this interface defaultcpn The default calling party number CPN to be inserted in an incoming call setup message lt NSAPaddress gt enable if the originator does not provide an address in the call setup request Specifying
479. t carrier loss action clearCalls noClear options cost lt cost gt domain lt domain gt tions sscopnoresp timer lt sec gt ptions ilmireg disable ignore addressformat private e164 el64address lt el64Address gt el64mapping enable disable plantype international national subscriber Information Element filtering options iefilter one or more of cg cgs cds blli bili23 bhli aal defaultcpn lt NSAPAddress gt NSAP Address Filtering options AMI Configur incomingfilter lt filter id gt outgoingfilter lt filter id gt ation Commands Reference Manual oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinByUuod INY 1 353 AMI Configuration Commands These parameters for delete modify and new are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number of the signalling channel vpi The virtual path number of the signalling channel version The version of the UNI protocol to use at initialization auto means the UNI attempts to determine automatically which version of the UNI protocol to use auto is the default uni30 means this link uses version 30 of the UNI protocol uni31 means this link uses version 31 of the UNI protocol pnni10 means this link is an ATM Forum PNNI link You must specify both the version and the type if you want one of them to be something other than auto For a list of the allowable combinations and mor
480. t Connected to 198 29 22 46 asx200bxtnx 210 fishtank gt localhost myswitch gt configuration spvc spans new usage new lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt dest session gt lt dest port gt lt dest vpi gt lt dest vci gt peak lt Kb sec gt source destination bidirectional myswitch configuration spvc spans gt new 1c1 0 49 198 29 22 46 1b1 0 50 1 300 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 19 1 3 Displaying SPANS SPVC Information This command allows you to display all of the SPANS SPVCs on an individual switch fabric Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration spvc spans gt show Local Remote ID Port VPI VCI BW Direction ID Port VPI VCI Switch 35664 1C1 0 AL 0 0 bidirectional 10427 IBI 0 52 198 29 22 46 65364 1C1 0 49 0 0 bidirectional 42591 1B1 O 50 198 29 22 46 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Local ID The unique number that the local switch fabric s SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC when it was created Local Port The port number on the local switch fabric Local VPI The virtual path number on the local switch fabric Local VCI The virtual channel number on the local switch fabric Local BW The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC specified in Kbps Remote ID The unique number that the remote switch fabric s SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC when it was created
481. t elr lt clr gt elrl lt clri gt erm lt crm gt vf lt vf gt 1 3 4 4 3 Creating a Metric Set This command lets you create a metric set Enter the following parameters myswitch configur atmroute pnni metric gt new lt nodeix gt lt tag gt incoming outgoing lt index gt cbr rtvbr nrtvbr abr ubr clpEqual0 clpEqual00r1 adminw lt adminw gt per lt pcr gt acr lt acr gt ctd lt ctd gt edv lt cdv gt clr lt clr gt elrl lt clri gt erm lt crm gt vf lt vf gt 1 44 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands The parameters for delete modify and new are defined as follows Parameter Description nodeix The index number of the node to which this metric set belongs tag Indicates an arbitrary integer that identifies this metric set incoming outgoing The direction of the metric set with respect to the owning node index The index number of the metrics being configured within the metric set cbr Indicates that the metric applies to CBR traffic rtvbr Indicates the metric applies to real time VBR traffic nrtvbr Indicates the metric applies to non real time VBR traffic abr Indicates that the metric applies to ABR traffic ubr Indicates that the metric applies to UBR traffic clpEqual0 Indicates that the advertised GCAC parameters apply to CLP 0 traffic clpEqual0Or1 Indicates that the advertised
482. t The default is 1 second The lowest acceptable value is 1 second There is no upper limit 1 17 4 2 2 2 Resetting the Trap Log Threshold This command lets you reset the threshold and time period for sending traps to the trap desti nation or to a management station Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration snmp trap log threshold gt reset Reset all trap thresholds to defaults n n Entering n or pressing lt ENTER gt aborts the command Entering y resets the threshold and time period 1 290 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 17 4 2 2 3 Displaying the Trap Log Threshold This command lets you display the threshold and time period for sending traps to the trap destination or to a management station Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration snmp trap log threshold gt show Index Trap Threshold TimePeriod 1 asxSwLinkDown 2 asxSwLinkUp 3 asxHostLinkDown gt 4 asxHostLinkUp 5 asxNetModuleDown 9 O 6 asxNetModuleUp 3 El 7 asxPsInputDown 2 e 8 asxPsInputUp 2 S 9 asxPsOutputDown o 10 asxPsOutputUp sia asxFanBankDown 12 asxFanBankUp Press return for more q to quit q The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Index The index number of the trap Trap The name of the trap Threshold If the number of occurrences of a given trap exceeds the threshold number shown then the latest tr
483. t which EPD is activated AAL5 packets that arrive when the shared buffer is over this thresh old are discarded in whole Enter the following parameters uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch conf module traffic le gt epd lt module gt UBR lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module to be configured for Early Packet Discard UBR If UBR is entered the AAL5 packet drop threshold is used for AAL5 UBR connections only If UBR is not entered the AAL5 packet drop threshold is used for all other AAL5 con nections The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set in number of cells By default this value is set to 90 of the shared buffer size number of cells 1 153 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 7 2 Setting EFCI on a Series LE Network Module This command lets you designate the cell buffer threshold over which Available Bit Rate ABR cells have their explicit forward congestion indicator EFCI code point set When the EFCI code point is set this signals congestion to downstream flow control mechanisms Once this threshold is surpassed EFCI continues to be set until the queue empties below the off threshold Enter the following parameters myswitch conf module traffic le gt efci lt module gt on off lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Descrip
484. t 130 64 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The DS1 CES port number and the state of the port up or down Framing Mode The type of framing used on the line Carrier State yes means a carrier has been detected on this port no means a carrier has not been detected on this port Line Code The type of line coding used on the port Loopback State The loopback mode on the port Port Timing The source of the timing on this port The values are one of lt BNP gt indicating the board network module port from which the timing is being extracted srt s indicating that srts is being used on this port fabric lt X gt where X is 1 2 3 or 4 indicating that timing is being sourced from another switch fabric only applicable to an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 network indicating that the clock is being derived from the line itself or crystal indi cating that the crystal on the network module itself is being used Line Length The length of the physical cable attached to this port Line Status The line status of the DS1 CES port 1 A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port but it does not guarantee the signal is the proper frequency 1 184 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 7 CESE1 Port Configuration Commands These commands let you modify various aspects of the con
485. t cost gt cbrcap lt cbrcap gt vbrcap lt vbrcap gt 1 3 3 7 3 Creating a Metric Set This command lets you create a metric set that is used when creating a policy for a FI PNNI static route Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni metric gt new lt tag gt cost lt cost gt cbrcap lt cbrcap gt vbreap lt vbrcap gt The parameters for delete modify and new are defined as follows Parameter Description tag Indicates a unique integer that identifies this metric set cost lt cost gt The cost of reaching the address encompassed by this policy cbrcap lt cbrcap gt The CBR capacity of the link to reach the address encompassed by this policy vbrcap lt vbrcap gt The VBR capacity of the link to reach the address encompassed by this policy 1 26 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 7 4 Displaying Metric Set Information This command lets you display metric set information Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni metric show Tag Cost CBRCAP VBRCAP 1 10 10 10 Tag Cost CBRCAP VBRCAP 2 128 10 200 The fields in this display are defined as follows 7 o Field Description S Q 3 Tag The unique integer number that identifies this metric set 3 Fi 3c Cost The cost of reaching the address encompassed by this policy 2 CBRCAP The CBR capacity of the link to reach
486. t vci gt 5 opentimeout lt msec gt closetimeout lt msec gt outsigservice lt vbr ubr gt The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the SPANS signalling path exists vpi The number of the SPANS path cdvt The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT associated with the peak cell rates in micro seconds tag drop tag means that non compliant cells are tagged drop means that non compliant cells are dropped sig lt vci gt The VCI to use for SPANS signalling messages The default is 15 cls lt vci gt The VCI to use for connectionless messages The default is 14 aal The AAL type to use for this SPANS signalling path Can be 4 5 or auto The default is 4 sigbw The amount of bandwidth in Kbps to be reserved on the VCI for SPANS signalling mes sages clsupe lt index gt The integer index that refers to a specific traffic contract that is used to police the connec tionless VCI If no index is specified no traffic policing will take place on this VCI It is assigned a UPC index of 0 and all traffic on this VCI is treated as UBR traffic This is the default AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 293 AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description minvci lt vci gt The bottom number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for SPANS SVCs on this path The default is 32 You can
487. tatus of a BUS from down to up it takes a few seconds for the change to occur and to be reflected in the OperStatus field Therefore it is possible for the information above to show the AdminStatus as up but the OperStatus as down If you refresh the display the change will have taken place and be reflected here To display information about a particular BUS that is currently configured on the switch enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane bus gt show lt BUS index gt For example to display information about the BUS with an index number of 1 enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration lane bus gt show 1 Index AdminStatus OperStatus Selector Type MTU ELAN 1 Up up 0x12 ethernet 1516 one The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example 1 116 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 3 LAN Emulation Client LEC Configuration Commands These commands let you configure the LAN Emulation Client LEC You can display the list of available subcommands by typing lec at the lane level myswitch configuration lane gt lec admin arp gt delete default gt new show 1 9 3 1 Configuring the LEC Administrative Status This command lets you change the administrative status of a LEC to up start a LEC or down stop a LEC Enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a myswitch configuration lane lec gt
488. te HEX The 20th byte of the ATM address of the BUS associated with this LES Use this option only if you need to have the BUS use a different selector byte than the LES LES name The user defined name that helps you to remember what ELAN this LES services type ethernet token ring ethernet means the LAN type is Ethernet token ring means the LAN type is Token Ring The default is ethernet mtu 1516 4544 9234 18190 The length in number of bytes of the largest frame field or MTU size The default for Ethernet is 1516 The default for Token Ring is 4544 The MTU size must match that of the other hosts and edge devices on the ELAN secure wka lt LECS ATM Address gt Indicates you want to activate ELAN access control If you enter wka the ATM Forum well known address is used when running with ELAN access control enabled In this case you do not have to type the actual well known address If you are using an LECS address that is different than the well known address then you must type the full LECS ATM address to be used when running with ELAN access control enabled ELAN access control is disabled by default registertlvs enable disable enable means the LES supports MPOA operation by accepting flow descriptors from LANE MPOA clients LEC MPCs that register with it and distributing these flow descrip tors to LEC MPCs in response to LE ARP queries disable means the LES collects flow descriptors pa
489. ted as the CBR cell queue depth 256 cells by default multiplied by 1 cell time The CDV for VBR is calculated as the VBR cell queue depth 256 cells by default multiplied by 1 cell time plus the CBR CDV The CDV also varies depending on the physical interface on which the link is running e g a 155 Mbps connection versus a 45 Mbps connec tion This command lets you set the maximum CDV ona worst case basis that cells for a spec ified output port and priority CBR or VBR should incur This number is used to determine the size of the buffers reserved for CBR and VBR traffic Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port traffic c gt cdv lt port gt CBR VBR lt CDV in microseconds gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the CDV is to be set CBR VBR Specifies if the CDV is for output CBR traffic or for output VBR traffic CDV In microseconds the cell delay variation that an output cell experiences under the worst conditions 1 The network module must be reset for this command to take effect 1 234 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 22 1 2 Setting the CLP Threshold on a Series C Network Module This command allows you to designate the CLP 1 threshold at which cells that have been tagged as non conforming are dropped for a given traffic type on a specified port on a Series C network module Enter the f
490. that this alarm type will cause a major alarm Major alarm relay status Off means that no major alarms are currently active On means that one or more major alarms are currently active Look at the AlarmStatus field to see which condition is in a state of alarm Minor alarm relay status Off means that no minor alarms are currently active On means that one or more minor alarms are currently active Look at the AlarmStatus field to see which condition is in a state of alarm AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 1 2 Enabling an Alarm This command lets you enable an alarm Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration alarms gt enable major minor lt alarm type gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description major Indicates that the designated alarm type causes a major alarm when that condition occurs gt F R F na minor Indicates that the designated alarm type causes a minor alarm when that condition occurs 25 alarm type Indicates the kind of alarm condition Valid alarm types are displayed in the AlarmType EI g field for configuration alarms show 3 Fi 25 oR fe 3 For example to enable an overtemperature condition that is detected by the overtemperature sensor as a major alarm enter the following parameters myswitch configuration alarms gt enable major tempSensorOverTemp To verify that the change
491. that a reboot is necessary It asks if you want to continue with the change in case you made a mistake To abort the change type n or press lt ENTER gt No change will be made To continue with the change type y If you type y you will be asked if you want to reboot the switch You must reboot the switch for this change to take effect so type y or press lt ENTER gt This change requires a reboot to prevent any potential routing problem Do you want to continue with the change n y Reboot the switch y y This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description forelevel The level of the area to which this ForeThought PNNI node belongs in the FORE hierarchy This can be a value between 1 and 127 The default is 4 1 24 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 5 Setting the Hello Indication Interval Hello indication messages are the keep alive messages that two switches send to one another to verify their existence This command lets you change the interval for ForeThought PNNI hello indication messages Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt hello lt msec gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description hello The period of time between transmissions of hello indication messages The default 500 microseconds 1 3 3 6 Setting the Maximum Hop Count This command lets you set the ma
492. the lt mode1 gt parameter when using the conf module traffic c setmodel command Memor The size of this shared memory configuration in bytes y y 8 y Ucasts The maximum number of unicast connections supported for this model Half of these con nections are reserved for low priority connections ABR UBR and half are reserved for high priority connections VBR CBR For example if a model supports 4K unicast con nections it really supports 2K VBR or CBR connections and 2K ABR or UBR connections AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 145 AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Mcasts The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to the net work module for this shared memory model Half of these connections are reserved for low priority connections ABR UBR and half are reserved for high priority connections VBR CBR A multicast connection can have multiple outputs on the same network mod ule The number of outputs does not figure into this constraint MOuts The number of output multicast connections supported from the network module to the link for this shared memory model Any multicast connection can have multiple outputs on the same network module or the same port If one multicast connection has four out puts it requires 1 mcast and 4 mouts Adding an output to a multicast connection can fail if all of the outputs are in use Adding the multicast connecti
493. the ACR and the proportional multiplier is a very small number The minimum threshold pre vents excessively frequent NSAP updates resulting from minor changes in ACR when the value of ACR is very low This value indicates the minimum threshold above which you consider the change in Available Cell Rate ACR on any PNNI link to be significant The default is 3 The range is 1 99 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 51 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description cdvpm lt cdvpm gt Indicates the threshold above which you consider the change in Cell Delay Variation CDV on any PNNI link to be significant The default is 25 The range is 1 99 ctdpm lt ctdpm gt Indicates the threshold above which you consider the change in Cell Transit Delay CTD on any PNNI link to be significant The range is 1 99 domain lt domain gt The index number of the domain to which this node belongs forelevel lt level gt The level of the area used in FORE s hierarchy support This can be a value between 1 and 127 The default is 5 forearea lt area gt The ID of the area in FORE s hierarchy support to which this node belongs This can be a value between 1 and 127 The default is 5 1 3 4 5 5 Displaying PNNI Node Information This command lets you display PNNI node information Enter the following parameters myswitch
494. the noGCRA option when applying a UPC contract to the outbound signalling channel using the outsigupe lt upc index gt variable under conf signalling new to prevent the outbound signalling channel from being policed aal5 The connection is using the AAL5 Adaptation Layer noPktDisc This optional parameter can only be used if the connection is AALS i e the aa15 param eter is present This parameter suppresses EPD PPD AAL5 packet discard on the con nection The default is for this parameter not to be present EPD PPD is enabled ubrTagging ubrTagging means that all UBR traffic is tagged set to CLP 1 on this connection If ubrTagging is not entered then UBR traffic is not tagged on this connection This com mand only applies to UBR traffic By default UBR traffic is not tagged PPPol The optional parameter can only be used if the connection is AALS i e the aa15 parame ter is present This parameter indicates that Partial Packet Policing is going to be per formed on this connection The default is for this parameter not to be present which leaves Partial Packet Policing disabled AltCLP This optional parameter only applies to connections on Series D network modules It indi cates that the alternate CLP threshold configured using conf module traffic d altclpthresh should be used for all connections created with this UPC contract The default is for this parameter not to be present which means the connections will not use the alte
495. the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting 1 12 10 2 Configuring the DS3 Port Framing This command allows you to designate the framing to be used on a port on a DS3 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port ds3 gt framing lt port gt cchannel cbit These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description The port number on which the framing is to be changed port The type of framing for the port cchannel clearchannel means that standard M23 cchannel cbit framing is used on this port The default is cbit cbitparity AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 197 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 10 3 Configuring DS3 Port Line Length This command lets you change the line length of a DS3 port to correspond to the physical cable attached to that port Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port ds3 gt length lt port gt Lt225 Gt225 These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the line length is to be changed Lt225 Use if the physical cable is shorter than 225 ft Gt225 Use if the physical cable is greater than 225 ft This is the default 1 12 10 4 Configuring the DS3 Port Loopback This command lets you designate the type of loopback on a port on a DS3 network
496. the IP Address 0 000 c eee eee eee 1 8 2 Configuring the IP State cee 1 8 3 Configuring the IP Broadcast Address 1 8 4 Configuring IP Forwarding ccc eee eee eee 1 8 5 Configuring the IP Subnet Mask 000 ee eee eee 1 8 6 Configuring the MTU Size of a Classical IP Interface 1 8 7 Configuring IP Routes 0 00 ccc eee 1 8 7 1 Adding an IP Route 0 eee eee 8 7 2 Deleting an IP Route 02 eee eee 1 8 7 3 Showing the IP Routes 0 0 02 cece eee 1 8 8 Displaying the IP Interface Configuration 1 8 9 Unconfiguring an IP Interface 0 00 eee 1 9 LAN Emulation Configuration Commands cece eee eee 1 9 1 Default LANE Configuration Commands 0 5 1 9 1 1 Creating a Default ELAN 00 00 0002 00 1 9 1 2 Deleting a Default ELAN 2 1 9 1 3 Displaying a Default ELAN 4 1 9 2 BUS Configuration Commands 0 a 1 9 2 1 Configuring the BUS Administrative Status 1 9 22 DeletingaBUS iea cece 1 9 2 3 CreatingaBUS 0 c eee 1 9 2 4 Displaying BUS Information aaea 1 9 3 LAN Emulation Client LEC Configuration Commands 1 9 3 1 Configuring the LEC Administrative Status 1 9 3 2 Configuring LANE ARP Commands 1 9 3 2 1 Deleting
497. the address encompassed by this policy E VBRCAP The VBR capacity of the link to reach the address encompassed by this policy You can also display information about a specific tag as follows myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni metric gt show lt tag gt myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni metric gt show 2 Tag Cost CBRCAP VBRCAP 2 128 10 200 If no metrics have been configured then the following is displayed myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni metric gt show No metric information is available AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 27 AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 8 Setting a Minimum Threshold for NSAP Updates The minimum threshold is the smallest capacity value that the threshold value for determin ing the significant change in ACR can take This minimum value ensures that the threshold value does not become a very small value in cases in which the product of the ACR and the proportional multiplier is a very small number The minimum threshold is used to prevent excessively frequent NSAP updates resulting from minor changes in ACR when the value of ACR is very low Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt minthresh lt minthresh gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description minthresh The minimum threshold bandwidth value for triggering NSAP updates The default is 50 Kbps 1 3 3 9 Setting the NSAP Indication
498. the following myswitch configuration ilmiproxy gt go lal 0 6 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 99 AMI Configuration Commands 1 7 3 Creating an ISP Table Entry This command lets you create an ISP table entry and send the request Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration ilmiproxy gt new lt port gt lt vpi gt lt index gt get gnext lt oid gt lt comm gt doOnce doEveryIlmiRestart Your request will fail if ILMI is down on the path that you entered First use the command conf signalling show so that you can quickly see on which ports ILMI is up For example before creating an entry first check on which ports ILMI is up by entering the following myswitch Port VP 1C1 1C2 1C3 1C4 1CTL I configuration signalling gt show Interface SigVersion State ILMI Side RemoteAddress privateUNI a uni30 a down down network privateUNI uni31 up up network 172 19 12 140 PNNI a pnnil0 a up up network 172 19 12 57 PNNI pnnild up up network 169 144 64 58 privateUNI a uni30 a up down network Then type the parameters to create the entry as follows myswitch configuration ilmiproxy gt new 1c2 0 get 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 4 0 public doOnce The parameters for delete go and new are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number of the ISP table entry vpi The VPI of the ISP table entry index The unique index numb
499. the off threshold Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic d gt efci lt module gt on off lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows z o Parameter Description S Q module The network module on which the EFCI threshold will be set 3 Fi 3c on off on means the EFCI bit will be set when the threshold number is reached signalling con 2 D 3 gestion off means the EFCI bit will be cleared when the threshold number is reached indicating no congestion The number of cells over which the cells will have the EFCI bit set This number must be entered in increments of 32 The default for the on threshold is 256 The default for the off threshold is 192 number of cells 1 The value for the off threshold must always be less than or equal to the value for the on threshold AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 161 AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 8 5 Displaying Traffic Models for a Series D Network Module This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on a Series D network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic d gt models Cell Table Model Memory Memory Ucasts Mcasts MOuts Cells Counters Name i 256Kx32 256Kx32 12288 1024 4096 16352 8 16K cells OC 12 2 256Kx32 256Kx32 12288 1024 4096 16352 8 16K cells OC 3 3 256Kx32 256Kx32 10240 5
500. the standby SCP to automatically delete unused files i e old versions of switch software if necessary when files are being synchronized by the controlling SCP Enter the following to enable or disable the autoremove feature myswitch configuration system dualscp gt autoremove enable disable These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description enable Indicates that autoremove is enabled on the standby SCP When enabled the SCP auto matically deletes unused files and directories as needed disable Indicates that autoremove is disabled on the standby SCP If disabled you are not prompted and synchronization attempts fail in the event that there is not enough free space in FLASH This is the default When the master SCP synchronizes the OS configured using the conf sys dual sync os command the standby SCP checks to see if there is sufficient memory on the FLASH for the OS that is being synchronized If there is not and autoremove is enabled any old OSs not the CURRENT are deleted However if there still is not sufficient memory the CURRENT OS on the standby SCP is deleted as well AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 329 AMI Configuration Commands 1 21 2 2 Configuring Dual SCP Automatic Synchronization When in dual SCP mode you can configure the controlling SCP to perform file automatic syn chronization with the autosync command If autosync is enabled the CDB is saved to t
501. this display is defined as follows Parameter Description Number of tries per call The total number of times a PNNI call is attempted and retried through crankback before it is rejected The default is 2 1 3 4 2 2 Configuring the Crankback Setting This command lets you set the number of times a PNNI call will be retried through crankback on this switch before it is rejected Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni crankback gt set lt tries gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description tries The total number of times a PNNI call is attempted and retried through crankback before it is rejected The default is 2 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 41 AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 3 PNNI Interface Configuration Commands An ATM Forum PNNI node can be bound to a given network to network interface NNI This is useful when configuring more than one node on a switch By default there is one node on a switch configured with the ForeThought PNNI protocol and this node is bound to all exist ing NNIs The default NNI routing protocol of the default domain dictates the PNNI interface type You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the interface level myswitch configuration atmroute pnni interface gt modify show 1 3 4 3 1 Modifying a PNNI Interface This command lets you modify a PNNI interface Enter the fol
502. ting cost for all PNNI SPVCs that are up The call routing cost is the sum of all the link costs over the call route for ForeThought PNNI or the sum of the administrative weight over the call route for PNNI The current cost for a particular SPVC can be displayed using conf spvc pnni show advanced 2 Check to see if better new call routing cost is less by lt threshold gt percentage routes are available If not go to step 3 If so release the SPVC and reroute attempting to reconnect using the pacing cycle those that can be improved and then go to step 3 3 Pause for lt interval gt seconds 4 Goto step 1 Type parameters at the pnni level to display the available subcommands myswitch configuration spvc pnni gt parameters pacing gt reroute gt 1 19 2 3 1 Configuring Pacing for PNNI SPVCs If a switch has a large number of SPVCs configured in the CDB it tries to open the SPVCs all at once when it reboots Therefore it is advantageous to pace the number of SPVCs that are opened at once so that each is serviced properly This command lets you set the SPVC control ler to open only the configured number of SPVCs and to schedule itself for callback after the specified time interval if there are more SPVCs to be opened both at start up and at the retry callback To display the available subcommands type at the pacing level myswitch configuration spvc pnni parameters pacing interval number show 1 306
503. tion enable Indicates that the revertive timing delay is going to be turned on This command takes effect as soon as you enter 1 90 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 4 7 Secondary Timing Configuration This command enables you to select the secondary clock source from any of the switch fabrics exported clocks You can get to this level by entering secondary at the timing level Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration cec timing gt secondary fabric 1 2 3 4 primary secondary The parameter for configuring is defined as follows Parameter Description fabric 1121314 Indicates the secondary timing source is to be taken from one of the exported clocks either primary or secondary from one of the switch fabrics 1 first leftmost slot 2 sec ond slot 3 third slot 4 fourth slot switch fabric primary secondary O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY Before you configure the secondary timing source use the conf timing references com mand to display all of the possible clocking references their specific sources and whether or not they are actually available for you to use AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 91 AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 4 8 Displaying Timing This command lets you display the timing information that has been configured Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch
504. tion ConfNode The PNNI node index number for a user configured interface that was created through the conf atmr pnni interface menu ILMI Up means that ILMI is operational for this interface Down means that ILMI is not opera tional for this interface ForeLevel The level of the area used in FORE s hierarchy support ForeArea The ID of the area in FORE s hierarchy support to which this node belongs PnniLinkType Shows what kind of PTSE this is Can be nodalInformation internalReach ableAddresses externalReachableAddresses nodalStateParameters hor izontalLinks or uplinks DomainProto The default protocol used on all Network to Network NNI interfaces in the domain ftpnni means ForeThought PNNI is used for this domain pnni means ATM Forum PNNI is used for this domain gateway means this domain includes both the PNNI and FI PNNI networks so that reachability information can be leaked dynamically between peer groups of both types This will be a gateway switch a switch that has one FI PNNI node and one PNNI node 1 16 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description DomainPrefix The 13 byte prefix of the domain used in ILMI registration in the FI PNNI switch prefix and the PNNI node ID This prefix is also used as the default 13 byte policy summary FtpnniPgMask The mask that gives the number of leading bits in the switch prefix used to aggregate the addresses that bel
505. tion module The port on which the EFCI threshold will be set on off on means the EFCI bit will be set when the threshold number is reached signalling con gestion off means the EFCI bit will be cleared when the threshold number is reached indicating no congestion number of cells The number of cells over which the ABR cells will have the EFCI bit set The default for the on threshold is 64 The default for the off threshold is 1 1 The value for the off threshold must always be less than the value for the on threshold 2 The Series LE network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release 1 154 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 7 3 Displaying Traffic Models for a Series LE Network Module This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on a Series LE network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration module traffic le gt models Cell Table Model Memory Memory Ucasts Mcasts Cells Counters Name 1 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 32768 0 default 2 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 16384 1 one counter 3 256Kx64 32Kx32 6144 512 8192 2 two counters gt 4 256Kx64 64Kx32 6144 512 32768 2 default 5 512Kx64 64Kx32 6144 512 65536 2 default 9 Q 6 256Kx64 32Kx32 4
506. tion security nsapfiltering filters gt lookup lt filter id gt srcport lt port gt srcvpi lt vpi gt srcnsap lt nsap gt dstport lt port gt dstvpi lt vpi gt dstnsap lt nsap gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description lookup lt filter id gt The filter against which you are testing the call setup message srcport lt port gt The source port of the call setup message srcvpi lt vpi gt The source virtual path number of the call setup message srcnsap lt nsap gt The source NSAP address of the call setup message dstport lt port gt The destination port of the call setup message dstvpi lt vpi gt The destination virtual path number of the call setup message dstnsap lt nsap gt The destination NSAP address of the call setup message The switch returns an answer of either accepted or rejected and the template id of the specific template that accepted or rejected the tested call setup message If the message does not match any of the templates in the filter the switch returns an answer of rejected and address unknown This command is simply a test Therefore if a E gt message is rejected it does not increment the address validation counters enter the result in the table that shows the last failure nor send a trap 1 276 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 16 1 8 1 4 Creating an NSAP Filter
507. to 4 05 4 nsap address The NSAP address of the LECS for this entry 5 1 175 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 Port Configuration Commands These commands let you manage the configuration of the various ports Type port at the configuration level to display the available subcommands myswitch configuration gt port aalS5packetdiscard admin aisrdi cac cdvt cesds1 gt cesel gt delay ds1 gt ds3 gt el gt e3 gt gcrapolicing Jas leds policing pppolicing show sonet gt taxi gt tp25 gt traffic gt ubrtagging vbrbuffob vbrob 1 12 1 AAL5 Packet Discard Command This command lets you configure EPD PPD on a per port per class basis for all CBR VBR and or UBR SVCs and or PVCs Enter the following parameters Even though packet discard is disabled on a E gt certain port class or connection partial packet policing may still occur on that same port class or connection This is because partial packet policing occurs on the input side of the switch and partial packet discard occurs on the output side of the switch in the network module queues myswitch configuration port gt aal5packetdiscard lt port gt cbr vbr ubr allOn alloff svcOn svcOff 1 176 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which packet discard is bein
508. tracts Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration upc gt show Index PCR01 SCRO1 MBS01 PCRO SCRO MBSO CDVT TAG Name 0 default_ubr The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Index The UPC contracts listed by index number PCR01 The peak cell rate for all cells for this contract SCRO1 The sustainable cell rate for all cells in this contract MBS01 The maximum burst size for all cells in this contract PCRO The peak cell rate for cells with CLP 0 for this contract SCRO The sustainable cell rate for cells with CLP 0 for this contract MBSO The maximum burst size for cells with CLP 0 for this contract CDVT The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT associated with the peak cell rates in micro seconds TAG Tag means that non compliant CLP 0 cells are tagged No entry means that non compli ant cells are dropped This option only applies to cells measured by the PCRO parameter of the CBRO contract and to cells measured by the SCRO and MBSO parameters of the VBRO contract Name The user defined name associated with this UPC traffic contract 1 The units for PCRO1 SCRO1 MBS01 PCRO SCRO and MBS0 are shown either in cps or in kbps depending on what you used for conf system units To display the current setting use conf system show The default is cps 1 372 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands This command als
509. tted to the network Diagnostic connects the receiver to the transmitter The DS1 stream transmitted by the SCP to a port is looped back to the SCP The stream is still transmitted over the cable but the incoming stream is ignored none means no loopback will take place on this port The default is none 1 12 9 4 Configuring DS1 Port Mode This command allows you to change the mode of operation on a port on a DS1 network mod ule Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port dsl gt mode lt port gt plep hes These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the framing type is to be changed plcp hes plcp means that the port uses PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol framing G 751 for cell delineation hes means that the port uses HCS Header Check Sequence based framing G 832 for cell delineation The default is hes AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 193 Q e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 9 5 Configuring Pseudo Random Bit Sequence Generation This command allows you to enable Pseudo Random Bit Sequence PRBS generation on a port on a DS1 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port dsl gt prbs lt port gt off on These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the PRBS is to b
510. uit affects the number of bits per second that the circuit can reasonably carry as well as the interpretation of the usage and error statistics This parameter is read only Loopback The loopback mode on the port Timing The transmit clock for this port network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port Scram on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port off means that payload scram bling is disabled on this port Length The length of the physical cable that is attached to this port EmptyCells The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned 1 A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port It does not guarantee that the signal is the proper frequency 2 Please refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting 1 206 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 11 7 Configuring E1 Port Timing This command lets you change the timing source on a port on an E1 network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration
511. uling Port CBR VBR CBR VBR 1C1 roundrobin roundrobin perupc perupc The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Port The port numbers of each Series D network module installed in the switch fabric SVC CBR Scheduling Indicates that this scheduling mode will apply to all CBR SVCs output on this port SVC VBR Scheduling Indicates that this scheduling mode will apply to all VBR SVCs output on this port PVC CBR Scheduling Indicates that this scheduling mode will apply to all CBR PVCs output on this port PVC VBR Scheduling Indicates that this scheduling mode will apply to all VBR PVCs output on this port perupc Indicates that the PVCs output on this port will use the scheduling mode configured by the UPC contract that is applied to them The UPC contract can be configured using the scheduling parameter under the conf upc new command This option only applies to PVCs roundrobin All service for these connections comes from one of the round robin queues in the net work module This is the default mode for both SVCs and PVCs smoothed All service for these connections comes from the network module s rate controller which ensures that cells for these connections are transmitted into the network at a fixed rate of R cells per second guaranteed This is a combination of the round robin and smoothed modes Service for these connec tions are scheduled with both fixed rate R from the rate controlle
512. ult gt show Default LANE is not configured AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 113 O e 3 3 D 5 2 O uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 2 BUS Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure a Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS for an ELAN You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the bus level myswitch configuration lane bus gt admin delete new show ForeThought 5 0 and greater versions do not allow gt you to create a BUS separately from a LES Therefore the commands in this menu are only useful in providing backwards compatibility with switches that are running earlier versions of ForeThought software 1 9 2 1 Configuring the BUS Administrative Status This command lets you change the administrative status of a BUS to up start a BUS service or down stop a BUS service Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane bus gt admin lt BUS index BUS index range x y gt up down 1 9 2 2 Deleting a BUS This command allows you to delete a specified BUS Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane bus gt delete lt BUS index BUS index range x y gt The parameters for admin and delete are defined as follows Parameter Description BUS index The unique positive integer index of the BUS that is dynamically assigned by AMI when a BUS is created to identify this service from any other servi
513. ult is 1800 seconds ptselftf lt ptselftf gt The value used to calculate the initial lifetime of self originated PTSEs The initial lifetime is set to the product of the PTSE refresh interval and the PTSE Lifetime Factor The default is 200 rxmt lt rxmt gt The interval at which unacknowledged PTSEs are retransmitted A PTSE is retransmitted every interval unless explicitly acknowledged through the receipt of either an acknowl edgment packet specifying the PTSE instance or the same instance or a more recent instance of the PTSE by flooding The default is 5 seconds avcrpm lt avcrpm gt The proportional multiplier is expressed as a percentage of the last advertised Available Cell Rate ACR on any given PNNI link in the network If the change in percentage of the ACR on any given PNNI link in the NSAP topology of the network exceeds this percent age threshold then the change is considered significant and the topology tables are updated accordingly for that link This value indicates the threshold above which you consider the change in Available Cell Rate ACR on any PNNI link to be significant The default is 50 The range is 1 99 acvrmt lt acvrmt gt The minimum threshold is the smallest capacity value that the threshold value for deter mining the significant change in ACR can take This minimum value ensures that the threshold value does not become a very small value in cases in which the product of
514. um none means the well known address has been disabled other means the well known address has been rede fined in which case the new address appears on the following line Database The full path to the location and name of the LECS database file The default file is Lecs cfg Default LES The default LES address to use in case the LECS configuration file is inaccessible If a default LES address has not been specified this field is not displayed 1 When you change the administrative status from down to up it takes a few seconds for the change to occur and to be reflected in the OperStatus field Therefore it is possible for the AdminStatus to be up but the OperStatus tobe down If you refresh the display the change has taken place and is reflected here 1 128 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands To display information about a particular LECS that is currently configured on the switch enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lecs gt show lt LECS index gt For example to display information about the LECS with an index number of 1 enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration lane lecs gt show 1 Index AdminStatus OperStatus Selector WKA Database 1 up up 0x01 atm forum lecs cfg Default LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f215 096b 00204815096b a2 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those listed above in the example f
515. uration Commands Reference Manual 1 127 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY AMI Configuration Commands 1 9 4 4 Displaying LECS Information This command lets you display the current LECS information To display information about the current LECS configuration on the switch enter the following parameters myswitch configuration lane lecs gt show Index 1 AdminStatus OperStatus Selector WKA Database up up 0x01 atm forum lecs cfg Default LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f215 096b 00204815096b a2 up up 0x02 none lecs cfg up up 0x03 other lecs cfg wka 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f215 11f1 0020481511f8 99 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Index The unique index number of the LECS that identifies it from other LECSs This number is dynamically assigned by the switch when the LECS is created AdminStatus Reflects any changes that you have made to the status of the LECS up means you have started the LECS down means you have stopped the LECS OperStatus Reflects the actual current status of the LECS up means the LECS is currently active down means the LECS is currently inactive Selector The selector byte portion 20th byte of the ATM address in hexadecimal format of the host or switch that is running the LECS WKA The state of the well known address for this particular LECS atm forum means the LECS is using the default address as defined by the ATM For
516. used for this expansion Can range from 1 to 15 A CLR value of x means 10 e g 5 means 10 any_value means that any amount of cell loss is acceptable bClr The maximum acceptable backward CLR value to be used for this expansion Can range from 1 to 15 A CLR value of x means 10 e g 5 means 10 any_value means that any amount of cell loss is acceptable Name An optional text string associated with this entry to help you identify it You can also display information for a specific index or QOS class Enter the following myswitch configuration qos5 show lt QoSExpIndex gt lt QoSclass gt myswitch configuration qos5 show 0 3 QoSExp QOS Index Class fCtd us fCdv us bCdv us ECIF bClr Name 0 3 ANY_VAL ANY_VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL ANY VAL def class 3 expn The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example 1 256 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 14 QOS Extension Table Commands These commands let you delete create or display information about Quality of Service QOS extension table entries The QOS extension table is used to hold a set of QOS parameters of maxctd maxcdv and maxclr When creating a VPT using the conf vpt new command the external QOS contribution of an originating terminating path for a certain traffic type can be specified by an index pointing to this table You can display the list of avai
517. usive 1 19 2 3 2 2 Setting the Number of PNNI SPVCs to be Rerouted per Interval At each interval between reroutes you can check a certain number of the active SPVCs to see if they are using optimal routes This command lets you determine the number of SPVCs that are analyzed at each interval myswitch configuration spvc pnni parameters reroute gt number lt count gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description number lt count gt Indicates how many up SPVCs per interval will be analyzed to determine whether or not those SPVCs need to be rerouted The default is 20 SPVCs The range of valid values is 1 to 1000 inclusive 1 308 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 19 2 3 2 3 Displaying PNNI SPVC Reroute Information This command lets you display information about PNNI SPVC rerouting Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration spvc pnni parameters reroute gt show Rerouting analyzes 20 calls per cycle with 10 seconds between cycles The new call routing cost must show a 50 percent improvement over the current call routing cost before the call is rerouted 1 19 2 3 2 4 Setting the Improvement Threshold for Rerouting This command lets you configure the routing cost improvement percentage against which the SPVCs are analyzed to see if there is a better route available Enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a
518. ut signalling channel Use conf upc show and look at the Index field to find this number outsigupc The index number of the UPC traffic contract to be applied to the output signalling chan nel Use conf upc show and look at the Index field to find this number To prevent the outbound signalling channel from being policed you must use the noGCRA option when creating the UPC contract minvci The bottom number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for UNI SVCs on this path and other paths created dynamically if the sig alloc flag is link You can change this range to limit the number of SVCs on this path limit the number of SPANS SVCs with respect to UNI SVCs or divide the VCI range into a region reserved for SPANS SVCs and a region reserved for UNI SVCs The default is 32 1 354 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Parameter Description maxvci The top number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for UNI SVCs on this path and other paths created dynamically if the sig alloc flag is link You can change this range to limit the number of SVCs on this path limit the number of SPANS SVCs with respect to UNI SVCs or divide the VCI range into a region reserved for SPANS SVCs and a region reserved for UNI SVCs The default is the maximum number of VCIs on the containing path sig_alloc The allocation policy for the network side of a signalling channel vp means the
519. ute This command lets you create an IP route for one of the TCM s IP interfaces Enter the follow ing parameters myswitch configuration cec slotx ip route gt new default lt destination ipaddress gt lt gateway gt lt metric gt host net These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description default This parameter must be specified to create a default route destination ipaddress Indicates the destination IP network number gateway Indicates the gateway address to the destination IP network number metric Indicates the number of hops to the destination IP network The default value of 1 is used if no value is entered If 1 is specified the route is created with the RTF_GATEWAY flag host net Using host indicates this is a host specific route with the destination being a specific node s IP address Using net indicates this is a network specific route with the destina tion being a network IP address The default value of net is used if no value is entered AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 75 AMI Configuration Commands 1 5 3 1 5 2 Deleting an IP Route This command lets you delete an IP route from one of the TCM s IP interfaces Enter the fol lowing parameters myswitch configuration cec slotx ip route gt delete default lt destination ipaddress gt lt gateway gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description default
520. ute Configuration Commands 0000 0c cee eee 1 14 1 3 1 Displaying ATM Routing Information 000 eee 1 14 1 3 2 Configuring aDomain 000 cee eee 1 18 1 3 21 Deleting a Domain 00 02 eee 1 18 1 3 2 2 Modifying a Domain tori kene na Arao RS 1 18 1 3 2 3 Creating a Domain auaa 1 18 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual TOC 1 Table of Contents 1 3 2 4 Displaying Domain Information 045 1 19 1 3 3 ForeThought PNNI Configuration Commands 1 20 1 3 3 1 Changing the ForeThought PNNI Border Switch FUNCTIONALILY a stack sets tie Saka A ie eae Paes 1 20 1 3 3 2 DTL Configuration Commands 0 005 1 21 1 3 3 2 1 Deleting a DTL Entry 1 21 1 3 3 2 2 ModifyingaDTLeEntry 1 21 1 3 3 2 3 Creating a DTL Entry a 1 22 1 3 3 2 4 Displaying DTLs 004 1 23 1 3 3 3 Configuring the FORE Area 0 00 eee eee 1 24 1 3 3 4 Configuring the FORE Level 2 0 1 24 1 3 3 5 Setting the Hello Indication Interval 1 25 1 3 3 6 Setting the Maximum Hop Count 0 1 25 1 3 3 7 ForeThought PNNI Metric Configuration Commands 1 26 1 3 3 7 1 Deleting a Metric Set 1 26 1 3 3 7 2 Modifying a Metric Set 1 26 1 3 3 7 3 Creating a Metric Set 1 26 1 3 3 7 4 Displayi
521. ute level myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni staticroute gt delete new show 1 3 3 14 1 Deleting a Static Route This command enables you to remove an existing static route Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni staticroute gt delete lt NSAP gt lt mask gt lt port gt lt vpi gt oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 O 1 3 3 14 2 Creating a Static Route This command allows you to create a static route Enter the following parameters uoneinByUuod INY myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni staticroute gt new lt NSAP gt lt mask gt lt port gt lt vpi gt cost lt cost gt cbr_cap lt cbr_cap gt vbr_cap lt vbr_cap gt abr epd The following is an example of how to create an NSAP static route myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni staticroute gt new 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f215 11f2 002048100464 00 152 1c2 O cost 200 cbr_cap 20000 vbr_cap 30000 abr AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 31 AMI Configuration Commands The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows Parameter Description NSAP The complete 20 byte NSAP route address in hexadecimal format mask The bit mask indicating number of high order bits to use for routing purposes The default mask for the route to the host is 152 and the default mask for the route to the switch is 104 port The port number through which this static route can be reached vpi The UNI signalling
522. uted through a PNNI network See the QoSExpIndex field under conf qos show for this number carrier_loss_action The action to be taken on this signalling channel upon sensing a carrier loss clearCalls means that upon sensing a carrier loss the switch immediately tears down all the connec tions both active calls and calls in the establishment phase on this signalling channel noClear means that upon sensing a carrier loss the switch waits until the SSCOP timer expires and then clears the calls in the establishment phase on this signalling channel The active calls on this signalling channel take even longer to be cleared The default is noClear cost The cost administrative weight of this link that is used for determining the best route for this signalling channel in FI PNNI domain The index number of the PNNI domain to which this signalling channel belongs To find this number look in the ID field under conf atmroute domain show sscopnoresp_timer The value to be set for the duration of the SSCOP no response timer This is the time in sec onds to wait before bringing the SSCOP connection down This parameter can be set to a value higher than the default when the remote host is experiencing a heavy load and can not process a signalling request in time The default is 10 seconds for UNI 3 0 and 7 sec onds for UNI 3 1 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 355 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6
523. vcrMt is expressed as a percentage in Maximum Cell Rate CdvPm A change in Cell Delay Variation by this percentage is considered to be significant CtdPm A change in Maximum Cell Transfer Delay by this percentage is considered to be signifi cant 1 54 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands A significant change in any of the above parameters will result in a re origination of the PTSE You can also display information about a specific node Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute pnni node gt show 1 Node PnniNodeID Level Lowest Rstrn 1 80 160 47 000580ffe1000000f21a3509 ff1a35090001 00 80 true false PeerGroupID PnniAtmAddress 80 47 000580ffe1000000f2000000 47 000580ffe1000000f21a3509 ff1a35090001 00 Ptses OperStat AdminStat Shutdown ForeLevel ForeArea DomainId DomainName 60 up up false 5 5 1 fo 3 3 D 5 2 O The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those listed previously uoneinByuod INY 1 55 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 4 6 PNNI Profile Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure PNNI path computation profiles You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the profile level myswitch configuration atmroute pnni profile gt delete modify new show 1 3 4 6 1 Deleting a PNNI Profile This command lets you delete an existing PNNI path com
524. ve tokens then it is used as a prefix to the default filename If the file transfer attempt fails the switch generates a trap and attempts a transfer to the secondary URL If the Admin status is secondary URL and this URL is changed the change takes effect at the next recording interval secondary URL The URL is to be used in the event that the transfer to the primary URL is not successful If the file transfer attempt to this URL fails as well the switch generates a trap If the Admin status is on and this URL is changed the change takes effect at the next recording inter val userid The userid to be used for the data transfer sessions to the primary and secondary data servers If the Admin status is on and this URL is changed the change takes effect at the next recording interval recording interval in min utes The interval in minutes at which the data is transferred to the host If the Admin sta tus is on and this value is changed the change takes effect at the next recording interval Valid values are integers greater than or equal to 1 The default is 5 minutes memory Specifies what portion of the processor DRAM is to be reserved for call records Changing this value affects the amount of memory available for signalling and routing and may result in increased call blocking A change in this value takes effect only after the next call record initialization i e when the Admin status changes from off to on o
525. ware only support up to 255 VCIs and since all output paths must support the entire range it is better to lower the minimum reserved PMP VCI instead of increasing the maximum Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration switch gt pmpmaxvei lt vci gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description vci The top number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for PMP SVCs The default is 255 1 324 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 20 5 Setting the Minimum Number of Reserved VCls for PMPs This command lets you change the lower end of the range of the block of VCIs that are reserved for point to multipoint PMP SVCs on all paths and all ports on this switch fabric This range defaults to 155 255 which ensures that 101 PMP SVCs can always be created regardless of the number of point to point PP SVCs PVCs can be created on these VCIs but no PP SVCs may use these VCIs PMP SVCs attempt to allocate a VCI outside this range only if all of the VCIs in the range have already been allocated You should change the default range only if the number of PMP SVCs that the switch must always be able to set up is greater than 101 Each LANE 1 0 ELAN requires two or three PMP SVCs so if you are using more than 33 ELANSs you should increase the PMP reserved VCI range However since older versions of software only support up to 255 VCIs and since all output paths must su
526. willing to accept any amount of cell transfer delay The default is any_value fwdCdv The maximum acceptable forward CDV value to be used for this expansion Can range lt cdv us any values from 0 to 16777215 microseconds Specifying any value or 16777215 means that you are willing to accept any amount of cell delay variation The default is any value backCdv The maximum acceptable backward CDV value to be used for this expansion Can lt cdv us any values range from 0 to 16777215 microseconds Specifying any value or 16777215 means that you are willing to accept any amount of cell delay variation The default is any value fwdClr lt clr any values The maximum acceptable forward CLR value to be used for this expansion Can range from 1 to 15 any value means that you are specifying that you are willing to accept any amount of cell loss A CLR value of x means that you are specifying 10 e g 5 means 10 The default is any_value backClr lt clr any values The maximum acceptable backward CLR value to be used for this expansion Can range from 1 to 15 any_value means that you are specifying that you are willing to accept any amount of cell loss A CLR value of x means that you are specifying 10 e g 5 means 10 The default is any_value AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 255 AMI Configuration Commands 1 13 3 Displaying the QOS Expansion Table These commands let you display the
527. witch does not neces sarily create the type of channel you have specified If you assign a connection type but do not assign a pmp mpp or mpmp label the switch assigns a label of pp point to point The following is an example of how to create a virtual channel which specifies the connection type myswitch configuration vcc gt new 3b1 0 100 3b4 0 100 inctype tran outctype tran AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 375 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinbyuod INY AMI Configuration Commands The following is an example of how to create a virtual channel which has a name assigned to it myswitch configuration vcc gt new 3b2 O 145 3b3 0 145 name customer a The following is an example of how to create a simple virtual channel on an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 To create a vcc going in port 2A1 vpi 0 vci 100 on the switch board installed in slot 2 and going out port 4B1 vpi 0 vci 100 on the switch board installed in slot 4 enter the follow ing myswitch configuration vcc gt new 2al 0 100 2e4 O 100 myswitch configuration vcc gt new 2e4 0 100 2al1 O 100 myswitch configuration vcc gt new 4b1 0 100 4e2 0 100 myswitch configuration vcc gt new 4e2 O 100 4b1 O 100 In the first line in the first pair notice that the output port is 2E4 This is the intra fabric port The 2 means the connection is coming out of the switch board in slot 2 through the intra fabric port The E represents the intra fabric port The
528. x The unique index number that identifies this filter Name An optional user assigned name that identifies this filter Template IDs The name or index number of each template in this filter The templates are applied in the order in which they are listed in the filter AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 277 AMI Configuration Commands You can also display an individual NSAP filter If you specify templates then the tem plates in that filter are displayed as well Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering filters gt show lt filter id gt templates myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering filters gt show 2 templates Index Name Template IDs 2 3 256 The fields in this display are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example If no NSAP filters have been configured then the following message is displayed myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering filters5 show No Address Filters are present 116 1 8 2 Configuring Templates These commands allow you to configure the templates that are used in NSAP filters To dis play the list of available subcommands type at the templates level myswitch configuration security nsapfiltering templates gt delete new modify show 1 16 1 8 2 1 Deleting a Template This command lets you delete a template that has not been added to any filter yet If the tem plate has already been added to one or m
529. ximum hop count for the NSAP router By setting a maxi mum hop count you tell the switch to consider only those paths that have less than or equal to O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY the number of hops specified when setting up a connection If a connection is routed using a path with a large hop count there is a greater chance that the connection may experience con gestion and be delayed or discarded Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt maxhop lt hops gt This parameter is defined as follows Parameter Description maxhop The maximum number of hops to use when routing a connection for the NSAP router The default is 20 hops AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 25 AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 3 7 ForeThought PNNI Metric Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure ForeThought PNNI metric sets You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the met ric level myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni gt metric delete modify new show 1 3 3 7 1 Deleting a Metric Set This command lets you delete a metric set Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni metric gt delete lt tag gt 1 3 3 7 2 Modifying a Metric Set This command lets you modify a metric set Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni metric gt modify lt tag gt cost l
530. y It is useful for billing purposes so you can identify which channels are being used by which customers Can be up to 32 ASCII characters long inctype The channel connection type for the incoming channel For billing purposes it denotes on which switch this channel is arriving Orig originating means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran tran sit means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to a node within the net work and term terminating means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to the destination node which is outside the network outctype The channel connection type for the outgoing channel For billing purposes it denotes on which switch this channel is leaving Orig originating means that the egress endpoint of the channel is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran transit means that the egress endpoint of the channel is connected to a node within the network and term terminating means that the egress endpoint of the channel is connected to the destination node which is outside the network pmp Indicates this is a point to multipoint channel mpp Indicates this is a multipoint to point channel mpmp Indicates this is a multipoint to multipoint channel d By indicating pmp mpp or mpmp you are only assigning a label for record keeping purposes The s
531. y are defined in the same manner as those in the previous example There is additional information given about avoided or preferred links if any such informa tion is available If no PNNI profiles have been configured then the following is displayed myswitch configuration atmroute pnni profile gt show No profile information is available 1 60 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 3 5 PNNI Policy Prefix Configuration Commands These commands allow you to configure a policy prefix for a node A policy allows you to impose rules on how a node propagates information to its peer group about other peer groups Each policy consists of an ATM address prefix one of three actions associated with the address and an optional metric tag For more information about policy see the Network Configuration manual for your switch You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the policy level myswitch configuration atmroute policy gt delete modify new show 1 3 5 1 Deleting a PNNI Policy Prefix This command allows you to delete an existing policy prefix Enter the following parameters oO fo 3 3 D 5 2 O uoneinByUuod INY myswitch configuration atmroute policy gt delete lt nodeix gt lt address gt lt len gt 1 3 5 2 Modifying a PNNI Policy Prefix This command allows you to modify an existing policy prefix Enter the following parameters myswitch configurat
532. y are not communicating with one another Primary Shows which SCP X or Y is the primary SCP The SCP in slot X is set to primary by default Failover Shows if failover is enabled on the switch fabric failover is enabled by default Threshold The amount of time in seconds that the standby SCP waits to receive a heartbeat from the controlling SCP before taking control of the switch The minimum and default threshold value is 2 seconds 1 332 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands Field Description Auto Remove Shows if autoremove is enabled on the standby SCP autoremove is disabled by default CDB SyncMode automatic means that CDB synchronization occurs automatically autosync is enabled on the controlling SCP manual means that CDB synchronization does not occur auto matically autosync is disabled on the controlling SCP The default is automatic Sync Requests The number of synchronization requests that have been made between the controlling and standby SCP Sync Failures The number of synchronizations requests that have failed between SCPs Synchronization queue The number of synchronization requests waiting to be processed Synchronization state The state of the current synchronization attempt between the controlling and standby SCP Suspended means either that the switch is not in dual SCP mode or that the SCPs are running different versions of switch s
533. y arrive when the total cell buffering is over this threshold and when the corresponding dedicated queue is full Enter the following myswitch configuration module traffic d gt epd lt module gt ubr lt number of cells gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The network module to be configured for Early Packet Discard ubr If ubr is entered the AAL5 packet drop threshold is used for AAL5 UBR connections only If ubr is not entered the AAL5 packet drop threshold is used for CBR VBR and ABR AALS connections number of cells The AALS packet drop threshold to be set in number of cells The default value is set to 90 of the total cell buffer size for both the UBR and non UBR thresholds 1 The Series D network modules offer an ABR ready ATM interface A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release 1 160 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual AMI Configuration Commands 1 10 4 8 4 Setting EFCI on a Series D Network Module This command lets you designate the cell buffer threshold over which all cells have their explicit forward congestion indicator EFCI code point set When the EFCI code point is set this signals congestion to downstream flow control mechanisms Once this threshold is sur passed EFCI continues to be set until the queue empties below
534. y the current DTLs Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration atmroute ftpnni dtl gt show Index 10 NSAP prefix Mask Port VPI 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21b 19c3 104 C1 0 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21b 19al 104 C2 0 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Index The index number of each of the current DTLs Row The row number of each entry within each DTL Each entry in the DTL has a row number equal to its position in the source route so the entry corresponding to the first hop is row 1 the second hop is row 2 and so on NSAP prefix The NSAP prefix part of the node ID of this DTL entry In ForeThought PNNI the node IDs are prefixes that represent both the ID of the node and a summary of reachable addresses Mask The mask corresponding to the prefix which gives the length of the above prefix in num ber of bits Port The output port for the node given by the above node ID This is also the port to which the next node in the DTL if there is one is connected VPI The output path in the above output port This is the signalling path to the peer given by the next node in the DTL You can also display an individual DTL by entering the following parameters myswitch configuration nsap dtl gt show lt index gt myswitch configuration nsap dti show 10 Index 10 NSAP prefix Mask Port VPI 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21b 19c3 104 C1 0 0x47 0005 80 ffe
535. y when a TAXI network module is installed in the switch fabric To list the available subcommands type taxi at the port level myswitch configuration port gt taxi loopback show 1 12 20 1 Configuring TAXI Port Loopback This command allows you to designate the type of loopback on a port on a TAXI network module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port taxi gt loopback lt port gt diag none These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the loopback mode is to be changed diag diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter The TAXI stream transmit ted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch The TAXI stream is still transmit ted to the network but the incoming TAXI stream is ignored none none designates that no loopback will take place on this port This is the default setting 1 230 AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 12 20 2 Showing the TAXI Port Configuration This command enables you to display current information about all of the ports on a TAXI net work module Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration port taxi gt show AMI Configuration Commands O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY Port Carrier State Loopback 2A1 yes up none 2A2 no down none 2A3 no down none 204 no down none 2A5 no down none 2A6 no down none The fields in this display
536. ype at the ds1 level myswitch configuration port dsl gt emptycells length loopback mode prbs scrambling show timing 1 12 9 1 Configuring DS1 Port Empty Cells Empty cells are cells that are sent as filler or place holders when there is no real data to send By sending these cells network modules that are synchronous in nature can keep an even flow of traffic moving so that distributed timing can work properly This command lets you change the type of cells sent as empty cells on a DS1 network module port Enter the following parameters O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uonjein6iju09 INY myswitch configuration port dsl gt emptycells lt port gt idle unassigned These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on which the type of empty cells is to be changed idle unassigned The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data Idle cells set the CLP bit 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit 0 Idle invalid cell pattern and unassigned unassigned The default is unassigned 1 Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3 0 Specification for more information In general it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default setting AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 1 191 AMI Configuration Commands 1 12 9 2 Configuring DS1 Port Line Length This command lets you change the line length of a DS1 port to correspond t
537. ys 18 15 Hardware version A Software version S_ForeThought_5 1 0 1 14891 Serial number 30 Slot X State active Time zone External Inputs Change to active operation occurred at Nov 17 ESI module is present The fields in this display are defined as follows 1 5 Off Off off off off 17 16 56 1997 O e 3 3 D 5 2 a uoneinByuod INY Field Description TCM This TCM s system name Type Shows what type of TCM this is up The amount of time in days hours and minutes since this TCM has been rebooted Hardware version The hardware version of this TCM Software Version The software version being used by this TCM Serial number The serial number of this TCM card Slot The slot in which this TCM resides X indicates the top slot and Y indicates the bottom slot State The current state of this TCM act ive means this TCM is the controller and is functioning properly standby means this is the standby TCM offline means the timing has failed on this TCM Time zone The time zone configured for this TCM If this field reads N A then this value has not been configured yet External Inputs The current state of each of the five front panel external inputs from the viewpoint of this TCM Can be either on input being received oroff no input active standby offline Shows when this TCM control software switched to the current operating mode ESI modu

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents